Home

The H41q and H51q System Families

1. Terminal Terminal R E A R o Module 5 Module 2 FRONT o o s x s s os or o peres pe eere 2 Se III 5555555557 X17 Se SES lt III elelelelele le eleleleleleleleo lelelelelelelele p u TR 5 ae PET d E ejeje DE lt EA e ue gt RA Ec gt L L ji Ze o o 4 Fuse Module Fuse Module e g K 7214 e g K 7214 gt Modules amp Color coded Modules Color coded DO 2 DO F 3330 F 3330 gt o Figure 4 Single pole mono wiring via 7020 Note The reference potential L should be wired separately to a central dis tribution e g K 7214 The distribution is connected to clamp D The wires of the two system cables are color coded and are clamped to Combicon connectors For output modules the soldering points are only jumpered different than for input modules 496 H 7020 0606 Wiring of H 7020 redundant with analog output modules F 6217 Analog modules can be connected to the field level by the terminal module H 7020 the same way as digital modules In the following example the
2. a XG 3 XG 4 XG 5 XG 2 XG 1 0210 m XG 6 i F 26007 XG 9 XG 10 11 a XG 12 57 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 H41 L wi 2 3 4 1 doi 2 3 4 71009 L 13 1 9 7 5 3 1 XG 21 Z 6018 a 522 eer 578 1578 fa 1h 23 456 HP BR ll 78 910 F2 Ft 2 1 C 1112 13 14 el 5 C uum nro qu Figure 3 Connections on the rear of the system rack K 1409 4 6 1 Wiring ex works XD 1 Jumper plug Z 6007 Combination of the separated I O buses single channel system H41q H not at redundant system H41q HR XG 1 XG 2 Supply L for the power supply module Reference pole XG 9 L XG 3 4 5 Potential distributor free disposal of XG 9 L for the power supply module XG 10 Watchdog signal from CU2 XG 11 Watchdog signal from CU1 XG 12 Watchdog signal for I O modules 2 I O bus XG 13 Watchdog signal for modules 1 I O bus A PE earth Connections of the additional modules Z 6011 Z 6018 Z 6013 XG 21 refer to XG 22 XG 23 assembly kit wiring diagram S1 S2 for switching off the buffer batteries G1 G2 Delivery state Buffer batteries are switched off 4 6 2 Wiring by customer XG 6 1 13 L for modules slots 1 to 13 13 single connections see also conne
3. Switch no Stationno 12345 24 ore 25 oA A 26 ora AWAD 27 ABENE ong BR MM 22 or A NR Switch no Stationno 12345 56 u 57 orm 58 orm A AA so or MAA 60 ore AEA or A AAA 62 orm AAA e OMB ABS Switch no Stationno 12345 88 orm ES on AE 90 or A BA or AAAS 2 or BBS or AW ABS BABA 5 OM AAA A Bit is not set White switch in position ON Position switch no 6 7 Switch no orl n Switch no Stationno 12 34 5 Stationno 12345 ee s OS AG Eur 9 o MEE 2 om 10 or aaa EE a 4 oe 2 oua 5 13 oM Aa 6 oan 14 or AAA Position switch 6 7 Switch no Switch no Stationno 12345 Stationno 12345 32 Or 40 Og A oM ER 41 om uaa 34 org A 42 oua M M 35 oM Mun 43 SN MT 36 ore 44 Organ Al 45 oA AA ou AA 46 oe AAA ale 4 Or Position switchno 6 7 oW A Switch no Switch no Stationno 1234 5 Stationno 1234 5 64 Ora 72 Ora WR PN 5 oM uu A 66 or M ma 74 or M Aa 67 oM a 75 AA 68 oua 76 OB M co oA RR 70 ore AA k 78 or MR 7 SNR 79 Position switch no oW u Legend Staton ro m Positions white switch n i T AL Bit is set 9 omg White switch in 98 e B position OFF 99 oA Setting of the transmission rate with
4. Switch no Stationno 12345 24 ore 25 oA A 26 ora AWAD 27 ABENE ong BR MM 22 or A NR Switch no Stationno 12345 56 u 57 orm 58 orm A AA so or MAA 60 ore AEA or A AAA 62 orm AAA e OMB ABS Switch no Stationno 12345 88 orm ES on AE 90 or A BA or AAAS 2 or BBS or AW ABS BABA 5 OM AAA A Bit is not set White switch in position ON Position switch no 6 7 Switch no orl n Switch no Stationno 12 34 5 Stationno 12345 ee s OS AG Eur 9 o MEE 2 om 10 or aaa EE a 4 oe 2 oua 5 13 oM Aa 6 oan 14 or AAA Position switch 6 7 Switch no Switch no Stationno 12345 Stationno 12345 32 Or 40 Og A oM ER 41 om uaa 34 org A 42 oua M M 35 oM Mun 43 SN MT 36 ore 44 Organ Al 45 oA AA ou AA 46 oe AAA ale 4 Or Position switchno 6 7 oW A Switch no Switch no Stationno 1234 5 Stationno 1234 5 64 Ora 72 Ora WR PN 5 oM uu A 66 or M ma 74 or M Aa 67 oM a 75 AA 68 oua 76 OB M co oA RR 70 ore AA k 78 or MR 7 SNR 79 Position switch no oW u Legend Staton ro m Positions white switch n i T AL Bit is set 9 omg White switch in 98 e B position OFF 99 oA Setting of the transmission rate with switch S1 8 O
5. Cable type 2x Z 7063 6221 ExCn U1V part no 93 6221 100 1 Z 7025 3325 ExCn part no 93 3325 101 93 3325 101 Z 7025 3325 ExCn F 3325 Not safety related EEX transmitter supply module 01 52 U 23V 1 zag 01 z2 L m Cable plug transm supply module 93 6221 100 F 6221 Z 7063 6221 ExCn U1V 4 Safety related EEX measuring module fie 2 MUX pul I 8 nn E ee pod 5 un 28 it E Li 7 Y petites gt bd Cable plug measuring module p 1 10 T length 93 6221 100 F 6221 i Z 7063 6221 ExCn U1V Terminal Safety related EEX measuring module co z 42 L 1 wx gt di8 d 218 I PA ee gt 10 m max length Cable plug measuring module Figure 7 Mono supply redundant current measuring wiring via terminal Note Instead of the F3325 module a galvanically isolated power supply can also be used in this wiring variant It has to be considered that a fault current runs through the monitoring inputs TC1 to TC8 Re 15 kQ which affects the non intrinsically safe side of the galvanically isolated power supply and must be compensated The Hart protocol can also be transmitted if suitable t
6. IO bus 1 Cabinet 1 IO bus 2 Cabinet 2 Figure 2 Coding switches 352 F 8621A 0606 F 8621A F 8621A Coprocessor module Use in PES H41q H51q from BS41q 51q V6 0 6 9808 with Switches 51 54 N N Olo 0000 90 Olo 0000 90 HIMA 8621A Figure 1 F 8621A Coprocessor module The coprocessor module has its own microprocessor HD 64180 and operates with a clock fre quency of 10 MHz It contains mainly the following functions 384 kbyte static memory CMOS RAM and EPROM on two ICs battery buffering of the RAMs on power supply monitoring module F 7131 H51q atH41q subrack battery buffering via buffer batteries on rear PCB 2 interfaces RS 485 half duplex with galvanic isolation and own communication proces sor Transmission rates set by software 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 57600 bps or takeover of the values which are set on the CU via DIP switches Dual Port RAM for fast alternating memory access to the central module Note In central subracks of H51q systems the coprocessor module can be used only in the slots CM1 to CM3 Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 360 mA The mixed operation for safety related communication via a coproces sor module F 8621A and parallel the communication module for Ethernet communicati
7. 333 F 6706 2 channel converter 337 7126 Power supply module 341 7130A Power supply 343 7131 Power supply monitoring with buffer batteries 345 7132 4 channel power 347 7133 4 channel power 349 F 7553 Coupling module net ken lie 351 8621A Coprocessor module 4 353 8627X Ethernet 355 8628X PROFIBUS DP slave module 411 8650X Central 445 8651X Central 449 8652X Central 453 8653X Central module 457 4116 Relay in an electronic housing 461 4135 Relay in an electronic housing 465 4136 Relay in an electronic housing 469 7013 Power supply 473 7014 Electronic 1568 477 H 7015A Terminal module 4 481
8. OUT IN N IN OUT H 7505 H 7505 Lightning 7505 7505 7506 7506 Protection Protection H 7506 H 7506 covered plant part Field Wiring covered plant part Figure 12 Connection of lightning protection tools Planning notes The using of this lightning protection module reduces the max possible transmission length because of its series resistance of 4 4 Two modules are necessary per channel For HIBUS 2 the max transmission length is 1200 m with 0 25 mm wiring cross section The loop resistance is 180 Q in this case with regard of the specific line resistance of copper and the double transmission length The calculation of the remaining length ofthe bus refers on a continuous wiring with the same cross section according to the formula 180 Q n 4 4 2 R 1000 Lg remaining length in m n number of line protection modules per channel line resistance in Q km The result is a remaining length of 1141 m 2 modules 75 for 0 25 mm cross sec tion Note The line protection modules should not be installed in the same cabi net as the PES The use of fiber optics cable is advisable at large distances for light ning protection and protection of EMC influences Cable Colors The system wiring of H41q H51q specifies colors and color codes for cables and wires regard ing the relevant international stan
9. eu y jo Jea eui ye ejqejoeuuoo suod Alddns pue 241 Juos eui 1e ejqejoeuuoo suod Ajddns semod ejes Ajjeoisumu xis x3 Ajddns JepJo uj euo 1915000 xoeJqns 20 Ajquiassegns siu 5 jo ejqedeo eeudsoune ue episino Ajuo Joy snyesedde jeoujoaja payeloosse s 6265 4 ejnpoui uonduoseg LONGOYd 950 28161 0 20 SX3 n 91821482 93 0 xipueddy 223 F3325 0622 v v obed r Suiga ONW SS VL SALLOWOLAY ANL 2002 Se O3 6 v6 xeuuy pue uonoedsur jeuy 104 1e1njoejnueui Sul Ayjenb qi 9 2 65 jeunuepi Uonongsuoo jo 1 4e1njoenueui eui sseJppe pue SWEN 35 uondo eui epnjour Jsnw ejqeunp pue eut 6uMnuap 15619 N Ajayes y Bunoegje 1 aynjosqy M9 0 15810 Atz oa ayes Ayfeojsujuul uou
10. 11 2 PITTA ee 5v Gnd PE F 7133 2733 Slot 18 Slot 19 XG 10 xG 9 jm J Im o Slot 1 22 2 RJ Ir 2 ame 2 2 m3 Slot 2 22 4 J 4 5 m o 3 3 Slot 3 22 6 6 4 4 me L 7 Slot 4 z2 1 8 1 LX o L A toss AL PE 1 Fuse monttoring Fuse monitoring 1 1 7133 F 7133 Slot 20 Slot 21 XG 8 1 mje 1 1 1 mm e L e Slot 9 z2 oo 3 o 2 2 E om Slot 10 z2 4 mm 1 a 4 5 mje 3 3 o L e wm 5 Slot 11 22 6 mm 1 a 6 7 7 m 4 4 mm o L e wm 7 Slot 12 z2 8 1 8 L L A A PE 1 L Fuse monitoring Fuse monitoring Mee 1 2 n x EF 1 XG 5 6 XG 13 XG 14 Note Fix related slots due to the connection via bus board Figure 5 Assembly kit wiring diagram Slot 5 22 Slot 6 22 Slot 7 22 Slot 8 22 7553 10 CON Slot 13 22 Slot 14 22 Slot 15 22 Slot 16 22 WD not used 1120 3 4 XG 15 further IO CON from CU resp further IO CON 141 B 9302 0507 3 Side view B 9302 assembly kit Figure 6 Side view 142 B 9361 0507 B 9361 B 9361 Assembly kit Additional power supply 5 V for Systems H51q PS1 PS2 PS3 K 1408 U V V o1 Option o2 14 slots
11. suggested Figure 3 2 pole connection Planning notes atthe same time only 2 channels may be operated with the max load 2 A If the load is up to max 1 A all channels may be operated at the same time 10 output modules with nominal load may be used in one I O subrack canbe used in parallel without external diodes 234 F 3333 0602 F 3333 4 channel output module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 e resistive load or inductive load up to 2 A 48 W lamp connection up to 25 W with integrated safety shutdown with safe isolation no output signal at break of the L supply gt bus o 8 9288 x Bd ua Eo Sos 3333 i ct SZ 1 2 3 4 t i EE i N I amp es e e Ce A1 amp 4 ___ __ am DR DEE O zx ae 33 858 yI 01 02 03 04 8 8 2 71341 3333 2 7134 _1 25W lt 48W suggested L L 1 _ only till release 501 included L amp Capacitor 0 1 e e part no 171112104 Figure 1 Bloc
12. Jo uoneue eu JO SUS 1229 4 jo s ndjno jo onsuejoeJeuo y pue 4 JO suue GZEE 4 y Jo Ajddns jewod 3ndino jo seul onsuejoejeuo y jo y uonoeuuooJejul jo au ye 229 4 jo Juewa nseaw eui ui 229 4 Buipeenoeq eui pue GZEE 4 eui jo Alddns jo uonoeuuoo e jo uonoeuuooJejur eu jo uonejueuinoop Buipioooy pue ZZ9 4 jo uonoeuuoojJeiui 1se19jui ue swous Mp OI se npouu jo 919913 9222 4 eui 2ujpoe 3 9 2 qer 4 yndjno Jed 0 jndjno Jad 69 jseJo Og Jad samog 9 1580 9 yndyno 15810 On 3ndjno
13. Switch no Stationno 12345 16 orm 7 18 ora M RM 19 GRE 20 Sram A kA 21 22 ore AAA AA Switch no Stationno 12345 48 49 50 oua 51 GM 52 or MR M 53 oma ua 5 ore AAA 55 AAPA Switch no Stationno 12345 mM en 2 org Ma oM Maa 94 Oum 85 oM Maa 86 oum maf Switch no Stationno 12345 24 ore 25 oA A 26 ora AWAD 27 ABENE ong BR MM 22 or A NR Switch no Stationno 12345 56 u 57 orm 58 orm A AA so or MAA 60 ore AEA or A AAA 62 orm AAA e OMB ABS Switch no Stationno 12345 88 orm ES on AE 90 or A BA or AAAS 2 or BBS or AW ABS BABA 5 OM AAA A Bit is not set White switch in position ON Position switch 6 7 Switch no orl n Switch no Stationno 12 34 5 Stationno 12345 ee s OS AG Eur 9 o MEE 2 om 10 or aaa EE a 4 oe 2 oua 5 13 oM Aa 6 oan 14 or AAA Position switch 6 7 Switch no Switch no Stationno 12345 Stationno 12345 32 Or 40 Og A oM ER 41 om uaa 34 org A 42 oua M M 35 oM Mun 43 SN MT 36 ore 44 Organ Al 45 oA AA ou AA 46 oe AAA ale 4 Or Position switchno
14. 47 Input and Output Modules 48 Digital Input Modules ee 48 Analog Input Modules use 48 Digital Output ee ea 49 Analog Output Modules u 49 General Notes on the Data Sheets 50 VO M dUlES E 50 Modules within the Central Subrack 50 Communication Modules 2 tute ee 50 Symbols in the Data Sheet 51 Color Code for Lead Marking in Accordance to DIN IEC 60757 53 Description of the Order Code for Cable Plugs 53 4234 Assembly Kit HA1q M 55 B 4235 Assembly Kit HA1q MS System 63 4236 1 2 Assembly Kit HA1q H HR System 71 B 4237 1 2 Assembly Kit HA1q HS HRS 79 5230 Assemly Kit 51 87 5231 Assembly Kit H51q MS System 97 5232 1 2 Assembly Kit H51q H HR 109 5233 1 2 Assembly Kit H51q HS HRS System 121 B 9302 Assembly kit He 135 B9361 Assembly an em she 143 BV 7002 Data connecting cable seen 149 BV 7032 Data connecting cable ame 151 BV 70
15. 8 9 10 1112 13 2 XG 21 3 2 1 XG 22 3 2 1 XG 23 3 2 1 Ir 9 Won L L L L L L Eu d g Fuse and fan Supply 24VDC Supply 24VDC Supply 24VDC I C2 monitoring supply PS3 supply PS2 supply PS1 Mem d Figure 5 Assembly kit wiring diagram L Fan monitoring Si Fuse monitoring 95 B 5230 H51q M 0605 5 Side view 5230 assembly kit H51q M system Figure 6 Side view B 5231 H51q MS 0605 B 5231 H51q MS 5231 Assembly Kit H51q MS System System H51q M in K 1412B system subrack 5 HU 19 inches with single channel central mod ule power supply 24 5 V power supply monitoring module I O bus connection communica tion modules optional coprocessor modules optional and three fans TUV certified applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 PS1 PS2 PS3 11 12 CM13 CM14 CM15 K 1412B 9 P e ERROR 1 2 12 12 oo 1 CPU ACK IO 1 1 1 e elle ej 3 1 2 2 2 2 B 9 55 e 2 2 o HIMA HIMA HIMA HIMA HIMA 7126 F7126 F7126 F7131_ 8650 F8621A F8621A 8621 F8627X F8627X e e e 1 12 3 4 5 Ll 6 1 8 9 10 11 712 13 14
16. 0 ZOLELOOL ON WOdey SAILOWOLAV ANL AL S ALG 8 9 G 9 Az ez Ban lt eu Jo on A 0n 0 6 06 c LiueueA TU Jeuueuo 0 gt 501 Z gt 20 992 101 1229 4 1229 4 Sec 4 jeuueuo jeuueuo Le qe ul pue eseuj jo pue 201 1 01 pue gon pue zon Lon y Aq si eseo y 1 y jo 919818 Jo 2 eouejsisel yo Jeuueuo Jusweinsesyy Buipeauyseg A ddns A 1 29 on Lil s zon O AZ EZ LON 2 5 8011 Y i i i i i i T 1 sjauueyo jueujeJnseeui pue Bulpeasyoeq sj uueyo Alddns jo iequinu Aq pue pg euj spuodseuoo
17. SIIEWSUUOI bore ejqiBuDeu 4 eouejonpul jeuJejul 1 ewa oaeen A 61 OQ enie 15212 an 00 1d 1osusswnunerd 104 pod z yz LEO 58161 20 00 SX3 aJeoylweg uoneuruex3 ed 4 93 0 xipueddy 306 F 6221 0625 F 6221 8 channel analog input module Ex i safety related 8 monitoring channels for checking the transmitter supply voltage 0 30 V Current inputs 0 4 20 mA Voltage inputs 0 1 V Type Examination Certificate ATEX EX5 02 04 19183 036 Safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 1 Overview 39 ee w ge 9 38 Beal W 1 Z 7025 3325 to Ve 55 N 33 D a N 53 N _ supply module E _ J Channel 1 6 g Lap 7069 6221 L 1 L ra N D MUX ee E uc2 a uct 2 7063 E T F 6221 ES re Legend EN 8 8 SW Monhonng tane tor supply voltage 5 V GND L L Front Ious cable plu
18. jo jenueul 014 9 095 135 02 eu ejnpou eui jo 12 e qejoeuuoo suod Ajddns pue eu y je suod indui ejes pejdnoo Ajleo uene 91 spueog gOd ow Jo JSISUOD YORIGNS e 10 pun Alqwassegns si uoisojdxe jo ejqedeo ue op s no Ajuo 10 snyesedde eoujoee peyeioosse e s 1229 4 uonduoseg SOIANSS LINGOYd 9 0 2816 20 SX3 ON u 91821492 adAL 33 xipueddy 324 F 6221 0625 9 y 6uunseeu om 470001 95 uoroeuuoo pue euo xeu Duunseeu H 7 uonoeuuoo ejered pue euo eouejonpul ejqejoeuuoo Xe x33 Buunseeu 3 7 09 99 uonoeuuoo jejjeied pue euo ejqeroeuuoo xeyy e om F 7 gj eyed pue euo jo eouejonpui eqeyoeuuoo syno 40 pajejos SZ omy 7 0001 99 Jo uonoeuuoo jejjesed pue euo jo
19. pue seouejonpul payeuossed pue sjueuno pue y pJejdeuo uonoeuuooiejul leonpa euj jo e sy onsuejpeleuo y pue euj jo ejdiouud jo e Jejdeu jJusweinsesw pue Alddns samod ay jo SYNOI ejes jo aU ue MOUS siu Jo Z 1 19 Sjueuoduoo 1e nonjed S NI Jo BAIND onsuejeJeu 141 onsuejeleuo pejeroosse ue ssessod Jeoupeje y jo Ajddns jewod jueweinseew Kouepunpei uonoeuuo2Jejul jo suoneueA 12294 Jusweinsesw eu pue 4 Aiddns Jemod jo uonoeuuooiJejul Jo Jussayy p Yodel 541 uononpogu ANVIHISLNIGONS 328 F 6221 0625 ZL 30 9 8Epp 9ZEZ L62S 680 L 2002 90 82 uayounW 65508
20. pue uonoedsur jeuy uononpoud WaysAs ue jeys 991 eoueunsse p oll le x33 uononjjsuoo jo e Je4njoejnueuu au jo sseJppe pue uondo y snw ejqeunp ejqi amp o anjen 15010 Un Ajejes ejnjosqv M9 05 OG 15210 eDeyoA ayes zz LX duis od Ajddns amod ez AG 150 0 ayes Ajjeojsuysyul uou Lx dis uod 8 2 391 438 L0ndoud 920 58161 70 20 SX3 ON 33 0 xipueddy g g 3192 00 jo uonoeuuoo 4 pue euo xeyy 9 07 jo uonoeuuoo pue euo jo XEN all x33 Buunsesw 379 99 jo uonoeuuoo jejjeled pue euo Jo eouejioedeo xeyy HW 9 97 jo uonoeuuoo pue euo jo eouejonpu
21. zz 920 28161 70 20 SX3 ed 53 x puaddy 224 F 3330 0602 F 3330 8 channel output module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 e resistive or inductive load up to 500 mA 12 W lamp load up to 4 W with integrated safety shutdown with safe isolation no output signal with break of the L supply bus 2 g 88 SS d a s F3330 Le E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 K lg pap ap ap ap E UN x 08 O o e LA amp 06 O Ec Ce LL 05 amp T 04 3 sZ 1 bd i 03 C 02 N SR 22 54 54 ES 58 Saige X 000 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 7 7138 g z 2 7138 3330 ra aa eh c E RM a f Seer required with inductive load L L Iw l X Diode 1N4007 o 1N4448 Front m pu xe 2 part no 268104004 o 201704443 cable plug amp T only till release AS01 included 4 Capacitor 0 1 part no 1711421 04 Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug The module is automatically tested during operation The main test routines are Reading back of
22. Table 10 Analog Output Modules SU spacing units width Data Sheets 10 13 General Notes on the Data Sheets 10 13 1 I O Modules The block diagrams in the data sheets always show the direction of signal flow from top to bot tom For input modules the input signal from sensor proximity switch etc is lead via the cable con nector and input module to the I O bus or in the mechanical principle from the front to the rear side of the I O subrack For output modules the result of the logic operation in the user program is connected from the bus to the output amplifier the cable connector to the actuator relay solenoid valve etc The mechanical principle is from the rear to the front side of the I O subrack In the block diagrams the 5 V and 24 V operating voltages connections are shown 10 13 2 Modules within the Central Subrack Here you can see the essential components and the positions of switches and jumpers Addi tionally the front plate is shown The essential functions are described in the system descrip tions chapter 3 for the H41q and chapter 4 for the H51q as well as the data sheets of the systems assembly kits 10 13 3 Communication Modules 50 Applications for the using of the communication modules are described in the appertaining data sheets Data Sheets 10 13 4 Symbols in the Data Sheet Diagrams Function unit and signal converter Function unit and signal conv
23. 6 15210 2 15910 9 Queuing Z S OG 1590 on 877 JouUeYD ZVZ 1 329 F 6221 0625 2130 8 9222 1625 680 uojeje L 2002 90 82 62208 GQ Syeys ajp y 2012 002 880 4 pue 071 UoIsINaY 20 21002 HAND SAILOWOLNY ANL Ly Gel Bulpsoooe JO sjueueA jo euo sejeuosjed pue p e YM spuodseuoo uonoeuuoojeju jo 1deoeud y Jepun peniuued 51 Sy jo uonoeuuoouJejui Ode 510 jo siseq y uo je us oj euo sjueue 10 pue SMOUS qe pue p y Jo pue ISON L E 2 10 SEPP 9565 1616 680 L 2002 90 82 uayounW 68508 59 eyeqsuaipry 01 1002 0 1 850 pue
24. Option Figure 1 Front view 1 Parts of B 4236 1 2 assembly kit H41q H HR system 1xK 1409 system rack 5 HU 19 inches with cable tray with four fan modules K 9212 hinged receptacle for the label and backplane Z 1009 On the rear buffer batteries G1 G2 additional modules on the rear e 2x2Z6011 decoupling and fusing to feed the power supply modules 1xZ6018 fan run monitoring and fuse monitoring e 2xZ26013 decoupling and fusing for the supply voltage of the WD signal e 1xZ6007 jumper plug combination of the separated I O buses single channel system H41q H B 4236 1 includes the modules 2x F 8653X central module CU1 CU2 2xF 7130A power supply module 24 V 5 VDC PS1 PS2 The 5 V outputs of both power supplies are switched in parallel Modules for option separate order 2x F 8621A coprocessor modules CM1 CM2 2x communication modules CM1 CM2 e g F 8627X Ethernet or F 8628X Profibus DP All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 71 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 4236 1 2 H41q H HR 0605 2 1 72 H41q H B 4236 1 13 IO modules slots 1 13 H41q HR B 4236 2 7 10 modules slots 1 7 related to central module 1 6 IO modules slots 8 13 related to central module 2 Note Operating system resource type in ELOP Il The assembly kit is usable since operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 Resou
25. 20 x 0 25 mm Channel Connection Color 1 d2 WH 2 d4 BN 3 d6 GN 4 d8 YE 5 d10 GY 6 d12 PK 7 d14 BU Cable 8 d16 RD 9 d18 BK 10 d20 VT 11 d22 WHBN 12 d24 WHGN 13 d26 WHYE 14 d28 WHGY 15 d30 WHPK 16 d32 WHBU L 110 V 212 WHRD N 127 V Figure 2 Lead marking of the cable plug 2 7130 3240 C F3248 0524 F 3248 16 channel input module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 for digital signals or sensors with input voltage 48 VDC 48 VAC with safety isolation v pc P 4s v AC v pc P 4s v Ac Lias v 48 v L 0 5F 0 5F L 8 ce 8 G 01 02 04 05 06 09 10 11 12 14 15 16 77130 3248 e NN lt N st N N ce N N N N N e e N gt gt gt N o N cs o o e 7 gt e o 04 L N T T TOUT T T AT At At At T a 7 PA A t rZ 7 j t 1 3248 I Lb Lp x Front 3 RE 8 8 cable plug L 24V L 24V 45V GND VO bus Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug The module is automatically fully tested during operation for safety related errors The essen tial test procedures are Cross talking of the inputs by walking zero Function of the filter capacitors Function
26. Figure 5 Mono supply redundant current measuring wiring via cable Note In this wiring variant the first six channels of the F 3325 module are always used for passive transmitters Channels 7 and 8 are used for active transmitters see Variant C2 314 F 6221 0625 2 1 7 Variant C2 No supply redundant current measuring wiring via cable Redundant operation without transmitter supply for channels 7 and 8 e Cable type 2 7063 6221 ExCn IT R2 part number 93 6221 103 93 6221 103 F 6221 Z 7063 6221 ExCn ITI R1 Safety related EEX measuring module MUX H z30 Cable plug measuring module 2m max length 93 6221 103 Z 1063 6221 ExCn ITI R2 ai F 6221 active Transmitter Terminal Safety related EEX measuring module 4 z14 500 MUX H Cable plug measuring module Tose Figure 6 No supply redundant current measuring wiring cable 315 F 6221 0625 2 1 8 Variant D Mono supply redundant current measuring wiring via termi nal Redundant operation with transmitter supply for channels 1 to 8
27. 14 2 14 1 4 15 1 6 7 25 43 8 23 13 20 ae MIN D plug MIN D plug 25 pole 25 pole Figure 1 Wiring All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 149 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7002 0508 150 BV 7032 0508 BV 7032 BV 7032 Data connecting cable Connection of the I O bus between the I O subracks to the central rack and to the PES coupling module Standard length 0 5 m Special lengths up to 5 m or longer after testing Total bus length 12 m I I I 1 1 2 21 1 3 3 1 I 1 4 4 5 1 1 1 46 46 I 47 47 Flat cable 48 48 50 core round 49 49 50 50 I I I es eee a al Figure 1 Wiring All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 151 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7032 0508 152 BV 7040 0508 BV 7040 BV 7040 Data connecting cable Connection of the bus terminal H 7506 to the interface in the H41q H51q system Connection H 7505 gt H 7506 Standard lengths 0 5 2 4m O 14 5 H 25 13 MIN D plug 9 poles MIN D plug 25 poles RS 485 H 7506 Figure 1 Wiring Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 RxD TxD A R
28. ID_IP ON The bus station number ID which is set on the F 865x central module via switches S1 1 7 is used as Res ID if no Res ID could be determined from the loaded user program ID IP OFF The bus station number ID which is set on the F 865x central module via switches 81 1 7 is never used for the Res ID Table 4 Functions of switch 1 S1 F 8628X 0650 411 Switches 1 1 7 The switches 1 1 7 are used to set PROFIBUS DP Slave address 0 to 125 for the F 8628X communication module Switch 1 PROFIBUS DP address 89819 OnE ME E 5 Positions white switch OQjBBEEREN EA White Switch in on White switch in or H 1 oa position ON ora AAG 2 switch on H 3 of AAA BAG 4 Shih 5 SI hdi 6 S il 7 oA 8 oM uan 124 12 Table 5 Settings of switch 1 1 7 415 F 8628X 0650 4 2 4 2 1 416 Functions of switch 2 2 2 ON OFF Description 1 Ethernet Ethernet F 8628X allocation to the Ethernet channel 1 or Ethernet Channel1 Channel2 channel 2 2 Not used 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 ON OFF The baud rate for the F 8628X module is set via 6 ON OFF switches 2 5 8 See Table 6 7 ON OFF 8 ON OFF
29. 00 14 sosuaswinuneld a ieee oz 1 NEN sjeuiuua Jeujo 8t 0 AGZE JO e dn psjejos Ajojes pue ayes Ayea supjui 001 1d Josuesununejd 10 6 pue eidnooouueu 9g 941 Uld ZX ajes Ajeorsuuju pZ esupag 1 Jo BUY erqejoeuuoo pod Ajddns y pue ndino 99 pue jucu spod ejes Ajeoisuigur jo 1515000 XoeJqns ur Alqwassegns 141 5 Jo ejqedeo ue apisino Ajuo uonejje sul pajeroosse e si 02294 941 L SOMES 1 LEO 5861 20 00 SX3 ON au akoya 93 x pusddy 305 F 6220 0625 t t ung peyif N 3501 54 olas ANL 0002 21 yarunyy O3 6 v6 x xeuuy pue uonoedsur jueurdinba leuy uononpoud 10 urejs s Ayyenb pe cudde ue asado peys aus eoueinsse Ayjenb S O3 6 v6 xeuuv Butpioooe Aq esn ayes suononursul Perejep Aq seseydsoune
30. 1 11 tt 1 1 ti Figure 2 Connections on the rear of the additional power supply subrack 1408 Connections on the rear of the additional power supply subrack K 1408 see also assembly kit wiring diagram Wiring ex works XG 4 5 XG 26 XG 26 2 3 XG 26 1 26 4 5 6 Wiring by customer XG 1 9 11 XG 2 XG 3 XG 21 XG 22 XG 23 XG 24 XG 25 Feeding L 24 V for power supply module F 7126 Feeding L 24 V for power supply module F 7126 Connections for Z 6012 fan with fan run monitoring and fuse monitoring Power supply for fans Wire for fuse monitoring Floating NO NC contact for signaling of fuse and fan monitoring Connections for monitoring of the power supplies by power supply monitoring module F 7131 Output 5 V supply of I O subrack B 9302 Output GND supply of I O subrack B 9302 connection to GND of central subrack Connections for Z 6011 decoupling and fusing to feed the power supply modules Connections for Z 6013 decoupling and fusing of the supply voltage for Z 6012 and fee ding of the coupling module F 7553 in subrack XG 24 1st I O bus XG 25 2nd I O bus B 9361 0507 2 8 supply I O racks Assembly kit wiring diagram XG 2 XG 3 5V GND y
31. a F 3330 3330 Redundant Redundant Figure 4 Wiring of H 7015A with UMK EC56 56 479 H 7015A 0524 480 Wiring H 7015A with Pepperl Fuchs Motherboard For 16 analog inputs Motherboard type P F Motherboard MB AI HIMA 118233 Motherboard equipped with max 16x P F Module KFD2 STC4 Ex 1 or 16x P F Module KFD2 STC4 Ex 1 2 with additional output on X2 Table 2 Analog inputs For 16 digital inputs Safety related single channel 1x P F Motherboard MB DI HIMA 119935 equipped with max 16x P F Modul KFD2 SH Ex 1 T OP Not safety related dual channels 1x P F Motherboard MB DI HIMA 119941 equipped with max 16x P F Modul KFD2 SR2 Ex 2 2S Table 3 Digital inputs Marshalling cabinet Analog digital inputs 16 channels 22222 200 222 2122 21022 21 272 2122 21122 2122 2122
32. Ajejes pue ejes X3 eui 10 X3 eui Jo Alddns eui 20 AGZ Jo 4 LX diis sunau yndyno pz 5112 13 Z asn BANDAS JO uoneuuojul eeue y ees jo jenuew ey WOs4 9 095 15 gt 9 02 eu e npoui y 10 eui ejqejoeuuoo snq 3 eui 10 eui pue sod pue Indino ayy 1uoJj ejqejoeuuoo ejes Jno sewe X3 YOUMS oj 10 x3 Alddns uj preoq god euo jo 3815400 yoesqns ui uoge jejsul 10 A quiesseqns siu uorsojdxe jo ejqedeo ue Ajuo 10 snyesedde pejeloosse e s 4 eur uonduoseg 391AU3S 450 28161 90 20 SX3 u 9429113425 53 0 xipueddy 250 F 3335 0622 v v r id ONW S3 VL HAWS FALLOWOLNV ANL 2002 91 ABW 6 6 xeuuy Buysa pue uonoedsur juewidinbe uononpoud 10 Wayshs jjenb peroidde ue eje1edo eus eu Ayjenb
33. aa a amp 6 gt Z 7134 3334 4 E lt 25 _ saw IR M n 1 suggested KCN AS d 4 only till release AS01 included Capacitor 0 1 uF part no 171112104 Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Appertaining function blocks HB BLD 3 or HB BLD 4 The module is automatically tested during operation The main test routines are Reading back of the output signals The operating point of the 0 signal read back is lt 6 5 V Up to this value the level of the 0 signal may arise in case of a fault and this will not be detected Switching capability the test signal and cross talking walking bit test Outputs Internal voltage drop Admissible line resistance in out Undervoltage tripping Output leakage current Output voltage if output is reset Current input WD Monitored switching time Space requirement Operating data 2A k short circuit proof max 2 V at 2 A load max 3 6 Q at 16V max 550 uA max 1 5 V max 30 mA max 250 us 4 SU 5 VDC 130 mA 24 VDC 130 mA plus load All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 3 3 K N 04 03 02 01 Z 7134 Front cable plug 237 F 3334 0626 han nne
34. Cee Figure 8 Connections on the Wiring ex works XD 1 XD 2 XD 3 XD 4 XG 1 1 3 XG 1 5 7 XG 1 12 13 XG 1 14 XG 4 XG 5 Connections of the additiona XG 24 25 XG 26 Wiring by customer XG 1 2 4 XG 1 6 8 XG 1 9 11 XG 2 XG 3 XG 21 XG 22 XG 23 Z 6018 45 of 9 1 rear of the system rack 1412B B 5233 2 Bus termination module F 7546 plugged B 5233 1 BV 7032 data connecting cable plugged 5233 1 2 Bus termination module F 7546 plugged Watchdog supply for module Z 6013 Watchdog supply for module Z 6013 Connection external buffer battery on module F 7131 Ground GND for connection external buffer battery L for power supply 24V Reference potential L modules see assembly kit wiring diagram Z 6013 Z 6018 Watchdog signal CU1 for I O modules 1st I O bus Watchdog signal CU2 for I O modules 2nd I O bus Monitoring power supplies PS1 PS3 by F 7131 for external ex amination Connection 5 VDC for I O subrack Ground GND for supply 5 VDC Supply 24 V via module Z 6011 see assembly kit wiring diagram L L 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 4 7 Assemly kit wiring diagram Supply I O racks XG 2 XG 3 5V GND
35. 59 ZOLELODLON IEPIO 850 pue O UoIsINay 8 0 100 HAWS 1 ANL 9222 4 JO ejes jo Juawu sse pz GEL 9 jndino juepunpay eBeyoA 9 abeyon 6 eBeyoA 90 cea 9 eBeyoA GO 202 r ndino juepunpey 7 _ 024 0 eFmdmoebmpA O gol 5 _ eu 1ndino HO 91 eBeyoA 20 via eBeyoA 3ndino Juepunpay 10 va yndjno e8ejoA 0 3ndino e8eyoA 0 ez uonouny jndino GNVIHOSLNAGGNS ZL Jo G 8Epp 9562 1615 680 uojeje c00c 90 8c ueuouniw 68508 seuiou G9 ZOLELOOL ON JOPIO 8501 4 pue 071 uorsihe ZOLELOOL SAILONOLAY ANL synouro Jo SMOUS qe pejeroosse SMOUS qe Aiddns Jemod A Jo
36. 3330 Redundant 8 supply contacts coupled 6 floating contacts 2 contacts for shield Y Figure 3 Wiring of H 7015A with H 7018 491 H 7018 0508 492 H 7020 0606 H 7020 7020 Terminal Module For connection between the I O modules and the field level For DIN Rail mounting 1 2 1 Front vorne 2 Rear hinten 4 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 soldering points L tpunkte X19 X20 X23 X24 X25 X26 21 22 27 28 Figure 1 Block Diagram Technical Data Permissible voltage max 48 VDC 30 VAC SELV or PELV Current per channel X1 X16 2A X21 X22 4A Total current X1 X16 max 16A Cross section A B C 0 2 1 5 mm Combicon Connector 0 2 1 5 mm Ambient temperature range 20 C to 50 C Dimension L x W x H 90 mm x 91 5 mm x 60 mm Mounting on 35 mm DIN Rail Weight ca 130g Installation orientation horizontally or vertically installation clearance is not necessary All rights reserved Equipment ssubject to change without notice 493 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 D 68777 Br hl H 7020 0606 494 Wiring on the Terminal Module Designator T
37. Front cable plug The module is automatically fully tested during operation by applying of test values with signal duration lt 1ms The main test routines are Linearity of the D A converter Cross talk between the outputs Safety shutdown Resolution All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 12 bits 4095 steps 0 2 0 mA 3840 20 mA 4095 21 3 mA HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 333 F 6705 0524 334 Burden Rg source mode lt 550 incl line resistance to the burden sink mode lt Ug 10 V 21 3 mA Ug source voltage Basic error lt 0 2 40 uA at 25 C Operating error 0 4 96 at 0 60 C Line length max 1000 m observe burden Electric strength 250 V against Analog GND Basic status with plug in lt 40 uA Source voltage Ug sink mode 10 30 V Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 85 mA 24 VDC 130 mA aid az Color Cable 2 2 1 b8 WH 8 x 0 5 mm b6 BN b4 PK b10 GY 2 b24 GN 750 mm b22 YE 1mm 620 RD b26 BU Flat pin L b28 BK plug L b32 RD 2 8 x 0 8 mm Cable screen YEGN 120 mm q 2 5 mm r Mea pin plug 6 3 x 0 8 mm of the cable screen Lead marking cable plug to be connected to the earth bar under the slot 27126 6705 C Note To prevent module error messages not used channels have to be terminated with a jumper b6 b8 for chan
38. on HIMA F 7133 Front view Block diagram Figure 1 F 7133 4 channel power distribution The module has four miniature fuses with assigned LEDs The fuses are monitored via an eval uation logic and the state of each circuit is signalized to the related LED The contact pins 1 2 3 4 and L on the front side serve to connect L or EL and L to supply the I O modules and the sensors The contacts d6 d10 d14 d18 serve as rear terminals for 24 V supply of one I O slot each Fuses max 4 A slow blow Switching time approx 100 ms relay Loadability of the relay contacts 30 V 14 A continuous load Residual voltage in case of fuse tripped OV Residual current in case of fuse tripped 0 Residual voltage in case of missing supply max 3 V Residual current in case of missing supply lt 1 Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 24 VDC 60 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 349 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 7133 0507 If all fuses are in order the relay contact d22 z24 is closed If a fuse is not equipped or faulty the relay will be de energized Faults are announced via the LEDs as follows Supply voltage Fuse for path in order faulty missing exists LED on LED flashing fails LED off LED flashing Table 1 LED displays Note If the module is not wired all LEDs are off If the input voltage is missing in c
39. GND 13 Connection for external backup battery K 1412B e Power supply monitoring PS3 e amp e 10 Ps2 e R e PS1 WD F 8650X 8 yeh 3345 15 i Watchdog CU2 e bs amp to the rack N N F 7131 5 B9302 the 2nd I O bus N further I O racks 251 N PS2 PS3 du2 on the 2nd bus F 7126 7126 27126 e 4 GND WD F 8650X XG 15 e 4 1727 374 3 Watchdog CU1 to the I O rack WD b E B9302 on the 1st I O bus cu1 XG 1 further I O racks XG 4 1 2 3 on the 1st I O bus XG 5 1 2 3 B 5233 1 5 GY 0 5 GY 0 5 6 0 5 6 0 5 mm Supply racks 1st bus Supply racks 2 2nd I O bus RD 1 5 mm XG24 s 9 222 111 XG25 o 222 111 ee ee ee ee A e L L L 51 0 51 0 ad 1 6 hr 1 6A 2 e RD 1 5 mm ee 26013 o 26013 6 kK n eo gt 5 3 5 8 7444 a a X625 9 7 44 4 RD 1 mm BK 1 mm RD 1 mm BK 1 mm 0 5 mm RD 0 5 mm GY 0 5 X621 4 4 4 6 555 XG 22 8 4 4 6 555 2 X623 8 4 4 6 555 m 3 1a XG 26 ee E e ee E e ee T E im E in T e SU e 3 e 50 o 3 eL 550 gue L 26018 gt gt amp 4 4 ad 4A e e 76011 eR 26011 ex 7 6011 ee e e e lt 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 XG 26 LM XG 21 2 22 3 2 1 XG 23 2 1 S 4 6 ERE L L Lt L Fuse and fan Supply 24VDC Supply 24VDC Supply 24VDC monitoring su
40. gt WD WD WD BS X BS X T N T IO CON L e L Tm WD BS Shutdown via operating system T Safety related output module IO CON Coupling module WD Watchdog X Logic signal Figure 4 Shutdown ways in the H51q MS system 104 B 5231 H51q MS 0605 4 6 Connections on the rear g Te el F7546 2 XG 2 Bus 2 70 Bua 2 201 111 e 8 8 i 1011104 8 21888 8 8 REALE 8 e 8 8 B ome B 8 101110 g SERES 71001 811 Y e XD 3 wes G Figure 5 Connections on the rear ofthe system rack K 1412B 4 6 1 Wiring ex works XD 1 Connection data cable BV 7032 not used in single channel system H51q MS XD 2 Bus termination module F 7546 plugged Connection data cable BV 7032 XD 3 Connection data cable BV 7032 not used in single channel system H51q MS XD 4 Bus termination module F 7546 plugged Connection data cable BV 7032 XG 1 1 3 Watchdog supply for module 7 6013 XG 1 5 7 Watchdog supply for module Z 6013 1 12 13 Connection external buffer battery on module F 7131 XG 1 14 Ground GND for connection external buffer battery XG 4 L for power supply 24V XG 5 Reference potential L Connections of th
41. 0x01 hex data format 0x0001 1 dec 0x00 number of Word variables 20 0514 0 0014 20 dec 0 00 begin of the Boolean variables in iig Common D C8 hex data format 0x00C8 200 dec 0x00 number of Boolean variables 150 0596 0 0096 150 dec Module 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Figure 12 Example of address mapping for the export parameter data in the PROFIBUS DP master Slave Configuration x General Device F8628 Station address 2 Description Profibus DP Slave Cancel Activate device in actual configuration V Enable watchdog control GSD file HIG200EA GSD Parameter Data Max length of in output data 240 Byte Length of in output data 59 Byte Max length of input data 240 Byte Length of input data 59 Byte Max length of output data 240 Byte Length of output data 0 Byte Max number of modules 240 Number of modules 5 Assigned master Modue neus Outputs In Out identifier Taf Station address 1 DP Input ELOP2 Export 2 Bytes 2 Byte DP Input ELOP2 Export 4 Bytes 4 Byte DP Input ELOP2 Export 8 Bytes 8 Byte DP Input ELOP2 Export 16 Bytes 16 Byte cee 2 DP Input ELOP2 Export 1 word 1 word DPInput ELOP2Expot 2 2Word ae tas ee DP Input ELOP2 Export 4 4 Word 2 F8628 DP Input ELOP2 Export 16 Words DP Input ELOP2 Export 8 Bytes Append Module DP Input ELOP2 Export 16 Bytes DP Input EL
42. 5V 1 B ae o C 6 8 6 B K1406 ol e i 6 8 6 ol ach bi aeh XG 8 XG 9 XG 10 DM XG 1 L 11 EA Bus2 XD2 t XG 12 GND XG 13 XG 14 XG 15 n 205660650000 c Co Figure 4 Connections on the rear of the I O subrack K 1406 Connections on the rear of the I O subrack K 1406 refer also to Supply feeding and distribu tion of the 24 V system voltage wiring diagram 2 6 1 Wiring by customer XG 1 XG 2 Fuse monitoring neutral contacts on current distribution module F 7133 not equipped F 7133 slot can be overrided by the jump ers X1 X4 Slot equipped XG 3 Supply EL for F 7133 and F 7553 Reference pole XG 11 L XG 4 5V Reference pole XG 12 GND XG 5 Potential distributor free disposal XG 6 Potential distributor free disposal XG 13 Potential distributor free disposal XG 14 Potential distributor free disposal 7 L to F 7133 slot 21 XG 8 L to F 7133 slot 20 XG 9 L to F 7133 slot 19 XG 10 L to F 7133 slot 18 XG 11 Reference potential L XG 12 Reference pole GND XG 15 1 2 WD Watchdog signal XG 15 3 4 not used XD 1 XD 2 bus connection A PE earth 140 B 9302 0507 2 7 Assemby kit wiring diagram
43. E Xii oil MEM Value 500 220 Q 3 3 emer Lr Jol J 0 05 5 5 X 3 x 3 part 00 0710500 00 0471221 00 0471332 F M4T T no module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 Figure 14 Connection of smart transmitters Not used inputs redundant connection All examples are for channel 1 Install the resistors outside the cable connectors on terminals Active passive transmitter 0 4 20 mA R Resistors for channels 1 4 Rap terminating resistor for not used channels er Wo l 2712716244 m ML MER I CARE R01 03 05 07 Rab 2 MEM S lt Vale 50 Q 0 05 3 3 5 mn m E ien part no 00 0710500 00 0471332 ri F 6214 ri F 6214 1 module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 Figure 15 Active passive transmitter 0 4 20 mA 277 F 6214 0606 Voltage input 0 1 V Rap 7 712716214 C U1VIR2 5 6214 module 1 channel 1 Rab2 ms 3 x4 2 7127162141 N C2IUTVIRT 6214 module 2 channel 1 Resistors for channels 1 4 Rap terminating resistor for not used channels Resistor R01 03 05 07 Rab Value 50 0 05 3 3 5 part 00 0710500 00 0471332 Figure 16 Voltage input 0 1 V N N 4 Voltage input 0 5 V a R02 R01 Z 7127 6214 C USVIR2 X F 6214 mo
44. Measures to Install a Cabinet According to the CE Requirements According to the guidline 89 336 EWG of the European Council also law for EMC in the Fed eral Republic of Germany since January 1st 1996 all electrical equipments have to be pro vide with the CE symbol for Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC within the European Union All modules of the HIMA system families H41q H51q are supplied with the CE symbol To prevent also EMC problems with the installation of controls PLCs in cabinets and frames the following measures are required Installation of the 7013 HIMA module as power supply filter directly at the 24 VDC feed 31 Installation and Connections 8 5 8 5 1 32 ing The filter is not required if power supplies with the CE symbol are used e g the HIMA standard power supplies Correct and interference free electrical installation in the ambient of the control 9 no power current cables should run together with the 24 V cables filter 7013 is necessary if the 24 V feeding is installed in an own power supply cabi net installed side by side to the cabinets with PLCs Furthermore please notice the notes within the PES catalog concerning earthing shielding and cable run to sensors and actuators Earthing in the HIMA PES Reliable earthing and thus the fulfillment of the valid EMC regulations in HIMA systems is achieved by the measures described below Earthing Connections
45. gt 2 45 2 9558 d 2 9 57 o 1 yndjno 2 jueuno a G eageinung gt en 1229 4 jeuueuo S06 0 Bulpeesyoeg 1229 4 18 LS gt 2 9565 d 3 3 952 o Jeuueuojndino 9 A juauno Jeuueuo sjauueyo 943 Jo Jo jequinN Jeuueuo Jo puriy jueueA qNv1H9s1nadans m Z 30 6 aed 4 9ZEZ LELS 680 uojoje L 2002 90 82 uayounw 62208 seuiou G9 01 L00770N J9p40 2850 pue O L 8 ZOLELOOL ON HOdey H8INO SAILLOWOLAY ANL eDeyoA jueuno 18 cl eAnejnunz LZZ9 jeuueyo E 5 0 gt 0 1229 4 19 19 ee ze L jueuieunseej Gee 4 d 9 6 0 _jauueyo yndino 8 i jueuno C YO 9 9 gt emenuno z 1229 4 euueuo E 16 _ 9 0 2 4 Buipeenoeg 1229 4 l 5 Z 7 v juswainsesyy 965 d ZEZ 9 9 9 9 L Indino Y jueuno n 9 9 gt 1229 4 Vus gt G 0 5 2 Buipeeuyoeg LZZ9 4
46. om H 07 Jouonoeuuoo pue euo eouejonpur e qejoeuuoo XEN all x33 37 06 00 uonoeuuoo pue euo jo ejqejoeuuoo Xew Buunseeui H 7 pue euo eouejonpul ejqeroeuuoo XEN X33 synoJro Buunseeui 10 Mala pajos rz FOAU3S 1 9 0 28161 20 SX3 ON i 91821492 d L 53 xipueddy 9 5 4 9 Jeaul MW 22 0 15810 Og S 0 15919 9 ueuung AL S OG 33910 on 8 jeuueuo EZ eougjonpur eiqiBipeu 10 6 Z 15810 2 anjen 15210 di oec AL S 18819 on eBeyoA 39IAM3S 1 8 jeuueuo Buluinsesy zz 920 58161 20 SXI 1 53 xipueddy 325 F 6221 0625 9 9 f Burda ONWSA VL SALLOWOLNY WD L 2002 SZ yolunyy 09 6 76 xeuuy
47. 1x F 7130A power supply 24 5 V on slot 21 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 55 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 4234 H41q M 0605 2 1 56 Note Operating system resource type in ELOP Il The assembly kit is usable since operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 Resource type in Il H41qce M Modules Central module F 8653X The central module of the PES H41q M contains the essential functions demonstrated in the block diagram of the central module Interfaces Displays RS 485 en ERE E ead Front panel Setting of bus subscriber voltage monitoring i i i bus logic 1 bus WD DPR Bus CPU Bus Rear side bus plane Figure 2 Block diagram of the central module F 8653X Microprocessor Flash EPROMs of the program memory for the operating system and the user program usable for min 100 000 writing cycles Data memory in sRAM 2interfaces RS 485 with galvanic isolation Transmission rate max 57600 bps Adigit diagnostic display and 2 LEDs for information out of the system I O level and user program Power supply monitoring bus logic for the connection to the input output modules Hardware clock battery buffered Watchdog Battery backup of the sRAMs via battery with monitoring 4234 H41q M 0605 2 2 2 3 Coprocessor mod
48. 2interfaces RS 485 with galvanic isolation Transmission rate max 57600 bps Adigit diagnostic display and 2 LEDs for information out of the system I O level and user program Dual Port RAM for fast memory access to the second central module Hardware clock battery buffered bus logic and connection to the input output modules Watchdog Power supply monitoring testable 5 V system voltage Battery monitoring Coprocessor module F 8621A Right of the central module of the H41q HS HRS PES respectively one coprocessor module can be installed The coprocessor module mainly contains Microprocessor HD 64180 with a clock frequency of 10 MHz Operating system EPROM RAM for a PLC master project Note The RAM for the master project is buffered via the batteries on the backplane of the subrack Two interfaces RS 485 via communication software function block setting of the baud rate up to 57600 bps Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Communication modules F 8627 F 8628 F 8627X F 8628X Right of the central module of the H41q HS HRS PES respectively one communication module can be installed The communication module mainly contains 32 bit RISC microprocessor Operating system RAM for further protocols F 8627 Ethernet interface safeethernet F 8628 Profibus DP slave interface Dual port RAM DPR for the comm
49. IS lo x x d Em gt Protective earth terminal Ls i g x m USLKG4 ge gn Figure 3 Direct connection PC to H41 q H51 q 505 H 7505 0630 L 1 H41 q H51 q H41 q H51 q X2 X4 14 2 13 4 2 2 1 1 2 5 2 2 ws RxD TxD A 2 2 i 6 5 5 br RxD TxD B 5 s HIBUS2 switch 1 3 3 gn CNTRA 3 3 max 31 stations 12 6 6 ge CNTRB 6 6 5 1234 4 4 ONW 4 ar DGND 4 one 4 OFF im 51 7506 7506 OFF im m 2 orFu ug 3 H41 q H51 q H41 q H51 q orra 54 PE PE HIBUS 2 a 1234 2 1 1 2 max 31 stations H 7505 95 2 2 n 2 2 7 10 5 5 br 5 5 3 on 3 end HIBUS 2 8 6 6 ge 6 6 m 4 4 ar 4 059 4 7506 7506 7 no of the application Protective earth terminal USLKG4 ge gn Figure 4 Use as a HIBUS 2 repeater in one basic direction In this case the control lines to switch over the basic direction have to be used additionally 506 0009098 06 ou ped gU SZ 0 X ZX ejqeo uw GZ 0 uonoes ssoJo WYO OZL 00 eouepeduuri ejqeo pejsiw peJepisuoo 0707 JO u18ue peJepisuoo 9707 JO sejqeo jo uoneJepisuoo uy
50. Rheinland have to be considered Der Pr fpericht Nr 968 EZ 165 00 04 vom 2004 04 14 ist Bestandteil dieses Zertifikates Der Inhaber eines f r den Pr fgegenstand g ltigen Genehmigungs Ausweises ist berechtigt die mit dem Pr fgegenstand berein stimmenden Erzeugnisse mit dem abgebildeten Pr fzeichen zu ver sehen last report no 968 2 165 00 04 dated 2004 04 14 is an integral part of this certificate Ihe holder of a valid licence certificate for tne product tested is authorised to affix the test mark shown opposite to products which are identical with the product tested T V Industrie Service GmbH Gesch ftsfeld ASI Automation Software und Informationstechnologie Am Grauen Stein 51105 K ln 2 Lut 2004 04 14 Postfach 91 09 51 51101 K ln A Datum Date OE Stream 102 A iid Pha ceni Dres T V Rheinland Firmenstempel Company seal Unterschrift Signature 463 H 4135 0530 464 H 4136 0530 H 4136 Relay in an electronic housing safety related for circuits up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 Fi K1 EI max 4A slow blow Delivery state 25A T eC eo Figure 1 Block diagram The module is tested according to IEC 61508 SIL 3 EN 298 DIN VDE 0116 EN 50156 NFPA 8501 NFPA 8502 EN 60664 DIN EN 50178 VDE 0160 E
51. Table 6 Functions of switch 2 S2 Switch 2 5 8 The switches 2 5 8 are used to set the F 8628X module s baud rate for communicating as a PROFIBUS DP slave Switch 2 Baud rate Legend 00 96 kBit s Positions white switch ong White switch in on g White switch in CEBHERENE 192 m OOO BAR 93 75 m n 187 5 kBit s SHBHHE RS 500 kBit s 108 gay 1 5 MBit s 3 MBit s a 6 MBit s on DOOR ARYL 12 MBit s A OOOO URRY 4545 kBit s Table 7 Settings of switch 2 5 8 F 8628X 0650 5 5 1 Ethernet connection via the F 8628X Determining the F 8628X IP address For all OS versions the F 8628X IP address is determined from the resource name of the load ed user program The IP address is composed of the network address and the host address The default network address is 192 168 0 The last byte of the IP address 192 168 0 x is the host address and is calculated as follows For ethernet module channel 1 switch 2 1 ON Host address the last two digits of the resource name 2 1 For ethernet module channel 2 switch 2 1 OFF Host address the last two digits of the resource name 2 2 Note The resource name must have eight cha
52. coe ee E gt 16 Color coded Modules 6 Modules DI 1 3236 1 Figure 3 Single pole redundant wiring via 7020 Note The voltage supply L for the sensors and contact makers must be wired separately to the fuse module e g F 7133 The fuse module is connected to clamp D The wires of the two system cables are color coded and are clamped to Combicon connectors For inverse polarity protection diodes are soldered between soldering points X17 X19 and X18 X20 of the terminal module if input modules are connected to the terminal module The clamps D headers X23 and X24 are used for test purposes 495 H 7020 0606 Wiring of H 7020 single pole mono with output modules F 3330 Two digital output modules F 3330 are connected to the field level via terminal module H 7020 The two 8 wire system cables are connected single pole to the clamps A of the ter minal module The following figures show single pole wiring of two F 3330 output modules in a combined control and marshalling cabinet or in separate cabinets Field Level Field Level Terminals Clamps Fuses Terminals Clamps Fuses Interfaces Interfaces e g H 4007 e g H 4007 Wiring Wiring 7020
53. g e e m E e IE e 51 0 e 3 e SU 2 1 gt F2 F1 4A 9 4A e e e e Z 6011 e 7 6011 e o o e o XG24 gt 2 25 gt 2 1 L L L L Supply 24VDC Supply 24VDC Figure 4 Assembly kit wiring diagram L Fan monitoring Si U Fuse monitoring Assembly kit wiring diagram Watchdog CU1 2 GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 GY 0 5 mm RD 1 mm L slot 1 es en XG 6 3 L from feeding and L slot 3 current distribution L slot 13 EHE see note Supply 24 V DC L slot XG 14 L from feeding and L 1t013 XG 14 current distribution Watchdog CU2 XG10 1 2 3 4 2 BK 1 5 mm 2 2 GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm XG 23 5 222 111 ee ee en e L L Si U e 1 6A 2 e Z 6013 e ee xG235 9 7 444 RD 1 mm j BK 1 mm 2 BK 0 5 mm 2 RD 0 5 mm 2 GY 0 5 mm 2 3 XG 21 e L Z 6018 a XG 21 7 e 9 10 11 12 13 14 s al d abuti Li T Lich Fuse and fan monitorin 4 Fans 3 K 9212 Note The assembly kit is fully wired for a possible extension to redundant systems For extension to redundant I O buses remove jumper plug Z 6007 H41q HRS 85 4237 1 2 H41q HS HRS 0605 5 Side view 4237 1 2 assembly kit H41q HS HRS system Figure 5 Side view B 5230 H51q M 0605 5230 H51q M 5230 Assemly Kit H51q M System System H51q M in K 1412B system subrack 5 HU 19 inches with single channel central
54. pE GD Z I eynvepieu vie AU 078 99 ndino Jo uonoeuuoo 10 om 104 eougjonpul Xew 019145405 JO Jed A jo pue uondo Buymojjo epnjour ejqeunp pue eu N osuu y anjosqy M noge A 9 OQ 15810 AS 0 0 2 9 22 uod M 2 noge 0 OG anea 15810 A ve pue 22 JOMOd eDeyoA abeyon 2 Alddns Jamod JOMOd gn Alddns ejes ZX duis Ajddns samog 30445 Lonaoud 420 28161 S0 20 SX3 93 xipueddy JU 078 00 jndyno Jad eoueyoedeo ejqejoeuuoo xeyy gz 01 euo eougjonpul XEN aud x33 vec AUOLL 99 yndyno om jo uonoeuuoo 4 10 eouejoedeo ejqejoeuuoo 9 91 1ndino om
55. sR 8 x ps ey r 3331 i N e 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CM 3 f P A A N Af 08 T A T T JA T T 4 07 E 06 e P 05 amp 04 03 02 on oo N A dt Se 58 E amp A SN EN BN EN BN NR NNW WN N 01 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 5 2 Z 7138 Z 7138 3331 saw k 5120 required with inductive load i L t l Diode 1N4007 1N4448 ron 2 _ Partno 268104004 o 201104448 cable plug only till release ASO1 included Capacitor 0 14 F part no 171112104 Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Appertaining function block HB BLD 3 or HB BLD 4 The module is automatically tested during operation The main test routines are Reading back of the output signals The operating point of the 0 signal read back is lt 6 5 V Up to this value the level of the 0 signal may arise in case of a fault and this will not be detected Switching capability of the test signal and cross talking walking bit test 500 mA k short circuit proof max 2 V at 500 mA load Outputs Internal voltage drop All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice Admissible line resistance in out max 11 Q Undervoltage tripping at 16V Output leakage current max 350 uA Output voltage if output is reset max 1 5 V Curr
56. 5 e 26013 2 5 S LJ 3 3 XG 25 6 7444 2 2 RD 1 mm BK 1 mm 0 5 2 RD 0 5 mm 2 GY 0 5 mm 23 8 4 4 6 855 2 s Xe26 E 5 si Z 6018 SH L l amp 4 26011 5 4 6 XG 23 3 2 1 L Supply 24 supply PS1 Fuse and fan monitoring Figure 6 Assembly kit wiring diagram L Fan monitoring Si U Fuse monitoring 106 B 5231 H51q MS 0605 5 Side view 5231 assembly kit H51q MS system Figure 7 Side view 107 B 5231 H51q MS 0605 108 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 B 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 5232 1 2 Assembly Kit H51q H HR System System H51q H HR in 14128 system 5 HU 19 inches with redundant central mod ule power supply 24 5 V power supply monitoring module I O bus connection communica tion modules optional coprocessor modules optional and three fans H51q H B 5232 1 single channel bus redundant central modules 14128 H51q HR B 5232 2 redundant bus redundant central modules PS1 PS2 PS3 CU1 11 12 CM13 14 CM15 CU2 21 22 CM23 CM24 CM25 E 9 E P ERROR 12
57. Central module 2 Central module 1 Rear Central rack XD 1 LI XD 2 xU d F 7546 EE F 7546 s Central rack 5 Unit high MER 17 XD 3 XD 4 ML BV 7032 Front of the I O racks Rear of the I O racks C IO CON rack 4Units high F 7553 Sa XD 2 To 1st I O bus BV 7032 XD 1 1 9 I O rack 4Units high 7553 T xD 2 C To 2nd I O bus BV 7032 XD 1 rack 4Units high 7563 TRES C XD 2 To 1st I O bus M XD 1 CI NT IO CON x rack 4Units high F 7553 xD 2 CA To 2nd I O bus Tu F 7546 Set I O rack address by means of coding switch refer to data sheet F 7553 Figure 5 Construction principle of the I O bus for system H51q HRS max length I O bus 12m max length cable BV 7032 5m cable BV 7032 between subracks max 0 5 m 129 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 4 5 6 Shutdown ways in the H51q HS system In safety related systems an independent 2nd safety shutdown is necessary This is done by the watchdog signal At fault on the CPU or the I O connection the watchdog shuts down all safety related outputs VO bus BS VO bus gt WD WD x BS X INT IN IO CON e e L VO bus WD IO CON e L e L V a VO bus WD B Shutdown via operating system Safety related output module IO CON Coupling module WD
58. Click the button Stop Device in the ComEth control panel to set the F 8628X module into the STOP state green RUN LED blinks Select Extra gt OS Update in the ComEth control panel to open the standard dialog for opening a file Select and load the proper operating system for the upgrade downgrade into the selected F 8628X module see Chapter 10 1 1 and Chapter 10 1 2 If the operating system download of the F 8628X was aborted then the F 8628X must not be withdraw Close the control panel of ComEth and open this again Repeat the previous step to load the operating system of the F 8628X Note After successfully downloading the operating system for the F 8628X the module F 8628X must be rebooted After the reboot the new operating system is started Until then the F 8628X works with the old operating system To reboot the F 8628X Remove and replace the F 8628X module or select the function Extra gt Reboot Device located in the ComEth Control Panel dialog Check the upgrade downgrade Select PADT gt Connect in the control panel to create a new connection to the F 8628X module Select the tab version and check that the OS version displayed is the same as the OS version of the Upgrade Downgrade If a redundant F 8628X module exists follow the same procedure Note The ARP entry must be deleted on the PADT PC if another F 8628X is to be loaded and has the same IP address as the F 8628X loaded immediately befor
59. F 3322 16 15 140 13 O 12 11 10 09 08 07 O 06 05 O 04 O 03 27136 3322 02 01 Z 7136 Front cable plug Only max 10 output modules with nominal load may be used in one I O subrack and not more than half of the possible output loads of 16 x 0 5 8 A may be switched on at the same time The standard fusing of the modules in the I O subrack is 4 A slow blow Outputs 500 mA k short circuit proof Response value for current limiter gt 550 mA Space requirements 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 110 mA 24 VDC 150 mA plus load All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 213 F 3322 0508 Channel Connection Color 1 b2 WH 2 b4 BN 3 b6 GN 4 b8 YE 5 b10 GY 6 b12 PK 7 b14 BU 8 b16 RD Cable 9 b18 BK 16 x 0 5 mm 10 b20 VT 11 b22 WHBN 12 b24 WHGN 13 b26 WHYE 14 b28 WHGY 15 b30 WHPK 16 b32 WHBU L z2 BK Flat pin L 212 RD plug Lead marking of the cable plug 2 8x0 8 mm Z 7136 3322 1mm 750 mm Figure 2 Lead marking of the cable plug 2 7136 3322 C suggested Type 1 part no Figure 3 2 pole connection 214 N4007 26 810 4004 F 3322 0508 Channel Connection Color 1 b2 WHRD x2 WH 2 b4 WHBK x4 BN
60. Note All communication partners must be connected via switches Consider the delay time of the used switches If the delay time is higher than 5 ms Time out for the answer of the communication partners must be configured via switches S1 1 5 on each F 8627X F 8627X 0650 6 6 1 F 8627X redundancy mode is fixed to MONO in the HIPRO S DIRECT operating mode independently of the position of switch 2 2 The HSR cable connection is not required for HIPRO S DIRECT communication The number of HIMA OPC servers 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 or 14 can be set via switches 2 6 to 2 8 see Table 6 Notes for creating HIPRO S DIRECT s user program While creating the user program the following points must be considered In II the resource name must have eight characters the last two of which must be numbers see Chapter 5 1 The exchange of dummy data is not required If more than 31 communication members are required they can be configured in several bus configurations A communication partner must be configured in all bus configurations in which its communication partners are configured see Chapter 6 8 To check the HIPRO S configuration the PES master program should be compiled but not loaded into the master Potential errors can be corrected Via the system variables the diagnosis of the safety related communication can be evalutated in the user program II s function block HK COM 3 can be used to project an
61. The module comprises four identical functions for each a shunt with a subsequent low pass filter The filter is equipped with a triple redundancy So it is ensured that the input signal is continu ously measured even if there is an interruption of a filter resistor In case of an error for the tantalum capacitors increased leakage currents have to be assumed All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 485 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl H 7017 0641 486 With use of the module the process signal can be delayed up to 3 sec onds In case of an error a reduction of the process signal must be consid ered Technical data Shunt 2500 Time constant of the filter t 300 ms Operational limit 1 5 96 Ambient temperature 0 60 C Degree of protection IP 00 Connections and cross sections X1 Inputs Terminal row 8 pole 2 5 mm X2 Outputs Terminal row 8 pole 2 5 mm Mechanical design and dimensions of Terminal Module H 7017 53 mm 61 mm Figure 2 Mechanical design and dimensions of Terminal Module H 7017 Depth 40 mm including terminals Mounting on C rail or DIN rail 35 mm Mounting position horizontal or vertical Assembling distance not required H 7017 0641 Application Sensors with high dynamic signals can cause a channel fault in some cases The module H 7017 with integrated shunt is designed for filtering these interferen
62. ew 3 Connection for external backup battery 12 K 1408 i Power supply monitoring PS3 ee ha e 10 PS2 e X e 51 7131 XG 1 N GND Ps N N PS3 F 7126 F 7126 F7126 N XG 4 1 2 3 XG 5 a 2 3 BK 1 5 mm XG 24 8 9 2 2 2 1 1 1 XG 25 8 9 222 111 ee 51 0 51 0 pe c 1 6A 1 6 2 Fe e RD 1 5 mm 7 FAS e 4 Z 6013 Z 6013 E A gt XG 24 6 7444 o 3 3 XG 25 6 7444 RD 1 mm BK 1 mm RD 1 mm BK 1 mm BK 0 5 RD 0 5 mm XG 21 X 8 4 4 6 555 xe22 8 4 4 6 555 23 8 44 6 5155 o E e n m 2 3 5 0 2 5 0 5 0 Oro Fi ee x Oro Fi e x F S 4A 5 4A L e e fan 26011 26011 26011 e N 9 e XG21 3 2 XG 22 3 2 1 XG 23 3 2 1 L L L L L L supply 24VDC supply 24VDC supply 24VDC supply PS3 supply PS2 supply PS1 Figure 3 Assembly kit wiring diagram B 9361 supply I O rack 1st I O bus supply I O rack 2nd bus RD 1 5 mm 2 GY 0 5 mm TE XG 26 2 6012 amp xG 26 amp Fuse and fan monitoring 147 B 9361 0507 3 Side view B 9361 assembly kit Figure 4 Side view 148 BV 7002 0508 BV 7002 BV 7002 Data connecting cable Connection of the bus terminal H 7505 to LCL printers MT 2030 and MT 2033 Standard length 5 r7
63. f H 7506 Bus PE Terminal e Feeding ADIP t 24V DC H Standard connection PE at HIMA cabinets PE SEE MEME SS EE PE Protection earth PA ue Equipotential bonding Figure 9 Earthing and shielding concept of the system cabinet 8 5 2 Fastening of the Earthing Straps Regard the correct connection of the earthing straps 34 Installation and Connections 8 5 3 8 6 Interconnecting the Earth Terminals of Multiple Switchgear Cabinets The earth must be with less interference voltage as possible If this cannot be achieved a se parate earth for the control has to be installed cabinet framework PA equipotential bonding PE protection earth central earth min 16 mm cross section Figure 10 Connection of earth terminals Shielding of Data Lines in the HIMA Communication Systems Reliable shielding of data lines in HIMA communication systems is achieved by the following measures The connection 1 of the cable shield from the bus subscribers H41q H51q to the bus termi nals H 7506 is established on the bus subscriber s side Via the plug case and the metal front plate a connection is established via the PCB layout to the PE cabinet earth The other side of the cable shield is not connected The connection 2 of the H 7505 interface converter is also established on one side via the plug case The connection to the top hat r
64. 0 25V 10A HIBUS 5 VDC 0 25V 1A Efficiency rate 2 TO 96 Space requirement 4 SU All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 343 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 7130A 0507 344 F 7131 0507 F 7131 F 7131 Power supply monitoring with buffer batteries for PES H51q a o 2 a 4 2 2 Zz or H 5 gee L gt 5 z ds aa au oo 882 22 rr am a 5 9 v 9 6 Ua 29 29 gt Figure 1 F 7131 Power supply monitoring with buffer batteries The module F 7131 monitors the system voltage 5 V generated by the three power supplies max as follows 3 LED displays at the front of the module 3 test bits for the central modules for the diagnostic display and for the operation within the user program for the use within the additional power supply assembly kit 9361 the function of the power supply modules in it could be monitored via three outputs of 24 V PS1 to PS 3 Operating data 5 VDC 25 mA 24 VDC 20 mA Space requirement 4 SU All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 345 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 7131 0507 346 Note Lifetime of the buffer battery without external voltage feeding 1000 days at TA 25 C 200 days
65. 9565 4 031 OL Scee 4 ZZS eve 6 9222 d moym 8 gt Lg 8 935658 4 moyum v 48 2 9222 4 NOM v 48 9 9222 c 1 g S 9222 4 9 9 gt eve v 9222 4 9 925 9222 4 1 9 gt eve 9222 4 1 925 276 L uonejouuy y 20 pue soouejonpul eu SMOUS 9 1 Pa OS jo soouejedeo pue se uejonpur wnwi xe 332 F 6705 0524 F 6705 2 channel converter digital analog safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 e Outputs 0 4 20 mA individual electrical isolation with safe isolation with integrated safety shutdown for source or sink mode 1 Overview WD bus N N AN Er 1 2 Vec 1 pz 27 Vec2 _ Analog p d Pd Analog _ 9101 AA 2 2 7 GND I 3 T T F 6705 ep a le a N N 3 8 S E 2 7 i Eom 7 u 27126 6705 L Lt rg Rg Uot Ua Source mode Sink mode Block diagram Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug 27126 6705 Z 7126
66. Check the DIP switch settings see chapter 4 and compare to the exchanged F 8627X Check whether if the operating system see sticker on the F 8627X supports the used functions Plug the new communication module F 8627X Plug the HSR cable BV 7053 if required Corresponding central module e g F 8650X with operating system Version below 05 34 plug the central module Version beginning with 05 34 push the button Ack to activate the central module see operation system manual Self Education Wait until the LED RUN on the F 8627X lights continiously Plug the communication cable Ethernet Note The ARP entry on the PADT PC must be deleted if the new F 8627X has the same IP address as the old F 8627X If the new F 8627X has the same IP address it cannot be connected to the PADT PC Example Delete the ARP entry of an F 8627X with IP address 192 168 0 67 Start the Dos Shell on the PC Enter the command arp 192 168 0 67 359 F 8627X 0650 3 3 1 3 2 360 Diagnostic LEDs on module front Top row LEDs on module front TX COL FB Operating status ON Send LED of Ethernet communication ON Collision on the Ethernet segment OFF No display always OFF Table 3 Top row LEDs on module front Bottom row LEDs on module front RUN RED ERR Operating status ON OFF Ethernet communicati
67. Lo mL ultiplexer voltage monitoring i i VO bus logic i bus WD DPR Bus CPU Bus Figure 2 Block diagram of the central module F 8652X two clock synchronized microprocessors each microprocessor with an own memory one processor operates with real data and pro gram and the other one with inverted data and program testable hardware comparer for all the external accesses of both microprocessors in case of a fault the watchdog will be set to the safe status and the status of the processor is announced Flash EPROMs of the program memory for the operating system and the user program usable for min 100 000 writing cycles Data memory in SRAM Multiplexer to connect I O bus DPR and redundant CU not used in the H41q MS system Battery backup of the sRAMs via batteries with monitoring 2 interfaces RS 485 with galvanic isolation Transmission rate max 57600 bps Adigit diagnostic display and 2 LEDs for information out of the system I O level and user program Dual Port RAM for fast memory access to the second central module not used in the H41q MS system 4235 H41q MS 0605 2 2 2 3 Hardware clock battery buffered bus logic and connection to the input output modules Watchdog Power supply monitoring testable 5 V system voltage Battery monitoring Coprocessor module F 8621A Right of the central module of the H41q MS PES one coprocessor module can be installed The copr
68. Minimum pick up values Manufacturer Type lan Norgren Herion LPV Pilot valves E P converter 2080 2082 5V 1 2081 2083 10V 2 7 mA 2084 4V 1 6 mA Parker Lucifer 482160 Pilot valves 482870 10 7 V 29 mA Parker Lucifer 492965 13V Directly controlled 10 v 20 mA valves Samson E P binary converter 9 4 V Pilot valves 3701 3962 3963 18 V 1 43 mA 3964 3776 3766 and 3767 Telektron V525011L00 12V 8 mA Pilot valve 1 Hold values F 3335 0622 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 Operating Instructions for F 3335 Application The module can be used to control Ex valves and Ex measuring transmitters 0 4 to 20 mA These valves or transmitters can be installed in potentially explosive atmospheres from Zone 1 on No external voltage may be applied at the outputs N Only these applications are permissible which are described in the data sheet for F 3335 Electrical specifications concerning intrinsic safety For these specifications please refer to the EC prototype test certificate enclosed Assembly and installation The module is mounted in a 19 subrack It must be plugged in vertically The design of the subrack must allow heat dissipation Further information for assembly and installation see HIMA main catalog The H41q and H51q System Families Note The module may not be mounted within a potentially explosive atmo sphere The module is connected to the in
69. Note Beginning with OS version 4 x an F 8627X with the settings Autone gotiation Off 52 3 OFF and full duplex 82 5 ON may not operate with a communication partner e g switch with Autonegotiation acti vated Since these settings are allowed for OS version V3 x and below they must be checked and if necessary adapted when upgrading to OS version V4 x or higher Not observing these settings can lead to com munication problems F 8627X 0650 5 5 1 Ethernet connection via the F 8627X Determining the F 8627X IP address For all OS versions the F 8627X IP address is determined from the resource name of the load ed user program The IP address is composed of the network address and the host address The default network address is 192 168 0 The last byte of the IP address 192 168 0 x is the host address and is calculated as follows For ethernet module channel 1 switch 2 1 ON Host address the last two digits of the resource name 2 1 For ethernet module channel 2 switch 2 1 OFF Host address the last two digits of the resource name 2 2 Note The resource name must have eight characters and the last two char acters Res ID must be numbers IDs allowed DIRECT Mode ON switch 1 7 ON Res ID 1 up to 99 DIRECT Mode OFF switch 1 7 OFF Res ID 1 up to 64 The ethernet module does not change to RUN status if the Res ID gt 64 and the DIRECT Mode is deactivated Import
70. T1 E 01 1805 R07 R11 RIS R15 _ _ lt x sh 55 28 838 58 S9 Sa e 8 8 amp in N 1 Si wc le sies 7 E LI LL 11 H tT Transmitter supply as plug on module a Z 7127 bus av p Block diagram Front cable plug Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Analog input module Input voltage 0 1 06 V approx 6 overflow Digital values 0 mA 0 20 mA 3840 21 3 mA 4095 R Shunt with 50 0 05 96 0 125 W current input T 10 ppm K part no 00 0710500 Input resistance min 1 MQ Time const input filter approx 2 2 ms Conversion time max 4 ms for 8 channels Basis error 0 2 at 25 C of upper range value Operating error 0 4 at 0 60 C of upper range value Electric strength 200 V against Analog GND Ik for PT 100 2 5 mA Space requirement 8 SU Operating data 5 VDC 100 mA 24 VDC 590 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 285 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 6216A 0541 Transmitter supply Output short circuit proof Output voltage 26 V 21 V I gt 1 mA Output current 0 25 mA Load impedance max 900 Short circuit current 30 40 mA Channel Connection Color Channel Connection Color IK for z2 WHRD IK for 72 WHRD PT100 z6 WHBK PT100 z6 W
71. Table 6 Internal fuses I O bus The data connection of the I O level with the central module is established the bus System H51q H The data cable BV 7032 connects the I O buses of central module 1 XD 2 to central module 2 XD 1 bus H51q H 5232 1 Connection Procedure XD 1 to XD 2 Connect with cable BV 7032 XD 4 Remove bus termination module F 7546 and plug it on XD 2 of the last rack then connect cable BV 7032 from XD 1 of the 1st I O rack to empty terminal XD 4 Table 7 I O bus H51q 5232 1 System H51q HR The system H51q HR has a redundant I O bus Each of the central modules has its own I O bus and therefore only the correlated I O subracks The 1st I O bus is assigned to central mod ule 1 and the 2nd I O bus is assigned to central module 2 bus H51q HR B 5232 2 Connection Procedure XD 3 and XD 4 Remove bus termination module F 7546 and plug it on XD 2 of the last rack of both buses XD 4 Plug in cable BV 7032 of the 1st I O rack to the 1st I O bus XD 3 Plug in cable BV 7032 of the 2nd I O rack to the 2nd I O bus Table 8 I O bus H51q HR 5232 2 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 4 5 3 4 5 4 Systems H51q H HR For the I O rack the connection to the I O bus is made via a coupling module F 7553 installed in slot 17 The connection of the bus between the individual subracks is established at the
72. Te e 27546 9 2 2 us za EA Bes 2 Zi g 1 1 8 8 8888 8 a de 8 8 8 B 28888 8 2 8 B 8 6 9 8 8 o 8 GND EA 8 8 2 8 8 i i B 8 8 8 2 898888 6g el 85 8880 8 8 XG 4 m 8 21001 eee EI HMA ws F7546 e xD 4 XG 1le 114 XG 3 X MEN 5 Fo Flo Flo 2 Fi E2 F1 78 910 p p D D T 1314 REO IE Ql 0 12 34112 3412 34 1 2 3 1 2 3 26011 26011 26011 26013 26013 Figure 4 Connections on the rear of the system rack 1412B 4 6 1 Wiring ex works XD 1 Connection data cable BV 7032 not used in single channel system H51q M XD 2 Bus termination module F 7546 plugged Connection data cable BV 7032 XD 3 Connection data cable BV 7032 not used in single channel system H51q M XD 4 Bus termination module F 7546 plugged Connection data cable BV 7032 XG 1 1 3 Watchdog supply for module Z 6013 XG 1 5 7 Watchdog supply for module Z 6013 XG 1 12 13 Connection external buffer battery on module F 7131 XG 1 14 Ground GND for connection external buffer battery XG 4 L for power supply 24V XG 5 Reference potential L Connections of the additional modules see assembly kit wiring diagram XG 24 XG 25 Z 6013 XG 26 Z 6018 4 6 2 Wiring by customer 94 XG 1 2 4 XG 1 9 11 XG 2 XG 3 XG 21 XG 22 XG 23 Watchdog signal for I O modul
73. channel 1 channel 2 depending on F 8628X switch 2 1 left figure only via channel 1 right figure Channel 1 Channel 2 52 1 52 1 OFF 421 F 8628X 0650 5 2 5 3 ELOP II TCP connections to H41q H51q controllers via a redundant network ELOP II PADT PC IP address IP address Ethernet Segment 1 Ethernet Segment 2 2 Channel 1 52 1 The PADT can establish a connection to the H41q H51q systems via ethernet segment 1 or ethernet segment 2 A routing entry for each ethernet module of the PADT is required see also chapter 5 2 6 Others possibilities of the ELOP II TCP wiring shown above not authorized and can cause problems one another using the HSR cable the connection between F 8627X Only communication modules of the same type may be connected to and 8628 is not permitted 422 F 8628X 0650 5 2 6 If ELOP Il TCP communication can not be established First check If II TCP wiring was correctly performed see Chapter 5 2 5 1 to Chapter 5 2 5 3 and the F 865x ID DIP switches 1 7 and the ressources RES ID are identical Note H41q H51q PES can only communicate with a single PADT If the user accesses the same PES using a second PADT he can establish a connection to this PES by repeatedly pushing the button Initialize communication Then the connection to the first PADT is discon
74. on DIN rail 35 mm or on C profile horizontal or vertical not required H 4135 0530 TUV TUV Rheinland Group TUV Industrie Service GmbH Automation Software und Informationstechnologie ZERTIFIKAT Nr No 968 EZ 165 00 04 CERTIFICATE Pr fgegenstand Safely Related Electronic Hersteller HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Product tested System Manufacturer Albert Bassermann Stra e 28 68782 Br hl bei Mannheim Typbezeichnung Modules for Planar F System Verwendungs Safety Related Flectronic Modules for Type designation H4116 SIL 2 AK 4 zweck use in process control Burner 4135 SIL 3 AK 5 6 Intended Management BMS emergency shut 4136 SIL 3 5 6 application down where the safe state is the de energized state Pr fgrundlagen IEC 61508 Part 1 7 2000 Codes and standards forming VDE 0801 1990 and Amendment 1 1994 the basis of testing DIN V 19250 1994 DIN VDE 0116 1989 prEN 50156 1 CDV 2000 EN 60664 1 2003 EN 50178 1997 EN 298 1994 8501 1997 NFPA 8502 1999 EN 61000 6 2 2000 EN 61000 6 4 2002 Pr fungsergebnis The modules are suitable for safety related applications up to SIL 2 Test results or SIL 3 61508 RC 4 5 6 DIN V 19250 Besondere Bedingungen For the use of the Planar F Modules the Safety Manual the User Specific requirements Manual and the actual revision of Ihe official list of product documentation hardware modules and software components released by and
75. two toggle switches to request detailed error information push button ACK resets the error indication in failure stop ACK behaves like restarting the system For further information on the diagnostic display and lists of error codes refer to the documen tation Functions of the operational system BS 41q 51q also on ELOP II CD Notes for start up and maintenance Lifetime of the buffer battery without voltage feeding 1000 days at TA 25 C 200 days at TA 60 C It is recommended to change the buffer battery CPU in operation at the latest after 6 years or with display BATI within three months Lithium battery e g type CR 2477N HIMA part no 44 0000018 Check the bus station no and transmission rate at switch 51 for correct settings Important When upgrading an F 8650 to an F 8650X module the fan concept has also to be changed 444 F 8651X 0606 F 8651X 8651X Central module Use in the PES H51q M HR mH Figure 1 View Microprocessor Clock frequency Memory per microprocessor Operating System User program Data Interfaces Diagnostic display Shutdown on fault Construction Space requirement Operating data All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl Switch S1 Battery F 8651X S INTEL 386EX 32 bits 25 MHz Flash EPROM 1 MB Flash EPROM 1 MB SRAM 1
76. xeed e dn pue ejes eseu x3 y jo Alddns y A zz Jo se eyon xis 0 095 35 02 einjejeduje 1 ay jo JeaJ y ye ejqejoeuuoo suyod Ajddns pue jndjno eu eu suyod Aiddns jewod ejes xis Ajddns euo 1515 oeJqns e ur 10 A quuesseqns siu uoisojdxe ejqedeo ue episjno Ajuo uonejjejsur Jo snjejedde jeoujpeje ue 25 4 02x duis synouro yndyno 9119919 ejes Aj eorsuigu 9225 22 4 y jo eui Jo Jeaul ANSUEPEIEYI Mu 22 0 15810 Od WW Od 15810 9 uano A b AL S OG 15810 eBeyoA 8 ez 1229 4 eui jo 9499 3 2 2 GEL 1 Jojoedeo SAIN
77. 0 5F 50 8 amp amp amp 2 8 Q _ 5 e 2 4O 01 02 0 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 O 27130 3240 12 4 lt so Ta a o a 4 s s g P 2 S S F g E g 3 Sno 7 7 TO 7 E L N 08 O l T J Pk 7 1 T ai A A 7 7 2 A A ZU 1 2 P fA J WA 2 06 O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 05 O A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A O v v y y Yy vyv yY 20 Leo 2 7130 3240 Lp Tb o C8 Front N S x S 8 8 cable plug L 24V L 24V 45V GND bus Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug The module is automatically fully tested during operation for safety related errors The essen tial test procedures are Cross talking of the inputs by walking zero Function of the filter capacitors Function of the module The LEDs of the cable plug are not tested Inputs Input current Switching voltage Switching time Space requirement Operating data All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice digital signals or mechanical contacts input voltage 110 VDC 127 VAC 20 96 1mA approx 45 V approx 50 ms 4 SU 5 VDC 100 mA 24 VDC 120 mA 209 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3240 0524 210
78. 04 O 03 ge sg a6 38 2 HH 20 N Mt Qn 2 N E _ N N N N N _ N 01 01 02 03 04 Z 7134 Z 7134 3332 saw k L Front or suggested cable plug L Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Outputs 2A k short circuit proof Internal voltage drop max 2 V at 2 A load Admissible line resistance in out max 3 6 Undervoltagetripping at lt 16 V Operating point for short circuit current 2 6 5 A Output leakage current max 550 Output voltage if output is reset max 1 5 V Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 70 mA 24 VDC 70 mA plus load All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 233 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3332 0524 Chan Connec Chan Connec Color Color nel tion nel tion 1 b4 WH 1 b4 BN 2 b8 BN Cable x4 WH 3 b24 GN 4 x 2 b8 YE Cable 4 b28 YE 1 5 mm x8 GN 8 x L z2 BK Flat pin oe 1 5 mm L 712 plug x24 GY 28x 4 b28 RD 0 8 mm x28 BU 2 L z2 BK Flat pin q 1imm 212 RD plug 750 mm 2 8 x 0 8 mm Lead marking of the cable plug Lead marking of the cable plug Z 7134 3332 C Z 7134 3332 C P2 1mm 2 pole connection 750 mm Figure 2 Lead markings of the cable plugs 3 01 0 50
79. 12 12 ERROR 12 12 12 e 1 CPU ACK 1 1 9 9 CPU ACKO 1 1 1 9 9 8 0 e 48 oe k F E a 2 2 2 2 8 1 2 2 2 9 9 888 e ev ev 8688 5 0 HIMA HIMA HIMA HIMA ES H ma Hima HIMA wa Hima HIMA F7126 F7126 F7126 F7131 F8651X F8621A F8621A F8621A F8627X F8627X F8651X F8621A F8621A F8621A F8627X F8627X j e e e e 1 3 4 i 7 8 9 14 12 43 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1721 F7126 F7126 F7126 F7131 F8651X F8621A F8621A F8621A F8651X F8621A F8621A F8621A NG1 PS1 NG2 PS2 NG3 PS3 ZB1ICU1 ZB2 CU2 HIMA H5ig HR 5232 2 Option Option Figure 1 Front view 1 Parts of the B 5232 1 2 assembly kit H51q H H51q HR system 1xK 1412B central rack 5 units high 19 inches with cable tray with three fan modules K 9212 hinged receptacle for the label and backplane Z 1001 additional modules on the rear e 3x2Z6011 decoupling and fusing to feed the power supply modules 1xZ6018 fan run monitoring and fuse monitoring e 2x2Z6013 decoupling and fusing of the supply voltage for the WD signal 2xF7546 bus termination module B 5232 1 4xF7546 bus termination module B 5232 2 1xBV 7032 data cable only B 5232 1 includes
80. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 F7126 F7126 F7126 F7131 F8650X F8621A F8621A F8621A NG1 PS1 NG2 PS2 NG3 PS3 ZB1 CU1 N HIMA H51q MS B5231 Option Option Figure 1 Front view 1 Parts of the B 5231 assembly kit H51q MS system 1x 1412B central rack 5 units high 19 inches with cable tray with three fan modules K 9212 hinged receptacle for the label and backplane Z 1001 additional modules on the rear e 3x2Z6011 decoupling and fusing to feed the power supply modules 1xZ6018 anrun monitoring and fuse monitoring e 2x2Z6013 decoupling and fusing of the supply voltage for the WD signal 2xF7546 bus termination module includes the modules 2xF7126 power supply modules 24 V 5 V 10 A PS1 PS2 1xF7131 power supply monitoring module 1xF8650X central module CU1 modules for option separate order 3xF 8621A coprocessor modules CM11 CM13 5xcommunication modules CM11 CM15 1x F 7126 power supply module 24 V 5 V 10 A PS3 Assembly kits to be used for the I O level 9302 I O subrack 4 units high 19 inches B 9361 additional power supply 5 VDC 5 units high 19 inches All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 97 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl B 5231 H51q MS 0605 2 1 98 The max current must be 18 A all I O modules and the modules in the central rack if 3 x F 7126 are used to keep the system in op
81. 5 VDC 150 mA 24 VDC 250 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl Z 7127 6214 Z7127 Front cable plug 271 F 6214 0606 Channel Connection Color Channel Connection Color 1 220 WH 1 220 WH 74 BN z4 BN x4 x4 d4 GN d4 GN 2 z24 YE 2 z24 YE Cable x ad er LiYCY 98 98 12 x 0 25 mm screened 3 z28 BU 3 z28 BU z12 RD z12 RD x12 x12 d12 BK d12 BK 4 z32 VT 4 z32 VT 750 mm z16 WHBN z16 WHBN q 1mm x16 x16 d16 WHGN d16 WHGN Flat pin L d26 BK L d26 BK L plug L d30 RD L d30 RD 2 8 x 0 8 mm Cable screen YEGN Cable screen YEGN 120 mm 2 5 mm Flat pin plug 6 3 x 0 8 mm to be connected to the earth bar under the slot Lead marking cable plug to connect active and Lead marking cable plug to connect voltage via po passive transmitters Z 7127 6214 C ITI U1V Figure 2 Lead marking cable plug z 0 i9 2 2 D o m Switch positions normal operation no fault B line break S short circuit 2 SW Flat pin plug 2 8 x 0 8 mm Figure 3 Design of test plug Z 7205 272 tentiometer and smart transmitters Z 7127 6214 C U5V U10V F 6214 0606 The module is automatically tested during o
82. AgNi hard gold plated lt 250 VAC DC 1 mV lt 4 A gt 1 mA also for safety related use lt 12Afor lt 0 5s lt 4A slow blow delivery state lt 1000 VA cos gt 0 5 non inductive load up to 30 V 120 W 70V lt 40W 125 lt 25W 250 lt 40W approx 1 ms lt 10 cycles per second gt 107 cycles gt 2 5 x 10 cycles at full resistive load and 0 1 cycles per second For SIL 2 applications according to IEC 61508 function checks have to be made within a period of three years offline proof test The replacement of components must be made only by the manufacturer regarding the valid standards and TUV restrictions Mechanical construction and dimensions 6 4116 I7 81 20 Figure 2 Mechanical construction and dimensions Cross section of connecting wires Mounting Mounting position Assembling distance lt 2 5 mm AWG 14 on DIN rail 35 mm or on C profile horizontal or vertical not required H 4116 0530 TUV TUV Rheinland Group TUV Industrie Service GmbH Automation Software und Informationstechnologie ZERTIFIKAT Nr No 968 62 165 00 04 CERTIFICATE Pr fgegenstand Safely Related Electronic Hersteller HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Product tested System Manufacturer Albert Bassermann Stra e 28 68782 Br hl bei Mannheim Typbezeichnung Modules for Planar F System Verwendungs Safety Related Flectronic Modules for Type d
83. Current 12 bit 4095 2 21 3 mA 21 3 mA 20 mA 4 mA 768 3840 4095 Resolution digit Figure 5 Current outputs F 6706 0507 F 6706 F 6706 2 channel converter digital analog e Outputs 0 4 20 mA individual electrical isolation with safe isolation for source or sink mode 1 Overview LI N N N N N N N ee N u m Z 7126 6706 4 2 133 25 g 3358 NEN UE Tp qp ren Z 7126 6706 lea L L 27126 Ugt Ua Source mode Sink mode Front cable plug Block diagram Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Resolution 12 bits 4095 steps 0 0 mA 3840 20 mA 4095 21 3 mA Burden Rg source mode lt 750 Q incl line resistance to the burden pins b8 b6 or b24 b26 sink mode lt Ug 5 V 21 3 mA source voltage pins b4 b6 or b20 b26 Basis error lt 0 1 20 uA at 25 C Operating error lt 0 4 at 0 60 C All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 337 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 6706 0507 Line length max 1000 m observe burden Electric strength 250 V against Analog GND Basis status at plug in 1 lt 20 uA Source voltage Ug sink mode 10 30 V Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 40 mA 24 VDC
84. ER 0000 T0000 dg identit b a entity number BUSCOM address 0100 0 ER 2047 111 ER 0000 0000 bool EV 0000 261 bool 0150 ER 2047 ER 4096 area 1 ER 8191 ER 4096 ER 8191 Figure 19 Mapping of WORD and BOOL variables from export area 0 401 F 8627X 0650 7 3 2 Example 2 In this example the BOOL variables in the export area 0 on the F865x start with the BUSCOM address 0 and mapped to the memory area EV on the F 8627X with the identity number 0 The identity numbers of the BOOL variables in memory area EV are in ascending order up to the last BOOL variable identity number 100 from export area 0 In this example the BOOL variables in export area 1 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 4096 and are mapped to memory area EV on the F 8627X beginning with identity num ber 101 which follows the last identity number of the BOOL variables i e 100 The identity numbers of the BOOL variables in memory area EV are in ascending order up to the last BOOL variable 4196 from export area 1 F 865x F 8627X BUSCOM areas memory area EV Export area EA for Export variables EV ER 0000 Identity number EV 0000 ER 2047 area 0 ER 0000 EV 4096 BUSCOM address ER 2047 ER 4096 ER 8191 ER 4096 area 1 ER 8191 Figure 20 Mapping of BOOL variables from export areas 0 and 1 402 F 8627X 0650 7 3 3 area 0 area
85. Use XG 26 4 5 6 GY Color code gray Table 5 Connection of the monitoring loop Internal fuses GY 0 5 Faston 2 8 x 0 8 max 4 A slow blow Floating NO NC tact for signaling Position Size Dimension HIMA part no Z 6011 4 A slow blow 5 20 57 0174409 Z 6013 1 6 A slow blow 5x 20mm 57 0174169 Table 6 Internal fuses I O bus The data connection of the I O level with the central module is established the I O bus System H51q HS The data cable BV 70 2 XD 1 32 connects the I O buses of central module 1 XD 2 to central module bus H51q HS B 5233 1 Connection Procedure XD 1 to XD 2 Connect with cable BV 7032 XD 4 Remove bus termination module F 7546 and plug it on XD 2 of the last rack then connect cable BV 7032 from XD 1 of the 1st I O rack to empty terminal XD 4 Table 7 I O bus H51q HS B 5233 1 System H51q HRS The system H 51q HRS has a redundant I O bus Each of the central modules has its own I O bus and therefore only the correlated I O subracks The 1st I O bus is assigned to central mod ule 1 and the 2nd bus is assigned to central module 2 bus H51q HRS 5233 2 Connection Procedure XD 3 and XD 4 Remove bus termination module F 7546 and plug it on XD 2 of the last rack of both buses XD 4 Plug in cable BV 7032 of the 1st I O rack to the 1st I O bus X
86. and construction test plug 2 7204 The connections X4 to X32 are only used at special cable connectors Redundant connection for a safety related proximity switch 1k 10k N resistor wired sensor Fail safe proximity switch or d L L L L Mea C uu 2 L eR 201 5 01 7 1 Z 7108 3237 C IR2 1 Z 7108 3237 C2 R1 1 L L Er Lou LU Lila Rn N 5 Ed S 5 9 nel ES MITES MEME 4 i F 3237 T F 3237 i module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 Figure 3 Redundant connection for a safety related proximity switch Cable plug 27108 3237 C R HIMA order no 93 3237 300 F 3237 0622 Connection for proximity switches NAMUR according to EN 60947 5 6 2000 lt gt Proximity switch acc to NAMUR rr L L L a d Vm g0 y l l 201 T 21 Special cable 4 Re L Special cable X4 R L R 23900 L qopneptor ra i a epnnector bi i LIT EL er Tal e HIMA part no N 5 N IN 9 x 000552391 Sy i F 3237 F 3237 module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 R is also necessary mono applications Figure 4 Redundant connection for one proximity switch NAMUR according to E
87. 100 mA eee alee Cable Channel Connection Color LiYCY 1 b8 WH 8 x 0 5 mm b6 BN b4 PK b10 GY 2 b24 GN 750 mm b22 YE q ze mm b20 RD b26 BU Flat pin L b28 BK plug L b32 RD 2 8 x 0 8 mm Cable screen YEGN 120 mm PES q 2 5 mm i Flat pin plug 6 3 x 0 8 mm of the cable screen to be connected to the earth bar under the slot Lead marking cable plug Z 7126 6706 C Note To avoid failures of the module unused channels must be terminated by the bridge b6 b8 for channel 1 or 622 624 for channel 2 Figure 2 Lead marking cable plug 338 F 6706 0507 2 2 1 2 2 Current connection Bipolar current connection Module 1 Channel 1 Module 1 Channel 2 Module 2 Channel 1 Module 2 Channel 2 Yy N NN A A AS to F 6706 e g 8 8 ley 162 R B o o Uget Ugit Uaz Burden may be connected to any potential Channels 1 Sink mode Channels 2 Source mode Figure 3 Bipolar current connection The bipolar current connection serves the output of currents between 20 mA to 20 mA The following must be considered The total current is the addition of the individual currents lot 1 151 Or 62 42 122 The admissible burden resistance remains the same Module 1 generates the positive part and module 2 the negative par
88. 16A 16A for further wiring refer to data sheets of assembly kits central rack L 1 L 2 XG 11 XG 11 7 95 97 es 95 97 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 F7133 27133 ee ele eoe L eje L ee e oe o e Slot 21 5 E 3 ii Slot 20 A A F 3236 LW E front of the subrack b2 x2 b4 6 Slot 13 Slot 11 A 7 Output signal E Input signal sensn d Sensor 2 L 3 Figure 6 Feeding and distribution 24 VDC 5 VDC Distribution The 5 VDC system voltage for the I O subracks is taken from the flat pin plugs of the distribu tors XG 2 and XG 3 on the rear side of the central rack in star shape The power is connected to the I O subracks on the accordingly marked flat pin plugs XG 4 for 5 VDC and XG 12 for GND on the rear side of the I O subracks The power is internally distributed to the I O modules via the bus board Extension of the 5 VDC Power Supply If the power requirements of the 5 V circuits is gt 18 A an additional power supply has to be used For this purpose the B 9361 assembly kit can be used which provides the possibility of applying three power supplies F 7126 together with the monitoring module F 7131 in an addi tional subrack The 5 V output circuits of the additional power supply must not be switched in parallel with the ones from the c
89. 4 x 0 25 mm Pin RS 232 Signal Meaning 1 CF DCD Data could be received 2 BB RxD Receive data from interface to PC 3 BA TxD Send data from PC to interface 4 CD DTR PC ready to receive 5 AB GND Data Ground 6 CC DSR Interface ready to receive 7 A RTS PC indicates that PC would send 8 CF CTS Interface indicates that PC could send 9 CE RI Ring indicator Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 232 9 pole All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 159 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7045 0508 160 BV 7046 0524 BV 7046 BV 7046 Data connecting cable Connection of the bus terminal H 7506 to the interface in the H41q H51q systems redundant systems Standard lengths 2m 4m 25 MIN D plug 25 poles Figure 1 Wiring Note Depending on the used cross section the bus length calculated for the cable BV 7046 is four times the cable length All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 161 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7046 0524 162 Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data
90. 7016 Terminal module 487 7017 Shunt with low pass filter 489 7018 Terminal module 1 493 7020 Terminal Module 497 7021 Power supply 503 7505 Multifunctional interface converter 507 7506 Bus 1 eren 513 RS 485 PCI Interface 515 The H41q and H51q System Families The H41q and H51q System Families Notes to the Manual This manual contains the description of the Programmable Electronic Systems PES of the HIMA system families H41q and H51q Beside this manual and the data sheets you will find further informations to the system families H41q and H51q on the ELOP II CD The first part contains general notes to the PES and is followed by the description of the indi vidual types All the descriptions have the same structure so that they can each be used inde pendently as device documentation The descriptions are followed by general information about both system families e g technical data test standards applications start up and maintenance The second part of the manual contains all data sheets of the systems and the modules Each type of PES has a corresponding assembly kit After the descriptions of the systems and the assembly kits the data sheets are arranged in alphanumerical order acco
91. All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 265 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 5220 0625 266 Resolution 24 Bit Accuracy gate time measuring 0 5 over the complete range pulse measuring without loss of any pulse Gate time 50 ms 0 65 535 Min pulse length 500 ns Line length 500 m screened twisted pair for 100 Space requirement 4SU Operating data 5 VDC 200 mA 24 VDC 500 mA plus load Outputs 2 with integrated safety shutdown 1 output related to each input switchable independent from the PES cycle monitoring of the lines for short circuit and line break SIL 1 SIL2 evaluation only for used signals Allowable line resistance 11 max forward and return line Output power 500 mA 24 VDC e short circuit current 0 75 1 5A line break 0 5 9 5 mA Output leakage current 350 pA max length of the test signal 200 us max Reaction time gate time measuring 50 ms typical depends on application speed of the rotation variation pulse measuring 100 us verified during the safety time of the counter module The error codes for the module are shown in the display of the corresponding central module For further informations see operating system manual The parameterization of the module must also be performed according to the operating system manual for the currently used version of the operating system Especially the
92. Cable type Z 7063 6221 part number 93 6221 105 93 6221 105 F 6221 active Transmitter Terminal Z 7063 6221 een Safety related EEX measuring module He 507 T i MUX Jtem La 1 zo e Ms bg bg E u toa Cable plug measuring module ee E Ue d Figure 3 No supply mono current measuring 312 F 6221 0625 2 1 5 Variant B Mono supply mono current measuring wiring via terminal Mono operation with transmitter supply for channels 1 to 8 part number 93 6221 105 part number 93 3325 101 Cable type Z 7063 6221 ExCn l Z 7025 3325 ExCn 93 3325 101 Z 7025 3325 ExCn F 3325 A Cable plug 93 6221 105 Z 7063 6221 ExCn l Terminal a Not safety related EEX transmitter supply module transm supply module Transmitter 500 418 218 Le L F 6221 Safety related EEX measuring module Cable plug measuring module Figure 4 Mono supply mono current measuring wiring via terminal Note Instead of the F 3325 module a galvanically isolated power supply can be used in this wiring variant It has to be considered that a fault current runs through the monitoring inputs TC1 to TC8 Re 30 kQ which affects the
93. Co KG Box 1261 68777 Br hl N 7 7127 Front cable plug 279 F 6215 0507 Channel Connection Color Channel Connection Color IK for 72 WHRD IK for 22 RDWH PT100 76 WHBK PT100 76 BKWH 1 24 1 74 x4 x4 BN d4 WH d4 WH 2 z8 YE 2 z8 x8 x8 YE d8 GN d8 GN 3 212 3 212 12 12 412 GY d12 GY Cable 4 z16 RD 4 z16 LiYCY x16 x16 RD 20 x 0 25 mm d16 BU d16 BU screened 5 z20 VT 5 z20 x20 x20 VT d20 BK d20 BK 6 724 WHGN 6 724 24 24 WHGN d24 WHBN d24 WHBN 7 228 WHGY 7 728 28 28 WHGY d28 WHYE d28 WHYE 8 232 WHBU 8 232 nee se X32 x32 WHBU d32 WHPK d32 WHPK iere eerie Flat pin L d26 BK L d26 BK plug L d30 RD L d30 RD 172 8 x 0 8 mm Cable screen YEGN Cable screen YEGN 120 mm 2 5 mm Flat pin plug 6 3 x 0 8 mm to be connected to the earth bar under the slot Lead marking cable plug to connect current Lead marking cable plug to connect voltage via voltage Z 7127 6215 C 1 U1V potentiometer Z 7127 6215 C U5V U10V Figure 2 Lead marking cable plug Note to voltage inputs Note It is recommended to short circuit unused voltage inputs in the cable plug or on the appertaining terminal row 280 F 6215 0507 Transmitter supply x4 A a L MEN e 1407127162151 F 6215 802 Po
94. Communication by HIBUS 2 For HIMA system software with flying master capabilities since 1992 refer to planning list and with interface converter since ID no 03 H 7505 0630 pO ISN c 5 2 g snq jene E ad aa ad x _ 9082 H 908 H i 9082 H m 908LH SCH lt NOE aano Y der hho 5 4 sel MENO g NO 9 9 NO o eb 9 9 o gu ce 8B E g 46 gj 46 ub Sg an S ga joris BEBE 220 gj E 9 29 S S S g m S 4 E S D 6 vezb gps z z z uL z z z m z z o a ma M L va a ew Kv zX IX IX eX OX 24 qn eX 2 INE vx zx INE 5 1 1 las nw wm e 2 po o eben gt o Hn a 2 o D c 9 c 0v0L o i 5 g 0 oe 1 902 8 gaS 3 i coo 9 9E o 0902 coc o o
95. IP address PC displays all IP addresses of the available PADT PC network cards Select the IP address of the network card to be used for creating the connection to the F 8627X module 405 F 8627X 0650 406 Note OS versions lt V4 x The PADT PC IP address must be located in the same subnet as the F 8627 module have an IP address in one of the following ranges from 192 168 0 201 to 192 168 0 214 or from 192 168 0 243 to 192 168 0 254 Exception If the PADT PC is simultaneously used as an OPC server and already has own one of the OPC server IP addresses it also can also use this IP address If several network cards are available on the PADT PC a corre sponding routing entry must be set for the network card which is used for connection to the F 8627 OS versions gt V4 x Any free IP address for the PADT may be used If the PADT IP addresses of the PADT and the F 8627X are located in different sub nets a routing entry for the subnet of the F 8627X is required on the PADT PC Select Control Panel in the context menu of the new F 8627X to open the Control Panel Select PADT gt Connect in the control panel to create a connection to the F 8627X module A The next step causes a communication loss if no redundant F 8627X module exists or if the redundant module does not have any connec tion Click the button Stop Device in the ComEth control panel to set the F 8627X mod u
96. Input voltage max input voltage Input current max input current R Shunt with current input Resolution Measurand update Safety time Input resistance 0 5 5 V 7 5V 0 22 mA via shunt 22 mA 4095 30 mA 250 0 05 0 25 W T lt 10 ppm K part no 00 0710251 12 bit mV 0 5 5 V 4095 50 ms lt 450 ms 100 289 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Bruhl F 6217 0606 Time const input filter approx 10 ms Basic error 0 1 96 at 25 C Operating error 0 3 96 at 0 60 C Error limit related on safety 1 Electric strength 200 V against GND Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 80 mA 24 VDC 50 mA Channel Connection Color Channel Connection Color 1 74 1 24 4 4 BN d4 WH d4 WH 2 z8 YE 2 z8 x8 x8 YE d8 GN d8 GN 3 z12 PK 3 z12 x12 x12 PK d12 GY d12 GY 4 z16 RD 4 z16 x16 x16 RD Cabl d16 BU d16 BU pose 5 z20 VT 5 z20 20 x 0 25 mm x20 x20 VT screened d20 BK d20 BK 6 z24 WHGN 6 z24 x24 x24 WHGN d24 WHBN d24 WHBN 7 z28 WHGY 7 z28 x28 x28 WHGY oOo 750 am d28 WHYE d28 WHYE q 1mm 8 732 WHBU 8 732 x32 x32 WHBU d32 WHPK d32 WHPK Flat pin L d26 BK L d26 BK plug 2 8 x L d30 RD L d30 RD 0 8 mm2 Cable screen YEGN Cable screen YEGN 120 mm 2 5 mm d Flat pin plug 6 3 x 0 8 mm to be connected to the earth bar under the slot Lead markin
97. Internal voltage drop Admissible line resistance max lamp load max inductivity max capacity Output leakage current Operating points of the line moinitoring Line short circuit Line break Reaction of the module to errors Module error All outputs are switched off Line error max 200 ys without extension by the function block max 2 V at 500 mA load max 11 10W 1H 100 pF max 500 uA 0 7 0 8A 2 8 mA If an external line break or a short circuit is detected the module only makes an annun ciation to the corresponding central module At a short circuit and an overcurrent gt 2 A per channel the overcurrent tripping is acti vated after 50 ms at the latest For smaller overloads 0 7 A per channel the reaction time can last up to several seconds At line errors the channel of the module is reconnected again after approx 4 5 se conds The error codes for the module are shown in the display of the corresponding central module For further information see operating system manual 257 F 3349 0641 258 Planning notes The function block HB BLD 3 for single channel operation or HB N BLD 4 for redundant operation must be used for all applications with the module In case of line monitoring the appertaining function blocks HB BLD 3 for single chan nel operation or HB BLD 4 for redundant operation enable enhanced configuration possibilities for the module Th
98. Node Id IP Address IP Address Segment 1 Segment 2 107 192 168 0 215 192 168 0 216 108 192 168 0 217 192 168 0 218 109 192 168 0 219 192 168 0 220 110 192 168 0 221 192 168 0 222 111 192 168 0 223 192 168 0 224 112 192 168 0 225 192 168 0 226 113 192 168 0 227 192 168 0 228 114 192 168 0 229 192 168 0 230 115 192 168 0 231 192 168 0 232 116 192 168 0 233 192 168 0 234 117 192 168 0 235 192 168 0 236 118 192 168 0 237 192 168 0 238 119 192 168 0 239 192 168 0 240 120 192 168 0 241 192 168 0 242 Table 15 Mapping of IP addresses to node Id s The IP address must be set in the properties of the network card of the PC running the HIMA OPC server Configuring of the BUSCOM variables in ELOP Il The F 8627X communicates with an OPC server via the BUSCOM variables which must be created in ELOP by the user The BUSCOM variables created in ELOP II can be exported into a text file which in turn can be directly imported into the HIMA OPC server for configuration Address range of the BUSCOM variables The address of the BUSCOM variables are calculated as follows Base address Relative address BUSCOM address Note The base address settings are located in the resource s properties In the BUSCOM tab the user can set the base address separately for Import Export and Import Export however using the standard base address settings is recommended 397 F 8627X 0650 6 9 2 2 6 9 2 3 398 The followin
99. Open the tab PADT PC and select the communication type Ethernet Select one of the IP addresses channel1 or channel2 which are determined by By this the 8627X connected to the PADT is selected Click OK to close the Properties dialog with OK Load the User Program into the H41q H51q Connect the selected F 8627X with the PADT corresponding to a connection from chapter 5 2 5 Note In case of a redundant H41q H51q make sure that the HSR cable BV 7053 is plugged otherwise there is no access available to the redundant central module F 865x Open the context menu of the resource and select Control Panel If a connection has been established OK appears in the field Communication 365 F 8627X 0650 5 2 4 366 Load the user program into the central module s F 865x using Download Reload Start the H419q H51q controller In case of problems with the ELOP II TCP communication see also chapter 5 2 6 Upgrade of a H41q H51q to II TCP without system stop Preconditions A H41q H51q controller may change to II TCP without a system stop if the following con ditions are fulfilled The conditions for a II TCP connection are fullfilled see chapter 5 2 1 A suitable operating system OS version 05 34 or higher must be loaded in the cen tral module s F 865x In the F 865x a user program must exist having a resource name from which the F 8627X can determine an
100. T 7032 Rear of the I O racks CI Sees xD 2 CA SE XD 2 BV 7032 F 7546 Set I O rack address by means of coding switch refer to data sheet F 7553 Figure 4 Construction principle of the I O bus for system H51q HR max length I O bus max length cable BV 7032 cable BV 7032 between subracks 12m 5 m 0 5 m 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 4 6 Connections on the rear 4 6 1 4 6 2 E 7546 7546 Te o2 XG 2 EA Bus 2 202 EA Bue 2 Zu N ee Bl B 5232 2 F 7546 bus termination modules plugged in aif gh bbe B 5232 1 connected by BV 7032 data connecting cable a 488 8 E 8 8 GHD EA 8 5232 1 2 7546 bus termination modules plugged in _ 0 s E5 e o a dggga Seppe amp 8 8 cam 8 21001 _ 7546 3 tos F7546 e XD 4 1 114 3 os e e cw e e gqi mi m e e e e e 34 12 34 2 34 6011 26011 26011 Figure 5 Connections the rear of the system rack 1412 Wiring ex works XD 1 XD 2 XD 3 XD 4 XG 1 1 3 XG 1 5 7 1 12 13 XG 1 14 XG 4 XG 5 B 5232 2 Bus termination module F 7
101. Watchdog X Logic signal Figure 6 Shutdown ways in the H51q HS system 130 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 4 5 7 Shutdown ways in the H51q HRS system In safety related systems an independent 2nd safety shutdown is necessary This is done by the watchdog signal At fault on the CPU or the I O connection the watchdog shuts down all safety related outputs If a central shutdown in system H51q HRS is necessary because of the kind of fault the watchdog signal WD of the corresponding central module is switched off 1st VO bus WD 2nd I O bus WD lt ist VO bus IO CON BS amp 2nd I O bus T e gt WD WD IO CON RE v 1st I O bus WD 2nd VO bus WD BS Shutdown via operating system T Safety related output module 10 CON Coupling module WD Watchdog X Logic signal Figure 7 Shutdown ways in the H51q HRS system 131 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 4 6 Connections on the rear 4 6 1 4 6 2 132 E s F7546 lt XD ER Bus 5233 1 2 F 7546 bus term 1601 5233 2 F 7546 bus termination modules plugged in 5233 1 connected by BV 7032 data connecting cable Z1001 e F7546 lt XD 3 27546 lt xD 4 e G g e F7546 s XD 2 1 ination modules plugged in op
102. Z Transmitter supply FE 2 712716211 C U10V R2 PUES BE i x 5 fem module 1 channel 1 Not to apply in case of single chnl connect Note Regard to the internal resistance Z 7127162171 C2 U10 R1 14 R02 R01 _ x 5 rero j ar module 2 channel 1 of the transmitter voltage supply R01 R02 1 96 kOhm HIMA part no 000710192 Figure 5 Redundant connection via voltage divider fe Transmiter supply Transmiter supply 71216217 5 Z 7127 6217 C U5V Eni er a i 5 x 5 6217 6217 module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 or module 1 channel 2 in case of input voltage feeding 0 5V no resistor Figure 6 Current or voltage connection of redundant transmitters evaluation in the user program Occupation of not used inputs Not used voltage inputs 0 5 V have to be terminated with jumpers Not used current inputs are terminated with the shunt not used voltage inputs 0 10 V with the voltage divider in the cable connector Not used inputs redundant connection Example is for channel 1 Installation of jumpers outside of the cable connectors on the terminals Not to apply in case of single chnl connect H h ea s a Li Li 1 27127162171 27127 6217
103. channel systems this results of course in a shutdown of the plant in redundant systems the system reaction depends on the configuration Coprocessor module F 8621A This module may be installed as an option within the central rack of the H41q H51q system family At H41q system the coprocessor module is buffered via the batteries on the backplane at H51q system this is done by batteries on the F 7131 power supply monitoring module A coprocessor module is needed to hold the master program for controlling the communication between PES systems slaves Startup and Maintenance 9 8 9 8 1 9 8 2 Faults Faults in the Central Device If there are faults in PES with redundant central modules the device without failure takes over the operation without interruption The diagnosis display on the functioning central module in dicates MONO If there is a faulty central module in PES with one central module only this mostly results in a switch off of the PES The diagnosis display of the faulty central module shows STOP If the buttons on the front of the faulty central module are pressed the error codes of the faults are displayed refer to the manual operating system Note Before pushing the Ack button the history of the registered faults Control Panel Display of the error status of the CPU can be saved in a file By pushing the Ack button the RAM memory of the CPU with all saved error messages will be deleted When the prog
104. different I O module types does not matter All modules can be pulled out or inserted during operation see chapter 8 1 1 ATEX Ex i Modules The current Ex i modules exist in two construction models non varnished with PCB covering varnished with PCB covering Any models can be equipped together without free slots between Non varnished Ex i modules may combined together with non Ex i modules without any re strictions Also no free slots are necessary on the left or on the right With varnished Ex i modules with PCB covering the right slot has to remain free in combina tion with non Ex i modules or has to be equipped with a front plate including partition plate M 2214 This is also valid for slot 15 The slot left to the Ex i module may be equipped with any other module Spare slots have to be covered by front plates M 2215 4 spacing units SU or M 2217 8 spacing units SU Usable partition plates and front plates M 2214 Front plate with partition plate 100 x 160 mm M 2215 Front plate 4 SU M 2217 Front plate 8 SU Cable plugs for intrinsically safe circuits are marked and have coded pins so that they can only be plugged into the appropriate modules Safety Related Output Modules for SIL 3 All the safety related output modules meet the requirements of the SIL 3 The safety related output modules have three semiconductors connected in series That means that more than the required second independent compon
105. interface exten sions communication modules power supplies fusing and power distribution as well as input output modules The H51q system has a modular structure A central rack contains the central unit s interface exten sions communication modules monitoring and power supplies and it can have up to 16 associated input output subracks PADT Programming and Debugging Tool Concept of the HIMA PES 2 2 1 Concept of the HIMA PES The HIMA PES of the H41q and H51q system families consist of 19 inches subracks for central devices 5 HU and modules for binary and analog input output signals which are assembled in H51q systems within 19 inches subracks 4 HU The PES use PCs PADTs with the tool ELOP II for programming configuration mon itoring operation and documentation The entry of the user program and the compilation into the machine code is made only on the PC without connected PES To load test and to monitor the PES the PC is connected via a serial interface RS 485 or a bus system to the PES Safety and Availability HIMA PES are designed both for safety related applications up to SIL 3 definition according to IEC 61508 and for high availability Depending on the required safety and availability HIMA PES can be supplied as one channel or two channel redundant devices with the same mod ules in the central device as well as in the input output level Redundant modules increase the availability as in c
106. power supply monitoring module I O bus connection commu nication modules optional coprocessor modules optional and three fans H51q HS B 5233 1 single channel bus redundant central modules H51q HRS B 5233 2 redundant bus redundant central modules TUV certified applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 PS1 eu 4 0 B 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS HIMA F7126 K 1412B PS2 PS3 CU1 11 12 13 14 15 CU2 CM21 22 CM23 CM24 CM25 8 e 12 cu mon laa fa fag 1 ce ACK IO ei jel jel 8 8 cp le le le B g gt 6 d amp 1 i 1 a e e 2 Wi Er E 88 EIE 886 856 Uy U F amp fa E 600 606 2 0 HIMA Hima ES Hus HIMA HIMA F8650X F8621A F8621A 8621 F8627X F8627X 8650 F8621A F8621A F8621A F8627X F8627X je O 11 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 F7131 F7126 NG1 PS1 F7126 F7126 NG2 PS2 NG3 PS3 HIMA H51q HRS 5233 2 a l 9 10 41 42 43 18 1 amp 12 1 18 20 21 F8650X _ F8621A F8621A F8621A F8650X F8621A F8621A F8621A ZB1 CU1 N
107. 1 52 1 2B ENSE Cable 52 1 OFF 367 F 8627X 0650 5 2 5 3 ELOP II TCP connection to H41q H51q controllers via a redundant network ELOP II PADT PC IP address IP address XXX Safeethernet MODBUS TCP Ethernet Segment 1 NEN Ethernet Segment 2 Channel 2 Channel 1 S2 1 ON S2 OFF 52 1 ON Seem Cable Gable The PADT can establish a connection to the H41q H51q systems via ethernet segment 1 or ethernet segment 2 A routing entry for each ethernet module of the PADT is required see also chapter 5 2 6 Others possibilities of the ELOP II TCP wiring shown above are not authorized and can cause problems one another using the HSR cable the connection between F 8627X Only communication modules of the same type may be connected to and F 8628X is not permitted 368 F 8627X 0650 5 2 6 5 2 6 1 If Il TCP communication can not be established First check If II TCP wiring was correctly performed see Chapter 5 2 5 1 to Chapter 5 2 5 3 and the F 865x ID DIP switches 1 7 and the ressources RES ID are identical Note H41q H51q PES can only communicate with a single PADT If the user accesses the same PES using a second PADT he can establish a connection to this PES by repeatedly pushing the button Initialize communication Then the connection to the first PADT is disconnected and the mes sage 2 P
108. 10 XG 11 XG 12 XG 13 XG 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 HIMA H41 Tau 4 Ta 3 4 71009 9 7 65 3 1 XG 21 Z 6018 4 52 89 4 SSF 89 1 SF 1 99 1h 23 456 F1 F1 78 910 2 1 2 1 D LE 1 z 3 1 Ei 3 12 3412 34 Z6013 76013 76011 26011 Figure 3 Connections on the rear of the system rack 1409 Wiring ex works XD 1 1 XG 2 XG 3 4 5 XG 9 XG 10 XG 11 XG 12 XG 13 A Jumper plug Z 6007 Combination of the separated I O buses single channel system H41q MS Supply L for the power supply module Reference pole XG 9 L Potential distributor free disposal of L for the power supply module Watchdog signal not active at H41 MS Watchdog signal from CU1 Watchdog signal for I O modules not active at H41 MS Watchdog signal for I O modules PE earth Connections of the additional modules Z 6011 Z 6018 Z 6013 XG 21 XG 22 XG 23 1 2 Wiring by customer XG 6 1 13 14 1 13 XG 24 XG 25 refer to wiring of the assembly kit wiring diagram for switching off the buffer batteries G1 G2 delivery state buffer batteries are switched off L for modules slots 1 to 13 13 single connections see also connection XG 14 Reference potential L
109. 100 m 12 MBit s 100 m Table 11 Dependencies between cable length and baud rate Cable lengths specified in Table 11 refer to cable type A with the following parameters Surge impedance 135 Q up to 165 Q Capacitance per unit length 30 pF m Loopresistance Core diameter Core cross section 430 110 W km 0 64 mm 0 34 mm F 8628X 0650 8 2 Bus connection and termination The PROFIBUS DP bus termination consists of a resistance combination ensuring a defined zero potential on the bus VP 6 Station 1 Station 2 390 Ohm en Data transmission line RxD TxD P 3 DGND 5 5 DGND 220 6 6 O O 6 Data transmission line RxD TxD N 8 RxD TXD N 8 O 8 RxD TxD N h Shield 390 Ohm Protective earth Protective earth DGND 5 Figure 8 Bus connection and termination pin assignment of the field bus interface 8 3 PROFIBUS DP bus cable In the IEC 61158 two bus cable types are specified Cable type A may be used for all transfer rates up to 12 Mbps Cable type is outdated and should not be used any longer Profibus cable type A By selection of a switch the bus termination resistors can be switched on at each end X1 X2 MIN D plug MIN D plug 9 pole 9 pole Figure 9 PROFIBUS DP bus cable Type A with bus connector Plug Note When using the F 8628X Ethernet interface e g for ELOP II TCP the straight PROFIBUS connector
110. 19183 037 a l O Bus a mE 1 2 4 KJ z N Fd i amp N YH 3 ga Galvanically isolated repeater power supply T IEE 02 VRE agin AIJA 338 01 a 02 03 2 7035 Z 7035 i Front gt lt cable plug Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Nominal output voltage 19 V at 20 mA load current No load voltage 24V Short circuit current 52 mA short circuit proof Vertex 24V 12mA Switching time approx 15 ms Reset time 35 to 270 ms depending on load Ex category 1 2 GD EEx ib Space requirements 4 SU Operating data 24 V 1270 to 500 mA depending on load 5V 60 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 241 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3335 0622 The module must only be operated with forced ventilation fan The fan K 9203 must be installed above the subrack where the 3335 module is plugged in If the 3335 module is operated in an 414 the fan 9212 must be installed directly under the F 3335 module Output character
111. 2 3 M A 3L im lem CLE er Receiver 8L 1 RxDITxD B 4 LITT S3M 2 3 14 Receiver MODE passive si 1234 Pull down 1 2 34 56 L L EL L1 L 2 PE Figure 1 Block diagram Note The signal designations written at X2 are only valid for the HIBUS 2 connection otherwise refer to table operating modes Connectors and setting elements refer also to the block diagram S1 S2 S3 Switches for the bus termination resistors S4 Mode selection switch S5 Switch for signal crossing RS 232 C only Note Adjust the switches 51 55 only under the considering of all ESD pro tection measures The direct touching is only allowed for electrostatic discharged persons X1 MIN D socket 9 poles for HIBUS 2 connection X2 Plug clamp 14 poles for HIBUS 1 connection and L L supply X3 MIN D socket 25 pole for RS 232 C and TTY connection X4 Plug clamp 6 poles for L L supply All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 503 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl H 7505 0630 Note Choice of power supply connection on X2 or X4 depending on the mounting position Operating data 24 VDC 120 mA Note With exceeding the ambient temperature of 50 C the transparent cover will be deformed This will not influence the function of the
112. 24 VDC 124 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 4 1 4 Supply 5 VDC The 5 VDC power supply does not have to be wired extra as it is already part of the installation To supply the I O racks the 5 V power supply with corresponding GND is available at the rear side of the central rack The 5 VDC power and GND are connected starlike with each 2 wires to the potential distributor The 5 VDC power needed for the microprocessor system and as control current for the I O modules is generated from the 24 VDC power of the system via 24 VDC 5 VDC power sup ply modules type F 7126 One central rack can be equipped with a maximum of 3 power supply modules The power supply modules are switched in parallel One or two power supply mod ules are usually able to supply the PES A further power supply module is used to increase availability Note At planning the load of the power supply units have to be calculated The 5 VDC output voltage of the power supply module for the CPU I O and the interfaces are monitored by the power supply monitoring module F 7131 checking undervoltage over voltage or failure In case of a faulty power supply module the operating system of the CPU informs the user pro gram via a system variable In case of a 5 VDC system power failure a lithium battery on the central module buffers the hardware clock and sRAM on the central module The sRAM memory of the coprocessor module is buffered via two lithium batter
113. 24 VDC 90 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 185 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3224A 0622 Channel Connection Color 1 d2 WH d4 BN dio YE Cable 3 920 GY 8 x 0 5 mm d22 PK 4 d26 BU d28 RD Lead marking for cable plug Z 7114 3224A C gray or Z 7114 3224A ExC blue Figure 2 Lead marking for cable plug Function table Input Input current LED Control channel Line break monitoring d4 d2 74 72 1 5 for channel 1 410 d8 lg in mA z10 z8 2 6 for channel 2 d22 d20 222 720 3 7 for channel 3 428 426 228 226 4 8 for channel 4 lt gt 21 signal signal i gt lt 1 2 L signal H signal TL M 186 F 3224A 0622 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 Operating Instructions Application The module is used to evaluate proximity switches according to NAMUR or contacts in intrin sically safe circuits Ex i The proximity switches or contacts can be installed in hazardous areas from zone 0 on Note The connection of a mechanical sensor requires a resistor 8 2 to 15 connected in parallel directly at the sensor to avoid an input line break signal The module may not be mounted in hazardous areas The input channels may not be exposed to external voltage Modules which were operated in general electrical
114. 3 Concepts of the Safety Switch Off at H41q Definition Double fault fault within an output channel and the switch off electronic part of this testable output module Abbreviations used in the table CU Central Module bus Input output bus WD Watchdog signal More explanations on the following page The H41q System Family 3 3 3 3 1 Explanations to the table Parameter Display only Switch off by means of the integrated safety shutdown inside the output amplifier If not possi ble then shutdown of the watchdog signal in the I O rack by means of the coupling module only in systems H51q No shutdown of the watchdog signal of the appertaining central unit This parameter is permissible only up to SIL 1 Parameter Normal operation Reaction as with parameter Display only additionally switch off of the watchdog signal of the appertaining central unit if necessary Parameterization required from SIL 2 Normal and re commended parameter Parameter Emergency off Switch off of the watchdog signal of the appertaining central unit and thus shutdown of the out put amplifiers in case of a fault in the output module The watchdog signal is not switched off at faults in the input modules Module switch off A faulty testable output module with integrated safety shutdown will be switched automatically to the safe de energized status Group shutdown If it is requested a group shutdown may be defi
115. 4 Damped oscillatory wave immunity test 1 kV IEC EN 61000 4 12 IEC EN 61000 6 2 Noise Immunity Tests IEC EN 61000 4 6 Radio frequency common mode 10 V 150 kHz 80 MHz AM IEC EN 61000 4 3 900 MHz pulses IEC EN 61000 4 5 Surge 1 kV 0 5 kV IEC EN 61000 6 4 Noise Emission Tests EN 50011 Class A radiated conducted Emission test All modules of the systems H41q and H51q meet the requirements of the EMC directive of the European Union and have the CE sign With interferences exceeding the limits mentioned above all the systems have a safety related reaction Operating Conditions 6 4 Voltage Supply The most important tests and limit values for the voltage supply of the equipment are listed in the following table IEC EN 61131 2 Verification of DC Power Supply Characteristics Chapter 6 3 7 The power supply must meet alternatively the following standards IEC EN 61131 2 or SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage EN 60950 or PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage EN 60742 The fusing of the control devices must be in accordance to the statements of this manual 6 3 7 1 1 Voltage range test 24 VDC 20 25 19 2 V 30 0 V 6 3 7 2 1 Momentary interruption immunity test DC PS 2 10 ms 6 3 7 4 1 Reversal of DC power supply polarity test 6 3 7 5 1 Backup duration withstand test Test B 1000 h Lithium battery is u
116. 4 import windows determines the length of the OUT PUT telegram The user data length of INPUT and OUTPUT together must not exceed 256 bytes With this e g 2048 Boolean variables may be transmitted In accordance with the limit value specified in the PROFIBUS EN 50170 standard a maximum of 240 bytes may be configured for INPUT or OUTPUT i e up to 1920 Boolean variables in one direction The start identity number must have a value valid for the corresponding data pool of the commu nication module i e a variable with this identity number must have been defined in this data pool Also beginning with this variable a number of further variables must have been defined A window may have a sequence of variables of different types i e both Bool and Word Data are only compressed for the variables within one window If a window definition is not used 0 must be entered for the start identification number and the number of variables Addressing example Communication module PROFIBUS DP INPUT telegram Data pool byte offset Data pool 1 for Export variables EV Data pool _ 1st window 20 Word variables from word EV 0000 word identity number 1 on address PROFIBUS Word from offset 0 to 39 uncompressed 150 151 EV 0000 bool L 1 PROFIBUS Bool 58 from offset 40 to 58 compressed 351 2nd window 150 Boolean variables from identity number 200 on address Figure 11
117. 5 2 HIMA OPC Server IP address 192 168 0 216 IP address 192 168 0 215 Segment 2 Resource name MT200_33 Resource name MT200_33 Left F 8627 S2 1 ON Right F 8627 S2 1 OFF Host address 192 168 0 67 Host address 192 168 0 68 Figure 5 Redundant connection via 2 segments For a truly redundant connection an own network segment is required for each channel All F 8625 27 and PC network cards with odd IP addresses e g 192 168 0 67 must be at tached to segment 1 and all F 8625 27 with even IP addresses to segment 2 see Chapter 5 1 Switch Ethernet Segment 2 Switch Ethernet Segment 1 Figure 6 Possible PES connections 374 F 8627X 0650 Figure 6 shows all possible PES connections Left Single PES on one Ethernet segment each switch is an independent Ethernet segment Centre Single PES with two communication modules on both Ethernet segments Right PES with two communication modules on both Ethernet segments Figure 7 Interconnection of two PES When two PES are interconnected together Figure 7 no switch is required Both 10BaseT or 100BaseTX interfaces of the communication modules are directly connected by a special cross over cable with twisted wires Bridge HIMA OPC Server Router Switch Fiber optical cable max 3000 m With Singlemode Tranceiver distances of approx 20 000 m are realizable max
118. 6 Counting range 0 Hz to 1 MHz for pulse counting gate time monitoring via adjustable gate time with recognition of rotation direction Fastswitching output independent from the PES cycle time The module records fast pulses for use in HIMA PES SM gt 5V 5V lt 12W power 8 Jre y g sg ag eeg ov Lo d Hl JL L inr abd _ _ NR mom Dist m nh hh h a 2 7152 5220 FE ns T E EL p EL t 11 t 1 ese 5 Fags Sud S a 38 888 ssa 58 F HF F de 14441 222400 8 2 V it dx N 7 1 A 1 2 22 2 e Output Direction Counter Counter Direction Output 4 N v v Decoder uP1 uP2 7 uP3 4 7 5220 02 amp 01 3 8 V amp 8 48 bus 2 7152 5V GND Front cable plug Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Appertaining function block HF CNT 3 Pulse input e 1 signal 5 VDC switching level high 3 V 6 mA 24 VDC max 8 mA Counting frequency max 1 MHz 5 VDC Edge steepness min 1 V us Proximity switch input Counting frequency max 50 kHz
119. All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 165 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7049 0508 x3 9 1 FO Central Central module module Type of used cable LifYCY 3 x 2 x 0 08 mm Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole 166 BV 7050 0508 BV 7050 BV 7050 Data connecting cable Connection of interfaces in the single channel HIMA PES H 7505 inclusive to optical fibre FO or HIMA PES to PC 485 PCI interface card Standard length 0 5 m 4 m bigger lengths on request Screen PC 485 or FO 2 MIN D plug 9 pole MIN D plug 9 pole Figure 1 Wiring Type of used cable LifYCY 3 x 2 x 0 08 mm All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 167 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7050 0508 168 Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of po
120. All touchable plates of the 19 inches HIMA components e g blind plates and subracks are electrically conductive passivated ESD protection ESD Electrostatic Discharge The safe electrical connection between built in components such as subracks and the cabinet is made via captive nuts with claws The claws penetrate the surface of the swing frame 1 and thus guarantee a safe electrical contact The screws and washers used are made of high grade steel to avoid electrical corrosion 2 The parts of the cabinet framework 3 are welded together and therefore they make up an electrically conductive constructional element Swing frame door mounting rails and mounting plates if existing are conductively connected to the cabinet framework via short earthing straps with cross section of 16 mm 25 mm The earthing straps are covered with a yel low green identifying sheath 5 The top plate is screwed to the cabinet framework via four lifting eyes Side panels and rear panel are conductively connected via earthing clamps 7 see Figure 8 to the cabinet frame work as well as the bottom plate via screws 2 SS KON gt 2 223 Figure 7 Earthing connections for subracks As a standard two M 2500 4 bus bars are already installed in the cabinet and are connected to the cabinet framework via 25 mm earthing straps 5 Additionally the bus bars 4 can be used for poten
121. B 5231 H51q MS 0605 4 1 4 4 2 4 3 Supply 5 VDC The 5 VDC power supply does not have to be wired extra as it is already part of the installation To supply the I O racks the 5 V power supply with corresponding GND is available at the rear side of the central rack The 5 VDC power and GND are connected starlike with each 2 wires to the potential distributor The 5 VDC power needed for the microprocessor system and as control current for the I O modules is generated from the 24 VDC power of the system via 24 VDC 5 VDC power sup ply modules type F 7126 One central rack can be equipped with a maximum of 3 power supply modules The power supply modules are switched in parallel One or two power supply mod ules are usually able to supply the PES A further power supply module is used to increase availability Note At planning the load of the power supply units have to be calculated The 5 VDC output voltage of the power supply module for the CPU I O and the interfaces are monitored by the power supply monitoring module F 7131 checking undervoltage over voltage or failure In case of a faulty power supply module the operating system of the CPU informs the user pro gram via a system variable In case of a 5 VDC system power failure a lithium battery on the central module buffers the hardware clock and sRAM on the central module The sRAM memory of the coprocessor module is buffered via two lithium batteries on the p
122. B 5232 1 5 mm GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm Supply I O rack 1st I O bus Supply I O rack 2 2nd I O bus RD 1 5 mm XG 24 8 9 2223 at XG 25 8 9 222 111 eo 2 be L in e L L si U Si 1 6 1 6 2 ee RD 1 5 mm ee e Z 6013 26013 o eo 3 3 XG 24 6 7444 o 3 3 XG 25 6 7444 RD1 mm BK1 mm RD 1 mm BK1 mm 0 5 mm RD 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm XG21 4 4 4 6 555 XG 22 8 4 4 6 5 5 E X623 8 4 4 6 555 12 3 3 XG 26 ee E ee E e ee e E E 31 0 e 2 e 5 0 o 3 e 31 0 o e L 26018 7 5 5 amp 4 e e e 76011 oN 26011 90 26011 eR e e e e D 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 XG 26 7 li a N ptu XG21 3 2 XG 22 3 2 1 XG 23 1 lt Ife L L L L L L Fan J Fuse and fan Supply 24 VDC Supply 24VDC Supply 24 VDC K 9212 monitoring supply PS3 supply PS2 Figure 6 Assembly kit wiring diagram L Fan monitoring Si U Fuse monitoring 118 supply PS1 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 5 Side view B 5232 1 2 assembly kit H51q H HR system Figure 7 Side view 119 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 120 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 5233 1 2 Assembly Kit H51q HS HRS System System H51q HS HRS 1412B system subrack 5 HU 19 inches with redundant central module power supply 24 5 V
123. C U5V R2 N C2 U5V R1 i F 6217 d i F 6217 1 module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 Figure 7 Voltage input 0 5 V 292 F 6217 0606 Notes to the safety related operation and use Screened cables have to be used for the field input circuits twisted cables are recommended If it is sure that the environment of the transmitter up to the module is free from interferences and the distance is relatively short e g inside a cabinet then the cabling can be performed without screened cables or twisted cables However the interference immunity of the analog inputs can only be achieved by using screened cables Planning notes for ELOP Il For each input channel of the module exists an analog input value and an appertaining channel fault bit With activated channel fault bit a safety related reaction has to be programmed in II related to the corresponding analog input Recommendations for the use of the module according to IEC 61508 SIL 3 Cables for power supply shall be locally separated from the input circuits Application of a suitable earthing must be regarded Measures against rising of the temperature have to be taken outside of the module e g fans in the cabinet Recording events in a logbook for operation and maintenance A maintenance of the module is not required In case of fault there is a switch off The failed module must be replaced Z 7128 Cable plug with transmitter supply For the
124. Connection of smart transmitters F 6215 0507 F 6215 F 6215 8 channel analog input module for voltage inputs 0 1 5 10 V Pt 100 inputs current inputs 0 4 20 mA with safe isolation to the plant and electric isolation between the inputs Resolution 12 bits rii transmitter supply Z 7127 6215 FB SNS R e l I for Priog 7 A 6 6 the Che 454 Che Che ot R01 R03 R05 R07 9 R11 R13 R15 T T CIT u xo 99 28 58 AY Ba co 8 N N N N N N ZN MY 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 MUX Ce VO bus Block diagram Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Input voltage Digital values R Shunt with current input Input resistance Time const input filter Conversion time Basis error Operating error Electric strength Ik for PT 100 Space requirement Operating data 0 1 06 V appr 6 overflow 0 mV 0 1 V 3840 21 3 mA 4095 50 0 05 0 125 W T lt 10 ppm K part no 00 0710500 min 1 MQ approx 2 2 ms max 4 ms for 8 channels 0 1 at 25 C 0 3 at 0 60 C 200 V against Analog GND 2 5 mA 4 SU 5 VDC 100 mA 24 VDC 140 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice Paul Hildebrandt GmbH
125. DPR Bus CPU Bus Rear side bus plane Figure 2 Block diagram of the central module F 8651X Microprocessor Flash EPROMs of the program memory for the operating system and the user program usable for min 100 000 writing cycles Data memory in sRAM Dual Port RAM for fast memory access to the second central module 2interfaces RS 485 with galvanic isolation Transmission rate max 57600 bps Adigit diagnostic display and 2 LEDs for information out of the system I O level and user program Power supply monitoring 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 2 2 2 3 bus logic for the connection to the input output modules Hardware clock battery buffered Watchdog Battery backup of the sRAMs via batteries on the central module with monitoring Coprocessor module F 8621A Right of each installed central module of the H51q H HR PES up to three coprocessor modules can be installed The coprocessor module mainly contains Microprocessor HD 64180 with a clock frequency of 10 MHz Operating system EPROM RAM for a PLC master project Note The RAM for the master project is buffered via the batteries on the power supply monitoring module F 7131 Two interfaces RS 485 via communication software function block setting of the baud rate up to 57600 bps Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Communication modules F 8627 F 8628 F 8627X F 8628X
126. Delivery state 2 7 e e Figure 1 Block diagram The module is tested according to IEC 61508 SIL 2 EN 298 DIN VDE 0116 EN 50156 NFPA 8501 NFPA 8502 EN 60664 DIN EN 50178 VDE 0160 EN 6100 6 2 EN 50082 2 EN 61000 6 4 DIN V 19250 RC 1 4 DIN VDE 0801 incl A1 Due to its low current consumption the relay can be controlled directly from the outputs of safe ty related modules with an output load of at least 20 F The output signal of the module then may not be loaded additionally An LED indicates the relay coil energized Input voltage 24 VDC 15 20 96 Current consumption 15 mA Switching time approx 7 ms Reset time approx 5 ms Output 1 floating changeover contact sealed Relay data cf reverse Ambient conditions 25 50 C Degree of protection IP 20 according to IEC EN 60529 VDE 0470 part 1 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 457 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl H 4116 0530 458 The relay has a safe isolation according to DIN EN 50178 between the output contact and the input The clearance in air and the creepage distance are dimensioned for overvoltage class to 300 V Relay data Contact material Switching voltage Switching current Inrush peak current Fusing Switching capacity AC Switching capacity DC Bounce time Switching frequency Life mechanical electrical Restrictions
127. Example of address mapping for PROFIBUS DP export variables and for import variables accordingly The two export variable windows from data pool 1 are placed transparently onto the PROFI BUS DP The PROFIBUS DP INPUT telegram has a user data length of 59 bytes 0 to 58 It has the following structure e 1st window start of the variables beginning with identity 1 1 dec 0001 hex in big endian format number of variables 20 20 dec 0014 hex From identity no 1 to 20 there are Word variables which cannot be compressed Each word variable requires 2 bytes A user data length of 40 bytes is generated byte 0 to 39 F 8628X 0650 2nd window start of the variables beginning with identity no 200 200 dec 00C8 hex number of variables 150 150 dec 0096 hex From identity no 200 to 349 there are Boolean variables which can be compressed into bytes 150 8 18 75 A user data length of 19 bytes is generated offset by 1st window bytes 40 to 58 Parameter Data Description All Parameter Data in hex description 0 1 parameter data byte 1 window 000 begin of the Word variables in __ 2 parameter data byte 2 Sparameterdatabyte 3 __ 4 parameter data byte M Sparameter data byte 2 window 5 __ parameter data byte 6 __ 7 parameter data byte 8 9 parameter data byte 9 iO parameter data byte 10 11 parameter data byte 12 __ 13 parameter data Cancel
128. F 7126 has failed Values of the current requirement 5 VDC refer to the data sheets Note Operating system resource type in ELOP Il The assembly kit is usable since operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 Resource type ELOP II H51qe HS H51qe HRS Modules Central module F 8650X The central module for safety related applications with TUV certificate of the PES H51q HS HRS contains the essential functions demonstrated in the block diagram of the central module Displ Interfaces Front panel Isp ays Interrogation Fail safe Watchdog Inverted memory Up Multiplexer voltage monitoring bus logic Rear side bus plane bus WD DPR Bus CPU Bus Figure 2 Block diagram of the central module F 8650X two clock synchronized microprocessors each microprocessor with an own memory one processor operates with real data and pro gram and the other one with inverted data and program testable hardware comparer for all the external accesses of both microprocessors in case of a fault the watchdog will be set to the safe status and the sta tus of the processor is announced Flash EPROMs of the program memory for the operating system and the user program usable for min 100 000 writing cycles Data memory in sRAM 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 2 2 2 3 Multiplexer to connect I O bus DPR and redundant CU Battery backup of the sRAMs via batteries wit
129. GmbH Co A Bassermann Stra e 28 D 68782 Br hl 113 G EEx nA T4 X 25 lt lt 70 7013 Special conditions must be regarded H 7013 0548 Konformitatserklarung Declaration of Conformity Wir We HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Albert Bassermann Stra e 28 68782 Br hl Postfach 1261 68777 Br hl Telefon 0 62 02 709 0 erkl ren in alleiniger Verantwortung dass die Produkte declare under our sole responsibility that the products QF H 7013 Netzfilter 24 VDC QF H 7021 Netzfilter 48 VDC auf die sich diese Erkl rung bezieht mit den folgenden Normen bereinstimmt to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standards EN 61000 6 4 08 02 EN 61000 6 2 08 02 EN 61131 2 2003 EN 60079 15 2003 Elektrische Betriebsmittel f r gasexplosionsgef hrdete Breiche Teil 15 Z ndschutzart n Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres Part 15 Type of protection n Gem den Bestimmungen der Richtlinien Following the provisions of Directives EMV Richtlinie 89 336 EWG Ex Richtlinie 94 9 EG Bruhl den 22 ia 2005 LA Prof Dr m B rcs k J rgen H lzel Bereichsleiter ntwicklung Leiter Vorentwicklung und Qualitatswesen Vice President Development Lead Engineer Predevelopment and Quality Assurance 471 H 7013 0548 472 H 7014 0507 H 7014 Electronic fuses fo
130. H41q HS 19 inches 5 HU System H41q HRS 19 inches 5 HU System H51q M central rack 19 inches 5 HU System H51q MS central rack 19 inches 5 HU System H51q H central rack 19 inch 5 HU System H51q HR central rack 19 inches 5 HU System H51q HS central rack 19 inches 5 HU System H51q HRS central rack 19 inches 5 HU for all systems H51q subrack 19 inches 4 HU for all systems H51q additional power supply 5 VDC 19 inches 5 HU 10 2 Data Connection Cables BV 7002 BV 7032 BV 7040 H 7505 lt gt printer with serial interface Data cable of the I O bus H 7506 lt gt H 41q H51q M MS single channel H 7505 lt gt H 7506 45 Data Sheets BV 7043 419 514 lt gt V 24 without additional power supply BV 7044 V 24 lt gt H 7505 BV 7045 HIKA connection cable BV 7046 7506 lt gt H41q H51q redundant BV 7048 7505 lt gt H41q H51q redundant BV 7049 H41q H51q redundant lt gt optical fibre BV 7050 H41q H51q single channel lt gt optical fibre BV 7051 H 7506 lt gt optical fibre BV 7052 H 7505 lt gt HIMA systems single channel BV 7053 HSR cable for redundant communication module F 8627 F 8627 X BV 7055 H 7506 lt gt Edgeport 2i USB BV 7201 H 7015A lt gt H 7018 connection cable terminal module 10 3 Central Modules F 8650E H51q MS HS HRS SIL 3 1002D processor F 8650X 8651E H51q M H HR 8651X F 8652E H41q MS HS H
131. I O subrack XG 25 2 L RD 1 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply fuse monitoring and IO CON in I O subrack for 2nd I O bus B 5222 2 B 5223 2 B 5232 2 and B 5233 2 only RD Color code red Table 3 Output 24 VDC B 9361 0507 2 4 2 5 2 6 Connection of the monitoring loop for fuses and fans Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 26 4 5 6 0 5 mm Faston 2 8 x 0 8 GY Color code gray max 4 A slow blow Table 4 Connection of the monitoring loop for fuses and fans Internal fuses Floating NO NC contact for sig naling Position Size Dimension HIMA part no Z 6011 4 A slow blow 5x20 mm 57 0174409 Z 6013 1 6 A slow blow 5x20 mm 57 0174169 Table 5 Internal fuses Earthing A With installation of the assembly kit a conductive connection to the frame or a separate earth connection has to be installed according to the EMC requirements Connection PE earth Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm Pay attention for the manufacturers information concerning detaching and replugging of the Faston connectors 145 B 9361 0507 2 7 2 7 1 2 7 2 146 Connections on the rear o o rg rg vi vi 1 Fg 11 vi 1 Li rt
132. IP address On all F 865x the same number for the ID must be set which is used as Res ID in the resources name For the reading of the ID see manual functions of the opera ting system BS41q9 H51q HI 800 105 Installation of the F 8627X module For installation of the F 8627X Consider chapter 2 4 On all F 8627X activate the ID IP switch 1 6 ON Set channel 1 or channel 2 on the Ethernet module F 8627X see chapter 5 1 Set the redundant channel if available on the redundant Ethernet module F 8627X see chapter 5 1 Replace the existing modules F 8627 by F 8627X by which the ELOP II TCP con nection is carried out If no F 8627X modules were used previously then plug the F 8627X into the specified module slot Perform the following Settings in ELOP Il Open the resource context menu and select Properties Open the tab PADT PC and select the communication type Ethernet Select one of the IP addresses channel or channel2 that are determined by ELOP Il By this the F 8627X connected to the PADT is selected Click OK to close the Properties dialog with OK Load the User Program into the H41q H51q Connect the selected F 8627X to the PADT corresponding to a wiring from chapter 5 2 5 Note In case of a redundant H41q H51q make sure that the HSR cable BV 7053 is plugged otherwise no access possible to the redundant central module F 865x Open the context menu of the resource and select control panel If
133. J Su 5 0 x 05 998 4 998 4 998 4 X984 d gt 4 Xy98 4 Xy98 4 xy98 4 v z98 4 SU v 298 4 viz983 OE 10298 4 10298 4 02982 1083 5 Y SW N b LSH sun LSH SUHSHAHHPILEH D c SW W lb LrH SIN W b L7H SYH SH YH H b LpH e 1 ductors may only be used in the highest bus level no transmission of the status signal The coupling of a device with RS 232C interface is only possible with the correct operating of the status signal 508 H 7506 0630 H 7506 H 7506 Bus terminal for the installation of HIBUS 2 RS 485 000000000990 0000000000000 Figure 1 Wiring diagram top view front view The bus terminal consists of a 25 pole Min D socket to connect single channel PES and re dundant PES H41q H51q via the data cables BV 7040 or BV 7046 The connections for the 2 wire bus are made by means of two 6 pole terminal blocks By se lection of two switches the bus terminating resistors can be switched on at each end of the 2 wire bus If the bus terminal block H 7506 is used at the end of the 2 wire bus then the terminal block X2 cannot be connected Use of the bus terminal H 7506 see the following application and the applications in data sheet H 7505 Mechanical design Terminal box for top hat profile rail according to EN 50022 two 6 pole terminal blocks for cross sections up to 2 5 mm one 25 pole Min D
134. O subrack The used lines or cable must fulfill following insulation test voltages e Intrinsically safe lines gt 1000 VAC e Non intrinsically safe lines gt 1500 VAC The ends of stranded lines must be finished with wire end ferrules The terminals must be able to connect the used conductor cross sections General application notes Not used input channels must be short circuited In the case of a fault the output VALUE INT of the software function block HF TMP 3 gets the value 0 without declaration of underflow or overflow In this case the output of the software function block CHANNEL ERROR BOOL must be evaluated in the user program For safety integrity level SIL 3 the reference temperature must be used out of the user program or out of the compare of two reference temperatures from two modules The temperature of the thermocouple in applications with SIL 3 must be calculated out of two thermocouples The parameterization of the module must be performed according to the operating system manual for the currently used version of the operating system Especially the chapter about the noise blanking has to be regarded Setting Safety time gt 3 x watchdog time Start up Before commissioning the installation must be approved by an expert for intrinsically safe func tions particularly checking the power supply connections and the connections of intrinsically safe circuits Operation The error codes f
135. ON Bus termination activated 4 OFF 5 ON 6 ON 7 OFF not used 8 OFF not used Table 3 Switch positions 8 position DIP switch For the bus termination on H 7505 a 5 V supply is essential from the unit connected to X3 So the bus termination on the converter Edgeport 2i must be activated if it is connected to the end of the bus As the supply of the internal bus termination is made via the USB inter face there exists no termination if the PC is removed or switched off So the connection of the converter to the end of a bus is only admissi ble if it is exclusively a programming bus 178 BV 7201 0508 BV 7201 BV 7201 Connection cable for the connection plug amp play between Terminal Module H 7015 and Terminal Module H 7016 from HIMA or compatible module from other manufacturers 21x2x0 34 90 9906000 Color code DIN 47100 elco 8016 female elco 8016 female code 1 1 code 1 1 A B D E F H J K L M N R 5 T u w x a b d e f h J k y Figure 1 Connection cable BV 7201 In the data sheet H 7015A three applications are described where the connection cable BV 7201 is required All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 179 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7201 0508 180 F 3221 0524 F 3221 F 3221 16 input
136. OPC communication is only possible with a HIMA OPC server F 8627X configuration The F 8627X is configured in ELOP II and via DIP switches In Il the resource name under must have eight characters the last two of which must be numbers The numbers must be unique to avoid collisions while determining the com munication module s IP address see Chapter 5 1 While configuring the communication with a HIMA OPC server pay particular attention to the Passive mode see Chapter 6 9 1 1 to Chapter 6 9 1 3 Passive mode disabled switch S1 8 ON The token passing between the F 8627X and the HIMA OPC servers is active If the Passive Mode is disabled on the 8627 it must also be disabled on the HIMA OPC stervers With HIPRO S safety related communication must be set up such that each PES has configured a safety related data exchange with all other PES i e exchange of dummy data if no other user data are exchanged The direction of the data exchange can be freely selected This procedure is used because all Ethernet nodes must be known in each PES within SafeEthernet to ensure communication within the network token passing Passive mode enabled switch S1 8 OFF In this mode the F 8627X s behavior is passive and HIMA OPC server polls it in certain time intervals The token passing between the F 8627X and the HIMA OPC servers is disabled The Passive mode may be only activated on a 8627
137. Permissible wiring variants with active transmitters sources These wiring variants must be carried out in compliance with the rele vant Ex standards For the interconnection of intrinsically safe opera tional equipment the PTB ThEx 10 and the operating instructions for the F 6221 have to be considered 310 F 6221 0625 2 1 3 Variant A1 Mono supply mono current measuring wiring via cable Mono operation with transmitter supply for channels 1 to 6 For channels 7 and 8 see note below Cabletype Z7063 6221 ExCn ITI Z 7025 3325 ExCx part number 93 6221 101 93 6221 101 Z 7025 3325 ExCx F 3325 Not safety related EEX transmitter supply module b2 U 7 23V Le gt m iir Cable plug Supply module imax length 10m Terminal 93 6221 101 6221 Z 7063 6221 ExCnITI pol eee Safety related EEX measuring module Transmitter z18 Cable plug measuring module Figure 2 Mono supply mono current measuring wiring via cable Note In this wiring variant the first six channels of the F 3325 module are always used for passive transmitters Channels 7 and 8 are used for active transmitters see Variant A2 311 F 6221 0625 2 1 4 Variant A2 No supply mono current measuring Mono operation without transmitter supply for channels 7 and 8
138. Please regard the requirement of the SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage or PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage To improve the electromagnetic compatibility an instrument earth is pro vided The instrument earth is designed within the cabinet in such a way that it fulfills the re quirements of a protection earth All H41q H51q systems can be operated with earthed L or not earthed Floating Supply With several undetected earth faults faulty control signals may be triggered To prevent this with floating operation in any case an earth fault monitoring system must be provided ref also to e g VDE 0116 The earth fault monitoring must be installed outside the control cabinet An earth fault can only be located by switching off a partial function separation of lines An earth fault can be detected if both poles are feed to supply an output circuit Earthed Operation It is premised that the earthing conditions are excellent and there is a separate earth connec tion if possible through which no external currents flow Only the earthing of the negative pole L is permitted Earthing of the L positive pole is not admissible as any earth fault on a sen sor line would result in an overriding of the sensor concerned L may only be earthed at one point within the system Generally L is earthed directly behind the power supply e g on the bus bar The earthing should be easy to access and disconnect The earthing resistance must be lt 2
139. Right of each installed central module of the H51q H HR PES up to five communication mod ules can be installed The communication module mainly contains 32 bit RISC microprocessor Operating system RAM for further protocols F 8627 Ethernet interface safeethernet F 8628 Profibus DP slave interface Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Special applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the central module to PADT II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network Modbus TCP Special application with the communication module F 8628X II TCP connection PADT the Ethernet interface of the F 8628X to the H41q H51q controller Startup and maintenance A battery change of the buffer batteries on the power supply monitoring module and the central module CPU in operation is recommended every 6 years Buffer battery with soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000016 Buffer battery without soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000019 Further informations see also catalog H41q H51q chapter 9 Startup and maintenance 111 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 4 Wiring of the assembly kit The assembly kit is already wired for operation Wirings have still to be done by the user op tional modules see Assembly kit wiring diagram A With installation of the assembly kit a cond
140. The H41q and H51q System Families Note The module must not be mounted within a potentially explosive area The module is connected to the intrinsically safe field circuits via the cable plug Z 7063 In addition the following points should be considered The electronic module including its connections has to be installed in a way that at least the degree of protection IP 20 according to EN 60529 1991 A1 2000 is achieved Two intrinsically safe input circuits of two F 6221 modules or several intrinsically safe inputs of one F 6221 module as well as one Ex supply unit for the transmitter can be wired in parallel The maximum values Uo lo Co Lo reduced due to this method of con nection have to be considered interconnection according to PTB ThEx 10 A technical report on the interconnection of the F 6221 and F 3325 modules with two wire transmit ters is available from HIMA on request The separation between intrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe terminals must be gt 50 mm especially between adjacent modules The separation between adjacent intrinsically safe terminals must be gt 6 mm Intrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe lines must be installed separately or the intrinsically safe lines must be provided with additional insulation e ntrinsically safe lines must be identifiable e g by the light blue color RAL 5015 of the insulation The wiring has to be secured mechanically a way w
141. Type Contact E Vario ELCO 8016 Code 1 1 1x 56 D WAGO 739 4x 17 pole A1 up to 16 1 O channels to field gray B1 up to B16 Reference potential green C1 up to C16 I O channels to field gray 01 up to 016 Reference potential green A 17 C 17 Shield Y white B 17 D 17 Floating contacts gray Table 1 Sockets and terminals H 7018 Mechanical design and dimensions of Terminal Module H 7018 112 mm Figure 2 Mechanical design and dimensions of Terminal Module H 7018 Depth 105 mm with Vario plug ELCO 8016 Mounting on 35 mm DIN rail Installation orientation horizontally or vertically Installation clearance dependent on cable routing from ELCO 8016 H 7018 0508 Application Wiring of H 7015A with 7018 For fast and efficient wiring plug and play between a PLC cabinet and a marshalling cabinet the Terminal Modules H 7015A H 7018 and the cable BV 7201 are required Marshalling cabinet H 7018 8016 PLC cabinet Terminal Module H 7015A ELCO 8016 E Vario ELCO 8016 Code 1 1 A B C Phoenix Headers D WAGO 739 ee
142. WDerarget CT 1 5 D 5 5 WDeTarget 150 1 5 1 5 5 5 WDerarget 233 25 ms gt 234 ms Step 3 Calculating monitoring time MTe MTe 2 WDesource 2 Tmax 2 WDerarget MTe 2 161 2 700 2 234 MTe 2190 ms gt 2200 ms Step 4 Set the calculated monitoring time MTe in the target resource Open the dialog window Properties using the context menu Properties gt HIPRO S of the target resource Select the source resource in the list of HIPRO S communication partners and click the button EDIT Set the monitoring time MTe in the dialog window Edit resource Calculating the monitoring time MTe for each of the 20 communication partners in this target resource for each of the 20 communication partners in its own resource be agreed upon with the appropriate authority The monitoring time must not exceed the time period agreed upon N Setting the monitoring time depends on the process and must 389 F 8627X 0650 6 8 Example of Bus configuration with 64 resources In this example 64 resources are configured and partitioned into three bus configurations Both resources Bn PESO1 Bn_PESO2 are configured for each bus and provide gate way between the three bus configurations The bus configuration is identical for the communication versions MONO and Double MONO When Double MONO is used a second F 8627X communication module with the corresponding DIP switch setting
143. Writes one single variable WORD in the slave s import area Write Multiple Coils 15 BOOL Writes several variables BOOL in the slave s import area Write Multiple Registers 16 WORD Writes several variables of any type in the slave s import area Read Write Multiple Registers 23 WORD Writes and reads several variables of any type in and from the slave s import area Read Device Identification 43 1 Transmits the slave s identification data to the master 1 Note about the Modbus Function Read Device Identification 43 The HIMA Modbus slave supplies identification data to the master and supports the following Object lds Basic 0x00 VendorName HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG 0x01 ProductCode Serial Number 0x02 MajorMinorRevision CU OS Key 0x23ad CRC Ox COM Vx y CRC gt Regular 0x03 VendorUrl http www hima com 0x04 ProductName HlQuad 0x05 ModelName lt RessourceTyp gt z B F 8627X 0x06 UserApplicationName lt Buchst00 gt resource name from ELOP projekt Extended 0x80 CPU OS version CRC CU OS Key 0x23ad CRC Ox gt 0x81 CPU OSL version CRC deliver the error code 2 Invalid Data 0x82 CPU BL version CRC deliver the error code 2 Invalid Data 0x83 COM OS version CRC lt Vx y 0x234adcef gt 0x84 COM OSL version CRC deliver the error code 2 Invalid Data 0x85 COM BL version CRC deliver the error code 2 Invalid Data 0x86 Configuration CR
144. a connection has been established OK appears in the field Communication In case of problems with the ELOP II TCP communication see also chapter 5 2 6 F 8627X 0650 5 2 5 II TCP connections to H41q H51q controllers ELOP OPC and safeethernet can operate on the same network Certain restrictions apply to HIPRO S and OPC see Table 7 and Table 8 in Chapter 6 If the PADT and the H41q H51q controller are directly connected with one another a cross over Ethernet cable is required 5 2 5 1 ELOP Il TCP connections to redundant H41q H51q controllers II PADT PC ELOP II PADT PC II PADT PC Ethernet Switch Ethernet OPC Safeethernet MODBUS TCP Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 2 1 ON 52 1 OFF 2 1 ON S2 1 OFF Channel 1 Channel 2 52 1 Ss S2 OFF ee Cable len Cable De Cable The PADT can establish a connection to the H41q H51q only via channel 1 left figure only via channel 2 middle figure only via channel 1 right figure 5 2 5 2 ELOP II TCP connections to mono H41q H51q controller II PADT PC ELOP II PADT PC Ethernet Switch Ethernet Channel 1 2 1 ON OPC oder Safeethernet Channel 2 MODBUS TCP 2 1 OFF The PADT can establish a connection to the H41q H51q either via channel 1 or via channel 2 depending on F 8627X switch 2 1 left figure only via channel 1 right figure Channel
145. also data sheets for H51q systems or as sembly kits Overview Assembly Kits H51q The components required for a working system are included in assembly kits System H51q M H51q H H51q HR H51q MS H51q HS Es Safety SIL 3 SIL 3 SIL 3 Quantity type 1 2 2 1 2 2 CU F 8651X 8651X 8651 8650 8650 8650 Quantity type 3 2 3 2 3 3X 2x3 2x3 CM 8621A 8621A F 8621A F 8621A F 8621A F 8621A Quantity type 5x 2x5 2x5 5x 2x5 2x5 CoM F 8627 F 8627 F 8627 F 8627 F 8627 F 8627 Fast Ether F 8627X F 8627X F 8627X F 8627X F 8627X F 8627X net Quantity type 5x 2x5 2x5 5 2 5 2 5 CoM F 8628 F 8628 F 8628 F 8628 F 8628 F 8628 Profibus DP F 8628X 8628X F 8628X F 8628X F 8628X F 8628X Quantity type 2 1 x 3x 3x 2 1 x 3x 3x power supplies F 7126A F7126A F 7126A F 7126A F 7126A F 7126A 5 monitoring F 7131 F 7131 F 7131 F 7131 F 7131 F 7131 Battery 7131 F 7131 F 7131 F 7131 F 7131 F 7131 buffering F 8651X F 8651X F 8651X F 8650X F 8650X F 8650X Quantity 1 1 2 1 1 2 buses max quantity 256 256 in 2 128 256 in 256 in 2x 128 in modules 16 I O 16 I O 2 x 8 I 0 16 1 0 16 2x 8 I O subracks subracks subracks subracks subracks subracks Assembly kit B 5230 B 5232 1 5232 2 B 5231 B 5233 1 B 5233 2 number Table 4 Overview Assembly Kits H51q Optio
146. at 60 C It is recommended to change the unloaded buffer battery module in operation at the latest after six years Type of battery CR 1 2 AA CD HIMA part no 44 0000016 with soldering lugs HIMA part no 44 0000019 without soldering lugs since AS 02 F 7132 0507 F 7132 F 7132 4 channel power distribution to distribute L or EL and L for PES H41q H51q 24 426 28 410430 212 414 228 216 418 232 Front Block diagram Figure 1 F 7132 4 channel power distribution Front view The contact pins 1 2 3 4 and L on the front side serve to connect L or EL and L to the individual circuits The contacts d6 d10 d14 d18 serves as rear terminals for loads or current distributors Loadability of the contacts max 4A Space requirement 4 SU All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 347 F 7132 0507 348 F 7133 0507 F 7133 F 7133 4 channel power distribution with fuse monitoring and L distribution 46 24 d26d10z8 d30d14z12 228 418 216 232 220 L 224 922 A m 009868 9 3 O 4 1 52 Evaluation 2 logic 3 L4
147. at least 2 used depending on the load up to 4 x 2 5 mm BK wiring is necessary 82 4237 1 2 H41q HS HRS 0605 4 4 3 Supply 5 VDC 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 The 5 VDC power supply does not have to be wired separately as it is already installed as part of the subrack The 5 VDC power is used for the CPU the control of the interfaces and the I O modules It is generated by 24 VDC 5 VDC power supply module type F 7130A The subrack is equipped with two power supply modules The power supply modules are switched in parallel If one of them fails the other supplies the PES The 5 VDC output voltage of the power supply module for the CPU I O and the interfaces are monitored on the central module checking undervoltage overvoltage or failure In case of a faulty power supply module the operating system of the CPU informs the user pro gram via a system variable In case of a 5 VDC system power failure a lithium battery on the central module buffers the hardware clock and sRAM on the central module Connection of the monitoring loop for fuses and fans Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 21 4 5 6 GY 0 5 Faston 2 8 x 0 8 max 4 A slow Floating NO NC con blow tact for signaling GY Color code gray Table 2 Connection of the monitoring loop Internal fuses Position Size Dimension HIMA part no Z 6011 4 A slow blow 5x 20 57 0174409 2 6013 1 6 A slow blow 5x 20 5
148. autonegotiation must be activated for all com munication partners e g switch once the downgrade has been com pleted see also Chapter 4 2 Upgrading from version lt V3 x to version gt V4 x If the F 8627X is set to Autonegotiation Off S2 3 OFF and full duplex S2 5 ON then autonegotiation must be deactivated for all communication partners e g switch once the upgrade has been completed see also Chapter 4 2 Start the ComEth diagnosis dialog and check in the error state viewer that the main program version is 0 8 0 or higher diagnostic text version is 0 2 0 or higher Select Project gt New on the menubar of the ComEth diagnosis dialog to create a new Project Select New Configuration in the context menu of the new project to create a new configuration Select New Resource in the context menu of the new configuration to create a new resource Select New F 8627X in the context menu of the new resource to create a new F 8627X in the new resource Select Properties in the context menu of the new F 8627X to open the dialog win dow Properties Configure the input fields as follows Enter any unique for the F 8627X e g 1 1 in the input field In the input field IP address enter the IP address of the F 8627X module into which the operating system is to be loaded For determining the IP address of the F 8627X module see Chapter 5 1 The view box
149. been assured by compliance with EN 50014 1997 A2 EN 50020 1994 EN 50039 1982 If the sign X is placed after the certificate number it indicates that the equipment is subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the schedule to this certificate This EC type examination Certificate relates only to the design examination and tests of the specified equipment in accordance to the Directive 94 9 EC Further requirements of the Directive apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment These are not covered by this certificate The marking of the equipment shall include the following EEx ia Braunschweig June 30 2003 Dr Ing U Johannsmeyer Regierungsdirektor sheet 1 3 EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid The certificates may be circulated only without alteration Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt In case of dispute the German text shall prevail Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt Bundesallee 100 D 38116 Braunschweig 205 F 3238 0622 Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt Braunschweig und Berlin 13 SCHEDULE 14 EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 03 ATEX 2031 15 Description of equipment The electronic assembly type F 3238 is used for the transmission of signals from up to 8 intrinsically safe input circuits to non intrinsically s
150. can be transmitted BUSCOM address of the F 865x central module The user can set up the BUSCOM Addresses of the BUSCOM variables by specifying the base and relative addresses The addresses of the BUSCOM variables are calculated on the central module F 865x as fol lows Base address Relative address BUSCOM address The relative address must be set such that the BUSCOM address is located in the same range as the corresponding base address see Table 18 Note The base address settings are located in resource s properties In the BUSCOM tab the user can set the base address separately for Import Export and Import Export however using the standard base address settings is recommended The BOOL and WORD variables are stored within the import and export areas of the F 865x and further seperated into 0 and 1 areas Randes BOOL WORD BUSCOM address BUSCOM address Import range 0 Base address 0000 0000 to 2047 0000 to 2047 Import range 1 Base address 4096 4096 to 8191 4096 to 8191 Export range 0 Base address 0000 0000 to 2047 0000 to 2047 Export range 1 Base address 4096 4096 to 8191 4096 to 8191 Table 18 BUSCOM variable ranges in the F 865x central module F 8627X 0650 7 3 Mapping of the BUSCOM variables on the F 8627X To transmit the BUSCOM variables they are mapped from the F 865x central module to t
151. channel1 or channel2 which are determined by By this the 8628X connected to the PADT is selected Click OK to close the Properties dialog with OK Load the User Program into the H41q H51q Connect the selected F 8628X with the PADT corresponding to a connection from chapter 5 2 5 Note In case of a redundant H41q H51q make sure that the HSR cable BV 7053 is plugged otherwise there is no access available to the redundant central module F 865x Open the context menu of the resource and select Control Panel If a connection has been established OK appears in the field Communication 419 F 8628X 0650 5 2 4 420 Load the user program into the central module s F 865x using Download Reload Start the H41q H51q controller In case of problems with the ELOP II TCP communication see also chapter 5 2 6 Upgrade of a H41q H51q to II TCP without system stop Preconditions A H41q H51q controller may change to II TCP without a system stop if the following con ditions are fulfilled The conditions for a II TCP connection are fullfilled see chapter 5 2 1 A suitable operating system OS version 05 34 or higher must be loaded in the cen tral module s F 865x In the F 865x a user program must exist having a resource name from which the F 8628X can determine an IP address On all F 865x the same number for the ID must be set which is used as Res ID i
152. chapter about the noise blanking has to be regarded Setting Safety time 2 3 x watchdog time F 5220 0625 Channel Connection Color Color Color Type A Type B Type Counter1 210 WH prox sw d10 BN Counter1 d22 WH WH 24V 5VDC L d22 BN BN Direct 1 z14 GN prox sw d14 YE Direct 1 d26 GN GN 24V 5VDC L 426 YE YE Cable 1 d6 BK BK BK 6 2 0 5 mm 26 VT VT VT screened Counter2 1212 GY prox sw d12 PK Counter2 d24 GY GY 24V 5VDC L d24 PK PK Direct 2 z16 BU prox sw d16 RD Direct 2 d28 BU BU 24V 5VDC L d28 RD RD q 1 mm Output2 d8 GYPK GYPK 750 mm 78 RDBU RDBU RDBU Flat pin plug L z18 RD RD RD 2 8 x 0 8 mm L z2 BK BK BK m Cable YEGN YEGN YEGN 120 mm shield 4 2 5 mm Flat plug 6 3 x 0 8 to be Figure 2 Lead marking cable plug connected to the earth bar under the slot Lead marking cable plug A cable plug Z 7152 5220 C PU5 P2 for 5 V B cable plug Z 7152 5220 C PU24 P2 for 24 V Type C cable plug Z 7152 5220 C PSW P2 for prox switches The cable plug type A for 5 V and type B for 24 V are different in the resistance assembling The cable plug for 5 V may not be used for 24 V signals The module must only be operated with forced ventilation fan The fan K 9203 must be installed above t
153. communication module F 8628X Check the new F 8628X e Check the DIP switch settings see chapter Chapter 4 and compare to the exchanged F 8628X Check whether if the operating system see sticker on the F 8628X support the used function e g II TCP from OS version 4 x Plug the new communication module F 8628X Plug the HSR cable BV 7053 if required Corresponding central module e g F 8650X with operating system Version below 05 34 plug the central module Version beginning with 05 34 push the button Ack to activate the central module see operation system manual Self Education Wait until the LED RUN on the F 8628X lights continiously Plug the communication cable Ethernet Plug the communication cable PROFIBUS DP Note The ARP entry on the PADT PC must be deleted if the new F 8628X has the same IP address as the old F 8628X If the new F 8628X has the same IP address it cannot be connected to the PADT PC Example Delete the ARP entry of an F 8628X with IP address 192 168 0 67 Start the Dos Shell on the PC Enter the command arp 192 168 0 67 411 F 8628X 0650 2 3 412 Specifications for HIMA PROFIBUS DP slaves PROFIBUS is an international open Fieldbus standard which was standardized in the EN 50170 Fieldbus standard Please contact your Regional PROFIBUS Association RPA or refer to the Internet page www profibus com for
154. deactivat ed FIFO the following measures can solve the problems from Il Version 4 1 reduce value for message length Open in the context menu of the resource Properties and reduce the value for the message length in the register PADT PC Properties B1_PESO1 Mfl Master Data Print Forms More Print Order 10 parameter Safety Code generator Addressingeror HIPRO S BUSCOM 3364R Communication Type Ethernet Serial Serial Communication Settings PC interface gt Bus Bus 7 lt 1 PADT v cow C BSN 31 P COM Connection settings v Activate parameter Message length 528 Retry Additional time delay ms 0 Activate modem Initialization time ms 000 Standard Cancel Apply Figure 2 Reduce value of message length The check box Activate parameter must be set that a change of the message length becomes active RS 485 PCI 0602 up to Version 3 5 Setting the time delay Properties B1_PESO1 GE X1 Lel Code generator Addressing eror HIPRO S BUSCOM 39549 Print Def Print Forms More Print Order GV XRef 10 parameter Safety PADT PC interface Bus COM1 PADT v coM2 C COM3 BSN 3 C CO0M4 IV Activate m
155. eBeyoA 1 21329 3 ZZZ 1 330 F 6221 0625 ZL 40 01 Xe3 9222 1625 680 L 2002 9082 ueuoun 65508 59 ayeys ajp y ZOLELOOL ON IEPIO 850 pue O uoisiwes 2051001 ON Hodey 3ALLOWOLNV ANL E91199 9 SYUELIEA 10 pue sjueJino BAHEINWND Lp qe eDeyo jueuno _ CVS C CSL 1229 4 jouueyo vus 1 5 0 gt Bulpeaiyoeg 229 jeuueuo z Z gt 2 9565 d 219 9 94 z jeuueyo jndino 0L eDeyoA jueuno _ z ZZGL 1229 4 jeuueyo vus gt 9 0 gt 4 1229 4 euueuo n E 2 4 g jueujeunsee u gzeed 226 2191 OGL jauueyo jndino 6 adenon juauno 2 G 8 gt e 1 LZZ9 4 G 0 5 0 1229 4 Lg 48 9 45 c v 9658 d z z 9 5 QO Ieuueuondino 8 und 2 gt 7 gt 1229 4 5 G 0 gt 0 Buipesuyseg LZZ9 4 48 18
156. electrostatic discharges e g keep it in its packaging How to Insert and to Remove Modules The modules of the HIMA PES H41q and H51q may be removed and inserted if the following rules are observed The modules must be re moved from the bus board uninterruptedly by means of the ejection le ver front label to prevent faulty signals in the system which can trigger a shutdown The modules may not be cant by a screwdriver or by vibrations HIMA takes no responsibility for damages resulting from insertion and removing of the modules Modules Remove 1 Remove both screws of the module 2 remove the module together with the cable plug 3 screw off the cable plug and remove it Insert 1 Insert and fix the module without cable plug 2 plug in the cable plug and fix it by the screws 3 for safety related modules and modules with slot detection see overview of modules in chapter 10 Refresh the display by pressing the ACK key on the central module Coupling Modules Remove 1 Switch off the module WD switch to OFF position 2 remove fixing screws of the module 3 remove the module 4 corresponding subrack is completely switched off 29 Installation and Connections 8 2 3 8 2 4 30 Note If the module is removed without switching off the watchdog signal for all I O subracks is shut down This results in an error stop for MS and HS systems Insert 1 2 3
157. for modules Slots 1 13 see also connection XG 6 Supply 24 VDC see assembly kit wiring diagram L L 4235 H41q MS 0605 4 6 Assembly kit wiring diagram RD 1 mm L slot 1 EM L slot 2 Kae 6 3 L from feeding and L slot 3 current distribution 2 1009 XG 6 13 o o see note Supply 24 VDC A L slot XG 14 L from feeding and E L 1to13 XG 14 current distribution o o Watchdog CU1 Watchdog CU2 L L L atchdog g XG 2 XG9 XG 13 XG 12 XGA 1 2 3 4 1234 2 2 GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm 2 BK 1 5 mm 2 2 2 GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm 225 5 222 111 XG23 9 222 111 ee ee ee ee E 51 0 so gp oM 16A 1 6A F2 F1 RD 1 5 mm 2 ee P e e E Z 6013 e Z 6013 e gt ee X622 8 7444 6 a 36235 6 7 aaa GY 0 5 mm RD 1 RD 1 mm 5 BK 1 1 2 0 5 2 RD 0 5 2 GY 0 5 mm XG 24 4 4 6 555 XG25 4 4 4 6 555 2 3 1 XG21 e E e SE m o en E A e 5 0 e 55 o L Z 6018 F2 F1 gt F2 gt amp 4A 9 4A e 26011 ere Z 6011 9 XG 21 7 8 910 11 12 13 1 5 al 6 24 gt 25 gt L L 1 L 4 Fans an monitoring Supply 24 VDC Supply 24 VDC K 9212 Figure 4 Assembly kit wiring diagram L Fan monitori
158. for F modules of the HIMA Planar System ss 0 co OO HIMA HIMA F7126 F7126 X F7126 F7131 1 2 3 6 7 F7126 7126 7126 27131 NG1 PS1 NG2 PS2 NG3 PS3 HMA B9361 Option Figure 1 Front view Parts of the B 9361 assembly kit 1x K 1408 central rack 5 units high 19 inches with integrated cable tray additional modules on the rear e 3x2Z6011 decoupling and fusing to feed the power supply modules e 1xZ6012 fan with fan run monitoring and fuse monitoring e 2x2Z6013 decoupling and fusing of the supply voltage for Z 6012 include the modules 1xF7126 power supply module 24 V 5 V 10 A PS1 1xF7131 power supply monitoring module 14 socket connectors to install standard F type modules of the Planar System Modules for option separate order 2xF 7126 power supply module 24 V 5 V PS2 PS3 The 5 V outputs of the power supply modules are switched in parallel 1 14 x Standard F type modules of the Planar System The additional power supply loadable up to 18 A will be used if the power supply modules built in in the central rack are not sufficient to supply the 5 V circuits i e gt 18 A for 3 power supply modules F 7126 in a redundant control For the accurate current consumption for each module refer to the appertaining data
159. further information The functionality of the HIMA PROFIBUS DP protocoll meets the requirements of EN 50 170 DP VO Sizes Comments RPA ident number Assigned by the RPA PNO in germany GSD file HIQ200EA GSD The GSD file for configurating a H41q H51q PROFIBUS DP slave in a PROFIBUS DP master can be downloaded from the internet page www hima de HIMA PROFIBUS DP station address To be set via switch 1 Permissible station address from 0 to 125 PROFIBUS DP watchdog monitoring Baud rates 9 6 kBit s Baud rate that can be set via switch 2 19 2 kBit s 45 45 kBit s 45 45 kBit s 93 75 kBit s OS version 2 18 and higher 187 5 kBit s 500 kBit s 1 5 MBit s 3 MBit s 6 MBit s 12 MBit s Transmission RS 485 Most frequently used transmission mode for PROFIBUS often referred to as H2 Input max 192 Byte Inputs outputs maximum number 256 Output max 240 Byte Inputs outputs maximum number 256 Min slave Interval 3 ms Accuracy of 10 ms Modes of connecting the HIMA PROFIBUS DP slave In accordance with the international PROFIBUS standard EN 50170 Cable lengths terminating resistors etc have to be considered Table 1 Specification of the HIMA PROFIBUS DP slave F 8628X 0650 3 Diagnostic LEDs on module front 3 1 Top row LEDs on module front TX COL FB Operating status ON Send LED of Ethernet
160. further information on assembly and installation see the HIMA ca talog The H41q and H51q System Families Maintenance In case of a failure the defective module must be replaced with the same or with another ap proved type Any repair work must only be carried out by the manufacturer F 3238 0622 Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt Braunschweig und Berlin EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Translation Equipment and Protective Systems Intended for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Directive 94 9 EC EC type examination Certificate Number PTB 03 ATEX 2031 Equipment Electronic assembly type F 3238 Manufacturer HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Address 68782 Br hl bei Mannheim Germany This equipment and any acceptable variation thereto are specified in the schedule to this certificate and the documents therein referred to The Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt notified body No 0102 in accordance with Article 9 of the Council Directive 94 9 EC of 23 March 1994 certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex to the Directive The examination and test results are recorded in the confidential report PTB Ex 03 22333 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has
161. if HIMA OPC server also supports it HIMA OPC server version 3 2 0 and higher The Passive Mode can also be activated if safety related communication for the F 8627X module is configured Note If HIPRO DIRECT mode is active switch 1 7 ON switch 51 8 passive mode no longer influences communication For this reason passive mode must also be activated on the HIMA OPC servers 395 F 8627X 0650 6 9 1 3 Benefits of passive mode If safety related communication will not be performed via the F 8627X then safety related dummy variables need not be defined between the PES during configura tion It is now possible to have simultaneously a safety related communication via AG master F 8621A or a second F 8625 27 and non safety related communication to a HIMA OPC server in one PES since no more dummy variables are needed for com municating with the HIMA OPC server An overload of the PC running the HIMA OPC server can be prevented in cases in which the number of available communication partners is too small e g due to fre quent token holding caused by the short token cycle Note Hubs may not be used in Passive mode Switches are recommended 6 9 1 4 Numbers of OPC server and determination of the node Id HIPRO S mode 51 7 OFF Fixed to four HIMA OPC servers Node Ids of the HIMA OPC servers are 107 to 110 HIPRO S DIRECT mode 51 7 ON Switches 2 6 8 set the number of HIMA OPC ser
162. isolation applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 ECtype examination certificate ATEX EX5 00 02 19183 031 1 Overview p 2 7062 6220 F 6220 GND Analog I Z 7062 6220 ExC ep ee ee ee Z 7062 Front cable plug VO bus Block diagram Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Software function block in user program HF TMP 3 Inputs thermocouples R S B J K T E according to DIN EN 60584 1 temperature limits between 270 C 1820 C or low voltage input 100 mV 100 mV individual parameterizable by function block All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 297 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 6220 0625 Measurand update Space requirement Operating data for intrinsically safe circuits EEx ia IIC 1 Pt 100 resistance thermometer according to DIN IEC 751 input only for reference temperature 80 ms 4 SU 5 VDC 125 mA 24 VDC 300 mA A The module must only be operated with forced ventilation fan The fan K 9203 must be installed above the subrack where the F 6220 module is plugged in If the F 6220 module is operated in an 41 the fan 9212 must be installed directly under the F 6220 module In order to ensure the forced ventilation the air deflector panel M 7201 1 HE must to be
163. jo Je e1ed 10 eouejonpui ejqeyoeuuoo XEN 3u 011 795 3ndino euo ejqeioeuuoo Xew HU Z euo ejqejoeuuoo 91 93 yndjno 1 1 1ndino MU 189 anjen 15010 Jad 0 02 OQ 15610 9 yndyno 0 SZ enje 15210 Of 1ndino sad eBeyoA 22 1 450 28161 90 20 918211182 93 o1 xipueddy 251 F 3335 0622 252 F 3348 0602 F 3348 8 channel output module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 Output voltage 48 VDC resistive load or inductive load up to 500 mA lamp connection up to 4 W with integrated safety shutdown with safe isolation 5V GND WD Z 7148 3348 1 L 48 V L 48 V Front cable plug Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug The module is automatically tested dur
164. mm2 Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply fuse monitoring and IO CON in the I O rack RD Color code red Table 2 Output 24 VDC Supply 5 VDC The 5 VDC power supply does not have to be wired extra as it is already part of the installation To supply the I O racks the 5 V power supply with corresponding GND is available at the rear side of the central rack The 5 VDC power and GND are connected starlike with each 2 wires to the potential distributor The 5 VDC power needed for the microprocessor system and as control current for the I O modules is generated from the 24 VDC power of the system via 24 VDC 5 VDC power sup ply modules type F 7126 One central rack can be equipped with a maximum of 3 power supply modules The power supply modules are switched in parallel One or two power supply mod ules are usually able to supply the PES A further power supply module is used to increase availability Note At planning the load of the power supply units have to be calculated B 5230 H51q M 0605 4 2 4 3 The 5 VDC output voltage of the power supply module for the CPU I O and the interfaces are monitored by the power supply monitoring module F 7131 checking undervoltage over voltage or failure In case of a faulty power supply module the operating system of the CPU informs the user pro gram via a system variable In case of a 5 VDC system power failure a lithium battery on the central module buffers the ha
165. mod ule power supply 24 5 V power supply monitoring module I O bus connection communica tion modules optional coprocessor modules optional and three fans PS1 PS2 PS3 CU1 CM11CM12CM13 CM14 CM15 K 1412B P e P ERROR 12 12 1 0 Ge 2225 3 1 2 2 2 o 0 o HIMA HIMA HIMA HIMA HIMA HIMA HIMA F7126 F7126 F7126 F7131 F8651X F8621A F8621A F8621A F8627X F8627X 1 1 2 3 4 5 l 6 1 8 9 10 44 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 27126 27126 27126 27131 F8651X F8621A F8621A F8621A NG1 PS1 NG2 PS2 NG3 PS3 ZB1 CU1 HIMA H51q M B5230 Option Option Figure 1 Front view 1 Parts of the B 5230 assembly kit H51q M system 1x K 1412B central rack 5 units high 19 inches with cable tray with three fan modules K 9212 hinged receptacle for the label and backplane Z 1001 additional modules on the rear e 3x2Z6011 decoupling and fusing to feed the power supply modules 1xZ6018 fan run monitoring and fuse monitoring e 2x2Z6013 decoupling and fusing of the supply voltage for the WD signal 2xF7546 bus termination modules includes the modules 2xF7126 power supply modules 24 V 5 V 10 A PS1 PS2 1xF7131 po
166. must only be carried out by the manufacturer F 3224A 0622 Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt PIB Braunschweig und Beriin a _EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE Translation 2 Equipment and Protective Systems Intended for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Directive 94 9 EC 3 EC type examination Certificate Number PTB 02 ATEX 2178 4 Equipment Electronic assembly type F3224A 5 Manufacturer HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG 6 Address 68777 Br hl Germany 7 This equipment and any acceptable variation thereto are specified in the schedule to this certificate and the documents therein referred to 8 The Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt notified body No 0102 in accordance with Article 9 of the Council Directive 94 9 EC of 23 March 1994 certifies that this equipment has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex to the Directive The examination and test results are recorded in the confidential report PTB Ex 03 22253 9 Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 50014 1997 1 A2 EN 50020 1994 10 If the sign X is placed after the certificate number it indicates that the equipment is subject to special conditions for safe use specified in the s
167. nels SIL 3 ment tion 0 1 5 10 V 4 SU F 6214 4 0 1 5 10 V 450 6215 8 0 1 5 10 V 8 SU F6216A 8 0 5 10 V 4 SU F 6217 8 e TC 4 SU F 6220 8 100 100 mV 0 1V 450 6221 8 Table 8 Analog Input Modules TC Thermocouple SU spacing units width 48 Data Sheets 10 12 3 Digital Output Modules safety Space Slot 24 gt 24V Kine Load require Type gnan detec VDC Control nels SIL 3 ment tion e lt 0 5 450 3322 16 e only with Transmitter 450 3325 6 6221 supply lt 22 lt 60 lt 0 5 450 3330 8 lt 0 5 4 SU F3331 8 lt 2A 450 3332 4 lt 2A 450 3333 4 lt 2A 4 SU F 3334 4 Ex i 450 3335 4 e lt 24V 12 mA e e lt 0 5A 48V 4 SU F 3348 8 lt 0 5 450 3349 8 24 48 lt 4A lt 60V 450 3422 8 lt 4 450 F 3430 4 lt 110 VDC lt 250 VAC Table 9 Digital Output Modules SU spacing units width 10 12 4 Analog Output Modules safety Slot 21 gt 24V related Eno Load require Type detec VDC Control nels SIL 3 ment tion 0 20 4 SU F 6705 2 0 20 450 6706 2
168. non intrinsically safe side of the galvanically isolated power supply and must be compensated The Hart protocol can also be transmitted if suitable transmitters are used 313 F 6221 0625 2 1 6 Variant C1 Mono supply redundant current measuring wiring via cable Redundant operation with transmitter supply for channels 1 to 6 For channels 7 and 8 see note below Cable type Z 7063 6221 ExCn ITI R2 part number 93 6221 103 93 6221 103 Z 7025 3325 ExC F 3325 Not safety related EEX transmitter supply b2 U 23V L aie 2 E 4 4 Cable plug transm supply module 10 m max length 93 6221 103 F 6221 Z 7063 6221 ExCn ITI R1 lee ee Safety related EEX measuring module 22 ag id ne eee 1 i 1 1 218 1 1 1 ien Cable plug measuring module i TC1 Di E Toe 4 8 2 max length 93 6221 103 Z 7063 6221 ExCn ITI R2 e F 6221 Transmitter Terminal Safety related EEX measuring module n 4 22 i T MUX H dig beoe Bl PA 1 1 1 zi og 1 1 1 1 m Cable plug measuring module i PEERS
169. of the module The LEDs of the cable plug are not tested Inputs digital signals or mechanical contacts input voltage lt 48 VDC lt 48 VAC 20 96 Input current 2mA Operating point typ 19 VDC 29 VAC Switching time typ 50 ms Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 100 mA 24 VDC 120 mA All rights reserved The technology is subject to changes without notice 211 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Postfach 1261 68777 Br hl F3248 0524 212 20 x 0 25 mm Channel Connection Color 1 d2 WH 2 d4 BN 3 d6 GN 4 d8 YE 5 d10 GY 6 d12 PK 7 d14 BU Cable 8 d16 RD 9 d18 BK 10 d20 VT 11 d22 WHBN 12 d24 WHGN 13 d26 WHYE 14 d28 WHGY 15 d30 WHPK 16 d32 WHBU L 48 VDC 212 WHRD N 48 VAC Figure 2 Lead marking of the cable plug 2 7130 3248 F 3322 0508 F 3322 16 channel output module resistive or inductive load up to 500 mA 12 W lamp connection up to 12 W with safe isolation no output signal at break of the L supply gt 2 bus ii s e8 8 9 x Se E LT a mes i Mf F 3322 V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 05 06 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 111 1111121 Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Planning note
170. of the ring counter can be read over the defined digital input All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 263 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 5203 0507 264 With 1 signal at the zero setting input NS the 14 bit ring counter is set on zero and the value 32 768 is transferred to the digital output O signal transfers 0 to the digital output Counting mode UM 1 signal ZE counting pulses The counting direction depends on a binary signal at the input RE 0 signal forward 1 signal backward Discriminator mode UM 0 signal ZE counting pulses The counting direction depends on the signal sequence of the inputs RE and ZE If the signal on ZE changes before RE the counting direction is forward If the signal on ZE changes after RE the counting direction is backward Function Connection Color ZE d2 WH RE d6 BN UM d10 GN Cable NS d14 8 x 0 5 mm none d18 GY none d22 PK none d26 BU none d30 RD L z2 L BK Flat pin plug 5 2 8 x 0 8 mm Lead marking of the cable plug Z 7127 5203 C q 1 mm 750 mm Figure 2 Lead marking of the cable plug Z 7127 5203 C F 5220 0625 F 5220 2 channel counter module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 for input signals 24 V and 5 V safety related proximity switches and proximity switches according to DIN EN 60947 5
171. of the subrack Twointerfaces RS 485 via communication software function block setting of the baud rate up to 57600 bps Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Communication modules F 8627 F 8628 F 8627X F 8628X Right of the central module of the H41q H HR PES one communication module can be in stalled The communication module mainly contains 32 bit RISC microprocessor Operating system RAM for further protocols F 8627 Ethernet interface safeethernet F 8628 Profibus DP slave interface Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Special applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the central module to PADT II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network Modbus TCP Special application with the communication module F 8628X II TCP connection PADT via the Ethernet interface of the F 8628X to the H41q H51q controller Startup and maintenance Before startup the system switch on the rear buffer batteries G1 and G2 DIP switches on the backplane A battery change of the buffer batteries without load CPU in operation is recommended every 6 years Buffer battery with soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000016 Buffer battery without soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000019 Further informations see also catalog H41q H51q
172. re wor Pr a Identity number BUSCOM address 110 Pa EV 0000 0 ER 2047 1115 0000 0000 P 215 4096 bool 216 0100 7 ool e 00 EV 0000 316 ER 2047 P 317 ER 4096 4100 bool EV 4096 word 417 4200 8191 1 ER 4096 4096 bool 4196 ER 8191 Figure 7 Mapping of the WORD and BOOL variables from the export area 0 and 1 429 F 8628X 0650 8 Characteristics of the PROFIBUS DP transmission On the PROFIBUS DP s physical layer the data are transferred in accordance with the RS 485 standard The following table presents the basic technical features of the RS 485 transmission used for PROFIBUS DP Area Sizes Remark Network topology Linear bus active bus ter Branch lines should be avoided mination on either end Medium Shielded twisted cable Shielding can be omitted depending on the environmental conditions Number of stations 32 stations in each seg ment without repeater With repeaters expandable up to 126 stations Connectors 9 pole SUB D connector Available from HIMA Table 10 Characteristics of the RS 485 transmission technology 81 Bus dependencies between cable length and baud rate Baud rate Range Segment 9 6 kBit s 1200 m 19 2 kBit s 1200 m 45 45 kBit s 1200 m 93 75 kBit s 1200 m 187 5 kBit s 1000 m 500 kBit s 400 m 1 5 MBit s 200 m 3 Mbit s 100 m 6 Mbit s
173. rear side via the BV 7032 data cable To terminate the I O bus an F 7546 module is plugged in at the beginning on central subrack and at the end last I O rack Construction principle of the I O bus of the system H51q H Central module 2 Central module 1 Rear central rack XD 1 XD 2 Nr Pr _ J I Central rack 5 Units high BV 7032 XD 3 4 XD 4 F 7546 BV 7032 Front of the I O racks Rear of the I O racks pP I O rack 4Units high 27559 Penn XD 2 BV 7032 71 XD 1 VO rack 4Units high L J XD 2 BV 7032 XD 1 IO CCON VO rack 4Units high 27553 XD 2 F 7546 Set I O rack address by means of a coding switch refer to data sheet F 7553 Figure 3 Construction principle of the I O bus for system H51q H max length I O bus 12m max length cable BV 7032 5m cable BV 7032 between subracks max 0 5 115 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 4 5 5 Construction principle of the I O bus of the system H51q HR 116 Central rack 5 Unit high Front of the I O racks VO rack 4Units high To 1st I O bus VO rack 4Units high To 2nd I O bus I O rack 4Units high To 1st I O bus I O rack 4Units high To 2nd I O bus Central module 2 IO CON F 7553 Central module 1 4 2nd I O bus 2 Rear Central rack XD 2 F 7546 1st O bus CI xp 4 LL
174. redundancy The selected F 8627X transfers the telegrams to the associated F 865x central module and via the HSR cable BV 7053 to the redundant F 8627X and the associated F 865x central module The HSR cable between the two redundant F 8627X enables the communication to both cen tral modules as well as the Reload of a redundant H41q 51q Note For II TCP connection any free IP address for the PADT may be used If the PADT IP addresses and the F 8627X are located in the same subnet a routing entry for the subnet of the F 8627X is not required on the PADT see also Chapter 5 2 6 1 Note Carefully check that no other participant e g H41q H51q OPC server or PC has the same IP address as this could cause communication problems Next time when expanding communication please con sider the H41q H51q and the OPC server IP addresses Create II TCP connection to a H41q H51q Perform the following settings on the H41q H51q Activate the ID IP switch 1 6 ON on the F 8627X Set channel 1 or channel 2 on the Ethernet module F 8627X see chapter 5 1 Set the redundant channel if available on the redundant Ethernet module F 8627X see chapter 5 1 Make sure that a proper operating system OS Version 05 34 or higher is loaded in the F 865x central modules Set same number for the ID on the F 865x central module DIP switches see F 865x data sheet which is used as Res ID in the resource na
175. route print Start the ELOP II control panel to establish a connection to the F 8627X 369 F 8627X 0650 5 2 6 2 5 2 6 3 Connection problem after exchanging an F 8627X The ARP entry on the PC must be deleted if the new F 8627X has the same IP address as the old 8627 Otherwise the new F 8627X with the same IP address cannot be connected to the PADT PC Example Delete the ARP entry of an F 8627X with the IP address 192 168 0 67 Start the Dos Shell on the PADT PC Enter the command arp d 192 168 0 67 Check the connection to the F 8627X using Ping Start the Dos Shell on the PADT PC Enter the command Ping 192 168 0 x Messages generated by Ping Ethernet connection is Reply from 192 168 0 x bytes 32 time lt 4ms If connection is available check the resource settings in Il Ethernet connection is not OK Request timed out Check the wiring routing entrie etc Note If all steps described in this chapter have been followed and the F 8627X does not respond check if other participants can be accessed using the PC s netword card 5 2 6 4 The F 8627X determines its IP address in accordance with the following 370 priorities 1 The IP address is determined from the Resource ID Res ID of the user program that is loaded in the F 865x The Res ID of the user program always has a higher priority than the F 865x ID settings DIP switch 1 7 2
176. se OL dseJ 6 JO ejqeonoeud jou si ZL JO LL eed Xe 9562 16 5 680 2002 9082 ueuouniN 65508 seuiou egeusielpr Z0LEL00 7ON J6p1O 280 9uozoe 3 pue O L uoisi es x3 uonoeuuooeju ZOLELOOZ HAWS SAILOWOLNY ANL MBIA 104 seouejioedeo pue seouejonpul WNWIXEN 1 6 qe pue seouejonpul 2 5 qe Szee 4 5 0 2 291 OL 9565 4 5 0 2 291 6 9222 4 NOM ty S Sb 8 gt 498 8 9222 ty S 9 S 48 v 18 2 9222 Sg S S S LS v 498 9 9222 Sg S sib S 6c ce 1 g 9 9555 4 5 0 S 90 0 2 159 9 975 v 9555 d 5 0 S 90 0 L 2 159 9 9 gt 9555 d 5 0 S 90 0 2 159 1 925 9555 3 5 0 S 90 0 21 159 1 925 276 uonejouuy vuuroj Auron uenen y 10 pue seouejonpul ejqeyoeuuoo ay swous qe 1 9jisoduioo y jo Z S
177. settings DIP switch 1 7 2 The IP address is determined from the F 865x ID settings DIP switches 1 7 if the Res ID cannot be determined from the current user program s resource name and switch ID IP is activated on the F 8628X switch 1 6 ON 3 IP address of the Basic Configuration If no IP address can be determined using the Res ID or ID switch 1 6 OFF as de scribed in the first two cases the last IP address determined on this F 8628X is used F 8628X 0650 6 Parameter used in PROFIBUS DP Master to reload a redundant H41q H51q system When reloading a redundant H41q H51q system using a redundant PROFIBUS DP connec tion the PROFIBUS DP communication is stopped for a short time after switching over to the central module that was loaded first To avoid failure reactions during the reload procedure the downtime tgown must be consid ered when parameterizing the PROFIBUS DP Master s redundancy management Estimating the downtime tgown for the PROFIBUS DP Master The following formula is used for estimating the downtime tdown lt 200 ms tmaster tdown Within this time the F 8628X modules cannot communicate WDT H41q H51q system watchdog time tmaster The amount of time after loading central module 1 that the PROFIBUS DP Master requires before the F 8628X communication module can exchange data The time tmaster is at least 6 bus cycles polling cycles The user must deter mine the actual numb
178. sheets The 5 V circuits of the power supply modules in the central rack and in the additional power supply should not be switched in parallel but the GND of both power supplies has to be con nected together Availability is present because 2 of 3 power supply modules are able to gua rantee the 5 V supply All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 143 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl B 9361 0507 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 144 Wiring of the assembly kit Wirings to be done by the user refer to Assembly kit wiring diagram Supply 24 VDC Connection XG 21 22 23 2 Wire and connection Fusing Use RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 max 16 A gL PS1 PS3 XG 21 22 23 1 L 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole RD Color code red BK Color code black Table 1 Supply 24 VDC Output 5 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use XG 2 5 YE2x2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply I O subrack B 9302 XG 3 GND GN 2x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply I O subrack B 9302 to be connected with the GND of the central rack GN Color code green YE Color code yellow Table 2 Output 5 VDC for distances gt 2 m wire cross section 6 mm Output 24 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use XG 24 2 L RD 1 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply fuse monitoring and IO CON in the
179. should be utilized An angled connector might have to be removed to reach the F 8628X Ethernet interface The following table specifies the PROFIBUS connectors used within HIMA PROFIBUS Plug PHOENIX CONTACT Description HIMA Number Axial SUBCON PLUS PROFIB AX SC 52 000 9397 Angled plug with additio SUBCON PLUS PROFIB PG SC2 52 000 9394 nal PG connection Table 12 PROFIBUS connectors manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT 431 F 8628X 0650 9 432 Configurating the PROFIBUS DP slave using a PROFIBUS DP Master Via the FB interface the HIMA PROFIBUS DP slaves enables the PES to be connected with a PROFIBUS DP Using this function a PROFIBUS DP master can read and write BUSCOM variables To configure the HIMA PROFIBUS DP slave the HIMA PROFIBUS DP master must have the PROFIBUS DP configuration software This software may appear as displayed in Figure 10 The user can define variable windows There are four reading and four writing windows These windows must be configured in the parameter range parameter data within the master PROFIBUS DP configuration software see Figure 12 The PROFIBUS DP master can thus address data in accordance with standards The user data length of the PROFIBUS DP telegrams results from the window definition The PROFIBUS DP master must then parameterize and configure these telegrams for the HIMA PROFIBUS DP slave as a modular slave in accordance with the standard v
180. slot 17 The connection of the bus between the individual subracks is established at the rear side via the BV 7032 data cable To terminate the I O bus an F 7546 module is plugged in at the beginning on central subrack and at the end last I O rack 102 B 5231 H51q MS 0605 4 5 1 Construction principle of the I O bus of the system H51q MS Central module Rear central rack XD 1 2 F 7546 Central rack 5 Units high XD 3 H XD 4 _ BV 7032 Front of the I O racks Rear of the I O racks CI XD 1 rack 4Units high 7568 m Se 1 XD 2 7032 T XD 1 VO rack 4Units high F7553 XD 2 BV 7032 7 XD 1 VO rack 4Units high 7553 71 XD 2 F 7546 Set I O rack address by means of a coding switch refer to data sheet F 7553 Figure 3 Construction principle of the I O bus for system H51q MS max length I O bus max length cable BV 7032 cable BV 7032 between subracks 12m 5m max 0 5m 103 B 5231 H51q MS 0605 4 5 2 Shutdown ways in the H51q MS system In safety related systems an independent 2nd safety shutdown is necessary This is done by the watchdog signal At fault on the CPU or the I O connection the watchdog shuts down all safety related outputs bus BS al L gt bus T
181. socket protective earth terminal Note Do not use PIN1 bus terminal X1 1 and X2 1 to prevent interferences on the bus Connect the wire shield to the protective earth terminal All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 509 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl H 7506 0630 Application Programmer station PADT with RS 485 interface card RS 485 PCI u6 e6 POY ISN 9052 H Oll Oll H a H A Alb yz Alt iz d auod 1 Y Y N Bi N gt 58 Or 119 097 9 9 95 9 ii j V MIND 95 ej u5 G S g QXL QXW G G lt G g G G c Z sm 1 Z sm Ze Z sm D4 WA LX ex LX ex LX ex 5 0704 0704 g 9701 0704 5 SU Dy SU orn 19 SU SU U SY 3 xpos 3 Lavd S3d 196 4 v 298 J Lavd Id 10298 4 0298 4 10298 3 SHH SHMH H 1SH SWG LSH SSHH SH HH H b LYH SW W b LPH Figure 2 Programmer station PADT w
182. systems may not be used in Ex plants thereafter Electrical specifications concerning intrinsic safety For these specifications please refer to the EC Type Examination certificate PTB 02 ATEX 2178 enclosed In case of the parallel connection of two outputs l 2 10 20 2 23 46 mW Assembly The module is mounted in a 19 subrack The mounting position must be vertically The design of the subrack must allow heat dissipation The module is connected to the intrinsically safe field circuits via the cable plug Z 7114 Further information for assembly and installation see HIMA Manual catalog The H41q and H51q System Families 187 F 3224A 0622 1 4 1 5 1 6 188 Installation The electronic module including its connections has to be installed in a way that at least the system of protection IP 20 according to EN 60529 1991 A1 2000 is achieved e Two intrinsically safe input circuits of two F 3224A modules can be wired in parallel The reduced maximum values Co Lo due to this method of connection have to be con sidered The separation between intrinsically safe and non intrinsically safe terminals must be 2 50 mm filament dimension especially between adjacent modules The separation between adjacent intrinsically safe terminals must be gt 6 mm filament dimension Intrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe lines must be installed separately or the intri
183. the modules 3xF 7126 power supply modules 24 V 5 V 10 A PS1 PS2 PS 3 1xF7131 power supply monitoring 2xF8651X central module CU1 CU2 modules for option separate order 8621A coprocessor modules CM11 CM13 CM21 CM23 10xcommunication modules CM11 CM15 CM21 CM25 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 109 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 2 1 110 Assembly kits to be used for the I O level 9302 I O subrack 4 units high 19 inches B 9361 additional power supply 5 VDC 5 units high 19 inches The max current must be 18 A all I O modules and the modules in the central rack if 3x F 7126 are used to keep the system in operation even one power supply module F 7126 has failed Values of the current requirement 5 VDC refer to the data sheets Note Operating system resource type in ELOP Il The assembly kit is usable since operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 Resource type in ELOP II H51qe H H51qe HR Modules Central module F 8651X The central module of the PES H51q H HR contains the essential functions demonstrated in the block diagram of the central module Interfaces Displays RS 485 EM Prin I UH 1 i Setting of bus subscriber no Front Fail safe Watchdog Multiplexer voltage monitoring i i i bus logic VO bus WD
184. the output signals The operating point of the O signal read back is lt 6 5 V Up to this value the level of the O signal may arise in case of a fault and this will not be detected Switching capability of test signal and cross talking walking bit test Outputs 500 mA k short circuit proof Internal voltage drop max 2 V at 500 mA load Admissible line resistance in out 11 Q Undervoltage tripping lt 16V Operating point f short circuit current 0 75 1 5 A Outp leakage current max 350 pA Output voltage if output is reset max 1 5 V Current input WD max 30 mA Monitored switching time max 200 us Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 110 mA 24 VDC 180 mA plus load All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 225 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3330 0602 Chan Connec Chan Connec Color Color nel tion nel tion 1 b2 WH 1 b2 BN 2 b4 BN x2 WH 3 b6 GN 2 b4 YE 4 b8 YE Cable x4 GN 5 b10 GY LiYY 3 b6 PK 6 b12 PK 8 x 0 5 mm x6 GY 7 b14 BU 4 b8 RD 8 b16 RD x8 BU sh Flat pin 5 b10 VT able L 22 BK Lig A0 Bk 16 x 0 5 mm E a be 2 8 x 6 b12 WHGN 0 8 mm x12 WHBN 7 b14 WHGY 1 mm x14 WHYE 750 8 616 WHBU x16 WHPK L z2 BK Flat pin plug L 212 RD 2 8 x 0 8 mm E Lead marking of the cable plug Lead marking of the cable plug 750 mm Z 7138 3330 C Z
185. then one of the two redundant F 8627X must have a connection to its associated F 865x which in turn must be in RUN or MONO status to answer a MODBUS request with the corresponding MODBUS response If the MODBUS request cannot be passed on to an F 865x the F 8627X sends the error code back to the MODBUS master Note Processing each MODBUS Request increases the cycle time for the F 865x central module To avoid increasing the cycle time too much the F 8627X limits the minimal polling interval per MODBUS master to 50 ms Using port 502 if the recommended polling interval is ignored the MODBUS communi cation may behave as follows Should the same master send other MODBUS request within 50 ms other MOD BUS requests from the same master are received within 50 ms after a MODBUS request the F 8627X transfers last MODBUS Request from this master to the F 865x central module if the central module is not processing a MODBUS request from this master and 50 ms expired As long as the F 865x is processing a MODUBUS request from a master it will only accept another MODBUS request from this master after a minimum of 400 ms In case of a new connection the first request is passed on to the 865x after gt 50 ms Note If the MODBUS master is only connected to one F 8627X on the H41q H51q the MODBUS master must always be connected to the 8627X plugged into the left F 865x an Ethernet
186. time approx 6 ms Ambient conditions 25 60 C Degree of protection IP 20 according to IEC EN 60529 VDE 0470 part 1 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 461 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl H 4135 0530 462 The relay has a safe isolation according to DIN EN 50178 between the output contact and the input The clearance in air and the creepage distance are dimensioned for overvoltage class to 300 V Relay data Contact material Switching voltage Switching current Switching capacity AC Switching capacity DC Bounce time Life mechanical electrical Restrictions AgNi hard gold plated 25V lt 250 VAC lt 127 VDC 2 10 lt 4 lt 500 VA cos gt 0 5 lt 830 VA cos gt 0 9 up to 30 V lt 120 W up to 70 V lt 50W up to 127 V lt 25 W approx 1 ms gt 30 x 106 cycles 22 5 x 10 cycles with full resistive load and 0 1 cycles per second For SIL 3 applications according to IEC 61508 function checks have to be made within a period of three years offline proof test The replacement of components must be made only by the manufacturer regarding the valid standards and T V restrictions Mechanical design and dimensions Figure 2 Mechanical design and dimensions Cross section of connecting wires Mounting Mounting position Assembling distance lt 2 5 mm AWG 14
187. upgrade downgrade version 2 x the operating system file with extension flash must be loaded When upgrading from version 2 x to another version the user must ensure that only the correct operating system file is loaded into the corresponding module If the module F 8627X was loaded with any incorrect file the function ality of the F 8627X is lost and can not be programmed any longer with the diagnostic dialog ComEth In this case the module F 8627X must be programmed new by HIMA After upgrading to version 3 x and higher a protection mechanism is activated and only oper ating system files with extension Idb can be loaded Upgrading downgrading from version 3 x and higher To upgrade downgrade version 3 x and higher the operating system file with extension must be loaded After downgrading to version 2 x the protection mechanism prevent N ing incorrect files from being loaded is no longer active F 8627X 0650 8 2 Downloading the operating system into the F 8627X The operating system for the F 8627X module is downloaded using the diagnosis dialog ComEth Ethernet module should be closed if ComEth is not used The connection between the ComEth s control panel and the F 8627X The connection to the ComEth s diagnosis panel can remain Downgrading from version gt V4 x to version lt V3 x If the F 8627X is set to Autonegotiation Off S2 3 OFF and full duplex S2 5 ON then
188. wide banded high energy switching overvoltages surge according to IEC EN 61000 4 5 up to 1 kV on a 24 VDC power supply circuit The interferences are discharged to earth F 6214 0606 F 6214 4 channel analog input module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 for transmitters in two wire technology 4 20 mA voltage inputs 0 1 5 10 V current inputs 0 20 mA with safe isolation resolution 12 bits eo die te 1 5V GND Block diagram with single chann Z 7127 6214 88333 as 88 838 x sgg 55 55 i l 1 e Anelog GND 4 SIT IL ZN N N ZN JA Pa supply transmitter 1 2 3 4 MUX i Register F 6214 g 8 8 8 V bus el connection of passive transmitters Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Appertaining function block HA RTE 3 Input voltage Digital values Wait after test R Shunt for current input Input resistance Time const input filter Transmitter supply Short circuit current Load impedance Scan time Basis error Operating error Electric strength Space requirement Operating data 0 1 06 V appr 6 overflow 0 mV 0 1 V 3840 21 3 mA 4095 100 ms 50 0 05 96 0 125 W T 10 ppm K part no 00 0710500 1 approx 10 ms 25 V 20 V 0 22 mA 25 mA max 900 Q max 100 ms for 4 channels 0 2 at 25 C 0 3 at 0 60 C 250 V against GND 4 SU
189. with circuit breakers graphical display 4 1 2 Supply 24 VDC See also catalog H41q H51q chapter 3 3 The Input Output Level 24 VDC Supply and Distri bution Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use 24 25 2 L RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 max 16A PS1 PS2 XG 24 25 1 L BK 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole L XG 14 L BK 2 x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference see note pole L XG 6 L RD 1 mm Faston 2 8 x 0 8 max 4 see wiring dia 13 single connections slow blow gram RD Color code red BK Color code black Table 1 Supply 24 VDC Connection XG 14 To be wired to the central L bus bar with at least 2 x A 2 5 mm BK If output modules with 2 pole connection to the actors are used depending on the load up to 4 x 2 5 mm BK wiring is necessary 66 4235 H41q MS 0605 4 1 3 4 2 4 3 4 4 Supply 5 VDC The 5 VDC power supply does not have to be wired separately as it is already installed as part of the subrack The 5 VDC power is used for the CPU the control of the interfaces and the I O modules It is generated by 24 VDC 5 VDC power supply module type F 7130A The 5 VDC output voltage of the power supply module for the CPU I O and the interfaces are monitored on the central module checking undervoltage overvoltage or failure In case of a faulty power supply module the operating system of the CPU informs the user pro gram via a syst
190. without voltage feeding 1000 days at T4 25 C 200 days at 60 C It is recommended to change the buffer batteries CPU in operation modules with voltage feeding at the latest after 6 years Changing of external batteries of the systems H41q H51q 1 Battery without soldering lug CR 1 2 AA CD HIMA part no 440000019 Remove battery cap loose battery out of the holder and plug in new battery Check the po larity 2 Battery with soldering lug CR 1 2 AA CD HIMA part no 440000016 Solder battery out of holder first pole then pole At solder in check the correct polarity and first solder the pole then the pole External batteries of the systems H41q Backplane of the bus plate Dependent on the battery type changing as described above External batteries of the systems H51q Power supply monitoring module F 7131 The module can be pulled out in the energized state Then change the battery as described above Check the polarity Central modules F 8650E F 8650X F 8651E F 8651X F 8652E F 8652 8653E F 8653X Battery CR 2477N HIMA part no 44 0000018 It is recommended to change the buffer battery CPU in operation modules with voltage feed ing at the latest after 6 years or with display BATI within three months For battery change the central module has to be pulled out of the sub N rack Further informations you will find in chapter How to Insert and to Remove Modules For single
191. x 0 25 mm All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl r BV 7055 LT Edgeport 2i 175 BV 7055 0509 176 Pin RS 485 Signal Function 1 m 2 5 decoupled with diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data reference potential 6 VP 5 V positive pole of supply voltage 7 X 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole BV 7055 0509 Applications Connection to the centre of HIBUS BV 7046 BV 7046 Edgeport 2i BV 7055 X3 HIBUS 2 Figure 2 Connection to the centre of HIBUS No Position Explanation 1 ON Echo disabled 2 ON Half duplex 3 OFF no bus termination 4 OFF 5 ON 6 ON 7 OFF not used 8 OFF not used Table 2 Switch positions 8 position DIP switch By removing the data cable BV 7055 the bus is disconnected The cable must remain plugged to H 7506 if the bus is not exclusively used for programming 177 BV 7055 0509 Connection to the end of HIBUS BV 7046 BV 7046 Edgeport 2i BV 7055 X3 HIBUS 2 Figure 3 Connection to the end of HIBUS No Position Explanation 1 ON Echo disabled 2 ON Half duplex 3
192. x 106 cycles 22 5 x 10 cycles with full resistive load and 0 1 cycles per second For SIL 3 applications according to IEC 61508 function checks have to be made within a period of three years offline proof test The replacement of components must be made only by the manufacturer regarding the valid standards and T V restrictions Mechanical design and dimensions Figure 2 Mechanical design and dimensions Cross section of connecting wires Mounting Mounting position Assembling distance lt 2 5 mm AWG 14 on DIN rail 35 mm or on C profile horizontal or vertical not required H 4136 0530 TUV TUV Rheinland Group TUV Industrie Service GmbH Automation Software und Informationstechnologie ZERTIFIKAT Nr No 968 EZ 165 00 04 CERTIFICATE Pr fgegenstand Safely Related Electronic Hersteller HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Product tested System Manufacturer Albert Bassermann Stra e 28 68782 Br hl bei Mannheim Typbezeichnung Modules for Planar F System Verwendungs Safety Related Flectronic Modules for Type designation H4116 SIL 2 AK 4 zweck use in process control Burner 4135 SIL 3 AK 5 6 Intended Management BMS emergency shut 4136 SIL 3 5 6 application down where the safe state is the de energized state Pr fgrundlagen IEC 61508 Part 1 7 2000 Codes and standards forming VDE 0801 1990 and Amendment 1 1994 the basis of testing DIN V 1
193. 0 8 62208 lawwe 99 egensie prd ZOLELOOL ON IEPIO 8501 pue eiewyos 071 5 20 21002 ON Hodey SAILOWOLNV ANL ZL jo abed Bert 9665 1616 680 L 2002 90 82 65508 GQ ZOLELOOL ON J8PIO 3801 3 pue 0 UOISINSY x3 uonoeuuoo1eju ZOLELOOZ HAWS SAILLOWOLNW ANL LZZ9 4 jo oujoeje ejes jo Juawu sse z 8 Bulpeasyoeg 801 gez 2 1941 oez 9 Buipeenpoeg 921 822 82 S Bulpeaiyoeg 921 922 9 p 21 vez Bulpeaiyoeg 201 444 Z Bulpeaiyoeg 221 022 ozp Buipeenpeg 194 812 81 8 81 9 2 4 21 viz 9 noo 91 212 S Bulunseayy 01 012 01 y unseen 7 82 8p nou 81 92 9p 2 Buunseoyy vz Bulunseayy cz uonounj jnduj auviHos1naaa
194. 0051 Z SNEIH JO siequosqns uy sng Jo pug uonounj 19jeedai 104 Ajuo uo euiwa uM sng jo pug u6 e6 jeuiuue UWS 507 H 7505 0630 SUH SHAH H P LSH SYH SH YH H b LYH trt SIN IN 9 9092 i 9092 9092 H M 9092 H buzz e b qv l e b Q3 I e b qa d 16 y 26 E Eho LEN 5 NO 9 a ENO g e M No 9 V HINO ub ub ub Z SNEIH 9 5 8 g S g 9 S z z m z z m z z eX x ex Lx 2 ex 004 0701 Bos 17 uug z Ta iy X uoneoi dde y jo ou 0 o al i o 9092 H E Ip 9092 H amp vez vS 2 0 VS anna 220 eS mnm 220 S es H E a 220 CS mm n m 220 5 2 CS 220 S 50 no Wer per _ vv0L on TESTS 9 62 SU Sr a 2227 SU ven ven Wo 98 4 98 4 xgoe J WOD San viz9e 1 1298 4 viz98 4 END LAVd Figure 5
195. 1 Example 3 In this example the WORD variables in export area 0 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 1 and are mapped to the memory area EV on the F 8627X beginning with identity num ber 1 The identity numbers of the WORD variables in memory area EV are in ascending order up to the last WORD variable 0110 from export area 0 The unused BUSCOM address 0 is assigned a dummy variable and mapped to identity num ber 0 within memory area EV In this example the WORD variables in export area 1 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 4100 and are mapped to the memory area EV on the F 8627X beginning with identity number 115 The identity numbers of the WORD variables in memory area EV are in ascend ing order up to the last WORD variable 4200 from export area 1 The unused BUSCOM addresses 4096 to 4099 are assigned dummy variables and mapped to identity numbers 111 to 114 within memory area EV In this example the BOOL variables in export area 0 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 0 and are mapped to the memory area EV on the F 8627X beginning with identity num ber 216 which follows the identity number 215 of the last WORD variable from export area 0 The identity numbers of the BOOL variables in memory area EV are in ascending order up to the last BOOL variable 0100 from export area 0 In this example the BOOL variables in export area 1 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 4096 and are mapped to the memo
196. 1 7 OFF DIRECT Mode On Switch 1 7 ON Passive Mode Off Token passing to a HIMA OPC server Switch 1 8 ON Deactivate the Passive Mode in the HIMA OPC server Number of HIMA OPC servers fixed to 4 Monitoring Time for HIMA OPC server fixed to 16 ms Passive Mode On No token passing to an HIMA OPC server Switch 1 8 OFF Activate the Passive Mode in the HIMA OPC server Number of HIMA OPC servers fixed to 4 Monitoring Time for HIMA OPC server fixed to 16 ms If DIRECT Mode Off switch 1 7 is activated ON the F 8627X s settings remain Passive Mode On Activate the Passive Mode in the HIMA OPC server Up to 14 OPC servers can be used Switch S2 6 8 Monitoring Time for HIMA OPC server fixed to 6 seconds The F 8625 F 8627 X communicates with an OPC server via BUSCOM variables The F 8625 F 8627 X communicates with an OPC server via BUSCOM variables The F 8627 X communicates with an OPC server via BUS COM variables For communicating with a HIMA OPC server without Passive Mode HIPRO S variables must be sent from each PES to all other PES one data direction is suffi cient to ensure token pass ing HIPRO S dummyies may have to be configured HIPRO S variables must not be defined when com municating with a HIMA OPC server in passive mode otherwise OPC with out passive mode F 8625 from V 1 13 F 8627 X from V 2 x No restrictions specif
197. 1 9 5 3 1 71009 X821 26018 5 a sola 50 sols Tt E 1a 1 HH fd Hoa 78 910 F2 F1 F2 F1 1112 13 14 e Figure 3 Connections on the rear of the system rack 1409 451 Wiring ex works XD 1 Jumper plug Z 6007 combination of the separated buses single channel system H41q M XG 1 XG 2 Supply L for the power supply module Reference pole XG 9 L XG 3 XG 4 XG 5 Potential distributor free disposal of XG 9 L for the power supply module XG 10 Watchdog signal not active at H41 M XG 11 Watchdog signal from CU1 XG 12 Watchdog signal for I O modules not active at H41 M XG 13 Watchdog signal for modules A PE earth Connections of the additional modules Z 6011 Z 6018 Z 6013 XG 21 refer to XG 22 XG 23 wiring of the assembly kit wiring diagram 1 2 for switching off the buffer batteries G1 G2 Delivery state Buffer batteries are switched off 4 5 2 Wiring by customer 60 XG 6 1 13 14 1 13 XG 24 XG 25 L for I O modules slots 1 to 13 13 single connections see also connection XG 14 Reference potential L for modules Slots 1 13 see also conne
198. 100 m Figure 8 Redundant interconnection with switches In Figure 8 three PES are completely redundantly interconnected via two switches A third switch is connected to the redundantly interconnected PES via a redundant fibre optic connection the fibre optic interface is integrated in the switch An HIMA OPC server and fur ther Ethernet components are connected to the third switch 375 F 8627X 0650 6 4 376 MODBUS TCP slave Requirements for the MODBUS TCP slave F 865x central module beginning with OS version 05 34 F 8627XEthernet module beginning with OS version 4 x A MODBUS TCP slave is active if BUSCOM variables are existing the F 8627X is in RUN mode RUN LED on the F 8627X is lighting continuosly the associated F 865x central module is in RUN or MONO operating mode The serial MODBUS slave is still supported serial interface RS 485 on the F 865x central mod ule The MODBUS TCP slave IP address is the F 8627X IP address see chapter 5 1 A MODBUS TCP master can access the MODBUS TCP slave in the H41q H51q via the ports 502 and 8896 Via F 8627X port 502 the 865x central module operates as MODBUS TCP slave with the known functions see manual Functions of the operating system HI 800 105 Via F 8627X port 8896 the 8627X operates as MODBUS TCP slave with further MODBUS function codes Both ports 502 and 8896 share the possible MODBUS TCP connections in according with th
199. 13 B13 C13 14 R A14 B14 C14 Module 8 15 A15 B15 15 16 T A16 B16 C16 Module 9 17 U A17 B17 C17 18 A18 B18 C18 Module 10 19 W A19 B19 C19 20 X A20 B20 C20 Module 11 23 a A21 B21 C21 24 b A22 B22 C22 Module 12 25 A23 B23 C23 26 d A24 B24 C24 Module 13 27 e A25 B25 C25 28 f A26 B26 C26 Module 14 29 h A27 B27 C27 30 j A28 B28 C28 Module 15 31 k A29 B29 C29 32 1 A30 B30 C30 Module 16 33 m A31 B31 C31 34 n A32 B32 C32 Table 4 Allocation of the P F Modules 481 H 7015A 0524 482 H 7016 0507 H 7016 7016 Terminal module plug and play with Vario plug ELCO 8016 56 pins for fast and efficient wiring to the Terminal Module 7015 Vario plug ELCO 8016 2 gt gt _ _ gt gt lt 4 MO 34 44 Ol e oS NINN NN NININA ANN NIS 49 50 55 56 3 A 1 1 10 0 NY OY O 7 ln N KHNMOTNORDAR R Pee x2 Figure 1 Block diagram X4 El
200. 2 PROFIBUS Hardware compa 3 only at the end of the HIBUS 1 tible 4 since 1992 ref to planning list PLESY P V gt 1 5 RS 485 H51 The DTR signal controls the direction of the H 7505 HIBUS 1 RS 422 H7503 basic direction RS 485 gt RS 232C 5 till 1992 ref to planning list PLESY P V lt 1 4 Legend The CNTR signals of the RS 485 interface control the direc at gt switch Transmission rates 504 tion of the H 7505 basic direction RS 232C gt RS 485 Application and Setting in II Wizcon connection via Modem fiber optic cable 20 mA lt 19 200 bps 24 lt 57 600 bps RS 485 and RS 422 lt 600 000 bps Cable cross sections for power supply max cable length 250 400 530 800 1300 m 2500 m Cross section mm 0 5 0 75 1 0 1 5 2 5 4 0 H 7505 0630 41312111098 7654 3 2 1 oooooooooooooo 5 3 Figure 2 Dimensions of the housing N Legend nun _ Su K gt of the application 3383 m 4 55 white switch Lunn oZ oo a5 20 EI on 1 nS nt X NANO 5 SL yx LL 88 8 mmw cm lt 8838 97 9 9 X Szxx Sn 59 2 ANFO gt A X ee
201. 2100 0122 21202 2 2 2 21200 123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123123 456 456456456 456456456 456456 456456 456 456 456456456 e Et St i e o N e N f f i 2 E 5 5 5 5 3 3 9 9 3 9 9 3 9 9 9 o o o 789789789789789789789789789789789789789789789789 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 10 11 12 1 DR 6 1 6 1 61 8 1 Cee 1 6 1 61 CREST 6 PO 2 FO PO gt i u FZ s 123456 20000 Mam PLC cabinet Figure 5 Wiring of H 7015A with P F Motherboard H 7015A 0524 Allocation of the P F Modules to the Terminal Module H 7015A Motherboard Motherboard X1 H 7015A A B C Module 1 1 A 1 B1 C1 2 B A2 B2 C2 Module 2 3 C A3 B3 C3 4 D A4 Module 3 5 A5 B5 C5 6 F B6 Module 4 7 H B7 C7 8 J A8 B8 C8 Module 5 9 K AQ B9 C9 10 L A10 B10 C10 Module 6 11 A11 B11 C11 12 N A12 B12 C12 Module 7 13 P A
202. 24 VDC 100 mA 199 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3238 0622 The module is tested completely during operation The main test routines are Switch on and switch off capability Crosstalk on the input circuits by walking zero Functions of the input filters Correct function of the module Short circuit and wire break of the sensor line The LEDs are not tested Channel Connection Color 1 d2 WH d4 x4 BN 2 d6 GN d8 x8 YE 3 d10 GY d12 x12 PK Cable 4 d14 BU 416 16 RD 16 x 0 5 mm 5 d18 BK d20 x20 VT 6 d22 WHBN d24 24 WHGN 7 d26 WHYE d28 x28 WHGY 8 d30 WHPK d32 x32 WHBU Lead marking cable plug Z 7008 3238 gray or Z 7008 3238 ExC blue Figure 2 Connection wiring L H 1 m Switch positions 0 Signal here channel 3 5 1 Signal here channel no 5 normal operation no fault line break S short circuit 2 u 0 sw 2 Flat pin plug 2 8 x 0 8 mm Assembly cable plug Z 7204 The connections X4 to X32 are only used at special cable connectors Termination of not used inputs d2 Note Not used inputs which are connected in the HIMA function block HB RTE 3 must be terminated with a 10 kQ resistor at t
203. 25 Pin allocation Cable type Z 7025 3325 ExCn part number 93 3325101 Channel Pin Color O1 z2 WH 01 62 BN O2 z8 GN O2 b8 YE O3 214 GY Cable O3 b14 PK LiYCY O4 218 BU 6x2 0 2 mm shielded 4 b18 RD O5 z22 BK O5 b22 VT O6 228 GY PK O6 b28 RD BU Cable shield YEGN Figure 3 Pin allocation Z 7025 3325 ExCn part number 93 3325101 F3325 0622 Pin allocation Cable type 2 7025 3325 ExCn R part number 93 3325102 Channel Pin Color O1 z2 WH O1 b2 BN OR1 72 OR1 b4 YE 02 z8 GY O2 b8 PK OR2 z8 BU OR2 b10 RD O3 z14 BK O3 b14 VT OR3 z14 GY PK OR3 b16 RD BU O4 z18 WH GN 04 b18 BN GN OR4 z18 WH YE OR4 b20 YE BN O5 722 WH GY O5 b22 GY BN OR5 722 WH PK OR5 b24 PK BN O6 728 WH BU O6 b28 BN BU OR6 728 WH RD OR6 b30 BN RD Cable shield YEGN Cable LifYCY 12x2 0 2 mm shielded Figure 4 Pin allocation Z 7025 3325 ExCn R part number 93 3325102 Note In Ex applications the cable shield has to be connected to the equipo tential bonding In non Ex applications the cable shield is connected to the PE terminal bus bar on the subrack 219 F3325 0622 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 220 Operating Instructions Application The module can be used to supply Ex measuring transmitters 0 4 to 20 mA These transmit ters can be installed in potentially explosive atmospheres
204. 28X is correct by using the command route print Start the ELOP II control panel to establish a connection to the F 8628X 423 F 8628X 0650 5 2 6 2 Connection problem after exchanging an F 8628X 5 2 6 3 The ARP entry on the PC must be deleted if the new F 8628X has the same IP address as the old F 8628X Otherwise the new F 8628X with the same IP address cannot be connected to the PADT PC Example Delete the ARP entry of an F 8628X with the IP address 192 168 0 67 Start the Dos Shell on the PADT PC Enter the command arp d 192 168 0 67 Check the connection to the F 8628X using Ping Start the Dos Shell on the PADT PC Enter the command Ping 192 168 0 x Messages generated by Ping Ethernet connection is Reply from 192 168 0 x bytes 32 time lt 4ms If connection is available check the resource settings in Il Ethernet connection is not OK Request timed out Check the wiring routing entry etc Note If all steps described in this chapter have been followed and the F 8628X does not respond check if other participants can be accessed using the PC s netword card 5 2 6 4 The F 8628X determines its IP address in accordance with the following 424 priorities 1 The IP address is determined from the Resource ID Res ID of the user program that is loaded in the F 865x The Res ID of the user program always has a higher priority than the F 865x ID
205. 3 according to IEC 61508 for 1 signals or sensors with safety isolation Screen 2G re rere 10 27116 3236 03 Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable 01 16 15 14 O 13 120 09 O 08 C 07 06 05 04 O 02 U LJ O Z7116 Front cable plug plug The module is automatically fully tested during operation for safety related errors The essen tial test procedures are Cross talking of the inputs by walking zero Functions of the filter capacitors Function of the module The LEDs of the cable plug are not tested Inputs Input resistance Switching time Space requirement Operating data 1 signal 6 mA incl cable plug or mechanical contact 24 V 4 with cable plug 12 without cable plug typ 8 ms 4 SU 5 VDC 120 mA 24 VDC 200 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 193 F 3236 0530 Channel ces Color tion 1 d2 WH 2 d4 BN 3 d6 GN 4 d8 YE 5 d10 GY 6 d12 PK 7 d14 BU Cable 8 416 RD 16 0 25 mm 9 d18 BK 10 d20 VT 11 d22 WHBN 12 d24 WHGN 13 d26 WHYE 1 14 428 WHGY 750 15 d30 WHPK 16 d32 WHBU L 22 BK Flat pin plug L 712 RD 2 8
206. 3 b6 BNGN x6 GN 4 b8 BNYE x8 YE 5 b10 BNGY x10 GY 6 b12 BNPK x12 PK 7 b14 BNBU Cable x14 BU 32 x 0 38 mm 8 b16 BNRD x16 RD 9 b18 BNBK x18 BK 10 b20 GNGY x20 VT 11 b22 GNPK x22 WHBN 12 b24 GNBU x24 WHGN 13 b26 GNRD x26 WHYE 14 b28 GNBK x28 WHGY 15 b30 YEGY x30 WHPK 16 b32 YEPK x32 WHBU L z2 BK Flat pin L z12 RD plug 2 8 x 0 8 mm Lead marking of the cable plug Z 7136 3322 C 2 1mm 2 pole connection 2 750 mm Figure 4 Lead marking of the cable plug Z 7136 3322 C P2 2 pole connection 215 F 3322 0508 216 F3325 0622 F 3325 Hima O ce F 3325 6 channel supply unit Ex i Supply unit preferably used for the F 6221 module Supply of transmitters 0 4 20 mA EC Type Examination Certificate ATEX EX5 02 04 19183 035 L L N S 3325 I 1 1 al d Z 1 p lt Ki NS lt lg lt 1 v v 18 5 E t m T x9 Xl oix X g T T L 5 888 B5 38 358 ast a_i st oo one OO N 85 9 55 N 58 N SS N ee m mue Nem ee 1 e e e e 7 7025 EE 2 7025 3325 Front cable plug Figure 1 Block dia
207. 300 V The module is equipped with relays in diversity The relay amplifier is suitable for the switching of safety related circuits Thus the amplifier can be used for safety shutdowns e g to cut off the entire fuel supply for combustion plants Restrictions Forthe application it must be ensured that the module is replaced after reaching the maximum quantity of switching cycles e g 300 000 switching cycles at a rated operation 30 VDC 4 A For SIL 3 plants according to IEC 61508 function checks have to be made by the manufacturer within a period of three years for SIL 2 plants within a period of six years The replacement of components must be made only by the manufacturer regarding the valid standards and T V restrictions F 5203 0507 F 5203 F 5203 14 bit ring counter N 4 5 z a N N 27127 5203 Z7127 Front cable plug 58 N N bus Block diagram ZE counting input RE counting direction input UM change over discriminator counter NS zero setting input Figure 1 14 bit ring counter The module records fast counting pulses It can be used as a counter or discriminator Inputs 1 signal 4 mA 24 VDC Counting frequency max 5 kHz Counting range 0 16383 Space requirement 4SU Operating data 5 VDC 300 mA The ring counter is controlled via the inputs ZE RE UM NS The value
208. 34 3333 C P2 q 1mm 2 pole connection 750 mm Figure 2 Lead markings of the cable plugs 14 3333 L L4 N aS 2 7134 suggested Figure 3 2 pole connection Planning notes atthe same time only 2 channels may be operated with the max load 2 A If the load is up to max 1 A all channels may be operated at the same time 10 output modules with nominal load may be used in one I O subrack can be used in parallel without external diodes connection line up to 3 km is possible The line capacity however is N The connection of capacitive loads is not permitted A length of the limited to a maximum of 1 pF 236 F 3334 0626 F 3334 4 channel output module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 e resistive or inductive load up to 2 A 48 W lamp connection up to 25 W with integrated safety shutdown with safe isolation with line monitoring no output signal at break of the L supply bus 2 2 g N j F 3334 i 1 2 4 k AA Z 5 7 2 Wa f y ATATIA 2 2 gti acil a amp l T t tah
209. 4 Setting the decode switch on the module according to the note in data sheet of F 7553 insert and fix the module switch on the module WD switch to ON position press ACK key on the central module until message RUN appears in display Central Modules CU Remove 1 2 3 4 Remove the screws of the data cable plugs remove the data cable detach the fixing screws of the module completely they must be freely movable Separate the module from the bus board uninterruptedly by means of the ejection lever front label to prevent faulty signals in the system which can trigger a shutdown Then the module can be removed Do not touch the components of the module Watch for the ESD rules for CMOS compo nents Insert 1 2 3 Check the settings of the switches and jumpers according to the data sheet remove the fixing screws of the front plate completely until to the limit set the module onto its connector and then insert it uninterruptedly until to the stop to pre vent faulty signals in the system fix the screws plug in the data cables and fix their screws Note At redundant systems the new inserted central module must have the same operating system version as the already plugged central module If this is not the case an error message appears in the display of the new plugged central module and this module will go into the STOP state Then the corresponding operating system version mu
210. 40 Data connecting cable 153 BV 7043 Data connecting cable 155 BV 7044 Data connecting cable 157 BV 7045 Data connecting cable sen een 159 BV 7046 Data connecting cable eee 161 BV 7048 Data connecting cable 163 BV 7049 Data connecting cable tete te tute cene 165 BV 7050 Data connecting cable eee 167 BV 7051 Data connecting cable eec ee 169 BV 7052 Data connecting cable eee 171 BV 7053 Cable i antes et tunt Alena 173 BV 7055 Data connecting cable eee 175 BV 7201 Connection cable han 179 3221 16 channel input module 181 3222 8 channel input module 183 3224A 4 channel input module 185 3236 16 channel input module 193 3237 8 channel input module 195 3238 8 channel input module 199 3240 16 channel input module 209 3248 16 channel input module 211 3322 16 channel output
211. 4136 Relay in terminal block housing safety related 4 A SIL 2 Relay in terminal block housing safety related SIL 3 Relay in terminal block housing safety related operating voltage 48 VDC SIL 3 10 10 Bus Connection Modules for HIBUS H 7505 H 7506 10 11 Accessories H 7014 H 7015A H 7016 H 7017 H 7018 H 7020 RS485 PCI data signal converter V 24 20 mA 2 wire 4 wire HIBUS Bus terminal module for 2 wire buses Electronic fuses Terminal module Terminal module Shunt with low pass filter Terminal module Terminal module Interface card 47 Data Sheets 10 12 Input and Output Modules For the appertaining software function blocks refer to the description of the used operating sys tem 10 12 1 Digital Input Modules Con 328 Line Coun Base Chan Slot related Ex i require detec tact switch Control ter nels SIL 3 ment tion 450 3221 16 450 3222 8 450 3224 4 450 3236 16 e e e 450 3237 8 8 SU F 3238 8 450 3240 16 4 SU F 3248 16 e 48V 450 5203 1 e e 4 SU 5220 2 Table 7 Digital Input Modules SU spacing units width 10 12 2 Analog Input Modules safety Space Slot Voltage related Pt 100 Ex i require Type cnan detec 20 mA
212. 5 3 To ensure the redundant MODBUS communication between a H41q H51q PES and a MOD BUS master the following two methods are possible Cable redundancy Under all circumstances MODBUS communication only takes place via a single ethernet channel If the MODBUS master no longer receives a responding telegram on the active chan nel it can switch to the other channel and continue exchanging data The MODBUS master can thus switch to the redundant channel if a network segment fails e g broken ethernet cable or a faulty switch Redundancy with two Peer to Peer connections In this case the MODBUS master in use must possess the function to establish two indepen dent MODBUS Peer to Peer connections to the MODBUS slave s two F 8627X The same data are then transmitted over both ethernet connections to the two F 8627X simul taniosly The user must ensure that separate BUSCOM address ranges are used for each Ethernet channel transmitting the redundant BUSCOM variables see figure below BUSCOM IMPORT address range Channel 1 IP address 192 168 0 67 Channel 2 IP address 192 168 0 68 Figure 10 Partitioning of the BUSCOM Import address range for the redundant BUSCOM variables Note In case of port 8896 the BUSCOM variables are mapped into the F 8627X process data image The MODBUS TCP master must there fore access the BUSCOM variables using the identity numbers see Chapter 7 The logic of the user program must ensu
213. 546 plugged B 5232 1 BV 7032 data connecting cable plugged 5232 1 2 Bus termination module F 7546 plugged Watchdog supply for module Z 6013 Watchdog supply for module Z 6013 Connection external buffer battery on module F 7131 Ground GND for connection external buffer battery L for power supply 24V Reference potential L Connections of the additional modules see assembly kit wiring diagram XG 24 XG 25 XG 26 Wiring by customer XG 1 2 4 XG 1 9 11 XG 2 XG 3 XG 21 XG 22 XG 23 Z 6013 Z 6018 Watchdog signal for I O modules Monitoring power supplies PS1 PS3 by F7131 for external ex amination Connection 5 VDC for I O subrack Ground GND for supply 5 VDC Supply 24 V via module Z 6011 see assembly kit wiring diagram L L 117 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 4 7 Supply I O racks Assembly kit wiring diagram XG 2 XG 3 5V GND 4 ono 3 Connection for external backup battery 14128 2 Power supply monitoring l 5 PS3 x e Ps2 e x e Pst F 8651X amp Watchdog CU2 e WD os to the I O rack F 7131 E SN N S S N PS1 PS2 PS3 Cuz F7126 7126 7126 GND 8651 4 3 Watchdog CU1 WD E to the I O rack e e 1 CU1 XG 1 XG 4 1 2 3 6 5 1 2 3
214. 6 7 oW A Switch no Switch no Stationno 1234 5 Stationno 1234 5 64 Ora 72 Ora WR PN 5 oM uu A 66 or M ma 74 or M Aa 67 oM a 75 AA 68 oua 76 OB M co oA RR 70 ore AA k 78 or MR 7 SNR 79 Position switch no oW u Legend Staton ro m Positions white switch n i T AL Bit is set 9 omg White switch in 98 e B position OFF 99 oA Setting of the transmission rate with switch S1 8 On Off 454 12 567 8 34 BB 6 H 51 8 ON 9600 bps Off 12345678 H 51 8 OFF 57600 bps F 8653X 0606 Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole For the serial interface only the bus station no 1 31 can be set Within an Ethernet network the bus station no can be set from 1 to 99 Therefore the switches S1 6 7 must be set in addition to the switches S1 1 2 3 4 5 The number of the communication partners within a network is still limited to 64 This enhanced setting the bus station no is only po
215. 6214 C U1V Rap Rap2 2 na Value 50 Q 0 05 3 3 5 NS part no 00 0710500 00 0471332 r4 F 6214 Channel 1 Figure 11 Voltage input 0 1 V Voltage input 0 5 V Resistors for channels 1 4 Rap terminating re Rab sistor for not used channels 4 Z112716214 C U5V z rt Resi R01 03 05 R02 04 06 Rap stor 07 08 9 g Da e m Value 42 2 162 kO 1 MO F 6214 196 1 5 part 00 0751423 00 0751164 00 0471105 no Channel 1 Figure 12 Voltage input 0 5 V 276 F 6214 0606 Voltage input 0 10 V Rab l Resistors for channels 1 4 Rap terminating re sistor for not used channels I x4 1 Z7127 6214 C IU10V L R02 R01 Resi R01 03 05 R02 04 06 R a stor 07 08 ab N N ee Value 38 3 332 kQ 1 E F 6214 s part 00 0751383 00 0751334 00 0471105 Channel 1 Figure 13 Voltage input 0 10 V Connection of smart transmitters Programmer ior Tans Resistors for channels 1 4 Rap terminating resistor for not used channels PG 4 Not to apply in case of single chnl connect EDT P Resi R01 03 R02 04 R stor 05 07 06 08 ab 7 5
216. 7 Concepts of the Safety Switch Off at H41q 8 The Input Output Level 9 24 VDC Supply and Distribution 9 LUDERE DE 10 ATEX EX Mod iot rra e ete ER ERR Ra RR RR 10 Safety Related Output Modules for SIL 10 Special Features of the Output Modules 10 System Voltage 24 VDE utes ben 11 The H51q System Family 13 Overview Assembly Kits H51q 13 Concepts of the Safety Switch Off at H51q 14 The Input Output Level enne 16 The VO Subrack zoe ae is in 16 24 VDC Power Supply and Distribution 16 5 Distrib tiOD 2 ic cod snes tev tero nr ee ere hin 17 Extension of the 5 VDC Power Supply 17 The WO BUS cc E 18 VO Modules en nce tret ERR Ut bred Has 18 ATEXLIEX EMOAULBS be rae ri ah 18 Safety Related Output Modules for SIL 18 Special Features of the Output Modules 19 System Voltage 24 VDO nee IHE tiae 19 InRLBICE 21 Mechanical Design 3 adeo et
217. 7 0174169 Table 3 Internal fuses Connections of the WD to H41q HRS B 4237 2 Connection Procedure XG 12 and XG 13 Remove override between both connections Table 4 Connections of the WD Backplane bus Central module CU and I O modules are connected via the backplane bus The jumper plug Z 6007 on connection XD 1 combines the separated I O buses For the single channel system this is mandatory H41q HS With redundant I O bus H41q HRS the jumper plug Z 6007 at the backplane of the subrack is not installed 83 4237 1 2 H41q HS HRS 0605 4 6 Connections on the rear a 3 XG 4 XG 5 xo2xci 0 es 9 on on XG 6 O s2 1 C Z 6007 XG 9 XG 10 11 a XG 12 XG gj 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 HIMA H41 L 1 E 3 4 2 4 71009 L 13 11 5 7 5 1 XG 21 Z 6018 4 SF sol 4 P sola 598 1 2 456 LEE B fad 13714 F2 1 F2 1 4 HL EL Figure 3 Co
218. 7138 3330 C P2 2 pole connection Figure 2 Lead markings of the cable plugs 1 _ l d __ 3330 _____ ___ g 8 _ amp mr 08 Z 7138 d _ lt _ lt 12 L reg with inductive load Figure 3 2 pole connection Note The safety related outputs can be connected via the electronic fuses 226 ofthe module H 7014 500 mA Detailed information is available from the appertaining data sheet F 3330 0602 Planning notes 10 output modules with nominal load may be used in one I O rack canbe used in parallel without external diodes for lamp load 4 W to 10 W please refer to following sketch 47Q 5W Part no 011086479 Figure 4 Connection of a lamp load The connection of capacitive loads is not permitted A length of the connection line up to 3 km is possible The line capacity however is limited to a maximum of 1 uF 227 F 3330 0602 228 F 3331 0626 F 3331 8 channel output module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 e resistive or inductive load up to 500 mA 12 W lamp connection up to 4 W with integrated safety shutdown with safe isolation with line monitoring no output signal at break of the L supply bus 2 6 E aD
219. 74 2 720 13 26 TC3 722 PK 14 z8 BU TC4 224 RD 15 210 TC5 726 VT 16 212 TC6 228 RD BU 7 214 WH GN I7 d14 BN GN 18 216 WH YE 18 916 YE BN Cable screen YEGN Channel 7 and 8 have no supply Note 318 The grounds 11 to 18 on the module are taken together to one ground The signals 11 to 18 may only be interconnected on the module No external joints are allowed In Ex applications the cable shield has to be connected to the equipo tential bonding In non Ex applications the cable shield is connected to the PE terminal bus bar on the subrack F 6221 0625 Cable LIYCY 16x2 x 0 2 mm screened Cable type 2 7063 6221 ExCn U1V part no 93 6221 100 Z 7063 6221 ExCn l part no 93 6221 105 Channel Connection Color Channel Connection Color 11 22 WH TC1 z18 WH GY 11 d2 BN 11 d2 GY BN 12 74 2 720 WH PK 12 4 12 4 PK BN 13 26 GY TC3 722 WH BU 13 d6 PK 13 d6 BN BU 14 z8 BU TC4 z24 WH RD 14 d8 RD 14 d8 BN RD 15 210 TC5 z26 WH BK 15 910 VT 15 910 BN BK 16 212 GY PK TC6 728 GY GN 16 912 RD BU I6 d12 YE GY 17 214 WH GN TC7 730 I7 d14 BN GN I7 d14 YE PK 18 216 WH YE TC8 732 GN BU 18 916 YE BN 18 d16 YE BU Cable screen YEGN Cable screen YEGN Channels 11 to 18 for input signal measuring Note Cha
220. 7X into the Ethernet network and vice versa Special features of the central module Self education from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 ELOP II TCP from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 Further informations about the bus station no ELOP II TCP loading of operating systems and application programs self education et al corresponding to the central module you will find in the data sheet of the F8627X as well as the operating system manual of H41q H51q and the safety manual of H41q H51q Before removing a central module its fixing screws must be completely loosened and freely movable Remove the module from the bus board by pushing the ejection lever front label top down and quickly remov ing in an upward motion to ensure that faulty signals are not triggered within the system To attach the module place it on the terminal block and press it inwards as far as it will go This action should be performed quickly to ensure that faulty signals are not triggered within the system 447 F 8651X 0606 Function of the ejection lever with front label Push ejection lever top down U Withdraw module Front plate Front plate Figure 2 Function of the ejection lever Diagnostic display of the central module Four digit alphanumerical display two LEDs for the general display of errors CPU for the central modules IO for the testable input output modules two toggle switch
221. 7X with the same IP address Example Delete the ARP entry of a F 8627X with the IP address 192 168 0 67 Start the Dos Shell on the PC Enter the command arp 192 168 0 67 407 F 8627X 0650 9 408 Recommended literature 1 Safety Manual H41q H51q HIMA GmbH Co KG Bruehl 2005 HI 800 013 2 Functions of the Operating System H41q H51q HIMA GmbH Co KG Bruehl 2005 HI 800 105 3 Online Help in ELOP II GmbH Co KG Bruehl 2005 4 First Steps II HIMA GmbH Co KG Bruehl 2001 HI 800 000 5 HIMA OPC server 3 0 Rev 2 GmbH Co KG Bruehl 2004 F 8628X 0650 F 8628 F 8628X F 8628X PROFIBUS DP slave module Communication Module for PROFIBUS DP Communication Application in H41q H51q PES beginning with OS41q 51q V7 0 7 9906 Appertaining Function block HK COM 3 plugs 2 T HIMA F 8628X switch 1 switch 2 Figure 1 Communication module F 8628X 1 Technical data Processor 32 Bit Motorola CPU MPC860T with integrated RISC communi cation controller Operating voltage 5VDC 1A Space required 3 HU units high 4 SU units width Serial interface FB With PROFIBUS DP slave module Conn
222. 8652X F8627X N F8652X F8627X F7130A F7130A 281 04 KB1 CM1 ZB2 CU2 2 KB2 CM2NGI PSIING2 PS2 H41g HRS B 4237 2 Option Figure 1 Front view 1 Parts of B 4237 1 2 assembly kit H41q HS HRS system e 1xK 1409 system rack 5 HU 19 inches with cable tray with four fan modules 9212 hinged receptacle for the label and backplane Z 1009 On the rear buffer batteries G1 G2 additional modules on the rear e 2x2Z6011 decoupling and fusing to feed the power supply modules 1xZ6018 fan run monitoring and fuse monitoring 2x2Z6013 decoupling and fusing for the supply voltage of the WD signal 1x2Z6007 jumper plug combination of the separated buses single channel sys tem H41q HS B 4237 1 includes the modules 2x F 8652X central module CU1 CU2 2 7130A power supply module 24 V 5 VDC PS1 PS2 The 5 V outputs of both power supplies are switched in parallel Modules for option separate order 2x F 8621A coprocessor module F 8621A CM2 2x communication modules CM1 CM2 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 79 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 4237 1 2 H41q HS HRS 0605 2 1 80 e g F 8627X Ethernet or F 8628X Profibus DP H41q HS B 4237 1 max 13 IO modules slots 1 13 e H41q HRS B 4237 2 7 10 modules slots 1 7 related to central
223. 9250 1994 DIN VDE 0116 1989 prEN 50156 1 CDV 2000 EN 60664 1 2003 EN 50178 1997 EN 298 1994 8501 1997 NFPA 8502 1999 EN 61000 6 2 2000 EN 61000 6 4 2002 Pr fungsergebnis The modules are suitable for safety related applications up to SIL 2 Test results or SIL 3 61508 RC 4 5 6 DIN V 19250 Besondere Bedingungen For the use of the Planar F Modules the Safety Manual the User Specific requirements Manual and the actual revision of Ihe official list of product documentation hardware modules and software components released by and Rheinland have to be considered Der Pr fpericht Nr 968 EZ 165 00 04 vom 2004 04 14 ist Bestandteil dieses Zertifikates Der Inhaber eines f r den Pr fgegenstand g ltigen Genehmigungs Ausweises ist berechtigt die mit dem Pr fgegenstand berein stimmenden Erzeugnisse mit dem abgebildeten Pr fzeichen zu ver sehen last report no 968 2 165 00 04 dated 2004 04 14 is an integral part of this certificate Ihe holder of a valid licence certificate for tne product tested is authorised to affix the test mark shown opposite to products which are identical with the product tested T V Industrie Service GmbH Gesch ftsfeld ASI Automation Software und Informationstechnologie Am Grauen Stein 51105 K ln 2 Lut 2004 04 14 Postfach 91 09 51 51101 K ln A Datum Date OE Stream 102 A iid Pha ceni Dres T V Rheinland Firmenstempe
224. ADT PC connected to the PES is displayed in the control panel s Communication field Is the PADT PC network card located in the same subnet 1 Determining the IP address of the PADT PC network In MS Windows open the settings of the PADT network connections from the PADT Select the network card used for connecting to the F 8627X Select properties of the internet protocoll Ifthe network card is not located in the same F 8627X subnet 192 168 0 x follow step 2 for creating a connection fthe network card is located in the same subnet but no connection is available check the connection using the function Ping specified in Chapter 5 2 6 3 2 Establishing a network connection between a PC and an F 8627X if they are located in different subnets First method Change the IP address of the PC network card in use Inthe properties of the TCP IP connection enter a free IP address which is located in the same subnet as the F 8627X 192 168 0 x Second method Create a routing entry to the F 8627X on the PC Start the Dos Shell on the PC Enter the following command route add IP address F 8627X mask 255 255 255 255 IP address PC Note To ensure the routing entry remains permanent e g after the PC is restarted use the p parameter with the route command Example route p add Check if the routing entry for connecting the PC network card to the F 8627X is correct by using the command
225. B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole BV 7048 0508 BV 7048 BV 7048 Data connecting cable Connection of the interface converter H 7505 to the interface in the redundant H41q H51q systems Standard length 4 m bigger lengths on request X3 X1 MIN D plug MIN D plug 9 pole 9 pole CPU CPU 2 MIN D plug 9 pole H 7505 Figure 1 Wiring 1 9 1 7505 Central Central module module Type of used cable LifYCY 3 x 2 x 0 08 mm All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 163 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7048 0508 164 Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole BV 7049 0508 BV 7049 BV 7049 Data connecting cable Connection of interfaces in the redundant H41q H51q systems to PC 485 PCI interface card or optical fibre FO Standard length 4 m bigger lengths on request HIMA HIMA X3 MIN D plug MIN D plug 9 pole 9 pole PC 485 PCI or FO 2 MIN D plug 9 pole ETE EE ETE Figure 1 Wiring
226. C lt Data version Ox13ac Area version 0x13ac Code version 0x13ac Run version 0x13ac gt 381 F 8627X 0650 The following ReadDevice ID Codes are supported 1 Read Basic device identification stream access 2 Read regular device identification stream access 3 Read extended device identification stream access 4 Read one specific identification object inidividual access For further information about MODBUS TCP refer to Modbus Application Protocol Specifica tion www modbus org Note The function codes 03 04 and 16 support data type Word 2 bytes and any other data types The interpretation of the two MODBUS mas ter request parameters start address number is done as follows Start address describes the index of the first variable to be transmitted Number determines the size of the area to be transmitted 2 number bytes must be transmitted provided the area ends directly at a variable boundary 6 4 5 Error codes 382 Error code Description 0x01 Invalid Code If MODBUS TCP master sends a telegram with an unknown function code MODBUS TCP slave responds with error code 0x01 invalid code 0x02 Invalid Data If MODBUS TCP master s telegram does not match with the MODBUS TCP slave s configuration e g the request telegram does not end even at a variable border MODBUS TCP slave responds with error code 0x02 invalid data 0x03 Invalid Value If MODBUS TCP m
227. CON Sh VO rack 4Units high F 7553 ee L XD 2 To 1st I O bus BV 7032 IO CON xD 2 2nd I O bus EXE XD 1 Mr VO rack 4Units high E7459 gt TUNE 128 22 ist I O bus Se IO CON IER VO rack 4Units high F 7553 xD 2 L J To 2nd I O bus 7546 Set rack address by means of a coding switch refer to data sheet F 7553 Figure 3 Wiring of the redundant I O bus max length of I O bus 12m max length cable BV 7032 5m 137 B 9302 0507 2 Wiring of the assembly kit connections Wirings to be done by the user 21 Supply 24 VDC Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 7 L RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 16AgL F 7133 slot 21 XG 8 L RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 16AgL F 7133 slot 20 XG 9 L RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 16AgL F 7133 slot 19 XG 10 L RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 16AgL F 7133 slot 18 RD Color code red Table 1 Supply 24 VDC 2 2 Output 24 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use XG 3 L RD 1 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 from central rack and to further I O racks XG 11 L BK 2 x 2 5 mm Reference pole L Faston 6 3 x 0 8 see note RD Color code red BK Color code black Table 2 Output 24 VDC Note To be wired to the central L bus bar with at least 2 x 2 5 mm BK If output modules with 2 pole connecti
228. Calculating of the monitoring time for H41qe H51qge with HIPRO S and 20 communication partners Step 1 Calculating the maximum transmission time T max 20 communication partners 4 HIMA OPC server fixed configuration gt NP 24 Tmax NP NP 100 Tmax 576 24 100 Tmax 700 ms Note In HIPRO S DIRECT mode Tmax is not calculated but it must be set up via DIP switches 1 1 5 see Chapter 4 1 F 8627X 0650 Step 2 Calculating the HIPRO S source target resource Calculating the Watchdog Time WDegoyrce from the source resource Note the maximum PES cycle time CT in RUN status which is displayed on the control panel of the HIPRO S source resource e g 100 ms Note the datasize D in kByte Data Size without SI Data from the source resource which is displayed by the II Compiler e g 2 kByte Calculate the Watchdog Time WDesource for the source resource WDegource 1 5 D 5 5 WDesource 100 1 5 2 5 5 WDesource 161 ms Calculating the Watchdog Time 0 from the target resource Note the maximum PES cycle time CT in RUN status which is displayed on the control panel of the HIPRO S target resource e g 150 ms Note the datasize D in kByte Data Size without SI Data from the target resource which is displayed by the II Compiler e g 1 5 kByte Calculate the Watchdog Time WDerarger for the target resource
229. Configure the input fields as follows Enter any unique name for the F 8628X e g CU1CM1 in the input field n the input field IP address enter the IP address of the F 8628X module into which the operating system is to be loaded For determining the IP address of the F 8628X module see Chapter 5 1 The view box IP address PC displays all IP addresses of the available PADT PC network cards Select the IP address of the network card to be used for creating the conection to the F 8628X module Note OS versions V4 x The PADT PC IP address must be located in the same subnet as the F 8628 module have an IP address from 192 168 0 201 up to 192 168 0 254 If several network cards are available on the PADT PC a corre sponding routing entry must be set for the network card which is used for connection to the F 8628 OS versions gt V4 x Any free IP address for the PADT may be used If the PADT IP addresses of the PADT and the F 8628X are located in different sub nets a routing entry for the subnet of the F 8628X is required on the PADT PC Select Control Panel in the context menu of the new 8628X to open the Control Panel Select PADT gt Connect in the control panel to create a connection to the F 8628X module 437 F 8628X 0650 438 module exists or if the redundant module does not have any connec N The next step causes a communication loss if no redundant F 8628X tion
230. Council Directive 94 9 EC for equipment and protective Systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres with the identification number 0123 T V PRODUCT SERVICE GMBH Zertifizierstelle Ridlerstrasse 65 D 80339 M nchen 304 F 6220 0625 pic H 0 9 07 yod Indus H t 0 90 01 pod BUS Jo ejqejoeuuoo 3rd 0 71 50 HodindurjEJ Aes pue 8uo Jo ii d xaa Pil H 89 0 0 9 uod jndul jayesed jo pod 500 jo eouejonpur dri 52 0 0 91 95 x33 pod yndu 5A jo pod yndu 506 jo pue SUG Jo LES ari z o gt 1 z o euy pojsi spod pue euo pue soyoedes Joy 1415 991 eougjonpur Jojoedeo gi jeuueys ejdno ouneuj 20 uod 3nduj 1 2 39lAM3S 1 MAL LEO 8L6L 20 00 SX3 uoneulwexg 03 x puaddy
231. D 3 Plug in cable BV 7032 of the 2nd I O rack to the 2nd I O bus Table 8 I O bus H51q HRS B 5233 2 127 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 4 5 3 Systems H51q HS HRS For the I O rack the connection to the I O bus is made via a coupling module F 7553 installed in slot 17 The connection of the bus between the individual subracks is established at the rear side via the BV 7032 data cable To terminate the I O bus an F 7546 module is plugged in at the beginning on central subrack and at the end last I O rack 4 5 4 Construction principle of the I O bus of the system H51q HS Central module 1 Rear central rack XD 10 4 H XD 2 Co _ COLL a ie Central rack 5 Units high BV 7032 XD 4 F 7546 BV 7032 Front of the I O racks Rear of the I O racks 1 VO rack 4Units high Fm pee 1 XD 2 7032 1 XD 1 1 rack 4Units high Em Ima E XD 2 BV7032 1 XD 1 lO CCON p VO rack 4Units high F7553 XD 2 F 7546 Set I O rack address by means of a coding switch refer to data sheet F 7553 Figure 4 Construction principle of the I O bus for system H51q HS max length I O bus 12m max length cable BV 7032 5m cable BV 7032 between subracks max 0 5 m 128 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 4 5 5 Construction principle of the I O bus of the system H51q HRS
232. Devices 40 Testing in the Input Output Subracks nn 41 Switching on the HIMA 3 c aaa 41 Starting the Communication between Programming Device and PES 41 Maintenance ana 41 Exchange of the Buffering Batteries 42 rinnen en 43 Faults in the Central 43 Faults in the Input Output 43 Faults in the Coprocessor and Communication Modules 44 Repair of 44 Service Training and 44 Data SOG C eR 45 Assembly Kits er D nei Henn 45 Data Connection Cables 45 Central Modules ee e e TR enr 46 Power Supplies 25 e oS e med IE reed 46 Current Distribution Modules and Drawers 46 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 12 1 10 12 2 10 12 3 10 12 4 10 13 10 13 1 10 13 2 10 13 3 10 13 4 10 13 5 10 13 6 Table of Contents Additional Devices for Power Supply 46 Modules for I O Bus Coupling eer pte cete 47 Communication Modules seriellen seen 47 Relays in Terminal Block Housing eee 47 Bus Connection Modules for HIBUS 47 PACCESSOM
233. Distribution Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 24 25 2 L RD 2 5 mm2 Faston 6 3 x 0 8 max 16 A PS1 PS2 XG 24 25 1 L BK 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole L XG 14 L BK 2 x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole L see note XG 6 L RD 1 2 Faston 2 8 x 0 8 4 see wiring diagram 13 single connections slow blow RD Color code red BK Color code black Table 1 Supply 24 VDC 2 5 mm BK If output modules with 2 pole connection to the actors are Connection XG 14 be wired to the central L bus bar with at least 2 x used depending on the load up to 4 x 2 5 mm BK wiring is necessary 74 4236 1 2 H41q H HR 0605 4 4 3 Supply 5 VDC 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 The 5 VDC power supply does not have to be wired separately as it is already installed as part of the subrack The 5 VDC power is used for the CPU the control of the interfaces and the I O modules It is generated by 24 VDC 5 VDC power supply module type F 7130A The subrack is equipped with two power supply modules The power supply modules are switched in parallel If one of them fails the other supplies the PES The 5 VDC output voltage of the power supply module for the CPU I O and the interfaces are monitored on the central module checking undervoltage overvoltage or failure In case of a faulty power supply module the operating system of the CPU informs the user pro gra
234. F 3238 8 channel input module Ex i safety related T V certified according to IEC 61508 for applications up to SIL 3 for the connection of safety related proximity switches P F proximity switches according to EN 60947 5 6 NAMUR and contacts with resistor network for intrinsically safe circuits Ex i with sensor supply with safe isolation monitoring of the lines for short circuit and line break EC Type Examination certificate PTB 03 ATEX 2031 or Z 7008 3238 08 07 06 O 05 04 02 O Z 7008 Front cable plug N bus 230 5V N left position right position left position Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Appertaining function block HB RTE 3 Switching time Switching threshold Wire break Short circuit Line impedance Line length Supply voltage Us Shunt R Space requirement Operating data All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice approx 10 ms O signal 0 35 lt Ig 1 2 mA 1 signal 2 1 lt lg lt 6 0 mA lt 0 28 mA 26 5 mA lt 50 acc EN 60947 5 6 2000 lt 1000 m 0 5 mm approx 8 2 V 6810 8 SU 5 VDC 150 mA
235. Figure 3 Connecting the inputs of the H 7014 in parallel The outputs of the F 3330 and the H 7014 can be used in redundancy CHK Figure 4 Connecting the outputs of the F 3330 and H 7014 in redundancy For the use of two electronic fuses H 7014 their outputs must be decoupled by means of ex ternal diodes 475 H 7014 0507 476 7015A 0524 H 7015A 7015A Terminal module plug and play with a 56 pins Vario plug ELCO 8016 Code 1 1 forfast and efficient wiring to the Terminal Module H 7018 compatible with modules from other manufacturers see applications Vario plug ELCO 8016 z mOQuuroxaZzacoc2 2x wuo00000 cox tcao e 2 2x 208uvIagz4 0 TiO OR A YM TWO Tt 0 0 mim 6 aa aaa al MO 00 OTS SE SE SE SEL SE SE SE SE 1O ww 0 wo oo ee 0 0 D4 D3 eesee e elezesse e 29 of 0 0 19 z al 2 ZN EEREBEE 2222328 S
236. Front plate Figure 2 Function of the ejection lever Diagnostic display of the central module Four digit alphanumerical display two LEDs for the general display of errors CPU for the central modules IO for the testable input output modules two toggle switches to request detailed error information push button ACK resets the error indication in failure stop ACK behaves like restarting the system For further information on the diagnostic display and lists of error codes refer to the documen tation Functions of the operational system BS 41q 51q also on ELOP II CD Notes for start up and maintenance Lifetime of the buffer battery without voltage feeding 1000 days at TA 25 C 200 days at TA 60 C It is recommended to change the buffer battery CPU in operation at the latest after 6 years or with display BATI within three months Lithium battery e g type CR 2477N HIMA part no 44 0000018 Check the bus station no and transmission rate at switch 51 for correct settings Important When upgrading an F 8652 to an F 8652X module the fan concept has also to be changed 452 F 8653X 0606 F 8653X 8653X Central module Use in the PES H41q M H ba m Figure 1 View Microprocessor Clock frequency Memory per microprocessor Operating System User program Data Interfaces Diagnostic display Shutdown on fault Constructio
237. HBK 1 74 BN 1 74 4 4 BN d10 WH d10 WH 2 z8 YE 2 z8 x8 x8 YE 210 GN z10 GN 3 212 PK 3 212 12 12 PK d14 GY d14 GY Cable 4 z16 RD 4 z16 16 16 RD 20 x 0 25 mm 214 BU 214 BU screened 5 720 5 720 20 20 VT d18 BK d18 BK 6 z24 WHGN 6 224 x24 x24 WHGN z18 WHBN z18 WHBN 7 z28 WHGY 7 z28 x28 x28 WHGY d22 WHYE d22 WHYE T 8 232 WHBU 8 232 d q 1mm x32 x32 WHBU 722 WHPK 722 WHPK Flat L d26 BK L d26 BK plug L 430 RD L d30 RD 172 8 x 0 8 mm Cable screen YEGN Cable screen YEGN 2420 mm 7 2 5 mm Flat pin plug 6 3 x 0 8 mm to be connected to the earth bar under the slot Lead marking cable plug Lead marking cable plug to connect smart Z 7127 6216 C IT to connect current voltage transmitters 2 712716216 1 Figure 2 Lead marking cable plug Note to voltage inputs Note It is recommended to short circuit unused voltage inputs in the cable plug or on the appertaining terminal row 286 F 6216A 0541 Current inputs Measuring range 0 4 20 mA Current 12 bit 2 4095 2 21 3 mA 21 3 mA 20 mA 4 mA Figure 3 Current inputs Smart transmitter P f Smart smet trenemitier Trans Z 7127 6216 UT 16 115 i Roe noi g 6216 3840 4095 Resolution digit R01 R03 R05 R07 R09 R11 R13 R15 50 Q 0 05 96 R02 R04 R08 R10 R12 R14 R16 220 Q 0 5 W 5 96 Part n
238. Jeuueuo ce Geee d zZ tc Q S 951 eBeyoA jueuno 1 9 7 Jeuueuo 1229 4 jeuueyo vus 5 0 gt 5 0 gt L L229 4 l 2 4 9558 d ctc 9 6 9 c jndino Juano an C VC L 9 5 1229 4 jeuueyo LL Vus 9 0 gt G 0 5 L 1229 4 l 2 4 L 968 cec 9 97 997 leuueuo jndino L AU ul A eBeyo Jeuueuo Juano Jeuueuo sjeuueyo eajeinwng 94 Jo Jo jequinN Jeuueuo jueueA ANVIHISLNIGANS 331 F 6221 0625 ZL ZL aed Xe 9562 1616 680 uogeioL 00 amp 90 82 62208 59 TON ISPIO 350 pue eue jog xg uonoeuuoojeju 2011002 3ALLOWOLNY ANL WARS ee D Ag JeBeueuu joefoud 380 pue Wi PPNS ANL H8IN9 3ALLOWO LOV ANL Ajesys wissad sem Jewod eu 9 dnoJ6
239. KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3222 0524 Channel Connection Color 1 d2 WH d4 BN 2 d6 GN d8 YE 3 d10 GY d12 PK 4 d14 BU d16 RD Cable 5 d18 BK 16 x 0 5 mm d20 VT 6 d22 WHBN d24 WHGN 7 d26 WHYE d28 WHGY 8 d30 WHPK d32 WHBU Lead marking cable plug Z 7108 32221 C Figure 2 Lead marking cable plug Function table Input Input current Control channel d4 42 1 l in mA D32 d30 0 H signal L signal 184 F 3224A 0622 3224 3224A 4 channel input module for intrinsically safe circuits Ex i with safety isolation for proximity switches according to EN 60947 5 6 NAMUR and contacts with wire break monitoring EC Type Examination Certificate PTB 02 ATEX 2178 proximity switches contacts Rg 2 71141 3224 01 02 03 04 er m YANI 5855 5445 5449 1 i e 1 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 1 04 03 02 1 Z 7114 3224A Front ee 88 a 9 8 pg 5 l O BUS le Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Switching point 1 65 mA x 0 2 mA at 8 2 V Switching current difference approx 0 2 mA Switching time approx 10 ms Proximity switch supply 7 7 9V Resistor Rp 8 2 up to 15 Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 5 mA
240. MA Service Training and Hotline Appointments can be made with the Service Department concerning start up testing or mo difying of the control cabinets dates as well as the extent of the work to be done HIMA makes special trainings based on the current training program for its software programs and the hardware of the PES This training usually takes place at HIMA Please ask for the training program as well as for the dates of the internal trainings at HIMA We also offer training on site on the customer s premises On request the trainings can be ar ranged also as external or special trainings Important phone numbers and email addresses HIMA reception Phone 049 06202 709 0 Fax 049 06202 709 107 email info hima com HIMA hotline Phone 049 06202 709 258 or 255 Fax 049 06202 709 199 email hotline hima com Further contact persons at HIMA you will find at HIMA homepage www hima com Data Sheets 10 10 1 Data Sheets In the second part you can find the data sheets for the assembly kits the data connection ca bles and the modules in alphanumerical order The following lists and tables gives you an over view Assembly Kits B 4234 B 4235 B 4236 1 B 4236 2 B 4237 1 B 4237 2 B 5230 B 5231 B 5232 1 B 5232 2 B 5233 1 B 5233 2 B 9302 B 9361 System H41q M 19 inches 5 HU System H41q MS 19 inches 5 HU System H41q H 19 inches 5 HU System H41q HR 19 inches 5 HU System
241. MB Degree of utilization depending on operating system version Two serial interfaces RS 485 with electric isolation Four digit matrix display with selectable information Safety related watchdog with output 24 V loadable up to 500 mA short circuit proof Two European standard PCBs one PCB for the diagnostic display 8 SU 5V 2A 445 F 8651X 0606 Setting of the bus station no via switches S1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Switch no Stationno 12345 16 orm 7 18 ora M RM 19 GRE 20 Sram A kA 21 22 ore AAA AA Switch no Stationno 12345 48 49 50 oua 51 GM 52 or MR M 53 oma ua 5 ore AAA 55 AAPA Switch no Stationno 12345 mM en 2 org Ma oM Maa 94 Oum 85 oM Maa 86 oum maf
242. N 60947 5 6 2000 Special cable plug 27108 3237 102 mono connection HIMA order no 93 3237102 At redundant connection of proximity switches NAMUR according to EN 60947 5 6 the fol lowing redundant special cable plug must be used 27108 3237 W R1 S209 with resistors R1 R8 390 for NAMUR proximity switches Z7108 3237 Cx R2 S209 HIMA order no 93 3237 209 Between the plug R2 and R1 see Figure 4 the connections are configured as single cores Note If using the special cable plug for Namur proximity switches in the safe ty loop module proximity switch the SIL level may be reduced to that of the proximity switch 197 F 3237 0622 R a Q RI Resistors R RT R1 R8 390 R 8 R R Are R Figure 5 Cable connector Z 7108 special design for NAMUR Termination of not used inputs Note Not used inputs which are connected in the HIMA function block HB RTE 3 must be terminated with a 10 kQ resistor at the input of the module Thereby line error messages of the not used input channels are eliminated see following scheme ok ok Example Channel 1 and channel 5 not used Termination of channel 1 connections d2 d4 and nm channel 5 connections 418 420 each with 10 d2 d4 18 20 1 channel 5 Figure 6 Resistor circuit for the inputs 198 F 3238 0622 o
243. N 6100 6 2 EN 50082 2 EN 61000 6 4 DIN V 19250 RC 1 6 DIN VDE 0801 incl A1 The relay is suitable for the switching of safety related circuits Thus the relay can be used for safety shutdowns e g to cut off the entire fuel supply for combustion plants The module is equipped with relays in diversity Note The connection terminal 8 may be used only for monitoring the fuse F1 but not to supply a voltage for the contact Input 48 VDC 15 20 96 20 mA Output floating NO contact Relay data cf reverse Switching time approx 8 ms Reset time approx 6 ms Ambient conditions 25 60 C Degree of protection IP 20 according to IEC EN 60529 VDE 0470 part 1 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 465 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl H 4136 0530 466 The relay has a safe isolation according to DIN EN 50178 between the output contact and the input The clearance in air and the creepage distance are dimensioned for overvoltage class Ill up to 300 V Relay data Contact material Switching voltage Switching current Switching capacity AC Switching capacity DC Bounce time Life mechanical electrical Restrictions AgNi hard gold plated 25V lt 250 VAC lt 127 VDC 2 10 lt 4 lt 500 VA cos gt 0 5 lt 830 VA cos gt 0 9 up to 30 V lt 120 W up to 70 V lt 50W up to 127 V lt 25 W approx 1 ms gt 30
244. O modules are switched off only at H51q HR HRS Switch off of the appertaining coupling module In this case the watchdog signal WD of the appertaining coupling module will be switched off that means that all modules related to this coupling module will be switched off 15 The H51q System Family 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 16 The Input Output Level The input output subracks holding the input output modules with their fusings power distribu tion and I O bus coupling can be connected to the central racks Up to 16 input output subracks can be assigned to one PLC 9 G g if 4 Figure 5 View of the I O subrack 4 units high The I O Subrack The I O subrack fulfills the safety requirements of the SIL 3 Slots 1 to 16 are provided for any type of input output modules of the HIMA automation system Slot 17 is provided for the coupling module F 7553 for the I O bus Slots 18 to 21 keep the power distribution modules F 7133 They are non interactive and have a fuse monitoring with failure signalization by an LED and a contact The power distribution module F 7133 can be used to fuse the I O modules as well as the sensor and the actuator circuits There is a cable tray under the input output subrack It is equipped with a receptacle for the label which can be hinged to provide easy access to the cables 24 VDC Power Supply and Distribution Standard design The 24 VDC power is distributed via a
245. ON CERTIFICATE PTB 02 ATEX 2178 Benz individual circuit shunt connected EExiaorib IC 5mH 5mH 5mH 940 nF 900 nF Two control circuits each of one electronic assembly or of two electronic assemblies of this type may be connected in parallel in the following manner one assembly terminal d4 with terminal d10 and terminal d2 with terminal d8 etc two assemblies e g _ terminal 94 with terminal d4 and terminal d2 with terminal d2 etc Output circuits sss U 5VDC 1 lt 24mA terminals 222 422 224 424 Un 40V 226 d26 228 428 The control circuits are safely electrically isolated from all other circuits up to a peak value of the nominal voltage of 375 V 16 Test report PTB Ex 03 22253 17 i nditi for saf None 18 Essential health and safety requiremen met by compliance with the standards mentioned above Braunschweig February 03 2003 sheet 3 3 EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid The certificates may be circulated only without alteration Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt In case of dispute the German text shall prevail Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt Bundesallee 100 D 38116 Braunschweig 191 F 3224A 0622 192 F 3236 0530 F 3236 16 channel i nput module safety related applicable up to SIL
246. OP2 Export 2 Bytes Remove Module DP Input ELOP2 Export 1 Byte Tee Figure 13 Example of address mapping for the PROFIBUS DP input telegram user data length of 59 bytes in 5 modules 435 F 8628X 0650 10 10 1 10 1 1 10 1 2 436 Replace of the operating system Upgrading downgrading the operating system versions of the F 8628X The following instructions describe the upgrade downgrade the operation systems for the F 8628X module neers It is recommended to change the operating system only in the N The upgrade downgrade may be done only by HIMA service engi time of a shutdown of the plant Upgrading downgrading from version 2 x To upgrade downgrade version 2 x the operating system file with extension flash must be loaded Since the F 8628X has the same operating system as the F 8627X the F 8628X must use the same operating system file When upgrading from version 2 x to another version the user must ensure that only the correct operating system file is loaded into the corresponding module If the module F 8628X was loaded with any incorrect file the function ality of the F 8628X is lost and can not be programmed any longer with the diagnostic dialog ComEth In this case the module F 8628X must be programmed new by HIMA After an upgrade to version 3 x and higher a protection mechanism is activated and only oper ating system files with the extension ca
247. Programmable Systems The H41q and H51q System Families Catalog HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG HI 800 263 CEA Industrial Automation Caution The safety related H41q H51q systems as described in this manual can be used for several different pur poses The knowledge of regulations and the technically perfect transfer carried out by qualified staff are prerequisites for the safe installation start up and for the safety during operation and maintenance of the H41q H51q systems In case of unqualified interventions into the automation devices de activating or bypassing safety func tions or if advices of this manual are neglected causing disturbances or impairments of safety func tions severe personal injuries property or environmental damage may occur for which we cannot take liability Important Notes All HIMA products mentioned in this manual are protected with the HIMA trade mark As not differently noted down this is possibly also valid for other mentioned manufacturers and their products All listed modules are CE certified and meet the requirements of the EMC Guideline of the European Community All technical statements and data in this manual have been worked out very carefully and effective checks and inspections have been applied This manual may however contain flaws or typesetting er rors Therefore HIMA does not offer any warranties nor assume legal responsibility nor any liability for the possible consequences o
248. ROM for user program CMOS RAM for variables Lithium battery on the central module Measuring circuit in the central module in the central module with 4 digit alphanumeric display and 2 LEDs information of the user program Errors in the central device I O bus in safety related I O modules interfaces 320 kbyte logic parameters variables 5 ms for single channel systems 27 ms for redundant systems 21 Technical Data 5 4 Interfaces 5 4 1 RS 485 Interfaces Interface type Central module Quantity H41q Interface extensions Quantity H51q Interface extensions Baud rate Connection to programming device 5 4 2 Ethernet Interfaces Interface type Quantity H41q Interface extensions Quantity H51q Interface extensions Baud rate 5 4 3 Profibus DP interfaces Interface type Quantity H41q Interface extensions Quantity H51q Interface extensions Baud rate 5 5 Definition of Signals Two wire bus interface with passive coupling RS 485 2 interfaces max 4 interfaces on 2 coprocessor modules max 12 interfaces on 6 coprocessor modules 300 bps up to 57600 bps except 38400 bps by RS 485 RS 232C converter type H 7505 or cable BV 7043 Ethernet according to IEEE 802 3 with 100BaseT connection via RJ 45 max 2 interfaces on 2 communication modules with redundant CUs up to 4 interfaces max 5 interfaces on 5 communication modules with redundant CUs up to 10 interfaces max 100 Mbit s Pro
249. RRSSSSS S eezaesos Keogaaaes ss JASAN NNNNA NNNNA DNM 02 In Je 5 addadd 15 2122 aosoo o l eeeasaz 22 5988883 88585858 J soo PERRE SSS EEE osoo o eezeesos I neoogaex lesus2252 22732322 2255485 88588858 Figure 1 Block diagram Electrical characteristics of supply contacts Permissible voltage up to 48 VDC 30 VAC Current per channel 2A Total current max 16 Cross section A B C D 0 2 1 5 mm Combicon Connector 0 2 2 5 mm Diodes 2 A 2 A slow blow fuses are permitted All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 477 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl H 7015A 0524 Sockets and terminals on the Terminal Module H 7015A 1 3 5 7 Supply contacts decoupled red 2 4 6 8 Supply contacts not decoupled black 9 up to 14 Floating contacts gray 15 16 Shield Y white Designator Contact E Vario plug ELCO 8016 Code 1 1 1x 56 pin A1 C32 Phoenix Headers 12x 8 pin D Wago 739 1x 16 pin Accessories Phoenix Combicon Connector FK MCP 1 5 8 ST 3 81 Table 1 Sockets and terminals H 7015A Mechanical design and dimension
250. RS SIL 3 1002D processor F 8652X 8653E H41q M H HR F 8653X 10 4 Power Supplies F 7126 Power supply 24 VDC 5 VDC for systems H51q 7130A Power supply 24 VDC 5 VDC for systems H41q 10 5 Current Distribution Modules and Drawers F 7132 4 channel power distribution L or EL and L F 7133 4 channel power distribution with fuse monitoring 10 6 Additional Devices for Power Supply F 7131 Power supply monitoring with buffer batteries for H51q H 7013 Power supply filter 24 VDC H 7021 Power supply filter 48 VDC 46 Data Sheets The additional devices listed below are now described in the catalog Ca binets and Power Supplies K 7212 K 7213 K 7214 K 7215 K 7216 K 7901 K 7915 Feeding and current distribution with mains filter Feeding and current distribution up to 35 A Feeding and current distribution up to 150 A Feeding and current distribution up to 150 A graphical display Feeding and current distribution up to 63 A for SELV and PELV Feeding and current distribution up to 63 A with two mains filters Z 6015 Fuse distributor for lead fuse with certificate of Factory Mutual Research Corporation 10 7 Modules for Bus Coupling F 7553 Coupling module for H51q 10 8 Communication Modules 8621 8627 8627X 8628 8628X H41q 51q coprocessor module Fast Ethernet communication Profibus DP communication 10 9 Relays in Terminal Block Housing H 4116 H 4135 H
251. SERVICE GMBH is a Notified Body in accordance with Council Directive 94 9 EC for equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres with the identification number 0123 T V PRODUCT SERVICE GMBH Zertifizierstelle Ridlerstrasse 65 D 80339 M nchen F3325 0622 viz ebed S JuepunpsH S eBeyoA G Indjno eBeyoA lt lt pandino abelon juepunpey p ndino abeyon Sp ndino ebeo Lg i e 1ndino 2 oBeyoA z ndino cuo tendo 000 gindino 1ndino 10 indino ez uonouny indino Hod F91AU3S 1 580 28161 70 20 SX3 ON ui 918211492 uoNeulwexg ed 93 o1 xipuoddy v A ddns ay 1sureBe jo xeed e dn pejejosi Ajeyes pue ejes Ajjeo sumui eseu eje x3 eui jo Alddns 40 AZZ jo xis 002 dins yndyno pz Z esn einoes 10 uoneuuojul y ees uononujsur Jo 9 095 159 07
252. Switch no Stationno 12345 48 49 50 oua 51 GM 52 or MR M 53 oma ua 5 ore AAA 55 AAPA Switch no Stationno 12345 mM en 2 org Ma oM Maa 94 Oum 85 oM Maa 86 oum maf Switch no Stationno 12345 24 ore 25 oA A 26 ora AWAD 27 ABENE ong BR MM 22 or A NR Switch no Stationno 12345 56 u 57 orm 58 orm A AA so or MAA 60 ore AEA or A AAA 62 orm AAA e OMB ABS Switch no Stationno 12345 88 orm ES on AE 90 or A BA or AAAS 2 or BBS or AW ABS BABA 5 OM AAA A Bit is not set White switch in position ON Position switch 6 7 Switch no orl n Switch no Stationno 12 34 5 Stationno 12345 ee s OS AG Eur 9 o MEE 2 om 10 or aaa EE a 4 oe 2 oua 5 13 oM Aa 6 oan 14 or AAA Position switch 6 7 Switch no Switch no Stationno 12345 Stationno 12345 32 Or 40 Og A oM ER 41 om uaa 34 org A 42 oua M M 35 oM Mun 43 SN MT 36 ore 44 Organ Al 45 oA AA ou AA 46 oe AAA ale 4 Or Position switchno 6 7 oW A Switch no Switch no Stationno 1234 5 Stationno 1234 5 64 Ora 72 Ora WR PN 5 oM uu A 66 or M ma 74 or M Aa 67 oM a 75 AA 68 o
253. The HSR cable between both redundant F 8627X functionally replace Y cable BV 7049 when ELOP II TCP is connected to a PADT PC Replacing a communication module see Chapter 2 4 Should the Ethernet segment not be available to HIMA communication modules the following IP address cannot be used otherwise 192 168 0 3 up to 192 168 0 130 up to OS version 3 x 192 168 0 3 up to 192 168 0 200 from OS version 3 x on All single communication module connections must be connected to the same logi cal Ethernet segment Communication modules belonging to one PES and having the same module num ber must be connected to different Ethernet segments The F 8627X automatically accesses all HIPRO S data configured in the PES This may cause problems if a F 8621A simultaneously oper ates as PES master in the same PES In this case the function block HK COM 3 must deactivate the HIPRO S communication via the F 8627X or the F 8621A configura tion must change over to HIPRO N 373 F 8627X 0650 6 3 Ethernet possible connections All connected Ethernet components must meet the requirements spec ified in the application guidelines The Ethernet segments may always have a redundant structure If a HIPRO S is used the HSR cable BV 7053 must be plugged in between the redundant communication modules F 8627X via HSR interface The HSR cable BV 7053 is also required for the redundant MODBUS TCP and ELOP II TCP connection see chapter
254. The IP address is determined from the F 865x ID settings DIP switches 1 7 if the Res ID cannot be determined from the current user program s resource name and switch ID IP is activated on the F 8627X switch 1 6 ON 3 IP address of the Basic Configuration If no IP address can be determined using the Res ID or ID switch 1 6 OFF as de scribed in the first two cases the last IP address determined on this F 8627X is used F 8627X 0650 6 6 1 Communication via the F 8627X This chapter describes the F 8627X communication types and the required settings and MODBUS TCP can be operated in conjunction with any of the exisiting com munication types OPC HIPRO S and HIPRO S DIRECT Note If the HIPRO S DIRECT Mode is activated see 6 4 4 the HSR Com munication for the MODBUS TCP slave via Port 8896 is deactivated no redundancy Overview The following tables provide a quick overview of the communication type properties that can be set for the F 8627X as well as the conditions that must be fulfilled to do so HIPRO S HIPRO S DIRECT F 8625 F 8627 F 8627X all OS versions F 8627 beginning with OS version 3 x F 8627X DIRECT Mode Off Switch 1 7 OFF DIRECT Mode On Switch 1 7 ON Token passing No token passing No more than 64 safeethernet members can be config ured in the entire network No more than 99 safeethernet members can be configured in the entir
255. Watchdog time ms for the source resource Tmax From Step 1 Calculating the monitoring time MTe for H41qe H51qe 2 WDegource 2 Tmax 2 WDe Target MTe Monitoring time HIPRO S connection WDeTarget Watchdog time ms for the target resource WDesource Watchdog time ms for the source resource Tmax From Step 1 387 F 8627X 0650 6 7 2 388 Step 4 Setting up the calculated monitoring time The calculated monitoring time MT or MTe must set in the dialog window Properties gt HIPRO S of the target resource Properties B1_PESO3 Of x Print Def Print Forms More Print Order GV XRef 10 parameter Safety Lei Code generator Addressing enor HIPRO S BUSCOM 3364R Resource PES master _ Monitoring time 0 15 Reset imported variables 1_ 504 01 132 YES 1_ 505 01 22 WES Bi PESO0B Bn_PESD1 132 YES 1_ 508 Bn B1 PESOS Resource 1 PESO z BN PESO Bn f BN_PES02 F PES master Bn_PES01 Monitoring time 0 15 22 v Reset imported variables Standard Cancel Help OK Cancel Apply Help Figure 11 Configuration of the HIPRO S connections Setting the monitoring time depends on the process and must be agreed upon with the appropriate authority The monitoring time must not exceed the time period agreed upon Example for calculating the monitoring time
256. X 1 1 x2 9 1 x1 1 9 H 7505 System Type of used cable LifYCY 3 x 2 x 0 08 mm All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 171 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7052 0508 172 Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole BV 7053 0606 BV 7053 BV 7053 HSR cable HSR connection between redundant communication modules F 8627 F 8627X Standard length 0 6 m X1 RJ12 RJ12 gt lt 2s Figure 1 Wiring Figure 2 Construction All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 173 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7053 0606 174 BV 7055 0509 BV 7055 Data connecting cable Connection of bus terminal H 7506 to converter Edgeport 2i USB RS 485 in systems H41q H5 Standard lengths 2m 4m X 1 1q 25 pole MIN D plug Figure 1 Wiring Edgeport 2i 9 pole MIN D plug HIMA gepr BV7055 XX 00 wwwWWW XXX Type of used cable LiYCY 3 x 2
257. ZB2ICU2 Option Option Figure 1 Front view 1 Parts of the B 5233 1 2 assembly kit H51q HS H51q HRS system 1xK 1412B central rack 5 units high 19 inches with cable tray with three fan modules K 9212 hinged receptacle for the label and backplane Z 1001 additional modules on the rear 3xZ6011 decoupling and fusing to feed the power supply modules 1xZ6018 fan run monitoring and fuse monitoring 2xZ6013 decoupling and fusing of the supply voltage for the WD signal 2xF7546 bus termination module B 5233 1 4 7546 bus termination module B 5233 2 1 x BV 7032 data cable only B 5233 1 includes the modules e 3xF 7126 power supply modules 24 V 5 V 10 A PS1 PS2 PS 3 1xF7131 power supply monitoring 2x F 8650X central modules CU1 CU2 modules for option separate order 8621A coprocessor modules CM11 CM13 CM21 CM23 10x communication modules CM11 CM15 CM21 CM25 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 121 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 2 1 122 Assembly kits to be used for the I O level 9302 I O subrack 4 units high 19 inches B 9361 additional power supply 5 VDC 5 units high 19 inches The max current must be 18 A all I O modules and the modules in the central rack if 3 x F 7126 are used to keep the system in operation even one power supply module
258. afe output circuits It includes a plug connector with built in limiting facilities and it is intended for installation in combination with a rack bound system For redundant signal detection a combination of two interconnected plug connectors is used with a limitation of the output parameters as such that two apparatus may be operated in parallel without change of the electrical data given below The maximum permissible range of the ambient temperature is 20 C up to 60 C Electrical data Supply circuit 1 U x 30 V DC approx 2 5 W Maximum voltage Um 40 V Supply circuit 2 Un lt 6 V DC approx 1 W and output circuits Maximum voltage Um 7 V Control circuits type of protection EEx ia IIB IIC for connection to passive intrinsically safe circuits Maximum values per circuit 10V l 15mA 38 mW linear characteristic for the maximum permissible values of the external inductance L and capacitance C reference is made to the table below Co HF Lo mH sheet 2 3 EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid The certificates may be circulated only without alteration Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt In case of dispute the German text shall prevail Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt Bundesallee 100 D 38116 Braunschweig 206 F 3238 0622 Physikalisch Technische Bundesansta
259. ail is established via the X2 1 5 connection According to HIMA earthing principles the top hat rail itself is connected to the cabinet earth or optionally to an instrument earth 6 The connection of the cable shield between the individual H 7506 bus terminals is estab lished on one side via a terminal The terminal is located on a top hat rail to which it is also conductively connected 35 Installation and Connections 8 7 36 The shield of the BV 7044 cable for the connection 3 of the H 7505 interface converter is earthed on the PC PADT side The measures 1 2 3 are standardized already finished in HIMA The connections 5 6 have to be performed during the installation on site The shielding connection using a special cable 7 does already exist or has to be performed depending on the special cable PC PADT Programming PLS PC and Debugging Tool re ea CU Central Module 7 Pin 5 PLS Process Control System special cable BV 7044 H41q 51q H41q 51q CU CU1 CU2 Top hat rail 7505 9 H 7505 X21 X2 1 E 2 2 1 PEGs 5 5 1 1 BV 7048 BV 7040 BV 7040 BV 7046 1 4 4 4 Top hat rail FH en 7506 9 CU 6 PE H41q 51q PE S Figure 11 Connection of the cable shields Shielding in the Input Output Area At installation of the field cables pay atten
260. allation in the I O subrack B 9302 so it is urgently advised against the use of this kit with these modules The faultless operation of the modules in B 9302 kit is not guaranteed The TUV certificate of the testable SIL 3 modules F 3313 F 3314 and F 3323 is expired cause of changing of the corresponding stan dard Therefore an application for new plants is not admissible N Because of the new designed realization of the shutdown in the B 9302 assembly kit the supply voltage of an old output module can not be switched off automatically in case of a defective central module and so the outputs of the corresponding module can not be reset inde pendent from the CPU 27 Application Notes 7 4 7 5 7 6 28 Update from F 865 to F 865 X When F 865 central modules are updated to F 865 X also the fan conception must be mo dified Former fan concept Z 6012 one integrated fan with fan run monitoring and fuse monitoring New fan concept Z 6018 fan run monitoring for 4 fans and fuse monitoring K 9212 fan unit 4 fan units for H41 3 fan units for H51 See also data sheets of the assembly kits Replacement of F 865 A by F 865 X F 865 A central modules can be replaced by F 865 X modules after changing to the new fan concept and using the unaltered user program but with the new operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 Use of Coprocessor and Communication Modules System H41q To the right of each central module
261. ameter Emergency off WD switch off of the appertaining CU Central modules CU or independent of the I O WD switch off bus between CU and cou parameter of the appertaining CU pling modules Input modules independent of the Operation of O signal for all inputs of this module Independent of a fault of the output module System variable for emer gency switch off activated independent of the I O parameter WD switch off of the appertaining CU Table 5 Concepts of the Safety Switch Off at H51q Definitions Double fault fault within an output channel and the electronic switch off part of a testable out put module Abbreviations in the table CU Central Module bus Input output bus subrack Input output subrack WD Watchdog signal More explanations on the following page The H51q System Family Explanations to the table Parameter Display only Switch off by means of the integrated safety shutdown inside the output amplifier If not possi ble then shutdown of the watchdog signal in the I O subrack by means of the coupling module only in systems H51q No shutdown of the watchdog signal of the appertaining central unit This parameter is permissible only up to SIL 1 Parameter Normal operation Reaction as with parameter Display only additionally switch off of the watchdog signal of the appertaining central unit if necessary Parameterization requir
262. analog input modules F 6217 are con nected redundantly to each other by the cable plug Z 7127 and the system cable It is also pos sible to connect the I O modules redundantly via voltage divider or transmitter For information about redundant current and voltage connection of the analog output module F 6217 and the cable plugs refer to the respective documentation Field Level Terminals Clamps Fuses Interfaces e g H 6200 Wiring er H 7020 Terminal REAR Module 9 FRONT x3 s xe xa 2 1 apt aber spe T X17 8 gt FL A 3 x m 10950 9 x20 5 x Di 2 26 36 3 2 St ZN Color coded 1 1 L I O Modules Al 62171 Figure 5 Redundant wiring of analog output modules 6217 The soldering points are jumpered in case of connecting analog I O modules 497 H 7020 0606 498 H 7021 0548 H 7021 7021 Power supply filter for power supply systems 48 VDC 48V L 7 28161 5 Wires combined at end S 25 in wire end ferrules Connection lines _ y a
263. ange as the corresponding base address see Table 9 Note The base address settings are located in resource s properties In the BUSCOM tab the user can set the base address separately for Import Export and Import Export however using the standard base address settings is recommended The BOOL and WORD variables are stored within the import and export areas of the F 865x and further separated into 0 and 1 areas Ranges BOOL WORD BUSCOM address BUSCOM address Import range 0 Base address 0000 0000 to 2047 0000 to 2047 Import range 1 Base address 4096 4096 to 8191 4096 to 8191 Export range 0 Base address 0000 0000 to 2047 0000 to 2047 Export range 1 Base address 4096 4096 to 8191 4096 to 8191 Table 9 BUSCOM variable ranges in the F 865x central module F 8628X 0650 7 3 Mapping of the BUSCOM variables on the F 8628X To transmit the BUSCOM variables they are mapped from the F 865x central module to the F 8628X communication module The BUSCOM variables from the F 865x are copied into two memory areas located in the F 8628X internal memory The memory areas EV and IV reflect the export and the import variables respectively In the memory area a BUSCOM variable is described by its identity number Note This scheme for converting BUSCOM variables on the F 865x into identity numbers on the F 8628X is used for WORD as well as for BOOL var
264. ant for safeethernet If more than 30 communication partners are configured several bus configurations must be created in ELOP Il since a bus configuration in ELOP II supports no more than 31 participants Example Resource name MT200_33 module channel 1 switch 2 1 ON Host address 33 2 1 67 IP address 192 168 0 67 Resource name MT200_ 33 module channel 2 switch 2 1 OFF Host address 33 2 2 68 IP address 192 168 0 68 F 8627X settings upon delivery IP address 192 168 0 63 switch 2 1 ON or 192 168 0 64 switch 2 1 OFF Switch ID_IP is deactivated switch 1 6 OFF 363 F 8627X 0650 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 364 II TCP connection to the central module CM Via the PADT PC the user can establish an ELOP II TCP connection to the F 865x central module via the F 8627X The ELOP II TCP connection provides a fast data exchange between a PADT and the F 865x central module Res ID The Res ID is identical to the last two numbers of the resource name ID The ID is set via DIP switches 1 to 7 on the F 865x central module Requirements for aELOP II TCP connection F 865x central module OS version 05 34 or higher ELOP Il version 4 1 build 6118 or higher F 8627X Ethernet module OS version 4 x or higher HSR cable in redundant systems Connection of ELOP Il PADT PC to F 8627X A PADT can only connect to a H41q H51q via a single F 8627X on the H41q H51q even in cases of
265. applications Figure 5 Redundant connection for a proximity switch NAMUR according to EN 60947 5 6 2000 Special cable plug 27008 3238 Ex C 5101 mono connection HIMA order no 93 3238 101 At redundant connection of proximity switches NAMUR according to EN 60947 5 6 the fol lowing redundant special cable plug must be used 27008 3238 Ex W R1 S301 with resistors R1 R8 390 for NAMUR proximity switches 27008 3238 Ex Cx R2 5301 HIMA order no 93 3238 301 Between the plug R2 and R1 see Figure 4 the connections are configured as single cores Note If using the special cable plug for Namur proximity switches in the safe ty loop module proximity switch the SIL level may be reduced to that of the proximity switch F 3238 0622 Resistors R RT R17 R24 681 R Resistors R RY R1 R8 390 Q 8 8 Figure 6 Cable connector 2 7008 special design for NAMUR 1 6 Installation The electronic module including its connections has to be installed in a way that at least the system of protection IP 20 according to EN 60529 1991 A1 2000 is achieved If two intrinsically safe input circuits of two F 3238 modules are wired in parallel a spe cial cable provided by HIMA must be used The separation between intrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe terminals must be gt 50 mm especially between adjacent modules The separation
266. art no 00 0751383 00 0751334 Note Due to the tolerance of the potentiometer re sistors the accuracy defined in the data sheet is at first guaranteed after a new balancing of all chan nels within the user s program or resistors with tol erances lt 1 have to be used Figure 6 Application example 2 Application example 3 s Not to apply in case of single chnl connect 4 Transmitter supply REY fo 2 7127 6214 2 7127 6214 C JU1VIR2 C2 U1V R1 IT 0 E a 1 1 e 1 Xx i N 5 F 6214 I A F 6214 module 1 module 2 1 channel 1 in case of input voltage feeding 1 h 0 1 V no resistor Redundant connection of current or voltage active transmitter Figure 7 Application example 3 F 6214 0606 Application example 4 Smart Trans mitter Programmer for smart transmitters PG Not to apply in case of single chnl connect 7 hod 1 4 4 Special cable R02 _ L connector module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 R01 R03 R05 R07 50 Q R02 R04 R06 R08 220 Q 0 5 W 5 96 part no 00 0471221 Redundant connection of smart transmitters Figure 8 Application example 4 Application example 5 Note if used together with zener barrier To avoid cross talking in case of a short circuit Zener barrier 9 MTL7087 b
267. arth Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm Pay attention for the manufacturers information concerning detaching and replugging of the Faston connectors 89 B 5230 H51q M 0605 4 1 4 1 1 90 Current distribution within the assembly kit HIMA devices for current distribution It is recommended to use the HIMA supplies and current distributions K 7212 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with 2 decoupling diodes and 2 net work filters with fusing of up to 12 single circuits with circuit breakers or K 7213 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with fusing of up to 12 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7214 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7215 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers graphical display Supply 24 VDC The 24 VDC power supply can be feeded three times to the system H51q M starlike wiring See also catalog H41q H51q chapter 4 3 The Input Output Level 24 VDC Supply and Distri bution Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 21 22 23 2 L RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 0 8 max 16AgL PS1 PS3 XG 21 22 23 1 L BK 2 5 mm2 Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole L RD Color code red BK Color code black Table 1 Supply 24 VDC Output 24 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use XG 24 2 L RD 1 5
268. ase of an error in a safety related module this is automatically switched off while the redundant module continues the operation The following table gives an overview Safety SIL 3 SIL 3 SIL 3 Availability normal MS high HS very high HRS Central module mono redundant redundant modules mono 1 mono 1 redundant bus mono mono redundant Table 1 Safety and Availability 1 Individual I O modules can also be used as redundant modules or connected to sensors in a 2 out of 3 voting to increase the availability The inputs have to be therefore configured on 3 different modules Mono single channel system structure Redundant redundant central modules and or separated I O bus system structure Concept of the HIMA PES 2 2 Designs and Types of the PES The controls can be adapted to the requirements of the plant by equipping them with the ap propriate central modules The following structures are possible with the H41q or H51q system family Designs and Types of the PES The H41q compact system The H51q modular system Design Mono Redundant Mono Redundant Availability normal high very high normal high very high Type H41g M 3 H41q HR H51g M 519 H51q HR Safety SIL 3 SIL 3 SIL 3 SIL 3 SIL 3 SIL 3 Certificate TUV Type H41q MS Techn features Max l O rack I O buses 1 Central modules communication
269. ase of current paths connected together no statement about the different fuses can be made 350 F 7553 0630 F 7553 Coupling module in the assembly kit B 9302 with switch off of the watchdog signal for PES H51q gs win ON OFF HIMA F 7553 Figure 1 F 7553 Coupling module The coupling module contains the monitoring of the 5 V supply of the I O subrack and transmits a corresponding status signal to the central module The module is automatically tested during operation The LED WD on the front plate shows the existing safety related watchdog signal By the sec ond LED SEL the access to the I O modules of the appertaining I O subrack is signaled Via the recessed WD switch the watchdog signal can be switched off for the appertaining I O subrack to change the coupling module F 7553 without triggering an error stop for the MS and HS systems Note If the WD switch is not operated before the coupling module is replaced the entire system switches into error stop Space requirement 450 Operating data 5 VDC 600 mA 24 VDC 750 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 351 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 7553 0630 The coding switches 51 1 51 4 are used for setting the numbers for the cabinet or in HRS systems the I O bus number and the I O subrack number Legend white switch
270. aster sends a telegram with faulty values e g length field MODBUS TCP slave respons with error code 0x03 invalid value OxOB No reply for a MODBUS Request is possible In case of Port 502 No F 865x central module is reachable In case of Port 8896 No active MODBUS TCP slave on the F 8627X is reachable Note The function code 0x0B is based on a gateway function Please refer to the Modbus specification at page modbus org F 8627X 0650 6 5 6 5 1 HIPRO S HIPRO S is a safe communication via the HIPRO S variables configured in the PES In the HIPRO S Mode the Ethernet bus access control is done by token passing This mode provides operation with a hub and avoids collisions on the network No more than 31 safeethernet members can be configured in the entire network One PES can have up to 30 safeethernet communication partners since a bus configuration in ELOP supports a maximum of 31 communication partners All communication partners must be configured in the same bus configuration A PES can communicate with maximal 4 HIMA OPC servers The number of communication partners is not reduced by the number of configured HIMA OPC servers The communication modules for HIPRO S must be configured and the DIP switches Switch 2 1 sets the module numbers which corresponds to the attached Ethernet segment see Table 6 and Figure 5 Switch 2 2 set mono or redundant interconn
271. ation modules can be installed The communication module mainly contains 32 bit RISC microprocessor Operating system RAM for further protocols F 8627 Ethernet interface safeethernet F 8628 Profibus DP slave interface Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Special applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the central module to PADT II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network Modbus TCP Special application with the communication module F 8628X II TCP connection PADT via the Ethernet interface of the F 8628X to the H41q H51q controller Startup and maintenance A battery change of the buffer batteries on the power supply monitoring module and the central module CPU in operation is recommended every 6 years Buffer battery with soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000016 Buffer battery without soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000019 Further informations see also catalog H41q H51q chapter 9 Startup and maintenance Wiring of the assembly kit The assembly kit is already wired for operation Wirings have still to be done by the user op tional modules see Assembly kit wiring diagram With installation of the assembly kit a conductive connection to the frame or a separate earth connection has to be installed according to the EMC requirements Connection PE e
272. between adjacent intrinsically safe terminals must be 2 6 mm e ntrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe lines must be installed separately or the intrinsically safe lines must be provided with additional insulation ntrinsically safe lines must be identifiable e g by a light blue color RAL 5015 of the insulation The wiring has to be secured mechanically in a way which ensures that in the event of an accidental disconnection the distance EN 50 020 Part 7 Table 4 between the intrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe connections does not fall below the required minimum e g by bundling The cables wires used must comply with the following dielectric withstand test Intrinsically safe lines gt 1000 VAC Notintrinsically safe lines gt 1500 VAC For stranded wires suitable measures must be applied to prevent spreading at the end of wire The terminals must be suitable for clamping the wire cross section 203 F 3238 0622 1 7 204 The applicable regulations and standards have to be complied with especially EN 50014 1997 Corrigedum 1998 A1 1999 A2 1999 VDE 0170 0171 Part 1 2000 DIN EN 50014 2000 02 EN 50020 1994 VDE 0170 0171 Part 7 1996 DIN EN 50020 1996 04 EN 50039 1980 VDE 0170 0171 Part 10 1982 DIN EN 50039 1982 04 EN 60079 14 1997 VDE 0165 Part 1 DIN EN 60079 14 1998 08 EN 60947 5 6 2000 VDE 0660 Part 212 DIN EN 60947 5 6 2000 12 Note For
273. c Chan Connec oh a Color nel tion Color 1 64 1 64 BN 2 b8 BN TA x4 WH 3 b24 GN 2 2 b8 YE Cable 4 b28 YE 8 GN LiYY 8 x 3 b24 PK 1 5 mm L z2 BK B Flat pin x24 212 RD Eye 4 b28 RD ur x28 BU L z2 BK Flat pin q 1 mm L 212 RD plug 750mm 2 8 x 0 8 mm Lead marking of the cable plug Lead marking of the cable plug Z 7134 1 3334 C Z 7134 3334 C P2 q 1 mm 2 pole connection 750mm 238 Figure 2 Lead markings of the cable plugs 1 X d q amp 01 04 D x4 77134 _ _ c l 25W 48W P L e N e suggested Figure 3 2 pole connection Operating points of line monitoring short circuit current 2 6 5A line break 0 5 9 5 mA F 3334 0626 Planning notes The function block HB BLD 3 for single channel operation or HB N BLD 4 for redundant operation must be used for all applications with the module n case of line monitoring the appertaining function blocks HB BLD 3 for single channel operation or HB BLD 4 for redundant operation enable enhanced configuration possibil ities for the module The extension of the time for the inrush current for lamp loads by the appertaining function block is valid for all channels So inductive and lamp loads may not be operated on one module at the same time The line break monitoring requires a minimum load of 10 mA Line short circuit and line brea
274. cable This ensures that the data written most recently from the MODBUS master are also reflected in the data currently being processed by the user program 379 F 8627X 0650 6 4 4 380 Connection via port 8896 The MODBUS TCP master accesses the process data image from the F 8627X via port 8896 In this case the F 8627X is an active MODBUS TCP slave and relieves the burden on the F 865x On port 8896 the BUSCOM variables are mapped into F 8627 X s process data image For this reason the MODBUS TCP master must access the identity numbers resulting from the process data mapping see Chapter 7 A The WORD and BOOL variables are located in a common memory area on the F 8627 In case of port 8896 a MODBUS telegram for WORD can access the address range of the WORD and BOOL variables The user must pay attention to correctly interpret the variable types of reading and writing data Note MODBUS function codes 2 4 23 and 43 are supported by port 8896 HK COM 3 function block must allow the not safety related data exchange via MODBUS TCP The address mapping of the BUSCOM variables into the F 8627X is described in Chapter 7 Note If port 502 is not used in the H41q H51q controller the polling interval for port 8896 can be set to tpo gt CT F 8627X reacts to a MODBUS request via port 8896 as described below If the F 8627X is in mono operation mode i e HSR connection to a seco
275. can be used for the galvanic isolation of proximity switches of the L L potentials of the module If the plants are electromagnetically exposed this is highly recommended If using any Ex isolated switch amplifier HIMA power supply filters Z 6015 or H 7013 must be implemented These dampen or eliminate the interfer ences in the supply lines of the switch amplifier which can initiate count impulses in the counter module F 5220 The following interferences between earth and L or L are dampen by EMC filters and or Ex isolated switch amplifiers Operating elements of the test plug Channel 2 Adjuster P2 Switch S7 counter clockwise clockwise Switch S5 LB normal LS Switch S8 LB normal LS Switch S6 LB normal LED V2 Channel 1 Adjuster P1 Switch S2 counter clockwise clockwise Switch S1 LB normal LS Switch S3 LB normal LS Switch S4 LB normal LED V1 Switch positions shown in italic Adjustment of the supplied frequency 5 V Adjustment of the direction of rotation counter clockwise clockwise Line test of the counter input proximity switch LB line break normal LS line short circuit Line test of the direction input proximity switch LB line break normal LS line short circuit Line test of the output pulse operation LB line break normal Status display of the output wide banded low energy switching interferences burst according to IEC EN 61000 4 4 up to 2 kV and
276. ces When using the module the cable plug Z 7127 6217 C with unsoldered shunts see Fig ure or the cable plug Z 7128 6217 C ITI with unsoldered shunts see Figure 4 has to be used for the F 6217 o ole RW YIR X SN SIS 7 le wee ur mi EPA s QS Z 7128 6217 t py 00 ol V1 V2 V3 V4 V6 ee N N 5 5 5 485 55 5 45 4 Figure 4 Application with cable plug 2 7128 F 6217 with modules 7017 instead of shunts 487 H 7017 0641 488 H 7018 0508 H 7018 7018 Terminal module plug and play with 56 pins Vario plug ELCO 8016 Code 1 1 for fast and efficient wiring to the Terminal Module 7015 A ro Sd we we of NI al fo OB a of of lt lt lt SE SC CHHDVZEPACIMMIOD gt Figure 1 Block diagram Electrical characteristics of the Terminal Module H 7018 Permissible voltage up to 48 VDC 30 VAC Current per channel 2A Total current max 16 A Cross section A B C D 0 2 2 5 mm All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 489 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl H 7018 0508 490 Sockets and terminals on the Terminal Module H 7018 Designator
277. chapter 9 Startup and maintenance 73 4236 1 2 H41q H HR 0605 4 Wiring of the assembly kit The assembly kit is already wired for operation Wirings have still to be done by the user op tional modules see Assembly kit wiring diagram With installation of the assembly kit a conductive connection to the frame or a separate earth connection has to be installed according to the EMC requirements Connection PE earth Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm Pay attention for the manufacturers information concerning detaching and replugging of the Faston connectors 4 1 Current distribution within the assembly kit 411 HIMA devices for current distribution It is recommended to use the HIMA supplies and current distributions K 7212 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with 2 decoupling diodes and 2 net work filters with fusing of up to 12 single circuits with circuit breakers or K 7213 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with fusing of up to 12 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7214 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7215 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers graphical display 4 1 2 Supply 24 VDC The supply voltage 24 VDC may be fed two times to the H41q H HR system See also catalog H41q H51q chapter 3 3 The Input Output Level 24 VDC Supply and
278. chedule to this certificate 11 This EC type examination Certificate relates only to the design examination and tests of the specified equipment in accordance to the Directive 94 9 EC Further requirements of the Directive apply to the manufacturing process and supply of this equipment These are not covered by this certificate 12 The marking of the equipment shall include the following w GD EEx ia Braunschweig February 03 2003 sheet 1 3 EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shail not be valid The certificates may be circulated only without alteration Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt In case of dispute the German text shall prevail Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt Bundesallee 100 D 38116 Braunschweig 189 F 3224A 0622 190 Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt Braunschweig und Berlin 13 SCHEDULE 14 EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 02 ATEX 2178 15 Description of equipment The electronic assembly type F 3224A is a quadruple isolation amplifier which is used for transmitting control commands The permissible ambient temperature is 20 C to 60 C Electrical data Supply circuit 1 20 30 V DC approx 2W terminal z2 L d2 d32 L Um 40V Supply circuit UB2 4 5 5 5 V DC approx 0 5 W
279. commended to use the HIMA supplies and current distributions K 7212 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with 2 decoupling diodes and 2 net work filters with fusing of up to 12 single circuits with circuit breakers or K 7213 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with fusing of up to 12 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7214 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7215 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers graphical display 4 1 2 Supply 24 VDC The 24 VDC power supply can be feeded three times to the system H51q HS HRS starlike wiring See also catalog H41q H51q chapter 4 3 The Input Output Level 24 VDC Supply and Distribution Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 21 22 23 2 L RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 0 8 max 16AgL PS1 PS3 XG 21 22 23 1 L BK 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole L RD Color code red BK Color code black Table 1 Supply 24 VDC 4 1 3 Output 24 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use XG 24 2 L RD 1 5 2 Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply fuse monitoring and IO CON in the rack 25 2 L RD 1 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply fuse monitoring and IO CON in the rack for 2nd I O bus only B 5233 2 RD Color code red Table 2 Output
280. communication ON Collision on the Ethernet segment OFF No PROFIBUS DP slave activities on the bus Flashing Slave waits for its configuration from PROFIBUS DP master ON Data exchange between Slave and PROFIBUS DP master Table 2 Top row LEDs on module front Bottom row LEDs on module front RUN RED ERR Operating status ON OFF PROFIBUS DP communication protocol active Flashing OFF PROFIBUS DP communication protocol inactive ON OFF Communication to redundant communication module active Is used for the II TCP communication Flashing Flashing Communication module booting ON Flashing OS version 4 6 and higher User Error Configuration Error Res ID and ID are not equal Ethernet communication protocol inactive even if the communication module is in RUN status OFF ON Fatal error in communication module Module must be replaced OFF Flashes Saving error code in Flash EPROM required for 3 times repair purposes Do not unplug communication module Table 3 Bottom row LEDs on module front 413 F 8628X 0650 4 4 1 414 Functions of the switches Functions of switch 1 1 1 OFF Description 1 1 0 The PROFIBUS DP Slave address 2 0 0 to 125 for the F 8628X is set via switches 1 1 7 See Table 3 0 4 8 0 5 16 0 6 32 0 7 64 0 8 ID_IP ID_IP For OS versions lt 4 x no function ON OFF
281. croprocessor Flash EPROMSs of the program memory for the operating system and the user program usable for min 100 000 writing cycles Data memory in sRAM Dual Port RAM for fast memory access to the second central module not used in the H51q M system 2interfaces RS 485 with galvanic isolation Transmission rate max 57600 bps diagnostic display and 2 LEDs for information out of the system I O level and user program Power supply monitoring bus logic for the connection to the input output modules Hardware clock battery buffered Watchdog Battery backup of the sRAMs via batteries on the central module with monitoring B 5230 H51q M 0605 2 2 2 3 Coprocessor module F 8621A Right of each installed central module of the H51q M PES up to three coprocessor modules can be installed The coprocessor module mainly contains Microprocessor HD 64180 with a clock frequency of 10 MHz Operating system EPROM RAM for a PLC master project Note The RAM for the master project is buffered via the batteries on the power supply monitoring module F 7131 Two interfaces RS 485 via communication software function block setting of the baud rate up to 57600 bps Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Communication modules F 8627 F 8628 F 8627X F 8628X Right of the installed central module of the H51q M PES up to five communic
282. ction XG 14 XG 14 1 13 Reference potential L for I O modules Slots 1 13 see also connection XG 6 XG 24 XG 25 Supply 24 VDC see assembly kit wiring diagram L L 76 4236 1 2 H41q H HR 0605 4 7 Assembly kit wiring diagram RD 1 mm 1 slot 1 ed Frslot2 XG 6 3 L from feeding and L slot 3 current distribution _ 2 1009 XG 6 13 o o see note Supply 24 VDC L slot XG 14 L from feeding and L 11013 XG 14 current distribution o 5 5 Watchdog CU1 Watchdog CU2 L L L atchdog atchdog XG 1 XG 2 XG 9 XG 13 XG 12 11 1 2 3 4 XG10 12 3 4 2 2 GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm 2 BK 1 5 mm 2 2 2 2 GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm XG 224 o 222 111 XG 23 8 9 222 111 ee ee ee on m 51 0 oc so 7 v L 1 6A 1 6A F2 F1 2 F2 F1 e RD 1 5 mm e e Z 6013 2 6013 5 3 XxG225 9 7 444 3 XG235 9 7 4 GY 0 5 mm RD 1 mm RD 1 mm BK 1 mm 0 5 2 RD 0 5 2 GY 0 5 mm XG 24 4 4 6 555 XG 25 4 4 6 555 2 3 XG21 E e e A s E m e 5 0 e 3 SiU 6 3 L Z 6018 F2 F1 gt F2 F1 gt amp 4 2 4A 2 e e e Z 6011 Z 6011 oe e e e e 3 6 1 3 2 4 XG 21 DER aol 11 12 13 14 s al e XG 24 XG 25 T T T L L L L Fuse and 4 Fans fan monitoring Supply 24VDC Supply 24VDC K 9212 Figure 4 Assemly kit wiring diag
283. ction XG 6 Supply 24 VDC see assembly kit wiring diagram L L B 4234 H41q M 0605 4 6 Assembly kit wiring diagram RD 1 mm L slot 1 X62 bt sot XG 6 3 L from feeding and L slot 3 current distribution Z 1009 Lesiot 13 XG 6 13 2 see note Supply 24 V DC L slot XG 14 L from feeding and L 11013 14 current distribution 2 Le En ie Watchdog CU1 Watchdog CU2 XG 2 XG 9 XG 13 XG 12 11 123 4 1 2 3 4 2 2 GY 0 5 0 5 2 1 5 2 a 2 2 GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm XG 22 8 9 22 2 11 1 XG 23 8 9 2 22 ee ee ee ee nn L L nn L s a si 5 1 6A 1 6A F2 F1 mnm F2 F1 2 26013 Z 6013 e 3 3 XG 22 6 7444 3 3 XG 23 6 7 4 GY 0 5 mm RD 1 mm RD 1 mm BK 1 mm 1 mm 2 BK 0 5 mm 2 RD 0 5 mm x GY 0 5 mm XG 24 8 4 4 6 5 5 5 XG 25 7 8 4 4 6 555 3 1 XG 21 g ean yan l l Ay e Siu s Si U o s L U 2 6018 F2 F1 gt F2 F1 gt amp 4A 9 4A e e Z 6011 oN Z 6011 17 77 XG 21 7 8 9 10 1112 13 1 5 4 6 XG 24 3 2 1 XG 25 3 1 en 2 T p Fuse and L L 4 Fans fan monitoring Supply 24VDC Supply 24 V DC pply pply K 9212 only required if extended to redundant systems Figure 4 Assembly kit wiring diagram L Fan monitoring Si U Fuse m
284. ction facilities must be installed with a minimum degree of protection IP 20 according to EN 60529 VDE 0470 part 1 The specified ambient temperature for the explosion protection is T 25 C to 60 C Two intrinsically safe input circuits from two thermocouple input modules F 6220 or some intrinsically safe input circuits from one thermocouple input module can be connected together The calculation must use the reduced values for the max inductiv ity The separation between intrinsically safe and non intrinsically safe terminals must have a distance of 50 mm filament dimension The separation between two intrinsically safe terminals must have a distance of gt 6 mm filament dimension ntrinsically safe and non intrinsically safe lines and cables must be installed separately or the intrinsically safe lines must be additionally insulated ntrinsically safe lines and cables must be marked for example with light blue colored F 6220 0625 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 RAL 5015 insulation The wiring must be mechanically secured that by an unintentional disconnection the minimum distance EN 50020 part 7 table 4 between an intrinsically safe connection and a non intrinsically safe connection is not falling below the minimum The cable shield must be wired on the equipotential bonding PA For non intrinsically safe applications the cable shield can be wired on the protective earth PE at the I
285. d monitor the 8627 In this case distinction differ between safe and non safe communication can be made see ELOP II Online Help The monitoring time MT MTe for HIPRO S connections must be calculated Chap ter 6 7 385 F 8627X 0650 6 7 6 7 1 386 Calculating the monitoring time for HIPRO S HIPRO S DIRECT connections The monitoring time for HIPRO S HIPRO S DIRECT connections is used for monitoring the update of HIPRO S import variables at regular intervals The relevant factor is the safety time of the overall plant If no imported safety related variables are written within the defined period of time they are set to 0 in the PES The monitoring time of the HIPRO S HIPRO S DIRECT connections is set in the dialog win dow Properties gt HIPRO S of the corresponding target resource and must not be confused with the monitoring time of each PES agreed upon with the appropriate authority The monitoring time must N Setting the monitoring time depends on the process and must be not exceed the time period agreed upon If the monitoring time provided by the authority exceeds or is equal to 13200 ms the user can set the monitoring time of the HIPRO S or HIPRO S DIRECT connections to 13200 ms in the target resource This value corresponds to the monitoring time which is sufficient for the max imum size of a bus configuration HIPRO S with 31 or HIPRO S DIRECT with 64 members Calculation method and formu
286. d on the diagnosis display additionally with the defective channel number In this case also the external wiring has to be checked but the module must not be changed The effect of faulty channels of not safety related input output modules will be the difference between the signal status in the logic and of the appertaining LEDs on the cable connectors If the logic signal does not match the LED display the respective input output module must be exchanged For output modules you should first check whether the control element works or there is a line disturbance Input output modules can be inserted and pulled out during operation For insertion and remov ing of input output modules refer to chapter 8 1 1 43 Startup and Maintenance 9 8 3 9 8 4 9 8 5 44 Faults in the Coprocessor and Communication Modules Faults of the modules are signaled by front LEDs interface LED or ERR LED The corre sponding function block informs the user program via system variables In order to maintain the redundancy of the H41q and H51q systems faulty coprocessor or communication mod ules have to be changed immediately To change faulty modules in a redundant system two central modules during operation of the system the following procedure must be observed Remove fixing screw of the central module The related central module has to be removed Remove fixing screw of the module to be changed The defective coprocessor module or commun
287. dards Deviant from the HIMA standard the customer can also use different cable colors for wiring based on national normative requirements These deviations shall be documented and veri fied 37 Installation and Connections 38 Startup and Maintenance 9 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 4 1 9 4 2 Startup and Maintenance The tests and recommended measures for the startup maintenance and fault detection are briefly summarized To limit the scope of the documentation the chapters concerned in this catalog and in the other printouts of the HIMA system documentation are referred to Recommended Devices for Startup and Maintenance PC for the work on site as portable computer laptop All projects of the system in their current state and the HIMA system software should be on the hard disk High resistance multimeter with resistance meter Sensors to simulate analog signals Installing the System The control cabinets are delivered with the modules plugged in and fixed with screws and with free connectors They have been tested with these modules in the factory so that the following tests concentrate on the correct external installation Earthing the 24 VDC System Voltage Refer to chapter 8 2 Starting up the Control Cabinet Testing All Inputs and Outputs for External Voltage Impermissible external voltages especially e g 230 VAC to earth or L can be measured with a multimeter We recommend chec
288. dule 1 channel 1 2 7127 62141 1 4 x4 R02 C2 USVIRI N F 6214 module 2 channel 1 Figure 17 Voltage input 0 5 V N Resistors for channels 1 4 Rap terminating resistor for not used channels Resi R01 03 R02 04 Stor 05 07 06 08 e Value 424kQ 162 1 1 1 5 part no 00 0751423 00 0751164 00 0471105 d z20 Voltage input 0 10 V R02 ROI 2 7127162141 C U10VIR2 F 6214 module 1 channel 1 d4 u Ea x4 R02 Ron g 27127162141 N C2 U10V R1 XY 3 6214 module 2 channel 1 Resi R01 03 R02 04 _ stor 05 07 06 08 ab Value 38 3 332 1 1 5 part 00 0751383 00 0751334 00 0471105 Resistors for channels 1 4 Rap terminating resistor for not used channels Figure 18 Voltage input 0 10 V 278 x4 202 Ro Z 712716214 C TUR2IS 6214 module 1 channel 1 Connection of smart transmitters Z 7127162141 C2ITIRTS F 6214 module 2 channel 1 Resistors for channels 1 4 Rap terminating resistor for not used channels Resi R01 03 R02 04 R _ stor 05 07 06 08 ap Value 500 220 Q 3 3 0 05 5 5 part 00 0710500 00 0471221 00 0471332 no Figure 19
289. dule via confectioned Combicon connectors The Combicon connector is used for a fast connection between the Ter minal Module and other modules Wiring of H 7020 single pole redundant with F 3236 input modules Both digital input modules F 3236 are each redundantly connected single pole to the terminal module via a 16 wire system cable The following figures show redundant wiring of F 3236 in put modules in a combined control and marshalling cabinet or in separate cabinets Field Level Field Level III I I Terminals Clamps Fuses Terminals Clamps Fuses DI Terminal Module 11 Interfaces Interfaces e g H 4012 e g H 4012 Wiring Wiring 7020 s Terminal e RIEIAIR Module FRONT x1 x a alaala sla am Ei X17 X18 Are Tel cac TE ee X17 X18 rrr a c Tyr a oe 5 a a ee ee ee pee ehed ee 5 5 gil 1 Module
290. e principle First Come First Serve The following table shows three possible equipment configuration variants of H51q and how many MODBUS TCP master can access the F 865x central module Variants F 865x associated F 8627X Max number of MODBUS master 1x CU1 1 4 1 x CU2 1 4 1x CU1 2 8 5 1x CU2 2 8 1x CU1 5 maximum equipment 20 3 1x CU2 5 maximum equipment 20 Table 9 Variants for MODBUS master access the H51q Note Up to 40 MODBUS TCP masters can access the H51q controller However a maximum number of 16 MODBUS TCP master is recom mended see variant 2 in Table 9 Partitioning of the BUSCOM address range in the MODBUS TCP slave H41q H51q All variables which should be sent via the MODBUS TCP slave must be created as BUSCOM variables using ELOP Il While configuring the MODBUS communication the user must ensure that separate address ranges are used for BUSCOM Import Variables for each MODBUS master otherwise the ac ceptance of the data sent by a MODBUS TCP master cannot be guaranteed F 8627X 0650 The following figure shows an example how the BUSCOM import address range of the H41q H51q can be partitioning for the MODBUS TCP masters BUSCOM IMPORT address range address range for MODBUS Master 1 address range for MODBUS Master 2 address range for MODBUS Master 3 address range for MODBUS Master 4 Figure 9 Partitioning of the BUSCOM Import address
291. e Faston connectors 4 1 Current distribution within the assembly kit 411 HIMA devices for current distribution It is recommended to use the HIMA supplies and current distributions K 7212 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with 2 decoupling diodes and 2 net work filters with fusing of up to 12 single circuits with circuit breakers or K 7213 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with fusing of up to 12 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7214 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7215 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers graphical display 4 1 2 Supply 24 VDC The 24 VDC power supply can be feeded three times to the system H51q MS starlike wiring See also catalog H41q H51q chapter 4 3 The Input Output Level 24 VDC Supply and Distri bution Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 21 22 23 2 L RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 0 8 max 16AgL PS1 PS3 XG 21 22 23 1 L BK 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole L RD Color code red BK Color code black Table 1 Supply 24 VDC 4 1 3 Output 24 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use XG 24 2 L RD 1 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply fuse monitoring and IO CON in the I O rack RD Color code red Table 2 Output 24 VDC 100
292. e additional modules see assembly kit wiring diagram XG 24 XG 25 Z 6013 XG 26 Z 6018 4 6 2 Wiring by customer XG 1 2 4 Watchdog signal for modules XG 1 9 11 Monitoring power supply PS1 PS3 by F 7131 for external exam ination XG 2 Connection 5 VDC for I O subrack XG 3 Ground GND for supply 5 VDC XG 21 XG 22 XG 23 Supply 24 V via module Z 6011 see assembly kit wiring diagram L L 105 B 5231 H51q MS 0605 4 7 Supply racks XG 2 5V x e e X F 7131 PS1 N PS2 N PS3 F 7126 F 7126 F 7126 GND XGA 1 2 XG 5 1 2 3 2 2 GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm XG 24 8 9 222 111 eo 2n e L L Si 446A 2 e e RD 1 5 mm Z 6013 eo 3 XG 24 6 7444 RD 1mm BK XG 21 T 8 4 4 6 555 6 22 8 4 6 555 e 50 e 50 gt 4 4 26011 one 26011 XG 21 3 2 1 XG 22 3 2 1 L L L L Supply 24VDC Supply 24VDC supply PS3 supply PS2 Assembly kit wiring diagram XG 3 le 14 GND 3 Connection for external backup battery 1412B e Power supply monitoring PS3 e 10 52 PS1 8 e X e 6 e 3 F 8650X 4 3 Watchdog to I O rack WD 42 e 1 XG 1 B 5231 BK 1 5 mm GYO5mm GYO5mm Supply rack RD 1 5 XG 25 8 9 222 111 x efi 51 0 L L 1 6
293. e approx 1 5 ms Switching current 1 lt 1 lt 4A Inrush peak lt 12 A for 4 s relative ON period lt 10 96 Life mechanical 2 x 107 cycles Life electrical 105 cycles with full resistive load and lt 0 1 cycles per second Switching capacity up to 60 VAC max 240 VA cos lt 0 5 Switching capacity up to 30 VDC max 120 W non inductive up to 60 VDC max 40 W Switching frequency max 18 Hz Space requirement 4SU Operating data 5 VDC 60 mA 24 VDC 150 mA Isolation between contact circuits up to 300 V to EN 50178 VDE 0160 overvoltage class 11 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 259 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3422 0524 260 Channel Connection Color 1 216 WH d16 BN 2 z18 GN d18 YE 3 z20 GY d20 PK 4 z22 BU d22 RD Cable 5 724 BK 16 x 0 5 mm d24 VT 6 226 WHBN d26 WHGN 7 228 WHYE d28 WHGY 8 z30 WHPK d30 WHBU Flat pin L z2 BK plug L z12 RD 28x 0 8 mm Lead marking of the cable plug 2 27139 3422 q 1mm 750 mm Figure 2 Lead marking of cable plug F 3430 0507 F 3430 4 channel relay module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 Switching voltage 2 5 V lt 250 110 VDC with integrated safety shutdown with safety isolation with 3 subsequent relays in diversity Solid state output open collector for LED display i
294. e associated F 865x central module and via the HSR cable BV 7053 to the redundant F 8628X and the associated F 865x central module The HSR cable between the two redundant F 8628X enables the communication to both cen tral modules as well as the Reload of a redundant H41q 51q Note For II TCP connection any free IP address for the PADT may be used If the PADT IP addresses and the F 8628X are located in the same subnet a routing entry for the subnet of the F 8628X is not required on the PADT Chapter 5 2 6 1 Note Carefully check that no other participant e g H41q H51q OPC server or PC has the same IP address as this could cause communication problems Next time when expanding communication please con sider the H41q H51q and the OPC server IP addresses Create II TCP connection to H41q H51q Perform the following settings on the H41q H51q Activate the ID_IP switch 1 8 ON on the F 8628X Set channel 1 or channel 2 on the module F 8628X see chapter 5 1 Set the redundant channel if available on the redundant module F 8628X see chapter 5 1 Make sure that a proper operating system OS Version 05 34 or higher is loaded in the F 865x central modules Set same number for the ID on the 865x central module DIP switches see F 865x data sheet which is used as Res ID in the resource name last two digits of the resource name F 8628X 0650 If necessary delete
295. e black Table 1 Supply 24 VDC 4 1 3 Output 24 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use XG 24 2 L RD 1 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply fuse monitoring and IO CON in the rack XG 25 2 L RD 1 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply fuse monitoring and IO CON in the rack for 2nd I O bus only 5232 2 RD Color code red Table 2 Output 24 VDC 112 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 4 1 4 4 2 Supply 5 VDC The 5 VDC power supply does not have to be wired extra as it is already part of the installation To supply the I O racks the 5 V power supply with corresponding GND is available at the rear side of the central rack The 5 VDC power and GND are connected starlike with each 2 wires to the potential distributor The 5 VDC power needed for the microprocessor system and as control current for the I O modules is generated from the 24 VDC power of the system via 24 VDC 5 VDC power sup ply modules type F 7126 One central rack can be equipped with a maximum of 3 power supply modules The power supply modules are switched in parallel One or two power supply mod ules are usually able to supply the PES A further power supply module is used to increase availability Note At planning the load of the power supply units have to be calculated The 5 VDC output voltage of the power supply module for the CPU I O and the interfaces are monitored by the power supply monito
296. e communication with the central module via CPU bus Special applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the central module to a PADT ELOP II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network Modbus TCP Special application with the communication module F 8628X ELOP II TCP connection PADT via the Ethernet interface of the F 8628X to the H41q H51q controller Startup and maintenance A battery change of the buffer batteries on the power supply monitoring module and the central module CPU in operation is recommended every 6 years Buffer battery with soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000016 Buffer battery without soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000019 Further informations see also catalog H41q H51q chapter 9 Startup and maintenance 123 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 4 Wiring of the assembly kit The assembly kit is already wired for operation Wirings have still to be done by the user op tional modules see Assembly kit diagram wiring With installation of the assembly kit a conductive connection to the frame or a separate earth connection has to be installed according to the EMC requirements Connection PE earth Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm Pay attention for the manufacturers information concerning detaching and replugging of the Faston connectors 4 1 Current distribution within the assembly kit 411 HIMA devices for current distribution It is re
297. e diagnostic display of the central module via two buttons or after the start of the communication to the programming device via OLT window Refer to the documentation of the operating system Starting the Communication between Programming Device and PES For construction and startup of the communication between progamming device and PES re fer to the documentations first steps ELOP Il user manual operating system and user manual Resource Type Communication faults can be checked by means of a program HIKA for monitoring logging and analyzing of the data communication For more informations about the tool HIKA refer to the service Maintenance Maintenance on supply signal and data lines may only be executed by qualified personnel with consideration of all ESD protection measures Before direct contact of these lines the maintenance personnel has to be electrostatically discharged At safety related applications e g using of relay output modules the modules have to be over hauled at regular intervals every 3 years for relay modules for all other modules every 10 years OFFLINE proof test see IEC EN 61508 4 paragraph 3 8 5 We recommend exchanging electrolytic capacitors in the power supply every five years 41 Startup and Maintenance 9 7 1 42 Exchange of the Buffering Batteries For buffering lithium batteries are used Lifetime of the buffer batteries CPU not in operation modules
298. e extension of the time for the inrush current for lamp loads by the appertaining func tion block is valid for all channels So inductive and lamp loads may not be operated on one module at the same time The line break monitoring requires an output load of at least 10 mA The short circuit and line break can be evaluated in the user program as line faults by means of the function blocks HB BLD 3 or HB BLD 4 The evaluation of the signal line break is made up to SIL 1 The outputs of the module and their supply voltage must be connected with two poles The use of common lines can produce coupling loops with interferences leading to a module fault or a failure of the safety shutdown of the outputs The outputs can be connected in parallel without additional external decoupling diodes An external short circuit of a channel does not trigger the integrated safety shutdown i e the remaining channels continue their function If the line is longer than 10 m or if a power supply unit not manufactured by HIMA is used for a faultless operation with 48 V the supply voltage must be filtered with an additional module Z 6019 Lines for outputs not used may not be extended to the plant without any terminal loads In one I O subrack max 10 output modules with nominal load may be used at the same time At maximum power dissipation a forced cooling with a fan module is required Note for the redundant use of modules In case of a line short circuit t
299. e network One PES may have no more than 30 safeethernet com munication partners A PES can have no more than 63 safeethernet communication partners Timeout fixed to 16 ms Timeout adjustable 10 ms up to 1480 ms Switch S1 1 5 Communication between each PES and any other PES HIPRO S dummies might be required Not required Ethernet network with low load Only HIMA PES or HIMA OPC servers An existing Ethernet network can be used ifthe require ments are fullfilled Hub Switch Switch HSR cable required for redundancy HSR cable is required for ELOP TCP and MODBUS TCP Port 502 Half Full Duplex Full Duplex Table 7 Overview of the HIPRO S DIRECT communication via the F 8627X 1 Requirements for using an existing Ethernet network for the HIMA PES with F 8627X Network may only contain switches Full Duplex no collisions Sufficient bandwidth for transmission Calculating the timeout with the delay time induced by active network components e g switches gateways taken into account 371 F 8627X 0650 372 OPC without Passive Mode OPC with Passive Mode OPC with Passive Mode HIPRO S DIRECT F 8625 from version 1 x F 8627 F 8627X from version 2 x on F 8625 from version 1 13 8627 F 8627X from version 2 x on F 8627 F 8627X from version 3 x on DIRECT Mode Off Switch 1 7 OFF DIRECT Mode Off Switch
300. e technique Line compensation via correction calculation in the user program Connection of one Pt100 in three wire technique Z 7127 1 6215 Figure 7 Connection of one Pt100 in three wire technique Connection of more than one Pt 100 in three wire technique eae 2 5m Z 7127 6215 Figure 8 Connection of more than one Pt 100 in three wire technique 283 F 6215 0507 Using of one Pt 100 in four wire technique 2 5mA Figure 9 Using of one Pt 100 in four wire technique Using of more than one Pt 100 in four wire technique Figure 10 Using of more than one Pt 100 in four wire technique Installation of diode ZPD 5 1 on terminals in case of replacing a Pt 100 element Note The resistance of the current loop must be less than 6 Reason To ensure the security of the functions of all other Pt 100 measurements in case of one thermometer break 284 F 6216A 0541 F 6216A 6216A 8 channel analog input module with transmitter supply for transmitters in two wire technique 4 20 mA Pt 100 inputs current inputs 0 4 20 mA with safety isolation to the plant and electrical isolation between the inputs resolution 12 bits transmitter supply with safety isolation IN N rss ES N a Ero N ze e te toe o st
301. eArsordxe asn 5 eajsojdxe Ajjenuejod uj asn t SN BES 10 uoneuuojur JENU SS 2 er x33 1 lt uogongsuoo jo Jo seues Jo 6 6 1urod x xeuuy Bupyew 39 jo pue asi uondo snu pue oup BuAynuep 1 LEO 58161 20 00 SX3 uvoneumuexg 1 33 0 xipuoddy vic anjen 15812 AES 2 y Jaye JOU M9 J MOd A 0 Isa ejes 5 22 Hod Adddns ez A 15945 eDeyoA ejes Ajles supyur uou 27 822222 97 LX wodindno zz HL 0 9 9 eouejonpur Jopoedes vzve 0 0 9 97 ejqejoeuuoo Jri 92 0 o 1 59 eeve Joyoedes x33 22 3n 295 Joyoedeo ejqej2euuoo
302. easy access to the cables 24 VDC Supply and Distribution For 24 VDC supply and distribution we recommend to use the K 7212 K 7213 K 7214 K 7215 subassemblies or fuse distributor K 7915 They include all components for the fusing of up to 18 individual supply circuits with circuit breakers The K 7212 is additionally equipped with decoupling diodes and filters with monitoring relays for mains supply Additionally you could use also a power supply of the PS1000 series see ELOP II CD The H41q System Family 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 amp FS 3 3 5 10 Modules The I O modules are used for signal transfer and signal matching between the plant and the central modules The input and output circuits are always fed into the I O modules via cable plugs on the front side The status of the digital output signals is shown on the LEDs of the cable plugs The power supply is either via the cable plugs or via the I O bus board The order of the different I O module types does not matter All I O modules can be removed or inserted during operation see chapter 8 1 1 ATEX Ex i Modules The current Ex i modules exist in 2 construction models non varnished with PCB covering varnished with PCB covering Any models can be equipped together without empty slots between them Non varnished Ex i modules may combined together with non Ex i modules without any re strictions There are no free slots necessary on the
303. eceive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 153 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7040 0508 154 BV 7043 0508 BV 7043 BV 7043 Data connecting cable Direct connection of personal computer to the interface in the H41q H51q systems also redundant without additional power supply Standard lengths 5 m 15 m 00000 MIN D socket 9 poles Figure 1 Wiring u 3 41 5 6 8 9 21 MIN D plug 9 poles 100 b 50 mm width h 25mm Notes It is not possible to build up a serial connection of several cables BV 7043 for extension Usable for service and set up not for continuous operation in this case use interface converter H 7505 and appertaining cables Together with the MIN D 9 pole adapter socket socket part no 52 0009389 the BV 7043 is also usable as a branch to connect a PC with the system software HIMA communication analyzer HIKA If the cable is used together with a system software which does not support the status line of an interface RS 232 C the DIP switch on the board within the box Z 6004 has to be set from positi
304. ection of the communication module group see Table 6 and Figure 5 Notes for creating HIPRO S user program While creating the user program the following points should be considered In a resource name must have eight characters the last two of which must be numbers see Chapter 5 1 With HIPRO S safety related communication must be set up such that each PES has configured a safety related data exchange with all other PES i e exchange of dummy data if no other user data are exchanged The direction of the data exchange can be freely selected To check the HIPRO S configuration the PES master program should be compiled but not loaded into the master Potential errors can be corrected Via the system variables the diagnosis of the safety related communication can be evaluated in the user program Il s function block HK COM 3 can be used to project and monitor the F 8627X The monitoring time MT MTe for HIPRO S connections must be calculated Chap ter 6 7 383 F 8627X 0650 6 6 384 HIPRO S DIRECT Like HIPRO S HIPRO S DIRECT is a safety communication via the HIPRO S variables con figured in the PES This mode can only be used with switches HIPRO S DIRECT mode allows a faster exchange of data than HIPRO S mode No more than 99 safeethernet members can be configured in the entire network One PES can have up to 63 safeethernet communication partners If more than 30 commu
305. ection via a 9 pole SUB D plug Ethernet interface 10Base T or 100Base TX according to the IEEE 802 3 stan dard connection via an RJ 45 plug HSR interface High speed serial communication interface to the redundant HSR High Speed Redundancy communication module Connection via an RJ 12 plug with BV 7053 Diagnostic Display 6 LEDs for display diagnostic during operation DIP switches 2 DIP switches for setting the module functions All rights reserved The technology is subject to changes without notice 409 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 8628X 0650 2 Functions of the F 8628X OOUSH 2 1 General With the F 8628X communication module a HIMA H41q H51q controller can operate as a PROFIBU DP Slave Beginning with operating system version 4 x the F 8628X supports the function ELOP II TCP The ELOP II TCP connection enables a fast data exchange between a PADT PC and the F 865x central module Note The F 8628X has the same functions as the F 8628 and is compatible with it however the new function II TCP can only be used with an F 8628X with an operating system beginning with V4 x the same PES the HK COM 3 software function block with the proper N If an F 8628X module and a F 8621A coprocessor module operates in parameterization must be used see function block online help 2 2 Replacing an F 8628X An F 8628X must never be removed from a redundant operati
306. ectrical characteristics of supply contacts Nominal voltage 30 VDC Current per channel 2A Max total current 16A Insulation 30V 30 VAC DC Cross section X2 X4 XX 0 2 2 5 mm Sockets and terminals on the Terminal Module H 7016 Designator Type Contact E Vario ELCO 8016 1x 56 X2 X4 Terminal block 2x 16 pins XX Terminal block 1x 8 pins 4x supply contacts 2x floating contacts 2x contacts Y for shield Table 1 Sockets and terminals H 7016 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 483 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl H 7016 0507 Mechanical design and dimensions of Terminal Module H 7016 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 2 4 6 1 3 57 9 1113 15 17 19 2123 25 27 29 31 Figure 2 Mechanical design and dimensions of Terminal Module H 7016 Depth 105 mm with Vario plug ELCO 8016 Mounting on 35 mm DIN rail Installation orientation horizontally or vertically Installation clearance min 25 mm to next Terminal Module H 7016 Application Wiring of H 7015 with H 7016 For fast and efficient wiring plug and play between a PLC cabinet and a marshalling cabinet the Terminal Modules H 7015 H 7016 and the cable BV 7201 are required Marshalling cabinet X4 X2 E 7016 80165 BV 7201 N PLC cabinet Terminal M
307. ed from SIL 2 Normal and re commended parameter Parameter Emergency off Switch off of the watchdog signal of the appertaining central unit and thus shutdown of the out put amplifiers in case of a fault in the output module The watchdog signal is not switched off at faults in the input modules Module switch off A faulty testable output module with integrated safety shutdown will be switched automatically to the safe de energized safe status Group shutdown If it is requested a group shutdown may be defined in the user program so that all testable output modules belonging to one group with the faulty module are also switched off Inside the user program up to 10 testable output modules can be assigned to one group by means of the function block H8 STA 3 WD switch off of the appertaining CPU In this case the watchdog signal WD of the appertaining central module will be switched off If systems with redundant central modules and a common I O bus are used then the output modules are assigned to both central modules In case of a fault both watchdog signals of the central modules are switched off that means all the I O modules are switched off only at H51q H HS If systems with redundant central modules and redundant I O bus are used then the output modules are related to one central module and one I O bus In case of a fault only the watchdog signal of the related central module is switched off that means only the related I
308. ehand otherwise a connection cannot be opened to the newly loaded F 8628X with the same IP address Example Delete the ARP entry of a F 8628X with the IP address 192 168 0 67 Start the Dos Shell on the PADT PC Enter the command arp d 192 168 0 67 F 8628X 0650 11 Recommended literature 1 Safety Manual H41q H51q HIMA GmbH Co KG Bruehl 2005 HI 800 013 2 Functions of the Operating System H41q H51q HIMA GmbH Co KG Bruehl 2005 HI 800 105 3 Online Help in ELOP II HIMA GmbH Co KG Bruehl 2005 4 First Steps II HIMA GmbH Co KG Bruehl 2001 HI 800 000 5 HIMA OPC Server 3 0 Rev 2 GmbH Co KG Bruehl 2004 439 F 8628X 0650 440 F 8650X 0606 F 8650X 3 28 8650X Central module Use in the PES H51q MS HS HRS Safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 T oo Bu Oo oo Figure 1 View Battery Switch S1 o9 99 8650X 8 Central module with two clock synchronized microprocessors Microprocessors Clock frequency Memory per microprocessor Operating System User program Data Interfaces Diagnostic display Shutdown on fault Construction INTEL 386EX 32 bits 25 MHz Flash EPROM 1 MB Flash EPROM 1 MB SRAM 1 MB Degree of utilization depending on operating system version Two serial interfaces RS 485 with electric isolation Four digit matrix displa
309. em variable In case of a 5 VDC system power failure a lithium battery on the central module buffers the hardware clock and SRAM on the central module Connection of the monitoring loop for fuses and fans Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 21 4 5 6 GY 0 5 mm Faston 2 8 x 0 8 max 4 slow Floating NO NC con blow tact for signaling GY Color code gray Table 2 Connection of the monitoring loop Internal fuses Position Size Dimension HIMA part no Z 6011 4 A slow blow 5 20 mm 57 0174409 Z 6013 1 6 A slow blow 5 x 20 mm 57 0174169 Table 3 Internal fuses Backplane bus Central module CU and I O modules are connected via the backplane bus The jumper plug Z 6007 on connection XD 1 combines the separated I O buses For the single channel system this is mandatory Redundant systems see also HA1q HR and H41q HRS slot 1 to 7 and 8 013 67 4235 H41q MS 0605 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 68 Connections on the rear XG 3 XG 5 xo2xo1 91 x XG 6 13 12 1 10 9 8 Jo 6 5 4 3 2 1 52 51 oo C 76007 L T XD 1 XG 9 XG
310. ent for safety shutdown is now integrated in the output module In case of a fault of an output module the requirements of the SIL 3 are valid without time limit In the following this feature is called the integrated safety shutdown If a safety related output module should fail during operation then it will be automatically switched off with the integrated safety shutdown to get the safe de energized status The coupling module F 7553 which has to be installed in each subrack is able to switch off the watchdog signal WD of the I O subrack Even in case of a very seldom double fault only the related I O subrack will be switched off but not the entire system The H51q System Family 4 3 9 4 4 Special Features of the Output Modules All modules have the following special features To increase the availability the outputs of the safety related output modules can be switched in parallel without external diodes Decoupling diodes are already integrated on the module see the corresponding data sheets No output voltage is generated if the supply voltage L is cut at the output module The connection of inductive loads can be done without using protection diodes at the coil However it is recommended to connect a diode directly at the inductive load avoiding noise voltages The LED signaling the output status is controlled separately The design of the cable plugs enables the two pole connection of the actuators Togethe
311. ent input WD max 30 mA Monitored switching time max 200 us Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 130 mA 24 VDC 180 mA plus load 229 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3331 0626 Chan Connec Chan Connec Color Color nel tion nel tion 1 b2 WH 1 b2 BN 2 b4 BN x2 WH 3 b6 GN 2 b4 YE 4 b8 YE Cable x4 GN 5 b10 GY LiYY 8x 3 b6 PK 6 b12 PK 0 5 mm2 x6 GY 7 b14 BU 4 b8 RD 8 b16 RD x8 BU Gable L 22 BK Flat pin 5 us Be 16x L 212 RD Maia 6 b12 WHGN 0 5 mm 12 WHBN 2 7 614 WHGY 2 Sle x14 WHYE 8 b16 WHBU x16 WHPK L z2 BK Flat pin L 212 RD plug 2 8 x 0 8 mm Lead marking of the cable plug Lead marking of the cable plug 1 mm Z 7138 13331 C Z 7138 3331 C P2 750 mm 230 2 pole connection Figure 2 Lead markings of the cable plugs 1 WE EE ___ 23391 ax e g a 8 a N VL a N N L 01 08 I x2 77138 e e e lt 4W lt 12W L req with inductive load Figure 3 2 pole connection Operating points of the line monitoring value differences possible by component tolerances short circuit current 0 75 1 5A line break 0 5 9 5 mA F 3331 0626 Planning notes The function block HB BLD 3 for single channel operation or HB BLD 4 for redundant operation must be used for all applications with t
312. entilation fan The fan K 9203 must be installed above the subrack where the F 6221 module is plugged in If the F 6221 module is operated in an 41 the fan 9212 must be installed directly under the F 6221 module In order to ensure the forced ventilation the air deflector panel M 7201 1 HE must to be mounted over the fan K 9203 or over the kit H 41q The air deflector panel M 7201 deflects the warm air to the rear in order to avoid a temperature rise of the subracks and modules which are mounted above Note The block diagram of F 6221 shows the wiring with the supply module F 3325 In this wiring variant the first six channels of the F 3325 mod ule are used for passive transmitters The channels 7 and 8 are used for active transmitters see Variant A1 and A2 The pins d4 and d30 on the front socket of the F 6221 are omitted coding of the front plug F 6221 0625 2 2 1 Application The field of application of the F 6221 module is the operation with current transmitters 0 4 to 20 mA which can be supplied via the intrinsically safe supply unit F 3325 For safety reasons the supply voltage of the transmitters is monitored The F 6221 module contains the measuring device It can be used to measure up to eight sig nal inputs 11 to 18 For monitoring the transmitter supply voltages another eight signal inputs TC1 to TC8 are available These signal inputs only monitor the switch off limit and are
313. entral module to PADT II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network safeethernet Modbus TCP The communication runs from the central module via the backplane bus to the communication module F 8627X and from the Ethernet ports of the F 8627X into the Ethernet network and vice versa Special features of the central module Self education from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 ELOP II TCP from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 Further informations about the bus station no ELOP II TCP loading of operating systems and application programs self education et al corresponding to the central module you will find in the data sheet of the F8627X as well as the operating system manual of H41q H51q and the safety manual of H41q H51q Before removing a central module its fixing screws must be completely loosened and freely movable Remove the module from the bus board by pushing the ejection lever front label top down and quickly remov ing in an upward motion to ensure that faulty signals are not triggered within the system To attach the module place it on the terminal block and press it inwards as far as it will go This action should be performed quickly to ensure that faulty signals are not triggered within the system 451 F 8652X 0606 Function of the ejection lever with front label Push ejection lever top down U Withdraw module Front plate
314. entral rack Apart from them they supply their own circuits The reference poles GND have to be connected together The power supply units of the additional power supply assembly kit B 9361 emit monitoring signals These signals can be taken from the XG 1 terminal block on the rear side of the sub rack see 9361 assembly kit They can be fed into the PLC via digital input modules In the logic of the PLC the signals are used to trigger an error message 17 The H51q System Family 4 3 5 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 A Be T v Rheinland 18 The I O Bus With the I O subrack the connection element for the I O bus is the F 7553 coupling module plugged into slot 17 The connection of the I O bus between the individual I O module subracks is established at the rear side via the BV 7032 data cable which is connected to the plugs XD 1 and XD 2 The I O bus in the I O module subracks is integrated in the bus board An F 7546 bus termination module is plugged into the XD 2 connector of the last module subrack to terminate the I O bus Modules The I O modules are used for signal transfer and signal matching between the plant and the central devices The input and output circuits are always fed into the I O modules via cable plugs on the front side The status of the digital signals is shown on the LEDs of the cable plugs The power supply is either via the cable plugs or via the I O bus board The order of the
315. er OPC gt H51q_0 Undo Filter gt 51 1 Read To be read by the OPC gt HS1q_2 Export to Text HIMA OPC server gt 514 3 OPC gt H51q_4 View Write To be written by the HIMA OPC server Figure 17 Dialog Res Docu generated The generated BUSCOM list appears as seen in Figure 18 and can be used by the HIMA OPC server without any changes opc Editor Datei Bearbeiten Format Ansicht RES docu generated Config B1_PES03 Variable Data type Read Address Write Address Event H 1q OPC OUINT 0 H 1q OPC 1UINT H51q OPC 2 UINT H 51q OPC 3 UINT H51q gt OPC_4 UINT OPC H51q 0 UINT OPC H51q 1 OPC H51q 2 UINT gt 519 3 gt 519 4 UINT Figure 18 BUSCOM list for the HIMA OPC server 399 F 8627X 0650 7 7 1 7 2 400 Address mapping of the BUSCOM variables Data types of BUSCOM variables Overview how the BUSCOM variables are represented and stored ELOP Il Process data mapping Size of data types variable data types on the F 8627X on the F 8627X and F 865x BOOL BOOL 1 Byte WORD WORD WORD 2 Bytes INT UINT Table 17 Data type definitions All 2 Byte data types configured in ELOP as BUSCOM variables are transmitted as WORD 1 Byte data types e g Byte SINT must be packed into BUSCOM variables of data type WORD e g with the function blocks Pack and Unpack such that they
316. er of bus cycles polling cycles from the PROFIBUS DP master settings or by using a bus analyzer The estimate formula is only suited for PROFIBUS DP slave mod ules of type F 8628X The PROFIBUS DP slave modules must be set to a fixed baud rate via switch 2 5 8 When reloading the redundant H41q H51q systems one must ensure that the central module 1 is loaded first 425 F 8628X 0650 7 7 1 7 2 426 Address mapping of the BUSCOM variables Data types of BUSCOM variables Overview how the BUSCOM variables are represented and stored ELOP Il Process data mapping Size of data types variable data types on the F 8628X on the F 8628X and F 865x BOOL BOOL 1 Byte WORD WORD WORD 2 Bytes INT UINT Table 8 Data type definitions All 2 Byte data types configured in as BUSCOM variables are transmitted as WORD 1 Byte data types e g Byte SINT must be packed into BUSCOM variables of data type WORD e g with the function blocks Pack and Unpack such that they can be transmitted BUSCOM address of the F 865x central module The user can set up the BUSCOM Addresses of the BUSCOM variables by specifying the base and relative addresses The addresses of the BUSCOM variables are calculated on the central module F 865x as fol lows Base address Relative address BUSCOM address The relative address must be set such that the BUSCOM address is located in the same r
317. eration valve control Pin allocation for redundant operation Channel Pin Color O1 72 WH OR1 b4 BN O2 z8 GN OR2 b10 YE O3 722 GY OR3 b24 PK O4 z28 BU OR4 b30 RD Cable 8 x 0 5 mm blue Figure 6 Pin allocation for redundant operation F 3335 0622 1 List of suitable Ex i solenoid valves This list is not intended to be complete All data listed are without guarantee The manufactur ers data sheets are authoritative 1 4 Safety related solenoid valves up to SIL 4 according to IEC 61508 Minimum pick up values valves Manufacturer Type Uan lan Eugen Seitz 11 G 52 Pilot valves 121 11 01 13V 16 mA 121 11 02 15V 12 mA 121 11 03 14V 16 mA 121 113 23 14 V 16 mA PV 12F73 Ci oH 133 288 00 14 V 2 2 mA PV 12F73 Xi oH 127 991 00 6 4V 1 5 mA PV 12F73 Xi oH 2 128 319 00 7V 4 4 MA Norgren Herion 2001 2002 22V directly controlled 5y 1 40 mA 1 1 Hold values 1 2 solenoid valves Minimum pick up values Manufacturer Type Uan lan ASCO Joucomatic IMXX directly controlled ISSC WPIS 21 6 V valves 11 28 1 Burkert 0590 10 4 V 29 mA Pilot valves 5470 6516 6517 6518 6519 8640 6106 10 8 V 30 mA Norgren Herion 2032 8 2V 34 mA Pilot valves 2033 9 0 V 30 mA 2034 10 0 V 27 mA 2035 11 5 V 25 mA 2036 13 0V 23 mA 2037 14 4V 21 mA 2038 15 9V 19 mA 245 F 3335 0622 246
318. eration even one power supply module F 7126 has failed Values of the current requirement 5 VDC refer to the data sheets Note Operating system resource type Il The assembly kit is usable since operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 Resource type in ELOP Il H51qe MS Modules Central module F 8650X The central module for safety related applications with TUV certificate of the PES H51q MS contains the essential functions demonstrated in the block diagram of the central module Interfaces Front panel Displays Interrogation Setting of bus subscriber no Inverted memory ____ o ultiplexer voltage monitoring i i bus logic i bus WD DPR Bus CPU Bus Rear side bus plane Figure 2 Block diagram of the central module F 8650X two clock synchronized microprocessors each microprocessor with an own memory one processor operates with real data and pro gram and the other one with inverted data and program testable hardware comparer for all the external accesses of both microprocessors in case of a fault the watchdog will be set to the safe status and the sta tus of the processor is announced Flash EPROMs of the program memory for the operating system and the user program usable for min 100 000 writing cycles Data memory in sRAM Multiplexer to connect I O bus DPR and redundant CU not used in the H51q MS sys
319. erature limits Value in Type Thermocouple Nominal range Input voltage Temperature limits Monitored Range of use Input voltage Temperature limits Value in B Pt30 Rh Pt6 Rh 0 092 mV 13 820 mV 150 C 1820 C 0 002 mV 13 820 mV 50 C 820 C 500 18200 variable type INT J Fe CuNi 8 095 mV 69 553 mV 210 C 1200 C 8 095 mV 69 553 mV 210 C 1200 C 2100 12000 variable type INT K CrNi NiAl 6 035 mV 54 819 mV 210 C 1370 C 6 458 mV 54 819 mV 270 C 1370 C 2700 13700 variable type INT T Cu CuNi 5 753 mV 21 003 mV 210 C 400 C 6 258 mV 21 003 mV 270 C 400 C 2700 4000 variable type INT E CrNi CuNi 9 063 mV 76 373 mV 210 C 1000 C 9 835 mV 76 373 mV 270 C 1000 C 2700 10000 variable type INT 299 F 6220 0625 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 300 Technical data Low voltage input Input voltage 100 mV 100 mV Linearization lt 0 1 96 Resolution 0 01 mV with scaling 0 1 Value in 10000 10000 variable type INT Input for comparison measurement Input for comparison Pt100 with two wire measurement Measurement max line length 6 m Reference temperature Limits 40 C 80 C Resolution 0 1 C Value in ELOP Il 400 800 variable type INT The Pt 100 input of the module F 6220 can be used as reference tempera
320. erter with safe isolation Function unit and signal converter with galvanic isolation Trigger stage threshold input VY LLL Amplifier in direction of signal flow DC DC converter Transmitter Analog Digital converter L Digital Analog converter T Automatic testing for operation Signal contraction Channel numbers according to Modify Cabinet Il 1 2 3 Module with automatical test functions Y 0T le J Threshold input for line break and line short circuit monitoring 51 Data Sheets E C lt gt MUX 545 lt oe i 52 Proximity switch without attenuation high current to the amplifier Proximity switch with attenuation low current to the amplifier Input filter testable Control block for registers Multiplexer bus Indicator light LED off no of the channel Indicator light LED on in function tables Current source Sensor with resistor as near as possible at the contact Diode Light emitting diode LED Relay with reverse current diode Resistance thermometer Pt 100 Fuse Power source Data Sheets 4F 100 F lt 15W L L 5 GND At inputs Load of the signal 4F 8mAat24v signal range 13 33 V At outputs Loadability of the signal 100 F 200 mA Loadability of the
321. es Monitoring power supply PS1 PS3 by F 7131 for external exam ination Connection 5 VDC for I O subrack Ground GND for supply 5 VDC Supply 24 V via module Z 6011 see assembly kit wiring diagram L L B 5230 H51q M 0605 4 7 Assembly kit wiring diagram Supply racks XG 2 XG 3 0909000009099 6 5V GND 43 Connection for external backup battery 14128 e Power supply monitoring e x 1 NG3 e 10 NG2 x e NG1 8 e ND E 7 SN NN e 6 N N F 7131 x SEN N e PS1 N PS2 PS3 N 27126 27126 F 7126 GND F 8651X 4 3 Watchdog to the rack WD 1 cu xG 4 1 2 3 XG 5 1 2 3 B 5230 1 5 mm GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 6 0 5 GYO5mm supply I O rack RD 1 5 mm XG 24 8 9 222 111 XG 25 8 9 222 111 lt ee ee ee ee Si U e L L Si U e L L 1 6A hd 16A 2 ee RD 1 5 mm 4 e 26013 o 26013 o 2 x e x ee 3 3 XG 24 6 7 444 o 3 3 XG 25 6 7 444 RD 1 mm BK 1 mm RD 1 mm BK 1 mm BK 0 5 mm RD 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm XG 21 8 4 4 6 555 XG22 4 6 555 x X623 4 6 555 12 3 H 1 XG 26 e eo g e e E e E e e 59 5 e Si o 2 e Sil L U 26018 x 5 5 amp 4A 9 4A e e e e e e Z 6011 26011 76011 oe
322. es for option separate order 1 4x F 7133 4 channel power distribution with fuses slots 18 21 to fuse and distri bute L EL and L The fuse monitoring on the current distribution modules are internally switched in series A cor responding fault signal is served via a neutral contact The fault contact of a not installed cur rent distribution module is bypassed by a jumper All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 135 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl B 9302 0507 Central module 2 Central module 1 Rear central rack XD 1 T T XD 2 08 Central rack 5 Units high BV 7032 1 4 7546 gt BV 7032 Front of the racks Rear of the I O racks TeX IO CON rack 4Units high F 7553 XD 2 BV 7032 pe gt 40 rack 4Units high rasen XD 2 BV 7032 Ll XD 1 IO CON VO rack 4Units high F 7553 XD 2 F 7546 Set I O rack address by means of a coding switch refer to data sheet F 7553 Figure 2 Wiring of the single channel I O bus max length I O bus 12m max length cable BV 7032 5m 136 B 9302 0507 Central module 2 Central module 1 Rear Central rack XD 128 XD 22 F 7546 F 7546 Central rack 5 Unit high 2 EIA Bus 1 EIA Bus 2nd I O bus 1st I O bus XD XD 4 BV 7032 Front of the I O racks Rear of the I O racks Ss 240 4 ae lO
323. es to request detailed error information push button ACK resets the error indication in failure stop ACK behaves like restarting the system For further information on the diagnostic display and lists of error codes refer to the documen tation Functions of the operational system BS 41q 51q also on ELOP II CD Notes for start up and maintenance Lifetime of the buffer battery without voltage feeding 1000 days at TA 25 C 200 days at TA 60 C It is recommended to change the buffer battery CPU in operation at the latest after 6 years or with display BATI within three months Lithium battery e g type CR 2477N HIMA part no 44 0000018 Check the bus station no and transmission rate at switch 51 for correct settings Important When upgrading an F 8651 to an F 8651X module the fan concept has also to be changed 448 F 8652X 0606 F 8652X 3 28 F 8652X Central module Use in the PES H41q MS HS HRS Safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 Battery Switch S1 n ea 8 T S IBS Ree iss jog o 50 Bu Bu oo A lt gt o9 HIMA F 8652X Figure 1 View Central module with two clock synchronized microprocessors Microprocessors INTEL 386EX 32 bits Clock frequency 25 MHz Memory per microprocessor Operat
324. esignation H4116 SIL 2 AK 4 zweck use in process control Burner 4135 SIL 3 AK 5 6 Intended Management BMS emergency shut H 4136 SIL 3 AK 5 6 application down where the safe state is the de energized state Pr fgrundlagen IEC 61508 Part 1 7 2000 Codes and standards forming VDE 0801 1990 and Amendment 1 1994 the basis of testing DIN V 19250 1994 DIN VDE 0116 1989 prEN 50156 1 CDV 2000 EN 60664 1 2003 EN 50178 1997 EN 298 1994 NFPA 8501 1997 NFPA 8502 1999 EN 61000 6 2 2000 EN 61000 6 4 2002 Pr fungsergebnis The modules are suitable for safety related applications up to SIL 2 Test results or SIL 3 61508 RC 4 5 6 DIN V 19250 Besondere Bedingungen For the use of the Planar F Modules the Safety Manual the User Specific requirements Manual and the actual revision of Ihe official list of product documentation hardware modules and software components released by and Rheinland have to be considered Der Pr fborichI Nr 968 EZ 165 00 04 vom 2004 04 14 ist Bestandteil dieses Zertifikates Der Inhaber eines f r den Pr fgegenstand g ltigen Genehmigungs Ausweises ist berechtigt die mit dem Prifgegenstand berein stimmenden Erzeugnisse mit dem abgebildeten Pr fzeichen zu ver sehen las report no 968 EZ 165 00 04 dated 2004 04 14 is an integral par of Ihis cerlificate The holder of a valid licence certificate for tne product tested is authorised to affix the test mark sh
325. eterizable at the function block HF CNT 3 as type DINT Recognition of rotation direction The rotation direction depends on the signal sequence of counter input and direction input There has to be a phase shift between them A A TA EN A direction input Figure 4 Application for clockwise rotation counter input If the direction of rotation pulse is leading the function block shows a counter clockwise rota tion If the pulse is lagging there is a clockwise rotation There is the possibility by parameter ization to count only the pulses of one direction of rotation Test connector Z 7208 For testing the functions of the counter module F 5220 the test plug Z 7208 can be fixed on the module instead of the normal front cable plug The plug generates signals to check the func tion The plug is connected with L and L to the supply voltage for the concerning slot 269 F 5220 0625 270 O Z 7208 Functions Adjuster P1 P2 Switch S2 S7 Switch 81 S5 Switch S3 S8 Switch S4 S6 LED 1 V2 Using the counter module F 5220 with EMC filters and Ex isolated switch amplifiers An EMC filter between the F 5220 and a proximity switch eliminates electromagentic interfer ences of the proximity switch line The effectivity of the filter depends on the installation and the conditions of the plant The Ex isloated switch amplifier HIMA H 4011 H 4012
326. etween the supply line of a transmitter and the cable screen earthing of the analog GND of the To be connected to the earth bar module F 6214 is recommended Not to apply in case of single chnl connect aaaeaii ee Z 7127162141 27127162141 0 C2IR N N N Tr 6214 1 pO F 6214 1 module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 Redundant connection for Zener barrier Resistor RO1 50 Q Figure 9 Application example 5 Occupation of not used inputs To guarantee the correct operation of the internal test routines not used analog inputs have to be terminated with resistors Not used inputs single channel connection All examples are for channel 1 Installation of the resistors outside the cable connectors On terminals 275 F 6214 0606 Active passive transmitter 0 4 20 mA Rab Resistors for channels 1 4 Rap terminating E resistor for not used channels era Z712716214 C ITI 0103705 L Rol _ Resistor 07 SUUS N N Value 50 0 05 3 3 5 7 6214 part no 00 0710500 00 0471332 1 I Channel 1 Figure 10 Active passive transmitter 0 4 20 mA Voltage input 0 1 V Rab Resistors for channels 1 4 Rap terminating resistor for not used channels x4e o Z71271
327. exchanged the necessary information will thus be immediately available Startup and Maintenance 9 6 3 9 6 4 9 6 5 9 7 Testing in the Input Output Subracks The essential tests in the input output subracks are Coupling module F 7553 only switch position for coding the rack according H51q systems to the resource type Wiring especially the watchdog signal refer to data sheets of the assembly kits and the safety manual For the construction of the I O bus refer to the data sheets of the B 9302 assembly kit and of the H41q assembly kits The input output modules themselves have no coding Only the correct position of the modules and the corresponding cable connector must be regarded The existing fuse modules including fuses have to be checked for completeness Also the correct assignment of the 24 V supply to the slots of such modules which need the feeding via the rear PCB bus has to be checked Switching on the HIMA PES After the operating voltage has been connected the HIMA PES goes into RUN operation if the user program has been loaded and no error has been found in the system If STOP is displayed the program can be started via II RUN state There is an error if this is not possible Only after the correction of the error e g setting the correct switch position correct connecting lines or possibly after the exchange of a module etc the RUN operation is started Error displays can be called on th
328. f any errors in this manual HIMA would appreciate being informed on pos sible errors The technology is subject to changes without notice Delivery Conditions For our deliveries and services apply the General Conditions for Delivery of Products and Services of the German Electrical Industry edition January 2002 resp the Conditions of Delivery for System Software and Peripheral Devices for the HIMA Automation System e g programmer units printers screen monitors The products of this price list are subject to the valid export regulations Eventual complaints can be recognized only when we are being notified within 14 days after receipt of the merchandize The prices shown in a special list are valid ex works packing charges excluded The prices are subject to change Table of Contents Table of Contents 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 5 5 6 1 6 2 6 4 The HIMA PES case een 2 Concept of the PES eese 3 Safety and Availability east 3 Designs and Types of the PES 4 Concept of H41q M MS H51q M 4 Concept of H41q H HS H51q H 5 Concept of H41q HR HRS H51q HR HRS 5 The H4A1q System rro sn 7 Overview Assembly Kits H41q
329. f problems with the ELOP II TCP communication see also chapter 5 2 6 F 8628X 0650 5 2 5 Il TCP connections to H41q H51q controllers II TCP can operate on an existing Ethernet network Requirements for using an existing Ethernet network for the HIMA PES with F 8628X Network may only contain switches Full Duplex no collisions Sufficient bandwidth for transmission Calculating the timeout with the delay time induced by active network components e g switches gateways taken into account In case of direct connections without switch between the PADT and the H41q H51q control ler a cross over Ethernet cable is required 5 2 5 1 ELOP II TCP connections to redundant H41q H51q controllers ELOP II PADT PC II PADT PC II PADT PC Ethernet Switch Ethernet Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel1 Channel2 2 1 ON S2 OFF 52 1 ON 52 OFF Channel 1 Channel 2 2 1 EN ss 2 1 OFF Fee Cable Miki EI EE Cable a Cable Wi kj The PADT can establish a connection to the H41q H51q only via channel 1 left figure only via channel 2 middle figure only via channel 1 right figure 5 2 5 2 ELOP II TCP connections to mono H41q H51q controller ELOP II PADT PC ELOP II PADT PC Ethernet i Ethernet Switch Channel 1 52 1 ON oder Channel 2 S2 1 OFF a The PADT can establish a connection to the H41q H51q either
330. f the 24 VDC System Voltage 31 31 Earthed Operation u stehn an Ra beendet as 31 Measures to Install a Cabinet According to the GE Requirements 31 Earthing in the HIMA eren eer a 32 Earthing au aa 32 Fastening of the Earthing Straps 34 Interconnecting the Earth Terminals of Multiple Switchgear Cabinets 35 Shielding of Data Lines in the Communication Systems 35 Shielding in the Input Output Area 36 Lightning Protection in Communication Systems 37 Cable Colors ict ik hie 37 Startup and 39 Recommended Devices for Startup and Maintenance 39 Installing the System etek ce ER 39 Earthing the 24 VDC System Voltage sesseeee 39 Starting up the Control Cabinet 39 Testing All Inputs and Outputs for External Voltage 39 Testing All Inputs and Outputs for Earth 39 Switching Power Supply an 40 TOS UNG ee a 40 Preparing Functional 40 Testing in the Central
331. fer batteries G1 G2 additional modules on the rear e 2x2Z6011 decoupling and fusing to feed the power supply modules 1xZ6018 fan run monitoring and fuse monitoring e 2x2Z6013 decoupling and fusing for the supply voltage of the WD signal e 1xZ6007 jumper plug combination of the separated buses single channel system H41q MS include the modules 1xF8652X central module CU1 2 7130A power supply 24 5 VDC PS1 PS2 The 5 V outputs of both power supplies are switched in parallel Modules for option separate order e 1x F 8621A coprocessor module CM1 1x communication module e g F 8627X Ethernet or F 8628X Profibus DP max 13 I O modules slots1 to 13 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 63 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 4235 H41q MS 0605 2 1 64 Note Operating system resource type in ELOP Il The assembly kit is usable since operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 Resource type in ELOP Il H41qce MS Modules Central module F 8652X The central module for safety related applications with certificate of the PES H41q MS contains the essential functions demonstrated in the block diagram of the central module Interfaces Front panel Displays RS 485 Rear side bus plane Interrogation Setting of bus subscriber no Fail safe Watchdog i Inverted memory
332. ff caused by an error only half the current is delivered at the output from one module in the worst case for a maximum of two cycles With the connection of a replaced module twice the current may be delivered for a maximum of one cycle 335 F 6705 0524 2 2 2 3 336 Bipolar current connection Module 1 Channel 1 Module 1 Channel 2 Module 2 Channel 1 Module 2 Channel 2 ded do itid 2 6705 F 6705 N N x 235 s 3 333 2 89 8358 EE ud v7 Special cable connector Special cable connector I Y ha la 122 leq 162 Rp e Uao Uat Uge O Burden may be connected to any potential Channels 1 Sink mode Channels 2 Source mode Figure 4 Bipolar current connection The bipolar current connection serves the output of currents with sign between 20 mA to 20 mA The following must be considered The total current is the addition of the individual currents 144 121 Or lea 42 122 The admissible burden resistance remains the same Module 1 generates the positive part and module 2 the negative part of the total current For reason of accuracy only one module may generate or consume current This must be regarded in the user program Current outputs Resolution in the range 0 4 20 mA
333. ffer batteries G1 and G2 DIP switches on the backplane A battery change of the buffer batteries without load CPU in operation is recommended every 6 years Buffer battery with soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000016 Buffer battery without soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000019 Further informations see also catalog H41q H51q chapter 9 Startup and maintenance 57 4234 H41q M 0605 4 Wiring of the assembly kit The assembly kit is already wired for operation Wirings have still to be done by the user op tional modules see Assembly kit wiring diagram With installation of the assembly kit a conductive connection to the frame or a separate earth connection has to be installed according to the EMC requirements Connection PE earth Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm Pay attention for the manufacturers information concerning detaching and replugging of the Faston connectors 4 1 Current distribution within the assembly kit 411 HIMA devices for current distribution It is recommended to use the HIMA supplies and current distributions K 7212 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with 2 decoupling diodes and 2 net work filters with fusing of up to 12 single circuits with circuit breakers or K 7213 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with fusing of up to 12 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7214 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits wit
334. fibus DP Slave coupling with RS 485 max 2 interfaces on 2 communication modules with redundant CUs up to 4 interfaces max 5 interfaces on 5 communication modules with redundant CUs up to 10 interfaces up to 12 MBit s The signal definitions of the H41q and H51q systems are according to IEC EN 61131 2 Input signals L signal 0 signal H signal 1 signal Output signals L signal 0 signal H signal 1 signal 22 3 5 V or open input 13 33 V typ switching point approx 9 V 0 2 16 30 Operating Conditions Operating Conditions The devices were developed in compliance with the requirements of the following standards for EMC climate and environment IEC EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Part 2 Equipment Requirement and Tests IEC EN 61000 6 2 EMC Generic Standards Part 6 2 Immunity for Industrial Environments IEC EN 61000 6 4 EMC Generic Emmission Standard Industrial Environment For the use of the safety related control systems the following common conditions have to be met Protection class Protection class Il according to IEC EN 61131 2 Pollution Pollution degree Altitude 2000 m Enclosure Standard IP 20 If requested by the relevant application standards e g EN 60204 EN 954 1 the device must be installed in a required enclosure Climatic Conditions The most important tests and limit values for climatic condit
335. from zone 1 on The cable shield for Ex applications has to be put to potential equalization In non Ex applica tions the cable shield is connected to PE bar on the subrack No external voltage must be applied at the inputs Only these applications are permissible which are described in the data sheets for F 3325 and F 6221 Electrical specifications concerning intrinsic safety For these specifications please refer to the EC Type Examination Certificate enclosed Assembly and installation The module is mounted in a 19 subrack It must be plugged in vertically The design of the subrack must allow heat dissipation Further information for assembly and installation see HIMA main catalog The H41q and H51q System Families Note The module may not be mounted within a potentially explosive area The module is connected to the intrinsically safe field circuits via the cable plug Z 7025 In addition the following points should be considered The electronic module including its connections has to be installed in a way that at least the degree of protection IP 20 according to EN 60529 1991 A1 2000 is achieved The separation between intrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe terminals must be 50 mm filament dimension especially between adjacent modules The separation between adjacent intrinsically safe terminals must be gt 6 mm filament dimension e Intrinsically safe and not intrinsicall
336. ful to you Please use therefore just this page or a photocopy of it and send it to us by post or by fax Fax No 49 6202 709 199 Sub The H41q and H51q System Families HI 800 263 BEA 0705 HIMA the safe decision HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Industrial Automation Postfach 1261 D 68777 Bruehl Phone 49 06202 709 0 Fax 49 06202 709 107 E mail info hima com Internet www hima com 96 9908112 by Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG
337. fuse and power distribution drawer For the input output subracks max 16 A back up fuses are provided for L The power for the input output modules is fed in at the rear side of the power distribution modules F 7133 via XG 7 8 9 10 Each I O module is assigned to a fuse on the module F 7133 refer also to the description of the assembly kit B 9302 The relation between the power distribution modules with 4 fuses each and the slots of the modules is as follows F 7133 in slot 18 supplies the I O slots 1 4 F 7133 in slot 19 supplies the I O slots 5 8 F 7133 in slot 20 supplies the I O slots 9 12 F 7133 in slot 21 supplies the I O slots 13 16 The supply of the I O modules is made either via the cable plug on the front side or via the con nection already integrated in the I O bus board for Ex i modules and partly analog input mod ules The potential distributor XG 11 is connected to the L of the power distribution drawer So all The H51q System Family F 3322 4 3 3 4 3 4 rear of the subrack power distribution modules F 7133 are internal connected with L Via the front side of the pow er distribution modules the L is also fed to the input output modules via the cable plugs The circuit feeding of the sensors is fused by the front of the F 7133 module The input module and the appertaining sensors use the same power supply circuit of the power distribution mod ule F 7133
338. g Flat pin plug 6 3 x 0 8 mm to be connected to the earth bar under the slot Cable plug Z 7062 6220 Ex C U100mV blue intrinsically safe version see note below Note Intrinsically safe cables must be marked e g with a blue RAL 5015 color of the isolation 301 F 6220 0625 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 302 Operating Instructions for F 6220 Usage The module can be used to measure temperatures with low resistance thermocouples As ref erence junction temperature serves a PT 100 The thermocouples can be installed in hazard ous areas up to zone 0 Digitized process signals are available in the HIMA PES The inputs must not apply with external voltage Beside all not described applications are not admissible Electrical data regarding intrinsic safety The respective indications can be learnt from the enclosed EC type examination certificate Assembling The module must be installed out of the hazardous area The modules shall be installed in 19 inches I O subracks The mounting position can be hori zontal or vertical There are no installation instructions any modules can be equipped together without free slots between Application hints for explosion protection The relevant standards shall be observed particularly DIN EN 60079 14 VDE 0165 part 1 EN 50014 EN 50020 Besides that the following points shall be observed The modules inclusive the conne
339. g Block diagram Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Appertaining function block HF AIX 3 Ex category II 1 GD EEx ia Electric strength 375 V Ex circuit against non Ex circuit 7 V Ex circuit against Ex circuit Noise suppression gt 60 dB common mode 50 60 Hz All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 307 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 6221 0625 308 Operating data 5 V 125 mA 24 V 300 mA Space requirement 4 SU Nominal input voltage 0 to 1 00 V Nominal input current 0 to 20 0 mA via shunt Range of use of voltage 0 1V to 1 1 V Range of use of current 2 mA to 22 mA R Shunt for current measuring 50 Q T 10 ppm K Resolution tolerance 0 05 96 part number 00 0710490 1 V 10 000 parts 20 mA 10 000 parts Updating interval of measuring values 80 ms Input resistance min 1 Time constant of input filter ca 7 ms Converting time Maximum error max 1 8 ms for one channel 0 1 96 at 25 C Max variation factor due to temperature 0 1 96 10K Max temperature variation 0 2 at 10 C 70 C Safety related variation limit 1 96 Electric strength of inputs 5V Maximum current via shunt 80 mA Transmitter supply voltage monitoring for channels 1 to 8 Input voltage max 30 V Switch off limit lt 16 0 V Input resistance min 30 kQ Electric strength of inputs 30V The module must only be operated with forced v
340. g address ranges can be used for BUSCOM variables BUSCOM variables Address range Base address relative address BOOL 0 up to 2047 or 4096 up to 8191 UINT WORD INT SINT USINT 0 up to 2047 or 4096 up to 8191 Table 16 Address range of the BUSCOM variables Note Select one of the two address ranges for the BUSCOM variables If this is not possible please contact the HIMA support Addresses for the BUSCOM variables can be allocated automatically or manually but each ad dress is allocated with reference to the base address Manually assigning the address for BUSCOM variables By activating the function set relative address in the dialog located Variable Declaration set the address must be assigned manually The base address is displayed above the input field An overview of all used addresses can be found selecting in the context menu of the resource gt documentation gt Res docu generated Note The user should assign the address for the BUSCOM variables man ually to avoid a reorganization of the addresses address shift after adding new BUSCOM variables Automatically assigning the address for BUSCOM variables Deactivate the function set relative address located in the dialog Variable Declaration The automatic address assignment of the BUSCOM variables is arranged in alphabetical order on the basis of the variable name An overview of all used addresses can be found selecting the c
341. g cable plug to connect current Lead marking cable plug to connect voltage via voltage Z 7127 6217 C 1 U5V potentiometer and smart transmitters 290 Z 7127 6217 C U10V Figure 2 Lead marking cable plug The module contains a redundant safety related processor system Because of this all the tests are executed directly on the module The main test routines are Linearity of the A D converters Overflow of the A D converters Cross talking between the eight input channels Function of the input filters Function of the I O bus communication F 6217 0606 Self tests of the microcontrollers Tests of the memories The channel error bit is set for a recognized error the evaluation must be made in the user program Current inputs Measuring range 0 4 20 mA Current 12 bit 4095 22 mA 22 mA 20 mA 4 mA 745 3723 4095 Resolution digit Figure 3 Current inputs Redundant connection of current or voltage Not to apply case of single connect Transmitter supply a Z 7127 6217 2 712716217 C U5V R2 C2 U5V R1 em E ur E 1 o 1 d L N 3 N 3 6217 6217 module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 in case of input voltage feeding 0 5V no resistor Figure 4 Redundant connection of current or voltage 291 F 6217 0606
342. g of the cable plug 2 8 x 0 8 mm Z 7116 3221 C 1mm 750 mm Figure 2 Lead marking of the cable plug G Switch position for O signal ES D 16 Ql Switch position for 1 signal _ 14 18 Pushbutton position for 1 signal D D 10 D D 8 D D 6 D D 4 D D 2 D U GJ 0 5 600 L Flat pin plug _ 2 8 x 0 8 BK Figure 3 Test plug construction Z 7201 3221 25 F 3222 0524 F 3222 F 3222 8 channel input module for proximity switches according to EN 60947 5 6 NAMUR with safety isolation with feeding of the proximity switches x lt gt or i L 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 5 N e 8 N 08 07 06 05 i j 04 O 02 7 O ZN 2710 E 5 Front X O Z cable plug amp a 8 V 5 2988 5V GND bus Screen L L Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Switching point 1 65 mA 0 2 mA Switching current difference approx 0 3 mA Switching time approx 10 ms Sensor supply 7 7 9V Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 40 mA 24 VDC 75 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 183 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co
343. gram and front cable plug Nominal voltage 19 V at 20 mA load current No load voltage 22V Short circuit current 60 mA Maximum burden 2500 Ex category 1 2 GD EEx ib Space requirements 4 SU Operating data 24 V 300 mA The module must only be operated with forced ventilation fan The fan K 9203 must be installed above the subrack where the F 3325 module is plugged in If the F 3325 module is operated in an H 41q N the fan K 9212 must be installed directly under the F 3325 module The pins d6 d26 b6 b26 on the front plug of the F 3325 are omitted coding pins on d6 d26 b6 b26 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 217 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F3325 0622 218 Interconnection with the F 6221 module The F 3325 module can be interconnected with the F 6221 module in several different ways see data sheet of the module F 6221 for interconnection Single channel interconnection of the supply module F 3325 6 channel supply module F 3325 with passive transmitter e g for the channels 1 to 6 of the F 6221 module Cable type Z 7025 3325 ExCn part number 93 3325101 Z 7025 3325 ExCn To signal Transmitter measuring module rM A A Shunt 1 mm Lt u 2 N 7 3325 To supply voltage 1 monitoring module O1 O1 Module 1 Channel 1 Figure 2 Single channel interconnection of the supply module F 33
344. gram as 2 consecutive bytes in big endian format During the transmission the BUSCOM data type BOOL is compressed such that up to 8 con secutive variables defined in the import export range are packed in one byte The TRUE value corresponds to 1 and the FALSE value corresponds to 0 The numbering of the Boolean BUS COM variables in the bits of the byte begins at bit 0 and ends at bit 7 This corresponds to Bool ean variable a to Boolean variable a 7 If integer multiples of 8 consecutive Boolean variables have not been defined in one range data pool the remaining bits of the last byte will remain undefined If Word variables follow a row of Boolean variables the Word variables begin in the subse quent byte Addressing The BUSCOM variables are addressed using their identity number which is used to replace the BUSCOM address The window definition for PROFIBUS INPUT and OUTPUT appears as follows Range Parameters PROFIBUS PROFIBUS 9 INPUT OUTPUT Export 1 0 1 Start identity number X 2 3 Number of variables Export 2 4 5 Start identity number X 6 7 Number of variables Export 3 8 9 7 Start identity number X 10 11 2 Number of variables Export 4 12 13 Start identity number X 14 15 Number of variables Import 1 16 17 Start identity number X 18 19 Number of variables Import 2 20 21 Start identity number X 22 23 Number of variables Import 3 24 25 Start identity
345. h circuit breakers or K 7215 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers graphical display 4 1 2 Supply 24 VDC See also catalog H41q H51q chapter 3 3 The Input Output Level 24 VDC Supply and Distri bution Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 24 2 L RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 max 16 A PS1 XG 24 1 L BK 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole L XG 14 L BK 2 x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole L see note XG 6 L RD 1 mm Faston 2 8 x 0 8 4 see wiring diagram 13 single connections slow blow RD Color code red BK Color code black Table 1 Supply 24 VDC Connection XG 14 To be wired to the central L bus bar with at least A 2x 2 5 mm BK If output modules with 2 pole connection to the actors are used depending on the load up to 4 x 2 5 mm BK wiring is neces sary 58 4234 H41q M 0605 4 1 3 4 2 4 3 4 4 Supply 5 VDC The 5 VDC power supply does not have to be wired separately as it is already installed as part of the subrack The 5 VDC power is used for the CPU the control of the interfaces and the I O modules It is generated by 24 VDC 5 VDC power supply module type F 7130A The 5 VDC output voltage of the power supply module for the CPU I O and the interfaces are monitored on the central module checking undervoltage overvoltage or failure In ca
346. h monitoring 2interfaces RS 485 with galvanic isolation Transm rate max 57600 bps Adigit diagnostic display and 2 LEDs for information out of the system I O level and user program Dual Port RAM for fast memory access to the second central module Hardware clock battery buffered I O bus logic for the connection to the input output modules Watchdog Power supply monitoring testable 5 V system supply Battery monitoring Coprocessor module F 8621A Right of each central module of the H51q HS HRS PES up to three coprocessor modules can be installed The coprocessor module mainly contains Microprocessor HD 64180 with a clock frequency of 10 MHz Operating system EPROM RAM for a PLC master project Note The RAM for the master project is buffered via the batteries on the power supply monitoring module F 7131 Two interfaces RS 485 via communication software function block setting of the baud rate up to 57600 bps Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Communication modules F 8627 F 8628 F 8627X F 8628X Right of each central module of the H51q HS HRS PES up to five communication modules can be installed The communication module mainly contains 32 bit RISC microprocessor Operating system RAM for further protocols F 8627 Ethernet interface safeethernet OPC F 8628 Profibus DP slave interface Dual port RAM DPR for th
347. he F 8627X communication module The BUSCOM variables from the F 865x are copied into two memory areas located in the F 8627X internal memory The memory areas EV and IV reflect the export and the import variables respectively In the memory area a BUSCOM variable is described by its identity number Note This scheme for converting BUSCOM variables on the F 865x into identity numbers on the F 8627X is used for WORD as well as for BOOL variables Consider at MODBUS Port 8896 that you neither reading nor writing with Modbus telegram beyond the address range of a variable type see also Chapter 6 4 4 7 3 1 Example 1 In this example the WORD variables in the export area 0 on the F865x start with the BUS COM address 0 and are mapped to the memory area EV on the F 8627X with the identity number 0 The identity numbers of the WORD variables in memory area EV are in ascending order up to the last WORD variable identity number 110 from export area 0 In this example the BOOL variables in export area 0 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 0 and are mapped to memory area EV on the F 8627X beginning with identity number 111 which follows the last identity number of the WORD variables i e 110 The identity numbers of the BOOL variables in memory area EV are in ascending order up to the last BOOL variable indentity number 150 from export area 0 F 865x 8627X BUSCOM areas memory area EV Export area EA for Export variables EV
348. he double current can flow until this line short circuit is diagnosed In case of a line break the required minimum current is twice the value 20 mA to pre vent an indication of a line break Note The connection of capacitive loads is not permitted A length of the connection line up to 3 km is possible The line capacity however is limited to a maximum of 1 uF With an interruption of the supply line L the safe shutdown of the out puts is no longer ensured F 3422 0524 F 3422 F 3422 8 channel relay module Switching voltage 60 VDC AC with safety isolation Solid state output open collector for LED display in the cable plug a a a _ bus a F 3422 1 ry ie 5 i3 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 n 08 O Pd Ed 37 NC bu NC SZ 07 O i ies BEER WERE 05 O J i _ 04 y 5 5595 sel 564 IST 399 83588 5 03 01 02 04 05 06 07 1 08 u u 02 27139 3422 01 7 2 7139 L L Block diagram Front cable plug Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Relay outputs NO contact dust tight Contact material AgNi 0 15 hard gold plated Switching time approx 10 ms Bounce tim
349. he first system start up an Ex expert has to check the correct installation of the sys tem especially the supply voltage connections and the connections for the intrinsically safe cir cuits Notes on project engineering Appertaining software function block HB RTE 3 for latest version refer to the description of the operating system Module in Surface Mounted Device SMD technology 503 usable with BS41q 51q V7 0 7 or newer Note for use in Ex i circuits No restrictions about type of module adjacent to F 3238 201 F 3238 0622 Redundant connection for a safety related proximity switch 1k 10k Fail safe proximity switch or contacts with resistor network e ew 2 7008 1 Z 7008 3238 C R2 Z 7008 3238 C2 R1 sou exe 5 N 5 N N ee 1 1 I 1 module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 Figure 4 Redundant connection for a safety related proximity switch Cable plug 27008 3238 C R HIMA order no 93 3238 300 Connection for proximity switches NAMUR according to EN 60947 5 6 2000 Proximity switch acc to NAMUR T aue Tan Special cable R x4 R Rt 1 Special cable connector L connector E m Er a u E l 1 a u R 3900 N F 3238 jH 1 HIMA part no l 000552391 module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 R is also necessary in mono
350. he input of the module Thereby line error messages of the not used input channels are eliminated see following scheme Example 10k 10k Channel 1 and channel 5 are not used d4 d18 channel 1 d20 channel 5 Termination of channel 1 connections d2 d4 and channel 5 connections d18 d20 each with 10 kQ Figure 3 Resistor circuit for the inputs 200 F 3238 0622 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 Operating Instructions Application The module is used to evaluate proximity switches according to NAMUR or contacts with re sistor network in intrinsically safe circuits Ex i The proximity switches or contacts can be installed in hazardous areas from Zone 0 on if cer tified The input channels must not be exposed to external voltage Modules which were operated in general electrical systems must not be used in Ex i applications thereafter In addition only the applications described in this data sheet are admissible Electrical specifications concerning intrinsic safety For these specifications please refer to the EC Type Examination certificate enclosed Assembly The module must not be mounted in hazardous areas The module is mounted in a 19 subrack It must be plugged in vertically The design of the subrack must allow heat dissipation The module is connected to the intrinsically safe field circuits via the cable plug Z 7008 System start up Prior to t
351. he module In case of line monitoring the appertaining function blocks HB BLD 3 for single channel operation or HB BLD 4 for redundant operation enable enhanced configuration possibil ities for the module The extension of the time for the inrush current for lamp loads by the appertaining function block is valid for all channels So inductive and lamp loads may not be operated on one module at the same time The line break monitoring requires a minimum load of 10 mA Line short circuit and line break can be evaluated in the user program as line faults by means of the function blocks HB BLD 3 or HB BLD 4 The evaluation of the signal line break is made up to SIL 1 In one I O subrack max 10 output modules with nominal load may be used The outputs can be connected in parallel without external decoupling diodes connection line up to 3 km is possible The line capacity however is N The connection of capacitive loads is not permitted A length of the limited to a maximum of 1 uF 231 F 3331 0626 232 F 3332 0524 F 3332 F 3332 4 channel output module e resistive or inductive load up to 2 A 48 W lamp connection up to 48 W with safe isolation no output signal at break of the L supply bus 2 g 8 8 5 gt Fasz 1 2 4 1 8 VA 2 P we N L
352. he subrack where the F 5220 module is plugged in If the F 5220 module is operated in an 41 the fan 9212 must be installed directly under the F 5220 module In order to ensure the forced ventilation the air deflector panel M 7201 1 HE must to be mounted over the fan K 9203 or over the kit H 41q The air deflector panel M 7201 deflects the warm air to the rear in order to avoid a temperature rise of the subracks and modules which are mounted above 267 F 5220 0625 268 Function table Proximity Switch Inputs Signal Status FALSE OK le 0 35 2 1 lt gt TRUE OK lpE229 45mA 7 Q lp gt 5 1 mA FALSE short circuit lg lt 0 2 mA FALSE line break Notes The input configuration with safety related proximity switches e g P amp F SN contains a monitoring of the lines for short circuit and line break When safety related proximity switches are used please refer to the specifications and notes of the manufacturers When non safety related proximity switches according to DIN EN 60947 5 6 are used external 390 Q 0 25 W resistors con nected in series must be used When operating in a redundant mode with proximity switches in one of the two cable plugs the shunts must be removed Direction inputs proximity switches which are not used must be ter minated by a 6 kC resistor Alternatively to the proximity switch a
353. hich ensures that in the event of an accidental disconnection the distance EN 50 020 Part 7 Table 4 between the intrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe connections does not fall below the required minimum e g by bundling The line shield has to be connected to equipotential bonding F 6221 0625 Modules which were operated in general electrical systems may not be used thereaf ter no more in Ex plants The lines used must comply with the following insulation test voltages e Intrinsically safe lines gt 1000 VAC Not intrinsically safe lines gt 1500 VAC Stranded wires the line ends must be provided with wire end ferrules The terminals must be suitable for clamping the wire cross section The applicable regulations and standards have to be complied with especially DIN EN 60079 14 1997 VDE 0165 Part 1 1998 EN 50 014 1999 VDE 0170 0171 Part 1 2000 EN 50 020 1994 VDE 0170 0171 Part 7 1996 44 Connection of unused inputs Any voltage inputs 0 1 V which are not used have to be short circuited at the terminal strip Unused current inputs are terminated with the shunt in the cable plug Inputs which are not terminated are not reported as faulty e g un plugged cable 45 Requirements for the supply The internal resistance of supply must not exceed 500 Otherwise internal errors of the mod ule can not be detected 4 6 Redundant connection When the inputs are connected redundant
354. hts reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 255 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3349 0641 Cable plug for outputs 24 VDC Channel Connection Color 1 b2 BN b18 WH 2 b4 YE b20 GN 3 b6 PK b22 GY 4 b8 RD b24 BU 5 b10 VT Cable b26 BK 16 x 0 5 mm 6 b12 WHGN b28 WHBN 7 b14 WHGY b30 WHYE 8 b16 WHBU b32 WHPK L 24 V z2 BK Flat pin plug 6 3 x 0 8 mm L 24V 212 RD Wire 1 mm 750 mm Lead marking of the cable plug 2 7150 3349 C5 24P2 2 pole connection of the load Figure 2 Lead marking of the cable plug for outputs 24 VDC Cable plug for outputs 48 VDC Channel Connection Color 1 b2 BN b18 WH 2 b4 YE b20 GN 3 b6 PK b22 GY 4 b8 RD b24 BU 5 b10 VT Cable b26 BK LiYY 16 x 0 5 mm 6 b12 WHGN b28 WHBN 7 b14 WHGY b30 WHYE 8 b16 WHBU b32 WHPK 48 V z2 BN Cable Sam ale un LiYY 2 x 1 mm Lead marking of the cable plug Z 7150 3349 C5 48P2 2 pole connection of the load Figure 3 Lead marking of the cable plug for outputs 48 VDC 256 F 3349 0641 3349 N N N z N 2 N N m 1 m V UR 01 08 2 7150 lt 10 lt 12W L L lt required with inductive load 2 pole connection of the loads required Figure 4 2 pole connection Additional technical data Current input WD 1mA Monitored switching time
355. ia HIMA GSD file The HIMA PROFIBUS DP slave is a modular slave Modules are therefore included in the communication module GSD file HIQ200EA GSD They are used to set the number of input and output bytes so that they correspond to the total of the parameterized windows Figure 13 Slave Configuration x General Device F8628 Station address p 1 Description Profibus DP Slave Cancel Activate device in actual configuration Enable watchdog control GSD HI 200E4 GSD Parameter Data Max length of in output data 256 Byte Length of in output data 0 Byte Max length of input data 240 Byte Length of input data 0 Byte Max length of output data 240 Byte Length of output data O Byte Max number of modules 32 Number of modules 0 r Assigned master Station address 1 2 Word 1 Other DP device 4 Word 8 word 16 word Actual slave Station address 2 1 Byte DP Output ELOP2 Import 2 Bytes 2 Byte UIDES DP Dutput ELOP2 Import 4 Bytes 4 Byte 2 F8628 Append Module Remove Module Insert Module Figure 10 Slave configuration of the HIQ200EA GSD file in a PROFIBUS DP master with a selection of available modules F 8628X 0650 9 1 9 2 Data formats The following description concerns the telegram user data only Please we refer to the EN 50 170 standard for further information about telegram data The BUSCOM data type WORD appears in a tele
356. iables 7 3 1 Example 1 In this example the WORD variables in the export area 0 on the F 865x start with the BUS COM address 0 and are mapped to the memory area EV on the F 8628X with the identity number 0 The identity numbers of the WORD variables in memory area EV are in ascending order up to the last WORD variable identity number 110 from export area 0 In this example the BOOL variables in export area 0 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 0 and are mapped to memory area EV on the F 8628X beginning with identity number 111 which follows the last identity number of the WORD variables i e 110 The identity numbers of the BOOL variables in memory area EV are in ascending order up to the last BOOL variable indentity number 150 from export area 0 F 865x 8628X BUSCOM areas memory area EV Export area EA for Export variables EV ER 0000 T0000 BEEN b entity number BUSCOM address Be EV 0000 area 0 ER 2047 111 ER 0000 9900 bool EV 0000 261 bool 0150 ER 2047 ER 4096 area 1 ER 8191 ER 4096 ER 8191 Figure 5 Mapping ofthe WORD and BOOL variables from the export area 0 427 F 8628X 0650 7 3 2 Example 2 In this example the BOOL variables in the export area 0 on the F865x start with the BUSCOM address 0 and mapped to the memory area EV on the F 8628X with the identity number 0 The identity numbers of the BOOL variables in memory area EV are in ascending order
357. ica tions for HIPRO S vari ables F 8625 from V 1 17 F 8627 F 8627X from version 3 x on No restrictions specifications for HIPRO S variables Hub Switch Switch Switch HSR cable required for HSR cable required for HSR cable is required for redundancy redundancy TCP and MODBUS TCP Port 502 Half Full Duplex Full Duplex Full Duplex with HIPRO S Table 8 Overview of the communication with a HIMA OPC server via the F 8627X in combination A The simultaneous use of both an F 8621A coprocessor module for safety related communication and an F 8627X communication module for Ethernet communication is not allowed F 8627X 0650 6 2 Application guidelines and notes The requirements of the IEEE 802 3 standards must be met The cycle time of the communication partners central module may differ up to factor 4 The entire transmission network must ensure a transmission rate of 10 MBit s or 100 MBit s To ensure a deterministic data exchange for safety related communication a load free Ethernet segment must be connected to the HIMA communication modules If this is not possible a specified time response can not be guaranteed on the Ether net segment This may result in a safety shutdown because of exceeded monitoring time No connection between the redundant Ethernet segments is required The HSR cable BV 7053 is required for redundancy in HIPRO S OPC and MOD BUS TCP
358. ication module has to be removed All interface cables including cable for redundancy have to be unplugged On the module in exchange for the defective module all switches have to be set exactly to the same positions 7 All interface cables including cable for redundancy have to be plugged in 8 The coprocessor or communication module in exchange has to be plugged in 9 Fix the mounting screw of the changed module 10 The related central module has to be plugged in 11 Fix the mounting screw of the central module OnkhWN Repair of Modules A repair by the user is not possible as the legal regulations for intrinsically safe and safety re lated modules cannot be complied Additionally special testing programs are necessary for repairing Therefore defective modules should be sent to HIMA for repair with a short fault description after they have been checked on the customer s premises The fault description of central modules and for input and output modules should contain ID no total of the module e g at a F 8650E module 01 064894 022 measurements to repair up till now detailed fault diagnosis from error state view refer to the user manual ELOP II and the user manual II Resource in case of redundant PES the diagnosis of both central modules should be included The fault description should contain the measurements taken up till now checking the power supply exchange of the module HI
359. ies on the pow er supply monitoring module F 7131 Output 5 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use XG 2 5 V YE 2x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply subrack 9302 XG 3 GND GN 2 x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 0 8 Supply subrack B 9302 GN Color code green YE Color code yellow Table 3 Output 5 VDC 125 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 4 2 Wiring Watchdog 4 2 1 Output WD Connection Wire and connection Use XG 1 2 4 and XG 1 6 8 XG 4 2 4 XG 1 6 8 GY 0 5 mm wire end ferrule GY 0 5 mm wire end ferrule GY 0 5 mm wire end ferrule WD to I O subrack B 5233 1 WD to 1st I O bus B 5233 2 WD to 2nd I O bus B 5233 2 see Wiring WD assembly kit wiring GY Color co de gray Table 4 Output WD 4 2 2 Wiring watchdog signal only H51q HS B 5233 1 B 5233 Central rack e 14 13 e 12 11 10 9 8 7 cu2 e 5 8650X WD 1 4 3 E e 1 8650 XG 1 Further construction and wiring refer to Assembly kit wiring diagram Figure 3 Wirin 126 g watchdog signal XG 15 B9302 at the I O bus Further I O racks at the I O bus 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 Connection of the monitoring loop for fuses and fans Connection Wire and connection Fusing
360. ing System Flash EPROM 1 MB User program Flash EPROM 1 MB Data SRAM 1 MB Degree of utilization depending on operating system version Interfaces Two serial interfaces RS 485 with electric isolation Diagnostic display Four digit matrix display with selectable information Shutdown on fault Safety related watchdog with output 24 V loadable up to 500 mA short circuit proof Construction Two European standard PCBs one PCB for the diagnostic display Space requirement 8 SU Operating data 5 2 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 449 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 8652X 0606 Setting of the bus station no via switches S1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Switch no Stationno 12345 16 orm 7 18 ora M RM 19 GRE 20 Sram A kA 21 22 ore AAA AA
361. ing operation The main test routines are Reading back of the output signals The operating point of the 0 signal read back is lt 6 5 V Up to this value the level of the 0 signal may arise in case of a fault and this will not be detected Switching capability of test signal and cross talking walking bit test Outputs 500 mA k short circuit proof Internal voltage drop max 2 V at 500 mA load Admissible line resistance in out max 11 Q Operating point for short circuit current 0 6 1 0A Output leakage current max 200 uA Output voltage if output is reset max 1 5 V Monitored switching time max 200 us Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 100 mA 48 VDC 100 mA plus load supply via cable plug All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 253 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3348 0602 254 Chan Connec Color nel tion 1 b2 BN x2 WH 2 b4 YE x4 GN 3 b6 PK x6 GY 4 b8 RD x8 BU 5 b10 VT Calle 10 BK 16 x 0 5 6 b12 WHGN x12 WHBN 7 b14 WHGY x14 WHYE 8 b16 WHBU x16 WHPK Lasvy 272 BN Cable Luayyt 212 WH 2 x 1 0 mm Lead marking of the cable plug Z 7148 3348 C P2 2 pole connection Figure 2 Lead marking of the cable plug connection line up to 3 km is possible The line capacity however is N The connection of capacitive loads is not permitted A length of
362. ions are listed in the following table IEC EN 61131 2 Climatic Tests Chapter 6 3 4 Temperature ambient 0 60 C Test limits 10 70 C Storage Temperature 40 85 C with battery only 30 C 6 3 4 2 Dry heat and cold withstand test 70 25 C 96 h EUT power supply unconnected 6 3 4 3 Change of temperature withstand and immunity test 25 70 C and 0 55 EUT power supply unconnected 6 3 4 4 Cyclic damp heat withstand test 25 55 C 95 relative humidity EUT power supply unconnected 23 Operating Conditions 6 2 6 3 24 Mechanical Conditions The most important tests and limit values for mechanical conditions are listed in the following table IEC EN 61131 2 Chapter 6 3 5 Mechanical Tests Vibration test operating 5 9 Hz 3 5 mm 9 150 Hz 1g 6 3 5 1 Immunity vibration test 10 150 Hz 1 g EUT operating 10 cycles per axis 6 3 5 2 Immunity shock test 15 g 11 ms EUT operating 2 cycles per axis EMC Conditions The most important tests and limit values for EMC conditions are listed in the following tables IEC EN 61131 2 Chapter 6 3 6 2 Noise Immunity Tests IEC EN 61000 4 4 6 3 6 2 1 ESD test 4 kV contact 8 kV air discharge IEC EN 61000 4 2 6 3 6 2 2 RFI test 10 V m 26 MHz 1 GHz 80 AM IEC EN 61000 4 3 6 3 6 2 3 Burst test 2 kV power supply 1 kV signal lines 6 3 6 2
363. istic of the F 3335 module 30 25 N 7 1 voltage a 5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 current mA Figure 2 Output characteristic of the F 3335 module The electrical characteristics of the solenoid valves must be always below the output charac teristic of the F 3335 module 242 F 3335 0622 Single channel operation valve control for channels 1 to 4 Cable type Z 7035 3335 ExCn part number 93 3335100 o1 L A EE mu gt lt k 3335 OR1 SZ BE LED1 Z 7035 3335 ExCn Module 1 channel 1 Figure 3 Single channel operation valve control Pin allocation for single channel operation Channel Pin Color 1 72 WH O1 b2 BN O2 z8 GN O2 b8 YE O3 z22 GY O3 b22 PK O4 z28 BU O4 b28 RD Cable 8 x 0 5 mm blue Figure 4 Pin allocation for single channel operation 243 F 3335 0622 244 Redundant operation valve control for channels 1 to 4 Cable type 2 7035 3335 ExCn part number 93 3335101 F 3335 F 3335 01 01 1 LED 01 01 Ort LED d N Ps 3 N N Ps 3 N Hn cid te amp I te laL L NX zu N e N 1 N e x 2 7035 3335 ExCn Z 7035 3335 ExCn Module 1 channel 1 Module 2 channel 1 Figure 5 Redundant op
364. ith RS 485 interface card RS 485 PCI 510 RS 485 PCI 0602 RS 485 RS 485 PCI Interface card RS 485 Interface extension card for personal computers 899888 Porti opago O BBEBBHIO E 099858 Port2 Figure 1 Side view The card contains two independent RS 485 interfaces as an extension for a PC PADT The interfaces are electrically isolated also among themselves and suitable to connect HIBUS 2 directly to programmer units and visualization stations Baud rate 9 6 to 57 6 kBaud Data format any Basis addresses automatic configuration Interrupts automatic configuration Isolation electric isolation gt 1kV Connections 2 Sub D plugs 9 pole Operating data 5V 0 2A Dimensions 120 x 106 mm Weight approx 110 g All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 511 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl RS 485 PCI 0602 512 After installation of the following HIMA programs the FIFO for the cor responding interface must be deactivated in the device manager of the windows operating system communication ports ELOP Il OPC A amp E Axeda Supervisor Wizcon Operation with II If short time disturbances or failures in communication should still occur despite of a
365. ith the identification number 0123 T V PRODUCT SERVICE GMBH Zertifizierstelle Ridlerstrasse 65 D 80339 M nchen 323 F 6221 0625 8 Bu pesiyoeg 891 262 2 Buipesuyoeg 101 057 9 991 822 6 694 922 92 voz yep Bu pesiyoeg 891 222 sep 2 Buipesuyoeg 201 022 Duipeedyoeg 01 812 81 8 Buunseejq 81 912 91 4 Buunsesyy 1 vip 9 Buunseayy 91 212 Buunseej 91 012 01 y Bulunseayy 7 82 9p l 9z 9p 2 noo Buunsee g vz Buunseayy 22 uonounj punoif us i 30885 1 950 28161 20 SX3 ON 199 edA 53 xipueddy 9 1 Ajddns 4 jndjno 1sureBe yeed e dn pajos Ajejes pue ejes Ajeorsuujur oujeje Buipeenjoeq 8 1 Jeuueuo pue g 02x dins od ejes 2 09 4 c esn eJnoes JO y ees
366. k Table 7 I O bus connection For the I O rack the connection to the I O bus is made via a coupling module F 7553 installed in slot 17 The connection of the bus between the individual subracks is established at the rear side via the BV 7032 data cable To terminate the I O bus an F 7546 module is plugged in at the beginning on central subrack and at the end last I O rack 92 B 5230 H51q M 0605 4 5 1 Central module Construction principle of the I O bus of the system H51q M Rear central rack XD 1 2 F 7546 Central rack 5 Units high XD 3 H XD 4 _ BV 7032 Front of the I O racks Rear of the I O racks CI XD 1 rack 4Units high 7568 m Se 1 XD 2 7032 T XD 1 VO rack 4Units high F7553 XD 2 BV 7032 7 XD 1 VO rack 4Units high 7553 71 XD 2 F 7546 Set I O rack address by means of a coding switch refer to data sheet F 7553 Figure 3 Construction principle of the I O bus for system H51q M max length I O bus max length cable BV 7032 cable BV 7032 between subracks 12m 5m max 0 5m 93 5230 H51q M 0605 4 6 Connections on the rear 5 e E g g z
367. k can be evaluated in the user program as line faults by means of the function blocks HB BLD 3 or HB BLD 4 The evaluation of the signal line break is made up to SIL 1 Atthe same time only 2 channels may be operated with the max load 2 A If the load is up to max 1 A all channels may be operated at the same time n one I O subrack max 10 output modules with nominal load may be used The outputs can be connected in parallel without external decoupling diodes connection line up to 3 km is possible The line capacity however is N The connection of capacitive loads is not permitted A length of the limited to a maximum of 1 uF In conjunction with certain 25 W lamp types problems may occur caused by too high inrush current To prevent this at building block HB BLD 3 HB BLD 4 at input INRUSH CURRENT IN ms a time between 1 to 50 ms might be set to suppress the fault signal The duration of the test then will be exceeded to the maximum of the entered time if this input is allocated Since edition AS 03 a resistor 1 Q 5 W must be connected in series to the lamp 239 F 3334 0626 240 F 3335 0622 F 3335 4 channel output module Ex i safety related usable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 for the control of intrinsically safe valves and for the supply of intrinsically safe transmitters Four voltage outputs 24 V with current limiting EC Type Examination certificate ATEX EX5 02 05
368. k diagram and front cable plug The module is automatically tested during operation The main test routines are Reading back of the output signals The operating point of the O signal read back is lt 6 5 V Up to this value the level of the 0 signal may arise in case of a fault and this will not be detected Switching capability of the test signal and cross talking walking bit test Outputs Internal voltage drop Admissible line resistance in out Undervoltage tripping Operating point for short circuit current Output leakage current Output voltage if output is reset Monitored switching time Space requirement Operating data 2A k short circuit proof max 2 V at 2 load max 3 6 at lt 16V 2 6 5 max 550 uA 1 5 V max 200 us 4 SU 5 VDC 100 mA 24 VDC 120 mA plus load All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3333 0602 Chan Connec Chan Connec nel tion 901 nel tion solor 1 b4 WH Cable 1 b4 BN Gaie 2 b8 BN 4 x x4 WH 3 b24 GN nz 2 b8 YE rd we 4 b28 YE 8 GN mm L 72 BK A Flat pin 3 ar plu L z12 RD E 4 b28 RD 70 8 rim x28 BK L 22 BK 44 Flat pin 1 212 RD plug 750 mm 28x 0 8 mm Lead marking of the cable plug Lead marking of the cable plug Z 7134 3333 C Z 71
369. king each connection for impermissible external voltage Testing All Inputs and Outputs for Earth Faults When testing the external cables for insulating resistance short circuits and wire breaks the cables must be disconnected at both ends in order to avoid damaging or destroying the mod ules with excessive voltage The testing for earth faults is carried out after the disconnection of the free connectors for the sensors and control elements The voltage connections of the free connectors on the potential distributors must also be disconnected The supplies of the sensors must be disconnected as well as the negative pole must be separated at the control elements If the negative pole is set up for earthed operation the earth connection must be interrupted while testing for earth faults This also applies for the earth connection of possibly existing earth fault testing facilities Any connection can be tested to earth with a resistance meter or a special testing device 39 Startup and Maintenance 9 5 9 6 9 6 1 9 6 2 40 Note In this state the system is set up for testing if individual lines or a group of lines are insulated against earth but not if two lines are insulated against each other Otherwise there is a risk of damage The guideline for test voltages and insulating resistance is IEC EN 61131 2 or DIN VDE 0160 EN 50178 Switching on Power Supply The input output modules and their appertaining cable c
370. l Company seal Unterschrift Signature 467 H 4136 0530 468 H 7013 0548 H 7013 7013 Power supply filter for power supply systems 24 VDC 5 5 Wires combined at end 5 25 in wire end ferrules Connection lines are part of delivery Top view SS ag Zu 4 EH ES 1 9 3 H 7013 20 e u 3 95 104 i 11 9 N 12 ey E L L 80 gt 6 Feeding 24 VDC Side view Circuit diagram Connecting example with terminals on mounting rail Figure 1 H 7013 power supply filter The power supply filter H 7013 dampens wide banded low energy switching interferences Burst according to IEC EN 61000 4 4 up to 2 kV and wide banded high energy overvoltages Surge according to IEC EN 61000 4 5 up to 1 kV on a 24 VDC power supply circuit The in terferences are discharged to earth Highest effectiveness can be achieved if the filter is installed directly at the 24 V power supply Connection 2 5 mm directly on the device terminals combined wires on terminals of min 10 mm Height over mounting rail approx 100 mm Electric strength against earth 250 V Max permissible operation voltage 30 VAC 42 VDC Power consumption 5 5 mA at 24 VDC Ambient conditions 25 70 C All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 469 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O B
371. las Step 1 Determining the maximum Ethernet transmission time Tmax To calculate the monitoring time the maximum Ethernet transmission time of the HIPRO S data Tmax must be determined Tmax for HIPRO S communication Tmax NP NP 100 ms If Tmax lt 600 ms than T max must set to 600 ms NP Number of PES communication partners 4 OPC servers which are fixed configured in HIPRO S mode Tmax Maximum Ethernet transmission time of the HIPRO S Data Tmax for HIPRO S DIRECT communication Tmax Set value of the Timeout for HIPRO S DIRECT Chapter 6 6 via switch 1 1 5 Tmax Maximum Ethernet transmission time of the HIPRO S DIRECT data F 8627X 0650 Step 2 Calculating the Watchdog Time WDsource Target 1 7 for 419 51 F 8650 up to F 8653 WDesource Target 1 5 D 5 5for H41qe H51qe F 8650 up to F 8653E X WD e Target Watchdog time ms for the target resource WD e source Watchdog time ms for the source resource CT Maximum cycle time ms of the central module in RUN operation mode is displayed in the ELOP II control panel D Data size in kByte Data Size without SI Data is displayed by the ELOP II Compiler Step 3 Calculating the monitoring time MT MTe Calculating the monitoring time MT for H41q H51q MT 2 WDsource 2 Tmax 2 WDrarget MT Monitoring time HIPRO S connection WD target Watchdog time ms for the target resource Source
372. lave PES master parameter Project file name cu CM 1 2 NN MJ Search for Time master Redundant Bus Additional time delay ms 00 Additional pause time ms 0 FR Data collector HIPRO N v Max time to hold values Holding time s 0 m Figure 4 Setting the time delay at PES master Note With a loss of the communication connection an increased time delay triggers an increased bus cycle time The concerning master waits during the defined time delay for an answer and so delays the data exchange This performance has to be considered Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interfaces RS 485 9 pole 514 From Company Name Dept HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Address lindustrie Automatisierung Documentation P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl Germany Dear reader we are always eager to keep our manuals up to date and to avoid errors But if you have found an error in this manual or if you want to make suggestions for improvements also for the HIMA pro ducts we would be very grate
373. le into the STOP state green RUN LED blinks Select Extra gt OS Update in the ComEth control panel to open the standard dialog for opening a file Select and load the proper operating system for the upgrade downgrade into the selected F 8627X module see Chapter 8 1 1 and Chapter 8 1 2 AN If the operating system download of the F 8627X was aborted the F 8627X must not be removed Close the ComEth control panel and reopen it Repeat the previous step to load the F 8627X operating system Note After successfully downloading the F 8627X operating system the F 8627X module must be rebooted After rebooting the new operat ing system is started Until then the F 8627X operates using with the old operating system F 8627X 0650 To reboot the F 8627X Remove and replace the F 8627X module or select the function Extra gt Reboot Device located in the ComEth Control Panel dia log Check the upgrade downgrade Select PADT gt Connect in the control panel to create a new connection to the F 8627X module Select the tab version and check that the OS version displayed is the same as the OS version of the Upgrade Downgrade If a redundant F 8627X module exists follow the same procedure Note The ARP entry must be deleted on the PADT PC if another F 8627X is to be loaded and has the same IP address as the F 8627X loaded immediately beforehand otherwise a connection cannot be opened to the newly loaded F 862
374. left or on the right With varnished Ex i modules with PCB covering the right slot has to remain free in combina tion with non Ex i modules or has to be equipped with a front plate with partition plate M 2214 This is also valid for slot no 15 The slot left to the Ex i module may be equipped with any other module Spare slots have to be covered by front plates M 2215 4 spacing units SU or M 2217 8 spacing units SU Usable front plates with partition or front plates M 2214 Front plate with partition plate 100 x 160 mm M 2215 Front plate 4 SU M 2217 Front plate 8 SU Cable plugs for intrinsically safe circuits are marked and have coded pins so that they can only be plugged into the appropriate modules Safety Related Output Modules for SIL 3 All the safety related output modules meet the requirements of SIL 3 The safety related output modules have three semiconductors connected in series That means that more than the required second independent component for safety shutdown is now integrated in the output module In case of a fault of an output module the requirements of SIL 3 are valid without time limit In the following this feature is called the integrated safety shutdown If a safety related output module should fail during operation then it will be automatically switched off by the integrated safety shutdown to get the safe de energized status Special Features of the Output Modules All output modules have the foll
375. lengths 5 m 15 m 30 m 177 P 12 2 1 13 3 l 14 1103 15 4 ly LiYCY 51 oo 4 0 25 mm 9 ce gt 5 9 MIN D socket 9 poles 25 13 MIN D plug 25 poles Figure 1 Wiring Transmission rate Maximum cable length 9 600 bps 30m 19 200 bps 15m 57 600 bps 5m Table 1 Maximum cable length at transmission rate Pin RS 232 Signal Meaning 1 CF DCD Data could be received 2 BB RxD Receive data from interface to PC 3 BA TxD Send data from PC to interface 4 CD DTR PC ready to receive 5 AB GND Data Ground 6 CC DSR Interface ready to receive 7 A RTS PC indicates that PC would send 8 CF CTS Interface indicates that PC could send 9 CE RI Ring indicator Table 2 Pin assignment of the interface RS 232 9 pole All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 157 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7044 0524 158 BV 7045 0508 BV 7045 BV 7045 Data connecting cable Connection of a personal computer to a branch of a RS 232C V 24 data connection Il other systems for the communication analyzer HIKA Standard length 5m COM2 MIN D socket 9 poles MIN D socket 9 poles Wires are soldered together and isolated by a shrink sleeve Figure 1 Wiring Type of the used cable
376. lt Braunschweig und Berlin SCHEDULE TO EC TYPE EXAMINATION CERTIFICATE PTB 03 ATEX 2031 The following values apply if capacitances or inductances or lines occur exclusively in the circuit The control circuits are interconnected through a common reference conductor and they are safely electrically isolated from all non intrinsically safe circuits up to a peak value of the voltange of 375 V The control circuits are safely electrically isolated from ground Test report PTB Ex 03 22333 Special conditions for safe use not required Essential health and safety requirements met by compliance with the standards mentioned above Braunschweig June 30 2003 sheet 3 3 EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid The certificates may be circulated only without alteration Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt In case of dispute the German text shall prevail Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt Bundesallee 100 D 38116 Braunschweig 207 F 3238 0622 208 F 3240 0524 F 3240 16 channel input module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 for digital signals or sensors with input voltage 110 VDC 127 VAC one phase with safety isolation L 110v pc P 127v L 110v 127 pc N 127v 60
377. lter 7021 must be mounted for securing the category 3G in an enclosure which fulfills the requirements of the EN 60079 15 with the type of protection at least IP 54 according to EN 60529 2 This enclosure must be labeled with Working permitted only in the de energized state Exception If it is assured that there exists no explosive atmosphere working under voltage is also permitted 3 The used enclosure must be able to dissipate safely the generated heat The power dissi pation of the power supply filter H 7021 is 250 mW max 4 The following items of the standards VDE 0170 0171 part 16 DIN EN 60079 15 2004 5 VDE 0165 part 1 DIN EN 60079 14 1998 08 must be regarded DIN EN 60079 15 Chapter 5 Design Chapter 6 Terminals and cabling Chapter 7 Air and creeping distances Chapter 14 Connectors DIN EN 60079 14 Chapter 5 2 3 Equipment for use in zone 2 Chapter 9 3 Cabling for zones 1 and 2 Chapter 12 2 Equipment for zones 1 and 2 The power supply filter additionally has the following label Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co A Bassermann Stra e 28 D 68782 Br hl 113 G EEx nA T4 X 25 lt lt 70 7021 Special conditions must be regarded H 7021 0548 Konformitatserklarung Declaration of Conformity Wir We HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Albert Bassermann Stra e 28 68782 Br hl Postfach 1261 68777 Br hl Telefon 0 62 02 709 0 erkl
378. ly an error at one input may generate a measuring error at the redundant faultless input The measuring error can be up to 2 5 when the input is terminated with a 50 Q resistor Due to the voltage drop on the line connecting the redundant modules the cable length is lim ited to 2 m 47 External transmitter connection variants D E The line between the F 6221 module and the assigned measuring shunts channels 1 to 8 can have a maximum length of 10 m 321 F 6221 0625 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 322 Maximum cable length and load in the transmitter circuit The maximum additional load Rb in the transmitter circuit is calculated as follows Urc UT min 16V 14V Rb gt 50 Q 500 500 Imax 50 20 Rb additional load _ switch off limit for the transmitter supply voltage monitoring UTmin minimum supply voltage of the transmitter Imax maximum current to be measured The contact resistances of the clamps must be considered When planning the Ex circuits the line inductance and the line capacitance for the respective line length have to be considered Max transmitter supply Max length of line Max length of line voltage UTmin at 0 2 mm at 0 5 mm 14 5V 135 m 312m 14V 271m 625 13 5 V 407 937 m 13V 543m 1250 m 12 5 V 679m 1562 m 12V 815m 1875 m 11 5 V 951m 2187 m Table 3 Max cable length and load in the transmitter circui
379. m via a system variable In case of a 5 VDC system power failure a lithium battery on the central module buffers the hardware clock and sRAM on the central module Connection of the monitoring dai for fuses and 21 4 516 GY 0 5 Faston 2 8 x 0 8 max EN A slow aes NO NC con blow tact for signaling GY Color code gray Table 2 Connection of the monitoring loop Internal fuses Position Size Dimension HIMA part no Z 6011 4 A slow blow 5 20 57 0174409 2 6013 1 6 slow blow 5x 20mm 57 0174169 Table 3 Internal fuses Connections of the WD to H41q HR B 4236 2 Connection Procedure XG 12 and XG 13 Remove override between both connections Table 4 Connections of the WD Backplane bus Central module CU and I O modules are connected via the backplane bus The jumper plug Z 6007 on connection XD 1 combines the separated I O buses For the single channel system this is mandatory H41q H With redundant I O bus H41q HR the jumper plug Z 6007 at the backplane of the subrack is not installed 75 4236 1 2 H41q H HR 0605 4 6 Connections on the rear
380. me last two digits of the resource name F 8627X 0650 If necessary delete the User Program of the Central Module F 865x If a user program with a wrong resource name e g no or wrong Res ID exists in the F 865x no ELOP II TCP connection can be established Delete the user program with the wrong resource name so that the F 8627X can be determine the IP address from the F 865x ID settings DIP switches 1 7 Note Please refer to the manual Functions of the operating system BS41q H51q HI 800 105 for further information about Erasing the user pro gram Perform the following Settings in ELOP Il Create a resource having a name from which the required IP address can be deter mined see chapter 5 1 In the dialog cabinet layout add the F 8627X module icons for the documentation of the cabinet allocation Face Fear 2852 7130 27130 B D B L E o B M 5 wf Figure 3 Cabinet Layout Open the context menu of the resource and select Properties Properties EtheX 33 ojx Master Data Print Forms More Print Order GV xRef 10 parameter Safety Lel Code generator Addressing error HIPRO S BUSCOM 39548 Communication Type Ethemet Serial r Ethemet Settings Channel1 1921658057 C Channel 192 168 0 68 192 168 05 3 Cancel Apply Figure 4 dialog Properties
381. module 213 3325 6 channel supply unit 217 3330 8 channel output module nee en 225 3331 8 channel output module 229 Table of Contents 3332 4 channel output module 233 3333 4 channel output module 235 3334 4 channel output module 237 F 3335 4 channel output module 241 3348 8 channel output 253 3349 8 channel output 255 3422 8 channel relay module eee 259 3430 4 channel relay module 261 F 5203 14 bit ring nler a re 263 5220 2 channel counter 265 6214 4 channel analog input module 271 6215 8 channel analog input module 279 6216A 8 channel analog input module with transmitter supply 285 6217 8 channel analog input module 289 F 6220 8 channel thermocouple input module Ex i saltety related crei e ete en 297 F 6221 8 channel analog input module Ex i safely relaled ee 307 6705 2 channel converter
382. module Table of the operating modes Mode Applicati Sening X2 Terminals active connect 6 7 9 10 9 12 TTY RS 232C 12 3 4 i a OFF cee MO EMT Mn di Repeater 123 4 RxD RxD CNTR CNT HIBUS 2 HIBUS 1 2 B S S TxDA TxD B A 3 OFF RS 2326 HIBUS 2 B 3 4 ee ON RTS CNTR o Sue TTY HIBUS 1 12 4 Tb 1 G jor mm m AE AS AS BS BS X2IX3 RS 232C HIBUS 1 1 2 4 6 ON s s 8 1 orr m BE AE AS AS BS BS 2 3 12 3 4 RxD RxD CNTR CNTR RxD RxD CNTR CNT HIBUS 2 Repeater T ON TxD A TxD B A B TxD A TxD B B x2 Bus 1 2 Bus 2 Bus 2 Bus2 Bus 1 Bus 1 HIMA network 334 CTS CTS RxD RxD TxD TxD RTS RTS x2 RS 232 HIBUS 1 1234 7T ON E x2X3 MON 22 10 TI BE AS AS BS BS 85 232C___ HIBUS22 1234 ON HEH 5 OFF V 24 RS 232 C H50 PC PLS 1 constant status signal H7503 A 20 mA TTY H30 2 active status signal 7503 HIBUS
383. module for sensors or 1 signals with safety isolation non interacting L L pe zz 4 r3 i 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Q 16 O 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 15 2 I mea 14 SNETSRSRENENSRSRS HIN S NS III 3323333 90 12 O e 10 Iu VA rZ VA Ti e 07 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 06 05 pee 03 C 02 01 6 E3554 Z7116 Front 8 cable plug 5 V GND bus Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Inputs 1 signal 8 mA incl cable plug or mechanical contact 24 V non interacting Switching time typ 10 ms Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 70 mA 24 VDC 130 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 181 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3221 0524 182 Channel Connection Color 1 d2 WH 2 d4 BN 3 d6 GN 4 d8 YE 5 d10 GY 6 d12 PK 7 d14 BU 8 d16 RD Cable 9 d18 BK 16 x 0 25 mm 10 d20 VT 11 d22 WHBN 12 d24 WHGN 13 d26 WHYE 14 d28 WHGY 15 d30 WHPK 16 d32 WHBU L z2 BK Flat pin plug Lead markin
384. module 1 6 IO modules slots 8 13 related to central module 2 Note Operating system resource type Il The assembly kit is usable since operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 Resource type Il H41qce HS H41qce HRS Modules Central module F 8652X The central module for safety related applications with TUV certificate of the PES H41q HS HRS contains the essential functions demonstrated in the block diagram of the central module Displ Interfaces Front panel splays Interrogation Fail safe Watchdog Inverted memory cp Multiplexer voltage monitoring bus logic bus WD DPR Bus CPU Bus Rearside bus plane Figure 2 Block diagram of the central module F 8652X two clock synchronized microprocessors each microprocessor with an own memory one processor operates with real data and pro gram and the other one with inverted data and program testable hardware comparer for all the external accesses of both microprocessors in case of a fault the watchdog will be set to the safe status and the status of the processor is announced Flash EPROMs of the program memory for the operating system and the user program usable for min 100 000 writing cycles Data memory in sRAM Multiplexer to connect I O bus DPR and redundant CU Battery backup of the sRAMs via batteries with monitoring 4237 1 2 H41q HS HRS 0605 2 2 2 3
385. modules and I O modules are installed in the system sub rack Figure 1 Designs and Types of the PES Notes Mono single channel system structure Redundant redundant central modules and or separated I O bus system structure SIL Safety Integrity Level according to IEC 61508 input and output 2 2 1 Concept of H41q M MS H51q M MS Input modules Characteristics CU mono Central module modules mono I O bus Figure 2 Concept of H41q M MS H51q M MS Concept of the HIMA PES H41q M H51q M single channel central module and single channel I O bus amp FS H41q MS H51q MS with double processors safety related single channel central module and single channel I O bus with T V certificate up to SIL 3 ac cording to IEC 61508 2 2 2 Concept of H41q H HS H51q H HS Input modules Characteristics CU redundant Central modules I O modules mono redundant bus mono Output modules Figure 3 Concept of H41q H HS H51q H HS H41q H H51q H redundant central modules and a single channel I O bus for highly available PES I FS H41q HS H51q HS with double processors safety related redundant central modules and a single channel I O bus for highly available and safety related PES with T V certificate up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 Rheinland 2 2 3 Concept of H41q HR HRS H51q HR HRS Input modules Characteris
386. mounted over the fan K 9203 or over the kit H 41q The air deflector panel M 7201 deflects the warm air to the rear in order to avoid a temperature rise of the subracks and modules which are mounted above Useable thermocouples Linearization in Nominal range Resolution Type Thermocouple Nominal range Input voltage Temperature limits Monitored Range of use Input voltage Temperature limits Value in ELOP 1 Type Thermocouple Nominal range Input voltage Temperature limits Monitored Range of use Input voltage Temperature limits Value in ELOP lt 10 1 96 0 1 R Pt13 Rh Pt 0 226 mV 21 003 mV 50 C 1760 C 0 226 mV 21 003 mV 50 C 1760 C 500 17600 variable type INT S Pt10 Rh Pt 0 236 mV 18 609 mV 50 C 1760 C 0 236 mV 18 609 mV 50 C 1760 C 500 17600 variable type INT F 6220 0625 Type Thermocouple Nominal range Input voltage Temperature limits Monitored Range of use Input voltage Temperature limits Value in ELOP Il Type Thermocouple Nominal range Input voltage Temperature limits Monitored Range of use Input voltage Temperature limits Value in Type Thermocouple Nominal range Input voltage Temperature limits Monitored Range of use Input voltage Temperature limits Value in Type Thermocouple Nominal range Input voltage Temperature limits Monitored Range of use Input voltage Temp
387. n Battery Switch S1 eu 2 s ma iat 00000 ooooo o9 F 8653X INTEL 386EX 32 bits 25 MHz Flash EPROM 1 MB Flash EPROM 1 MB SRAM 1 MB Degree of utilization depending on operating system version Two serial interfaces RS 485 with electric isolation Four digit matrix display with selectable information Safety related watchdog with output 24 V loadable up to 500 mA short circuit proof Two European standard PCBs one PCB for the diagnostic display Space requirement 8 SU Operating data 5VI2A All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 453 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 8653X 0606 Setting of the bus station no via switches S1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
388. n the resources name For the reading of the ID see manual functions of the opera ting system BS41q H51q HI 800 105 Installation of the F 8628X module For installation of the F 8628X Consider chapter 2 2 On all F 8628X activate the ID IP switch 1 8 ON Set channel 1 or channel 2 on the module F 8628X see chapter 5 1 Set the redundant channel if available on the redundant module F 8628X see chapter 5 1 Replace the existing modules F 8628 by F 8628X by which the ELOP II TCP con nection is carried out If no F 8628X modules were used previously then plug the F 8628X into the specified module slot Perform the following Settings in ELOP Il Open the resource context menu and select Properties Open the tab PADT PC and select the communication type Ethernet Select one of the IP addresses channel1 or channel2 that are determined by By this the F 8628X connected to the PADT is selected Click OK to close the Properties dialog with OK Load the User Program into the H41q H51q Connect the selected F 8628X to the PADT corresponding to a wiring from chapter 5 2 5 Note In case of a redundant H41q H51q make sure that the HSR cable BV 7053 is plugged otherwise no access possible to the redundant central module F 865x Open the context menu of the resource and select control panel If a connection has been established OK appears in the field Communication In case o
389. n Off 446 12 567 8 34 BB 6 H E 51 8 ON 9600 bps Off 12345678 H 51 8 OFF 57600 bps F 8651X 0606 Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole For the serial interface only the bus station no 1 31 can be set Within an Ethernet network the bus station no can be set from 1 to 99 Therefore the switches S1 6 7 must be set in addition to the switches S1 1 2 3 4 5 The number of the communication partners within a network is still limited to 64 This enhanced setting of the bus station no is only possible from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 of the central module Applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the central module to PADT II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network safeethernet Modbus TCP The communication runs from the central module via the backplane bus to the communication module F 8627X and from the Ethernet ports of the F 862
390. n be loaded Upgrading downgrading from version 3 x and higher To upgrade downgrade version 3 x and higher the operating system file with extension Idb must be loaded Since the F 8628X has the same operating system as the F 8627X the F 8628X must use the same operating system file After downgrading to version 2 x the protection mechanism prevent ing incorrect files from being loaded is longer active F 8628X 0650 10 2 Download of the operating system to the F 8628X The operating system download for the module F 8628X is done using the diagnosis dialog ComEth Ethernet module should be closed if ComEth is not used N The connection between the ComEth s control panel and the F 8628X The connection to the ComEth s diagnosis panel can remain Start the ComEth diagnosis dialog and check in the error state viewer that the main program version is 0 8 0 or higher diagnostic text version is 0 2 0 or higher Select Project gt New on the menubar of the ComEth diagnosis dialog to create a new Project Select New Configuration in the context menu of the new project to create a new configuration Select New Resource in the context menu of the new configuration to create a new resource Select New F 8628X in the context menu of the new resource to create a new F 8628X in the new resource Select Properties in the context menu of the new F 8628X to open the dialog window Properties
391. n if a fault occurs are shown Depending on the fault location the reactions of the systems are fixed or they can be defined in the user program Parameters are set inthe resource properties I O parameter by activating of a system variable for emergency shutdown via function block H8 STA 3 An overview of the system variables including the corresponding error code you will find in the operating system manual Reaction to faults of safety related digital modules during operation parameter in the pro Focauomotfault perties of the resource Reaction of the system Output modules display only or Module switch off Single error normal operation also voltage failure normal operation and Group shutdown one function block H8 STA 3 per group Emergency off WD switch off of the appertaining CU bus or display only Slot with error code in I O double fault of bus display of the CPU output modules WD is still switched on normal operation or WD switch off of the Emergency off appertaining CU Central modules independent of the WD switch off of the parameter appertaining CU Input modules independent of the Operation of O signal for all parameter inputs of this module Independent of a fault of the System variable for emer WD switch off of the output module gency switch off activated appertaining CU independent of the I O parameter Table
392. n the cable plug 45V GND bus L 24V L 24V e WD D Z 7149 I 3430 1 04 03 O 02 O 01 O 27149 01 02 03 04 Front m SES IE 2714910 _ _ Cable plug Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Relay output NO contact dust tight Contact material Silver alloy gold flashed Switching time approx 8 ms Reset time approx 6 ms Bounce time approx 1 ms Switching current 10mA lt I lt 4 Life mech gt 30 x 106 cycles Life elec gt 2 5 10 cycles with full resistive load and lt 0 1 cycles per second Switching capacity AC to 250 500 VA cos gt 0 5 Switching capacity DC up to 30 VDC max 120 W non inductive up to 70 VDC 50 W up to 110 VDC max 30 W Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC lt 100 mA 24 VDC lt 120 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 261 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 3430 0507 262 Channel Connection Color 1 z18 WH d18 BN 2 z22 GN Cable d22 YE LiYY 8 x 1 5 mm 3 z26 GY d26 PK 4 z30 BU d30 RD Lead marking of the cable plug Z 7149 3430 C P2 Figure 2 Lead marking of the cable plug The module has a safe isolation between the input and the output contact according EN 50178 VDE 0160 The clearance in air and the creepage distance are dimensioned for overvoltage class up to
393. nance In case of a failure the defective module must be replaced with the same or with another ap proved type Any repair work must only be carried out by the manufacturer 221 F3325 0622 CERTIFICADO CERTIFICAT aes ZERTIFIKAT CERTIFICATE 222 EC Type Examination Certificate No EX5 02 04 19183 35 PRODUCT SERVICE in accordance with Annex Ill of Council Directive No 94 9 EC for equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres ATEX for HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Albert Bassermann StraBe 28 68782 Br hl Product Electrical apparatus type of protection intrinsically safety i EX RL Model Automation device F 3325 Parameters see appendix four pages The above mentioned product meets the provisions of the Directive This certificate is issued on the basis of the product provided for testing and certification and on its technical documentation The detailed results of the test and the provided technical documentation are listed in Test report no 70013102 2 This certificate pertains only to the sample product submitted to T V PRODUCT SERVICE for testing Therefore this certificate has no specified period of validity Released with the above mentioned certificate number by the Certification Body of T v PRODUCT SERVICE T TTE Department TA ES MUC IQSE jb Date 25 04 2002 TUV PRODUCT
394. nd 8627X then the MODBUS TCP slave on the 8627X must be active to answer MODBUS request with the corresponding MODBUS response If two 8627 operating redundantly i e HSR connection to a second F 8627X then the MODBUS TCP slaves must be active on one of the two redun dant F 8627X to answer a MODBUS request with the corresponding MODBUS response If the MODBUS request cannot be passed to an active MODBUS TCP slave the F 8627X sends the error code OxOB back to the MODBUS master Note HSR communication MODBUS TCP slave via port 8896 is only possible if both F 8627X are operating in redundant mode DIP switch 2 2 OFF and the HPRO S DIRECT mode is deactivated DIP switch 1 7 OFF F 8627X 0650 Via MODBUS TCP port 8896 the F 8627X supports the following function codes Function Code Type Description Read Coils 01 BOOL Reads several variables BOOL from the slave s import or export area same range as code 02 Read discrete Inputs 02 BOOL Reads several variables BOOL from the slave s export area Read Holding Registers 03 WORD Reads several variables of any type from the slave s import or export area same range as code 04 Read Input Registers 04 WORD Reads several variables of any type from the slave s export area Write Single Coil 05 BOOL Writes one single variable BOOL in the slave s import area Write Single Register 06 WORD
395. nected and the mes sage 2 PADT PC connected to the PES is displayed in the control panel s Communication field 5 2 6 1 Is the PADT PC network card located in the same subnet 1 Determining the IP address of the PADT PC network In MS Windows open the settings of the PADT network connections from the PADT Select the network card used for connecting to the F 8628X Select properties of the internet protocol network card is not located in the same F 8628X subnet 192 168 0 x follow step 2 for creating a connection fthe network card is located in the same subnet but no connection is available check the connection using the function Ping specified in Chapter 5 2 6 3 2 Establishing a network connection between a PC and an F 8628X if they are located in different subnets First method Change the IP address of the PC network card in use Inthe properties of the TCP IP connection enter a free IP address which is located in the same subnet as the F 8628X 192 168 0 x Second method Create a routing entry to the F 8628X on the PC Start the Dos Shell on the PC Enter the following command route add IP address F 8628X mask 255 255 255 255 IP address PC Note To ensure the routing entry remains permanent e g after the PC is restarted use the p parameter with the route command Example route p add Check if the routing entry for connecting the PC network card to the F 86
396. ned in the user program in a way that all test able output modules appertaining to the group with the faulty module are also switched off Inside the user program up to 10 testable output modules can be assigned to one group by means of the function block H8 STA 3 WD switch off of the appertaining CPU In case of a fault the watchdog signal WD of the appertaining central module is switched off If systems with redundant central modules and a common I O bus are used then the output modules are related to both central modules In case of a fault both the watchdog signals of the central modules are switched off That means all the modules are switched off only at H41q H HS If systems with redundant central modules and redundant I O bus are used then the output modules are related to one central module and one I O bus In case of a fault only the watchdog signal of the related central module is switched off That means only the related I O modules are switched off only at H41q HR HRS The redundant central module is still in operation The Input Output Level In the subrack slots 1 to 13 are provided for the input output modules Any arrangement of module types is possible In PES with redundant I O bus the modules on slots 1 to 7 are assigned to the first I O bus and 8 to 13 to the second I O bus There is an integrated cable tray under the subrack It is equipped with a receptacle for the label which can be flapped open to provide
397. nel 1 or b22 b24 for channel 2 Figure 2 Lead marking cable plug Note At use of the module with external devices e g chart recorder the compatibility with test values with signal duration 1ms at the outputs has to be checked F 6705 0524 2 Current connections 2 1 Redundant current connection Module 1 Channel 1 Module 1 Channel 2 Module 2 Channel 1 Module 2 Channel 2 ZN NN VA A Y F 6705 6705 2 8 a a 2 a A a a 2 a a 2 a 2 CIT Li v t7 L Z 7126 6705 C R2 L Z 7126 6705 C2 R1 1 12 121 122 162 lc R B R B L i Uot Ug Channels 1 Sink mode Burden may be connected to any potential Channels 2 Source mode Figure 3 Redundant current connection With redundant current connection the following must be considered The total current 1 resp 162 to the burden Rg is the addition of the individual currents 144 and 124 resp 112 and 122 The admissible burden resistance is half the value The paralleled channels have to be used in the same mode source or sink mode Because of the temperature error and of the wanted well balanced load of the modules each output channel should generate the half of the current Ig to the burden Note If one of the two redundant modules is switched o
398. ng Si U Fuse monitoring Note The assembly kit is fully wired for a possible extension to redundant systems For extension to redundant I O buses remove jumper plug Z 6007 see data sheet H41q HR H41q HRS 69 B 4235 H41q MS 0605 5 Side view 4235 assembly kit H41q MS system Figure 5 Side view B 4236 1 2 H41q H HR 0605 4236 1 2 H41q H HR 4236 1 2 Assembly Kit HA1q H HR System System H41q H HR in K 1409 system subrack 5 HU 19 inches with redundant central mod ules power supply 24 5 V I O level communication module optional coprocessor modules optional and four fans H41q H B 4236 1 single channel bus redundant central modules H41q HR B 4236 2 redundant bus redundant central modules K 1409 CU1 CM1 CU2 CM2 PS1 PS2 d de 7 VO modules to CU1 with 6I D modules to CU2 with e redundant I O bus redundant I O bus R R 4236 2 4236 2 ils Earth bar covered J m ae 1 x Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm for each slot e e 48 Gr n HIMA HIMA HIMA F8653X F8627X F8653X F8627X F7130A F7130A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 13 14 15 16 Y 17 18 19 20 21 F8653X 8627 8653 F8627X F7130A F7130A ZB1 CU1 IKB1 CM1 ZB2 CU2 KB2 CM2ING1 PSAING2 PS2 H41q HR 4236 2 5
399. nical Design Structure of the compact devices H41q 1 subrack 482 6 mm 19 inches technology 5 HU for central modules and modules Modules in the I O area 4 or 8 SU 3 HU max 13 I O modules with width 4 SU Structure of the modular devices H51q subracks 482 6 mm 19 inches technology 1 central subrack 5 HU max 16 I O subracks 4 HU Modules in the central area width 4 and 8 SU 3 HU Modules in the I O area width 4 or 8 SU 3 HU max 256 I O modules with width 4 SU Explanation 1 SU spacing unit 5 08 mm 1 TE 1 HU height unit 44 45 mm 1 HE The connection of the external signal cables is made at the front plate of the I O modules via cable plugs with LED displays no LEDs for analog modules For the wiring fire retardant wires and cables are used 5 2 System Data Operating voltages 24 VDC peripherals 5 VDC microprocessor system Supply voltage 24 VDC 15 20 rpp lt 15 Ambient conditions 0 60 C according to IEC 61131 2 pollution degree Il according to DIN VDE 0160 Storage temperature 40 85 C without batteries 40 75 C central module and central subrack with battery 5 3 Data of the Central Module CU Type of processor INTEL 386 EX Clock frequency 25 MHz Program memory Battery backup for CMOS RAM Battery monitoring Diagnostic system Diagnoses displays Memory capacity for user Basic cycle time Flash EPROM for operating system and function blocks Flash EP
400. nication partners are configured several bus configurations must be created in ELOP Il since a bus configuration in ELOP II supports a maximum of 31 bus parti cipants The number of HIMA OPC servers can be set from 0 to 14 The number of HIPRO S commu nication partners is not reduced by the number of configured HIMA OPC servers If HIPRO S DIRECT mode is active switch 1 7 ON switch S1 8 passive mode no longer influences communication For this reason passive mode must also be activated on the HIMA OPC servers The communication modules for HIPRO S must be configured in ELOP II and via DIP switch es Switch 2 1 sets the module number which corresponds to the attached Ethernet segment see Table 6 and Figure 5 Set switch 1 7 Table 5 on page 361 to ON to activate the HIPRO S DIRECT mode Switches 1 1 to 1 5 Table 5 on page 361 set the Timeout for the answer of the communication partner Switch 1 Timeout 0 10 ms On 0 20 ms On of NULL 30 ms On 0 40 ms On 0 50 ms On H 0 60 ms 70 ms Legend a Positions white switch 80 ms on ong White switch in g White switch in 400 ms 01 position OFF position ON On Not used O switch 1000 ms Table 10 Settings of switch 1 S1
401. nnections on the rear of the system rack 1409 4 6 1 Wiring ex works XD 1 Jumper plug Z 6007 Combination of the separated I O buses single channel system H41q HS not at redundant system H41q HRS XG 1 XG 2 Supply L for the power supply module Reference pole XG 9 L XG 3 4 5 Potential distributor free disposal of XG 9 L for the power supply module XG 10 Watchdog signal from CU2 11 Watchdog signal from CU1 XG 12 Watchdog signal for I O modules 2 bus XG 13 Watchdog signal for I O modules 1 I O bus A PE earth Connections of the additional modules Z 6011 Z 6018 Z 6013 XG 21 XG 22 XG 23 refer to assembly kit wiring diagram S1 S2 for switching off the buffer batteries G1 G2 Delivery state Buffer batteries are switched off 4 6 2 Wiring by customer 84 XG 6 1 13 14 1 13 XG 24 XG 2 5 L for modules slots 1 to 13 13 single connections see also connection XG 14 Reference potential L for modules Slots 1 13 see also connection XG 6 Supply 24 VDC see assembly kit wiring diagram L L 4237 1 2 H41q HS HRS 0605 4 7 Z 1009 N N E o o 79 79 Le L L XG 1 XG 2 XG 9 XG 13 XG 12 XG 11 1 GY 0 5 mm 2 2 GY 0 5 mm GY 0 5 mm XG 22 8 9 222 1111 51 0 nal e 1 6 RD 1 5 mm e Z 6013 e 3 3 XG 22 6 7444 GY 0 5 mm RD 1 mm BK 1 mm XG 24 4 4 6 5 5 5 XG 25 4 4 6 555 e
402. nnels TC1 to TC8 for supply voltage monitoring The grounds 11 to 18 are joined to a common ground I The sig nals 11 to 18 may only be interconnected on the module No external joints are allowed The pins d4 and d30 on the front socket of the F 6221 are omitted coding of the front plug Pin allocations refer to the connections on the printed circuit board in the front plug In Ex applications the cable shield has to be connected to the equipo tential bonding In non Ex applications the cable shield is connected to the PE terminal bus bar on the subrack 319 F 6221 0625 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 320 Operating Instructions for F 6221 Application The module is used to measure the current of 0 4 to 20 mA transmitters These transmitters can be installed in potentially hazardous atmospheres from Zone 1 on No external voltage must be applied at the outputs Only these applications are permissible which are described the data sheets for F 3325 and F 6221 The digitized process signals are made available at the outputs Electrical specifications concerning intrinsic safety For these specifications please refer to the EC prototype test certificate enclosed Assembly and installation The module is mounted in a 19 subrack It must be plugged in vertically The design of the subrack must allow heat dissipation Further information for assembly and installation see HIMA main catalog
403. not available to the user program as measuring values The signal inputs I and TC are related to each other to TC1 12 to TC2 etc There are some wiring variants for different applications available for which HIMA supplies the corresponding cables Only the wiring variants described in the data sheets for F 3325 and F 6221 are permissible All other ways of wiring are prohibited For the described wiring variants only the provided HIMA cables are admissible Wiring variants Permissible wiring variants with two wire passive transmitters HIMA Variants Description variants 1 1 Mono supply mono current measuring wiring via cable B 1 Mono supply mono current measuring wiring via terminal C1 3 Mono supply redundant current measuring wiring via cable D 3 Mono supply redundant current measuring wiring via terminal according to the technical report No 70013102 4 1 2 Table 1 Permissible wiring variants with two wire passive transmitters Note The other TUV variants described in the technical report are only for theoretical considerations 309 F 6221 0625 2 1 2 Permissible wiring variants with active transmitters sources HIMA T Description variants A2 No supply mono current measuring C2 No supply redundant current measuring wiring via cable E Voltage measuring F Current measuring via shunt Table 2
404. ns Syno eu U SMOUS ez pue eoujoeje swous ZZ gel pejeroosse au smoys 2 qe Alddns Jamod pue y jsuieBe A 922 jo xeed e dn perejosi Ajsjes pue ejes Ajeorsuinul 919918 104 uBIe euo pue 1uBIe euo 1 0 095 5 02 941 y jo Jea suod Ajddns pue jndino eu spod jndui ejes pejdnoo 9 SISUOD YOBIGNS e A quuesseqns siu uorsojdxe Jo ejqedeo ue episjno Ajuo Joy pejeroosse ue 5 zz9 4 02x dins od ges Ajeorsuugu LZZ9 jueujeJnseeui pue A ddns jewod eui jo ejes Ajeorsuuiur Y ejep eui Ja deyo siu JO ejes jo je9ug99 3 Z pessnosip pue eq
405. ns max 5 communication slots per central module Abbreviations CM Coprocessor Module CoM Communication Module CU Central Module Input Output 13 The H51q System Family 4 2 14 Concepts of the Safety Switch Off at H51q In the system descriptions of the safety related PES H51q MS HS HRS the ways for shut down if a fault occurs are shown Depending on the fault location the reactions of the systems are fixed or they can be defined in the user program Parameters are set inthe resource properties I O parameter by activating of a system variable for emergency shutdown via function block H8 STA 3 An overview of the system variables including the corresponding error code you will find in the operating system manual Reaction to faults of safety related modules during operation Location of fault parameter in the pro perties of the resource Reaction of system Output modules single error also voltage failure display only or normal operation Module switch off normal operation and one function block H8 STA 3 per group Group shutdown Emergency off WD switch off of the appertaining CU O bus within subrack or double fault in output modules display only Slot with error code in subrack display of the CPU WD is still switched on normal operation WD switch off of the apper taining coupling module par
406. nsically safe lines must be provided with additional insulation e ntrinsically safe lines must be identifiable e g by a light blue color RAL 5015 of the insulation The wiring has to be secured mechanically in a way which ensures that in the event of an accidental disconnection the distance EN 50020 Part 7 Table 4 between the intrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe connections does not fall below the required minimum e g by bundling The lines used must comply with the following insulation test voltages Intrinsically safe lines gt 1000 VAC Not intrinsically safe lines gt 1500 VAC For stranded wires the line ends must be provided with wire end ferrules The terminals must be suitable for clamping the wire cross section The applicable regulations and standards have to be complied with especially EN 50014 1997 Corrigedum 1998 A1 1999 A2 1999 VDE 0170 0171 Part 1 2000 DIN EN 50014 2000 02 EN 50020 1994 VDE 0170 0171 Part 7 1996 DIN EN 50020 1996 04 EN 60079 14 1997 VDE 0165 Part 1 DIN EN 60079 14 1998 08 System start up Prior to the first system start up an Ex expert has to check the correct installation of the sys tem especially the supply voltage connections and the connections for the intrinsically safe cir cuits Maintenance In case of a failure the defective module must be replaced with the same or with another ap proved type Any repair work
407. number X 26 27 Number of variables Import 4 28 29 Start identity number X 30 31 Number of variables Table 13 Window definitions for PROFIBUS DP input and output The parameter range parameter data in the master PROFIBUS DP configuration software con sists of 32 byte initialized with 00 hex In the PROFIBUS DP master they are set to their values Figure 10 The first 16 bytes byte 0 to 15 describe the export variable windows the last 16 bytes byte 16 to 31 describe import variables of the communication module In ELOP II export variables correspond to PROFIBUS input variables and import variables in correspond to PROFIBUS output variables modules in Figure 13 The data in the parameter range parameter data each consist of 2 bytes forming a big endian 433 F 8628X 0650 9 3 Communication module identity no 434 coded 16 bit word The start identity number corresponds to an identity number in the corresponding data pool of the communication module The number of variables determines the number of variables to be transmitted beginning with the start identification number The size of window always comprises integer bytes and is determined by the data types defined by the window and the number of data types compressed or uncompressed The total of the sizes of the 4 export windows determines the user data length of the PROFIBUS INPUT telegram The total of the sizes of the
408. o 00 0471221 Connection of smart transmitter Figure 4 Connection of smart transmitter 287 F 6216A 0541 288 F 6217 0606 F 6217 8 channel analog input module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 for current inputs 0 4 20 mA voltage inputs 0 5 10 V with safe isolation resolution 12 bits transmitter supply UN UN x re OR EERE A E A gt 27127 6217 t Got bot eet dt R01 R03 R05 R07 R09 R11 R13 R15 8 8 X 98 5 2854 FH 58 8 T 3 gt 4 4 is e e e 1 e e e N O08 ei lo ee Ld N T T T T T T T T 1 N _ L8 V Analog GND Analog 0 MUX 1 C ee ee lt a Lee sd i k i 2 uct 77127 6217 J je _ 1 Front cable plug es 88 Note see also IN Block diagram LI 5V GND information about V cable plug Z 7128 bus All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Interpretation of channel bit faults for each channel to project Il
409. oad CPU in operation is recommended every 6 years Buffer battery with soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000016 Buffer battery without soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000019 Further informations see also catalog H41q H51q chapter 9 Startup and maintenance 65 4235 H41q MS 0605 4 Wiring of the assembly kit The assembly kit is already wired for operation Wirings have still to be done by the user op tional modules see Assembly kit wiring diagram With installation of the assembly kit a conductive connection to the frame or a separate earth connection has to be installed according to the EMC requirements Connection PE earth Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm Pay attention for the manufacturers information concerning detaching and replugging of the Faston connectors 4 1 Current distribution within the assembly kit 411 HIMA devices for current distribution It is recommended to use the HIMA supplies and current distributions K 7212 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with 2 decoupling diodes and 2 net work filters with fusing of up to 12 single circuits with circuit breakers or K 7213 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with fusing of up to 12 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7214 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7215 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits
410. ocessor module mainly contains Microprocessor HD 64180 with a clock frequency of 10 MHz Operating system EPROM RAM for a PLC master project Note The RAM for the master project is buffered via the batteries on the backplane of the subrack Two interfaces RS 485 via communication software function block setting of the baud rate up to 57600 bps Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Communication modules F 8627 F 8628 F 8627X F 8628X Right of the central module of the H41q MS PES one communication module can be installed The communication module mainly contains 32 bit RISC microprocessor Operating system RAM for further protocols F 8627 Ethernet interface safeethernet F 8628 Profibus DP slave interface Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Special applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the central module to PADT II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network Modbus Special application with the communication module F 8628X ELOP II TCP connection PADT via the Ethernet interface of the F 8628X to the H41q H51q controller Startup and maintenance Before startup the system switch on the rear buffer batteries G1 and A G2 via DIP switches on the backplane A battery change of the buffer batteries without l
411. odem Timedelay ms 00 Initialization time 0 Standard Cancel Help Figure 3 Setting the time delay at modem The check box Activate modem must be set that a change of the time delay becomes active for the communication After initialization of the Modem Connection after each start from the control panel or at online tests an annunciation results about the initialization of the time Bus system with I and HIPRO data exchange several masters If the bus system is used in common for ELOP and HIPRO several bus masters share the communication If in this case the time delay was activated as described above the time de lays must be set for all masters to the same value This time delay must be the same as the time delay of the modem otherwise the following error message will appear If the PADT and the PES Master are used together on the same bus the same time delay setting must be used Please check your time settings Therefore in the configuration of the project select Properties select the bus and mark it to open the dialog Edit HIBUS select bus station PES master and process it in the dialog HIBUS station There the time delay is set example II up to version 4 1 513 RS 485 PCI 0602 HIBUS station ELOPII x1 Type Name AG Mast zi Slave BSN ho x Slave C PADT PES master S
412. odule H 7015 ELCO 80162 F 3330 Redundant ALI E Vario plug ELCO 8016 A B C Phoenix Headers D Terminal block 4x supply contacts coupled 6x floating contacts 2x contacts Y for shield Figure 3 Wiring of H 7015 with H 7016 484 H 7017 0641 H 7017 H 7017 Shunt with low pass filter for current measurement with analog input modules asa module for mounting on a DIN X1 1 0 X1 2 0 X2 7 X1 3 0 2 6 X1 4 0 2 5 X1 5 0 x2 4 X1 6 0 X2 3 X1 7 0 x2 2 X1 8 0 X2 1 Figure 1 Block diagram If analog input modules operate under extreme ambient conditions or not according to the HIMA recommendations there can be interferences or interspersions in the module channels The module H 7017 is used in these cases as a module for a current measuring with the analog input modules The module H 7017 can operate with e g the following modules F 6217 8 channel analog input module Elimination of interferences at sensors with high dynamic signals F 6251 Planar F or 62100 Planar4 2 fold limit monitor Increase of noise immunity 10 V according to IEC 61000 4 6 at use with unshielded cables When using the module H 7017 the shunts in the analog input mo dules must be unsoldered modified cable plug otherwise the current measurement would be tampered Further details you will find in the corresponding data sheets
413. ommunication settings between F 8627X and F 8625 If the F 8627X is directly connected with a F 8625 using a cross over Ethernet cable without a switch then Autonegotiation must be activated on the F 8627X switch S2 3 to ON The DIRECT Mode on the F 8627X must be switched off set switch S1 7 to OFF Passive mode may only be used set switch 51 8 to OFF if also activated on the communication partners Redundant interconnection in an H41q H51q controller The following table shows the operating systems for the redundant interconnection of the com munication modules CM F 8627X and F 8627X F 8625 and the settings that must be consid ered CM1 CM2 Properties Settings F 8625 F 8627X The DIRECT Mode on the F 8627X module must be OS V1 x from OS V2 x switched off switch 51 7 to up to OS V4 x F 8627X F 8627X The used functions must be supported by the used OS ver from OS V2 x from OS V2 x sions see Table 1 up to OS V4 x up to OS V4 x Table 2 Redundant interconnection of the communication modules Note The passive mode and the DIRECT mode may only be activated if activated on the redundant communication module Note For redundant interconnection it is recommended to use communica tion modules of the same type with the same operating system 357 F 8627X 0650 2 4 Replacing an F 8627X An F 8627X must never be removed from a redundant operation
414. on 2 Bus to position 1 RS 232 Position 1 Operation with ELOP II or Wizcon Position 2 Operation with ELOP or HIKA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 155 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Bruhl BV 7043 0508 156 Transmission rate Maximum cable length 9 600 bps 15m 57 600 bps 5m Table 1 Maximum cable length depending on transmission rate Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 2 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole Pin RS 232 Signal Meaning 1 CF DCD Data could be received 2 BB RxD Receive data from interface to PC 3 BA TxD Send data from PC to interface 4 CD DTR PC ready to receive 5 AB GND Data Ground 6 CC DSR Interface ready to receive 7 RTS PC indicates that PC would send 8 CF CTS Interface indicates that PC could send 9 RI Ring indicator Table 3 Pin assignment of the interface RS 232 9 pole BV 7044 0524 BV 7044 BV 7044 Data connecting cable Connection from interface RS 232C V 24 of a PC to the interface converter 7505 Standard
415. on F 8627X is not admissible All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 353 Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 8621A 0606 354 Note If a Profibus DP communication module F 8628 F8628X or an Ether net communication module F 8627 F 8627X is used in addition to the coprocessor module F 8621A the software function block HK COM 3 from ELOP II V 3 5 BS 41q 51q V 7 08 0214 with proper parameter ization has to be set up Settings 51 54 for RS 485 Interface 1 1 2 RS 485 OFF Table 1 Interface 1 Interface 2 S3 S4 RS 485 ON OFF Table 2 Interface 2 A Other settings as given in the table are not admissible Note The redundant connection to a process control system is made via two redundant modules each with a BV 7040 The connection to an ELOP II bus is made via a cable BV 7046 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 Pin RS485 Signal Explanation 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 A A RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 3 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 F 8627X 0650 F 8627 F 8627X F 8627X Ethernet module 8627X Communication Mod
416. on protocol active Flashing OFF Ethernet communication protocol inactive ON OFF Communication to redundant communication module active Note The redundancy LED is OFF if DIRECT Mode switch 1 7 ON or Mono switch 52 2 ON is enabled This applies also in case of a redundant connection via HSR cable Flashing Flashing Booting of the communication module ON Flashing Beginning with OS version 4 6 User Error Configuration Error Res ID and ID are not equal Ethernet communication protocol inactive even if the communication module is in RUN status OFF ON Fatal error in communication module Module must be replaced OFF Flashing Saving the error code in Flash EPROM required 3 times for repair purposes Do not unplug communication module Table 4 Bottom row LEDs on module front F 8627X 0650 4 4 1 Functions of the switches Functions of switch 1 1 51 ON OFF Description 10 ms O ms 20 ms Oms 40 ms O ms 400 ms 0 oy A N gt 1000 ms 0 ms The Timeout is the timeframe within which the receiver must acknowledge receiving packets from the transmitter It is set via the switches S1 1 5 Standard value 10 ms switch 1 1 5 OFF Switches S1 1 5 can be combined by the user 10 ms must be added for each combination of switches HIPRO S DIRECT must be activated switch 1 7 ON 6 ID IP ON ID IP OFF For OS versi
417. on to the actuators are used depending on the load up to 4 x 2 5 mm BK wiring is necessary 138 B 9302 0507 2 3 Output 5 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use XGA 5 V YE 2 x 2 5 Faston 6 3 x 0 8 from central rack XG 12 GND GN 2 x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 from central rack GN Color code green YE Color code yellow Table 3 Output 5 VDC 2 4 Connection WD Connection Wire and connection Use XG 15 1 GY 0 5 mm wire end ferrule from central rack and to fur ther I O racks GY Color code gray Table 4 Connection WD 25 WO Bus Connection Procedure XD 1 Plug in BV 7032 and connect it with the I O subrack before XD 2 Plug in BV 7032 of the following I O subrack on the according I O bus or plug in bus termination module F 7546 at the last I O subrack Table 5 I O Bus A With installation of the assembly kit a conductive connection to the frame or a separate earth connection has to be installed according to the EMC requirements Connection PE earth Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm Pay attention for the manufacturers information concerning detaching and replugging of the Faston connectors Refer also to Supply feeding and distribution of the 24 V system voltage see assembly kit wiring diagram 139 B 9302 0507 2 6 Connections on the rear commen E EA Ba23D3 A 5 CH
418. on with out a special procedure Before removing an F 8628X its fixing screws must be completely loosened and freely movable Remove the module from the bus board by pushing the ejection lever front label top down and quickly remov ing in an upward motion to ensure faulty signals are not triggered within the system To attach the module place it on the terminal block and press it inwards as far as it will go This action should be performed quickly to ensure that faulty signals are not triggered within the system 2 2 1 Operation of the ejection lever Push ejection lever top down U Withdraw module Front plate Front plate C 2 Figure 2 Operation of the ejection lever 410 F 8628X 0650 2 2 2 Procedure for exchanging a redundant F 8628X in a redundant H41q H51q controller Make sure that you connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet socket 10 100BASE T and the HSR cable to the HSR socket HSR The respective connectors must be pressed in until they snap into their sockets 10 11 12 Unplug communication cable PROFIBUS DP Unplug communication cable Ethernet Corresponding central module e g F 8650X with operating system Version below 05 34 remove the central module Version beginning with 05 34 erase application program manually to deactivate the central module see operation system manual Erasing the application pro gram Unplug HSR cable BV 7053 if used Remove
419. one coprocessor module F 8621A or one communication module Ethernet F 8627 F 8627X Profibus DP F 8628 F 8628X can be installed If they are operated in redundant mode the same type has to be used System H51q To the right of each central module up to three coprocessor modules or up to five communica tion modules can be installed additionally Restrictions Coprocessor modules Max 3 for each central module only the slots reserved for the coprocessor modules can be used slots 10 11 12 or 17 18 19 Ethernet or Profibus DP communication modules Max 5 for each central module each of the five slots right of the central modules can be used slots 10 11 12 13 14 or 17 18 19 20 21 The different types can be mixed If they are operated in redundant mode the redundant coprocessor or communication mod ules must be installed in the according slots Installation and Connections 8 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 Installation and Connections ESD Protection Only personnel who have the knowledge of ESD protective measures are permitted to carry out system modifications upgrades to the system wiring An electrostatic discharge can damage the built in electronic compo nents Touch an earthed object to discharge any static in your body When carrying out the work make sure to use an ESD protected working area and wear an earthing strip When the module is not in use ensure it is protected from
420. onitoring Note The assembly kit is fully wired for a possible extension to redundant systems For extension to redundant I O buses remove jumper plug 2 6007 see data sheet H41q HR H41q HRS 61 4234 H41q M 0605 5 Side view B 4234 assembly kit H41q M system Figure 5 Side view B 4235 H41q MS 0605 4235 Assembly Kit H41q MS System System H41q MS in 1409 system subrack 5 HU 19 inches with single channel central mod ule power supply 24 5 V I O level communication module optional coprocessor module optional and four fans T V certified applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 4235 H41q MS K 1409 CU1 CM1 PS1 PS2 d ERROR _ cpu ACK Io L O L 13 Slots for I O modules e 5 1 3 o t Neus 666 amp 56 O 5V O 5V Earth bar covered o ICRUEN 1 x Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm for each slot HIMA HMA HIMA IMA F8652X F8627X F7130A F7130A 1 7 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 F8652X 8627 F7130A F7130A ZB1 CU1 IKB1 CM1 ING1 PS1 NG2 PS2 H41g MS 4235 655 Option Figure 1 Front view 1 Parts of the B 4235 assembly kit H41q MS system e 1xK 1409 system subrack 5 HU 19 inch with cable tray with four fan modules K 9212 hinged receptacle for the label and backplane Z 1009 On the rear buf
421. onnectors are fixed with screws The 24 VDC operation voltage has to be checked for correct polarity level and ripple before it is connected In case of reverse polarity a fuse protects the module of damages Functional Testing Preparing Functional Testing For functional testing check the equipment of the control cabinet completely with help of the label and or documentation printout I O subrack All free connectors of the input output mod ules have to be connected to the allocated input output racks and the voltage connections of the cable connectors to the allocated voltage distributors All control elements control devices must be released by the factory management or be driven without auxiliary power Testing in the Central Devices The essential tests in the central devices of the H41q H51q system are Central modules switch positions for bus station no and transfer rate version of the operation system via display Coprocessor module F 8621A operating system EPROM switch positions for RS 485 interface Communication modules switch positions for different operating modes for modules F8627 F8627X and F8628 F8628X see cor responding data sheet bus connection refer to the data sheet of the appertaining assembly kit We recommend marking all required switch positions etc in copies of the data sheets of the respective control cabinet and keeping the copies in the pocket of the cabinet door Should modules have to be
422. ons 4 x no function See also Chapter 5 2 3 ID IP ON The bus station number ID which is set on the F 865x central module via switches S1 1 7 is used as Res ID if no Res ID could be determined from the loaded user pro gram ID IP OFF The bus station number ID which is set on the F 865x central module via switches 1 1 7 is never used for the Res ID 7 DIRECT Mode enabled 8 Passive Mode disabled DIRECT Mode disabled Passive Mode enabled HIPRO S DIRECT Mode must be activated if more than one bus configuration is required HIPRO S DIRECT is supported beginning with the F 8627X OS version 3 x The Passive Mode controls the communication to the HIMA OPC server Passive Mode enabled The Token Passing between the F 8627X to the HIMA OPC servers is disabled The HIMA OPC servers cyclically exchange data with the F 8627X independent of the token owner Passive Mode disabled The Token Passing between the F 8627X and the HIMA OPC servers is enabled The HIMA OPC servers only exchange data with the F 8627X if they have the Token Table 5 Functions of switch 1 1 361 F 8627X 0650 4 2 362 Functions of switch 2 2 2 ON OFF Description 1 Ethernet Ethernet F 8627X allocation to the Ethernet channel 1 or Channel 1 Channel 2 Ethernet channel 2 2 Mono Redundant Wiring of the modules Not used in HIPRO S DIRECT Mode 31 Au
423. ontext menu of the resource gt documentation gt Res docu generated Once new BUSCOM variables have been added a not reloadable code must always be gen erated to allow the addressing to be reconfigured F 8627X 0650 6 9 3 Example of a configuration in ELOP Il for the communication with a HIMA OPC Server Define the BUSCOM variables used for the OPC communication Select one of the following properties to determine the communication direction of the BUSCOM variables Export read by HIMA OPC server Import written by HIMA OPC server Import Export both written and read by HIMA OPC server Create the BUSCOM resources list for HIMA OPC server Open the resource s context menu and select Documentation Select the submenu function RES Docu generated to open the dialog Res Docu generated Select the tab BUSCOM located in the dialog Res Docu generated Right click on the BUSCOM variable line to open the export context menu Select Export to Text File Note Consider that no filters are set during the export Save the file with the extension txt on a storage medium server floppy disk which the HIMA OPC server can read ERES docu generated Config B1_PESO3 Cabinet Rack Module Parameter BUSCOM 3964R HIPRO N S Lol CG en 519 gt 0 _0 U 0 I H51q gt 0PC_2 T 2 sort H51q gt 0PC_3 Find 519 gt 0 _4 Filt
424. operation DIP switches 2 DIP switches for setting the module functions All rights reserved The technology is subject to changes without notice 355 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 8627X 0650 2 2 1 2 2 356 Functions of F 8627X General A H41q H51q controller can simultaneously exchange via an F 8627X non safety related data with a HIMA OPC server and safety related data via safeethernet In this case the F865x cen tral module ensures safety Beginning with operating system version 4 x the F 8627X supports the functions MODBUS TCP slave and II TCP The ELOP II TCP connection provides a fast data exchange between a PADT PC and the F 865x central module Note The F 8627X has the same functions as the F 8627 and is compatible with it The new functions are only supported in an F 8627X with oper ating system V4 x or higher Operating system versions Overview of the operating system versions which can be loaded into the F 8627X The F 8627X is delivered with operating system version 4 x Operating system version Properties Mode From OS version 2 x HIPRO S Mode A maximum of 31 HIMA PES can communicate with each other in a safety related manner A PES can communicate with a maximum of 4 OPC servers see also Table 8 Overview of the communication with a HIMA OPC server via the F 8627X in combination with HIPRO S on page 372 F
425. or F 6221 0625 CERTIFICADO CERTIFICAT 5 ZERTIFIKAT CERTIFICATE EC Type Examination Certificate No EX5 02 04 19183 036 PRODUCT SERVICE in accordance with Annex Ill of Council Directive No 94 9 EC for equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres ATEX for HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Albert Bassermann Stra e 28 68782 Br hl Product Electrical apparatus type of protection intrinsically safety i EX RL Mode Automation device safety related F 6221 Parameters see appendix six pages The above mentioned product meets the provisions of the Directive This certificate is issued on the basis of the product provided for testing and certification and on its technical documentation The detailed results of the test and the provided technical documentation are listed in Test report no 70013102 1 This certificate pertains only to the sample product submitted to T V PRODUCT SERVICE for testing Therefore this certificate has no specified period of validity Released with the above mentioned certificate number by the Certification Body of T V PRODUCT SERVICE Department f ES MUC IOSE jb Date 25 04 2002 PRODUCT SERVICE GMBH is a Notified Body in accordance with Council Directive 94 9 EC for equipment and protective systems intended fer use in potentially explosive atmospheres w
426. or the module are shown in the display of the corresponding central module For further informations see operating system manual Maintenance When a module fails the defective module can be replaced against the same type or approved spare part The repair of defective modules must only be made by the manufacturer 303 F 6220 0625 EC Type Examination Certificate No EX5 00 02 19183 031 UTNE in accordance with Annex III of Council Directive No 94 9 EC for equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres ATEX for HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Albert Bassermann Stra e 28 68782 Br hl Product Automation devices safety related type F Model F 6220 Parameters see appendix four pages The above mentioned product meets the provisions of the Directive This certificate is issued on the basis of the product provided for testing and certification and on its technical documentation The detailed results of the test and the provided technical documentation are listed in Test report no 990187410 This certificate pertains only to the sample product submitted to T V PRODUCT SERVICE for testing Therefore this certificate has no specified period of validity Released with the above mentioned certificate number by the Certification Body of T V PRODUCT SERVICE Department PS IQSE jb Alm o Date 17 03 2000 T V PRODUCT SERVICE GMBH is a Notified Body in accordance with
427. orts of the F 8627X into the Ethernet network and vice versa Special features of the central module Self education from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 ELOP II TCP from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 Further informations about the bus station no II TCP loading of operating systems and application programs self education et al corresponding to the central module you will find in the data sheet of the F8627X as well as the operating system manual of H41q H51q and the safety manual of H41q H51q Before removing a central module its fixing screws must be completely loosened and freely movable Remove the module from the bus board by pushing the ejection lever front label top down and quickly remov ing in an upward motion to ensure that faulty signals are not triggered within the system To attach the module place it on the terminal block and press it inwards as far as it will go This action should be performed quickly to ensure that faulty signals are not triggered within the system 443 F 8650X 0606 Function of the ejection lever with front label Push ejection lever top down U Withdraw module Front plate Front plate Figure 2 Function of the ejection lever Diagnostic display of the central module Four digit alphanumerical display two LEDs for the general display of errors CPU for the central modules IO for the testable input output modules
428. output lt 15 W Positive pole of the 24 VDC supply voltage Reference pole of the 24 VDC supply voltage Positive pole of the microprocessor system Reference pole of the microprocessor system 10 13 5 Color Code for Lead Marking in Accordance to DIN IEC 60757 BK BN RD OG YE GN BU black brown red orange yellow green blue VT violet GY gray WH white PK pink GD gold TQ turquoise SR silver 10 13 6 Description of the Order Code for Cable Plugs Standard cable plugs see HIMA price list Z7nnn nnnn nnn A B R1 7 plug 1 redundant inputs R2 plug 2 redundant inputs 5 order includes drawing special design 0 4 20 active transmitter IT 0 4 20 mA passive transmitter ITI 0 4 20mA active amp passive transmitter U60mV 0 60 mV UV 0 1V U5V 0 5V U10V 0 10V 2P Pt 100 two wire technique 3P Pt 100 three wire technique U gt 65V voltage gt 65 V and single wires P2 2 pole connection 24P2 2 pole connection 24 VDC 48P2 2 pole connection 48 VDC cable or LIYCY length m W single cores nn length in m ExW single cores blue Ex nn length in m ExC cable with blue cover Ex nn length in m number of the according F module 53 Data Sheets 54 B 4234 H41q M 0605 4234 H41q M B 4234 Assembly Kit H41q M System System H41q M in K 1409 system subrack 5 HU 19 inches with single channel central mod
429. ow er supply monitoring module F 7131 Output 5 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use 2 5 V YE 2x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply subrack B 9302 XG 3 GND GN 2 x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply subrack B 9302 GN Color code green YE Color code yellow Table 3 Output 5 VDC Output WD Connection Wire and connection Use XG 1 2 4 0 5 mm wire end ferrule WD to I O subrack GY Color code gray Table 4 Output WD Connection of the monitoring loop for fuses and fans Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 26 4 5 6 GY 0 5 Faston 2 8 x 0 8 max 4 A slow Floating NO NC con blow tact for signaling GY Color code gray Table 5 Connection of the monitoring loop 101 B 5231 H51q MS 0605 4 4 Internal fuses Position Size Dimension HIMA part no Z 6011 4 A slow blow 5 20 57 0174409 Z 6013 1 6 A slow blow 5x 20mm 57 0174169 Table 6 Internal fuses 45 Obus The data connection of the I O level with the central module is established via the I O bus Connection Procedure Remove bus termination module F 7546 and plug it on XD 2 of the last I O rack then connect cable BV 7032 there and plug it on XD 1 of the 1st I O rack Table 7 I O bus connection For the I O rack the connection to the I O bus is made via a coupling module F 7553 installed in
430. owing special features To increase the availability the outputs of the safety related output modules can be Switched in parallel without external diodes Decoupling diodes are already integrated on the module see the corresponding data sheets No output voltage is generated if the supply voltage L is cut at the output module The connection of inductive loads can be done without using protection diodes at the coil However it is recommended to connect a diode directly at the inductive load avoiding noise voltages The LED signaling the output status is controlled separately The H41q System Family 3 4 The design of the cable plugs enables the two pole connection of the actuators Together with a two pole supply of the output module an earth fault detection will be simplified by means of a totalizing current transformer The cable plugs are available in two specifications L in cable plug one pole with common L L in 2 pole type 2 pole with L per channel see also chapter 10 13 6 Description of the Order Code for Cable Plugs option P2 Notime limited operation in case of a faulty output module System Voltage 24 VDC HIMA systems will be connected to 24 VDC The connection terminals are labelled with L and L The power supply units made available by HIMA e g the power supply PS1000 meet the requirements according to CE for electrical safety and EMC All used power supplies must fulfill the
431. own opposite to products which are identical with Ine product tested T V Industrie Service GmbH Gesch ftsfeld ASI Automation Software und Informationstechnologie Am Grauen Stein 51105 K ln 2 Lut 2004 04 14 Postfach 91 09 51 51101 K ln f Datum Date RHrmenstempel Company seal Unterschrift Signature A TUV Rheinland Chi Stream 202 459 H 4116 0530 460 H 4135 0530 H 4135 Relay in an electronic housing safety related for circuits up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 _ _ _ 8 4 0 D e 7 F1 K1 max 4A slow blow Delivery state 2 5A T 1 2 0 e e 5 Figure 1 Block diagram The module is tested according to IEC 61508 SIL 3 EN 298 DIN VDE 0116 EN 50156 NFPA 8501 NFPA 8502 EN 60664 DIN EN 50178 VDE 0160 EN 6100 6 2 EN 50082 2 EN 61000 6 4 DIN V 19250 RC 1 6 DIN VDE 0801 incl A1 The relay is suitable for the switching of safety related circuits Thus the relay can be used for safety shutdowns e g to cut off the entire fuel supply for combustion plants The module is equipped with relays in diversity Note The connection terminal 8 may be used only for monitoring the fuse F1 but not to supply a voltage for the contact Input 24 VDC 1 15 20 lt 40 mA Output floating NO contact Relay data cf reverse Switching time approx 8 ms Reset
432. ox 1261 68777 Br hl H 7013 0548 Mounting the H 7013 into Zone 2 EG guideline 94 9 EG ATEX 470 The device is suitable for mounting into zone 2 The corresponding Declaration of Conformity is added on the following page For this mounting the following mentioned special conditions have to be regarded Special conditions X for safety related application 1 The power supply filter 7013 must be mounted for securing the category 3G in an enclosure which fulfills the requirements of the EN 60079 15 with the type of protection at least IP 54 according to EN 60529 2 This enclosure must be labeled with Working permitted only in the de energized state Exception If it is assured that there exists no explosive atmosphere working under voltage is also permitted 3 The used enclosure must be able to dissipate safely the generated heat The power dissi pation of the power supply filter H 7013 is 250 mW max 4 The following items of the standards VDE 0170 0171 part 16 DIN EN 60079 15 2004 5 VDE 0165 part 1 DIN EN 60079 14 1998 08 must be regarded DIN EN 60079 15 Chapter 5 Design Chapter 6 Terminals and cabling Chapter 7 Air and creeping distances Chapter 14 Connectors DIN EN 60079 14 Chapter 5 2 3 Equipment for use in zone 2 Chapter 9 3 Cabling for zones 1 and 2 Chapter 12 2 Equipment for zones 1 and 2 The power supply filter additionally has the following label Paul Hildebrandt
433. peration The main test routines are Linearity of the A D converter Cross talk between the four input channels Function of the input filters Transmitter supply voltage Current inputs Measuring range 0 4 20 mA Current 12 bit 4095 21 3 mA 21 3 mA 20 mA 4 mA 768 3840 4095 Resolution digit Figure 4 Current inputs Application example 1 Lu Not to apply in case of single chnl connect I aeyaad3iROaAL 42525437 27127162141 Z 712716214 f C NTUR2 st a st N N N N E F 6214 i i F 6214 module 1 module 2 channel 1 channel 1 Redundant connection of passive transmitters Figure 5 Application example 1 273 F 6214 0606 274 Application example 2 Z Transmitter supply TE 2 7127162141 C U5 10 V R2 I7 e L R01 module 1 channel 1 Not to apply in case of single chnl connect Z 7127162141 C2 U5 10 V R1 x46 x i 6214 i module 2 channel 1 Redundant connection of voltage via potentiometer Resistor equipment for the potentiometers on Z 7127 6214 channel 1 4 Measuring R01 03 05 R02 04 06 range Uy 07 08 0 5 Value 42 2 1 162 1 part no 00 0751423 00 0751164 0 10 V Value 38 3 1 332 1 p
434. pikes unde fined signal levels at the analog inputs of the F 6217 Therefore e g the analog isolator with HART H 6200 of HIMA can be used F 6217 0606 Interferences of the module in low frequency range 10 Hz External disturbing pulses in the range of 10 Hz e g at pressure measurements of nearby pis ton pumps can lead to temporary channel bit faults at the analog inputs Internal hardware tests carried out in the same rhythm are influenced by this pulses fluctuations in an adverse way Input channels could be interpreted as faulty and de energized Solution Pressure sensors By internal damping via adjustable digital filters in the sensor disturbing pulses can be min imized or eliminated Use of low pass filter H 7017 The high time constant of the low pass filter eliminates the low frequency disturbing pulses in the input current The low pass filter may only be used in safety related circuits with low shut down because in case of a failure in the filter leakage current the measured values are reduced The time relay of the filter has to be regarded in calculating the safety time Note Additional transmitter supplies e g via front cable plug Z 7128 have no disturbing influences on the operation of the module F 6217 295 F 6217 0606 296 F 6220 0625 o F 6220 8 channel thermocouple input module Ex i safety related with Pt 100 input for comparison measurement with safe
435. pped to the memory area EV on the F 8628X beginning with identity number 115 The identity numbers of the WORD variables in memory area EV are in ascend ing order up to the last WORD variable 4200 from export area 1 The unused BUSCOM addresses 4096 to 4099 are assigned dummy variables and mapped to identity numbers 111 to 114 within memory area EV In this example the BOOL variables in export area 0 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 0 and are mapped to the memory area EV on the F 8628X beginning with identity num ber 216 which follows the identity number 215 of the last WORD variable from export area 0 The identity numbers of the BOOL variables in memory area EV are in ascending order up to the last BOOL variable 0100 from export area 0 In this example the BOOL variables in export area 1 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 4096 and are mapped to the memory area EV on the F 8628X beginning with identity number 317 which follows the identity number 316 of the last BOOL variable from export area 0 The identity numbers of the BOOL variables in the memory area EV are ascending up to the last BOOL variable 4196 from the export area 1 Note If BUSCOM variables do not start at the beginning of an area this area is padded with dummy variables on the central module and also mapped on the communication module F 865x 8628X BUSCOM areas memory area EV Export area EA for Export variables EV ER 0000 L
436. pply PS3 supply PS2 supply PS1 Figure 9 Assembly kit wiring diagram L Fan monitoring Si U Fuse monitoring 133 5233 1 2 H51q HS HRS 0605 5 Side view 5233 1 2 assembly kit H51q HS HRS system Figure 10 Side view 134 B 9302 0507 B 9302 B 9302 Assembly kit subrack 4 units high K 1406 Se 12 1 F 16 modules 9202102102 DOLIO w 9 ot Earth bar covered oer 1 x Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm for each slot al a H H m e mm HIMA HIMA HIMA HIMA HIMA 7553 F7133 F7133 F7133 F7133 7 c 1T 2T 3415 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 171 18 19 20 721 27553 7133 F7133 m F7133 GMA B9302 Option Figure 1 Side view 1 Parts of the B 9302 assembly kit e 1x 1406 I O subrack 4 units high 19 inch with integrated cable tray with a hinged receptacle for the lable 1x F 7553 coupling module in slot 17 e 1x BV 7032 flat cable length is depending on the order The standards are 9302 with 0 5 m cable Assembly kit B 9302 with choosable cable length on demand Total bus length is maximum 12 m The slots 1 through 16 of the rack K 1406 are reserved for I O modules Modul
437. put filters Correct function of the module The function of LEDs are not tested Switching time approx 10 ms Operating points O signal 0 35 lt 1 2 mA 1 signal 2 1 lt lg lt 6 0 mA wire break lt 0 28 mA short circuit 26 5 mA Line impedance lt 50 Q acc to EN 60947 5 6 Line length lt 1000 0 5 mm Supply voltage Us 8 2V Shunt R 681 1 0 25 W R17 R24 part no 00 0751681 Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 VDC 90 mA 24 VDC 170 mA All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 195 F 3237 0622 L H Channel Connection Color 8 1 d2 WH a d4 x4 BN 2 96 GN IW 5 d8 x8 YE Fr Switch positions 3 d10 GY m omg 3EN 0 Signal here channel 3 d12 x12 PK Cable i 5 1 Signal here channel no 5 LiYY 16 0 5 mm m ee 4 d14 BU line break 916 1 6 RD TH S short circuit 5 d18 BK lt d20 x20 VT 6 d22 WHBN d24 x24 WHGN 7 d26 WHYE d28 x28 WHGY Sw Flat pin plug 2 8 x 0 8 mm 8 d30 WHPK LIY 0 5 mm Construction test plug Z 7204 d32 x32 WHBU 2 L 22 BK E 28x08 mmi L z32 BK L L z12 RD q 1 mm 750 mm 196 Figure 2 Lead marking cable plug Z 7108 3237
438. r with a two pole supply of the output module an earth fault detection will be simplified by means of a totalizing current transformer The cable plugs are available in two specifications L in cable plug one pole with common L L 2 pole type 2 pole with L per channel see also chapter 10 13 6 Description of the Order Code for Cable Plugs option P2 No time limited operation in case of a faulty output module System Voltage 24 VDC HIMA systems will be connected to 24 VDC The connection terminals are labelled with L and L The power supply units made available by HIMA e g the power supply PS1000 meet the requirements according to CE for electrical safety and EMC All used power supplies must fulfill the requirements SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage or PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage See also chapter 6 4 The power supply units meet the requirements of the NAMUR recommendation NE 21 for the safety during short time voltage dips up to 20 ms For the supply of 24 V sources which cannot guarantee a buffering during voltage dips of at least 20 ms the following measures must be taken in the H51q system family decoupling of the power supply for the central units and noise blanking parameterizable Note Due to the high inrush current of lamps the correct dimensioning of the power supply units for lamp loads must be regarded 19 The H51q System Family 20 Technical Data 5 Technical Data 5 1 Mecha
439. r the safety related outputs of the F 3330 module e resistive or inductive loads up to 500 mA 12 W u e 5 Y x z z z z z z z z Test 3 EHE SEE 1 Se 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IN a N N N N N e e _ _ _ i _ _ _ M a ce Se 112 12 W 2W 12W 12W 12W ei die ee Osa a 0 2o ER 5 gt B gt 5 gt B gt B gt B gt gt 5 gt o S Figure 1 Block diagram The module is tested according to IEC 61508 2 SIL 3 IEC 61131 2 EN 298 DIN VDE 0116 EN 50156 EN 50178 and DIN V 19250 The electronic fuses are dimensioned to be connected to the outputs also redundant outputs of the F 3330 module All input signals for the H 7014 must be generated in SELV systems The output loads can be disconnected separately with slide switches Inputs voltage range matched to the outputs of the F 3330 module Current consumption lt 10 mA per channel Load rating of the output F 1 input F 3221 or F 3236 Operating point approx 550 mA Switching time 200 us Switching frequency E1Hz Ambient conditions 0 60 C Degree of protection IP 20 according to IEC EN 60529 VDE 0470 part 1 All rights reserved Equipmen
440. racters and the last two char acters Res ID must be numbers Permitted ID s 1 up to 99 beginning with H41q H51q OS version 05 34 Example Resource name MT200_33 module channel 1 switch 2 1 ON Host address 33 2 1 67 IP address 192 168 0 67 Resource name MT200_ 33 module channel 2 switch 2 1 OFF Host address 33 2 2 68 IP address 192 168 0 68 F 8628X settings upon delivery IP address 192 168 0 63 switch 2 1 ON or 192 168 0 64 switch 2 1 OFF Switch ID_IP is deactivated switch 1 6 OFF 417 F 8628X 0650 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 3 418 II TCP connection to the central module CM Via the PADT PC the user can establish an II TCP connection to the F 865x central module via the F 8628X The ELOP II TCP connection provides a fast data exchange between a PADT and the F 865x central module Res ID The Res ID is identical to the last two numbers of the resource name ID The ID is set via DIP switches 1 to 7 on the F 865x central module Requirements for aELOP II TCP connection F 865x central module OS version 05 34 or higher ELOP Il version 4 1 build 6118 or higher F 8628X Ethernet module OS version 4 x or higher HSR cable in redundant systems Connection of ELOP Il PADT PC to F 8628X A PADT can only connect to a H41q H51q via a single F 8628X on the H41q H51q even in cases of redundancy The selected F 8628X transfers the telegrams to th
441. ram L Fan monitoring Si U Fuse monitoring Note The assembly kit is fully wired for a possible extension to redundant systems For extension to redundant I O buses remove jumper plug Z 6007 H41q HR 77 4236 1 2 H41q H HR 0605 5 Side view B 4236 1 2 assembly kit H41q H HR system Figure 5 Side view 4237 1 2 H41q HS HRS 0605 4237 1 2 Assembly Kit H41q HS HRS System System H41q HS HRS in 1409 system subrack 5 HU 19 inches with redundant central modules power supply 24 5 V I O level communication module optional coprocessor mod ules optional and four fans H41q HS B 4237 1 single channel bus redundant central modules H41q HRS B 4237 2 redundant bus redundant central modules T V certified applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 K 1409 CU1 CM1 CU2 CM2 PS1 PS2 ERROR ERROR Ou 7 IO modules to CU1 with 610 modules to CU2 with gt mn R redundant IO bus redundant IO bus e 6 e B 4237 2 B 4237 2 ee a ie te ES O 5v Earth bar covered 8 8 Quay 1 x Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm for each slot WA IMA IMA F8652X F8627X F8652X 8627 F7130A F7130A 4237 1 2 H41q HS HRS o0 4 1 2 amp 7 T e 149 a 42 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 F
442. ramming device is connected it offers the possibility to display the occurred er rors These values are stored in the RAM memory of the PES These values are important to get a clear analysis of the errors They should be stored with Print or Export refer to the online help of ELOP Il If the central module is replaced the correct switch positions and correct version of the oper ating system on the display have to be regarded for insertion and removing of modules within the central rack refer to chapters 8 1 3 and 8 1 4 If the user program has to be loaded after exchanging the central module at redundant systems the following has to be regarded the user program can be loaded at redundant systems via the procedure Self education see also the description in the operating system manual and the corresponding data sheet of the CPU make sure that the correct central module will be loaded additionally the code version of the existing user program in the running central module and the user program to be loaded in the changed module must be the same Faults in the Input Output Modules Faults in safety related input output modules are recognized automatically by the PES during operation and they are displayed on the diagnosis display by I O error with the indication of the faulty position If an input output module has a line monitoring also the feeding lines to sensors and actuators are checked and faults are indicate
443. range for the MODBUS TCP Master Note In case of port 8896 the BUSCOM variables are mapped into the pro cess data image of the F 8627X The MODBUS TCP master must therefore access the BUSCOM variables using the identity numbers see chapter 7 To avoid further dividing the BUSCOM variable address ranges into BOOL and WORD areas we recommend creating BUSCOM variables of type WORD only This helps maintain a more simple overview 6 4 1 Polling intervall of the MODBUS TCP slave The polling interval is the interval in which the MODBUS TCP slave is polled by the MODBUS master The polling interval is registered within the MODBUS master Note The polling interval of the MODBUS TCP slaves should be selected depending on the cycle time of the F 865x central module tpo CT 15ms CT Maximum cycle time ms of the central module in status RUN it is displayed II control panel n Number of MODBUS masters polling the MODBUS slave 15ms Process time per request in which the MODBUS masters should give to the F 865x central module Note Please read the cycle time under full communication load again and check whether the maximum cycle time CT has increased An adap tion of may be necessary 377 F 8627X 0650 6 4 2 378 Redundant MODBUS communication To ensure a redundant MODBUS communication the MODBUS master must be redundantly connected to the MODBUS slave see Chapter 5 2
444. ransmitters are used 316 F 6221 0625 2 1 9 Variant E Voltage measuring Voltage measuring for signals I1 to 18 and supply voltage monitoring TC1 to TC8 for channels 1 to 8 Cable type Z 7063 6221 ExCn U1V part number 93 6221 100 93 6221 100 6221 Z 7063 6221 ExCn U1V Safety related EEX measuring module 1 O 1 j l PA Mm max length Cable plug measuring module Figure 8 Voltage measuring 2 1 10 Variant F Current measuring via shunt Current measuring for signals I1 to 18 and supply voltage measuring TC1 to TC8 for channels 1 to 8 e Cable type 2 7063 6221 part number 93 6221 105 93 6221 105 F 6221 Terminal Z 7063 6221 ExCnil Safety related EEX measuring module geo eye oor 22 C 500 MUX pod gig pe L_ l 218 cf i PA Cable plug measuring module en TC8 Figure 9 Current measuring via shunt 317 F 6221 0625 3 Pin allocation in the field Z 7063 6221 ExCn ITI 93 6221 101 Z 7063 6221 ExCn IT R2 part no 93 6221 103 Cable LIYCY 8x2 x 0 2 mm screened Cable type Z 7025 3325 ExCx Channel Connection Color 11 22 WH TC1 718 BN 12
445. rce type Il H41qce H H41qce HR Modules Central module F 8653X The central module for the PES H41q H HR contains the essential functions demonstrated in the block diagram of the central module Front panel Rear side bus plane Interfaces Displays RS 485 M TR Setting of bus subscriber no Fail safe Watchdog voltage monitoring bus logic bus WD DPR Bus CPU Bus Figure 2 Block diagram of the central module F 8653X Microprocessor Flash EPROMSs of the program memory for the operating system and the user program usable for min 100 000 writing cycles Data memory in SRAM 2 interfaces RS 485 with galvanic isolation Transmission rate max 57600 bps Adigit diagnostic display and 2 LEDs for information out of the system I O level and user program Power supply monitoring bus logic for the connection to the input output modules Hardware clock battery buffered Watchdog Battery backup of the sRAMs via battery with monitoring 4236 1 2 H41q H HR 0605 2 2 2 3 Coprocessor module F 8621A Right of the central module of the H41q H HR PES one coprocessor module can be installed The coprocessor module mainly contains Microprocessor HD 64180 with a clock frequency of 10 MHz Operating system EPROM RAM for a PLC master project Note The RAM for the master project is buffered via the batteries on the backplane
446. rding to EN 55011 EN 55022 Space requirement 8 SU All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 341 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 7126 0507 342 F 7130A 0507 7130A 7130A Power supply module Input voltage 24 VDC output voltage 5 VDC for PES H41q i O L L z2 e o z14 g HIBUS L 032 2 L1 iedi4 GND HIBUS d2 PE d4 12216 NG 210 5V 12410 HIBUS e 11228 5V 1112 GND O 8V 230 WORRIES d30 F 7130A S Figure 1 F 7130 A power supply module The module supplies PES H41q with 5 VDC from a main supply of 24 VDC It is a DC DC con verter with electrical isolation between input and output voltage The module is equipped with overvoltage protection and current limitation The outputs are short circuit proof The supply connections are separated for the central device IO modules and HIBUS interface The present input voltage L and the output voltages are indicated with LEDs on the front plate A proper operation of the module is still assured if the LED 5 V CPU EA illuminates only slightly The power supply for the monitoring of the central device is fed separately via pin 216 NG Operating data 24 VDC 15 20 lt 15 Primary fuse 5AgL Outputs for central device IO modules 5 VDC
447. rding to their type numbers HIMA Automation Devices are developed manufactured and tested according to the relevant safety standards They must only be used for the applications described in the instructions and with specified environmental conditions and only in connection with approved external devic es In case of unqualified interventions into the automation devices de activating or bypassing safety functions or if advices of this manual are neglected causing disturbances or impair ments of safety functions severe personal injuries property or environmental damage may occur for which we cannot take liability The HIMA PES The H41q and H51q System Families 1 The HIMA PES The HIMA PES described here consists of the H41q and H51q system families Both system families are based on the same hardware and software and they are the third generation of the field proven PES to control preferably process engineering plants PCs PADT are used for programming configuration data logging operation and trend recording Digital and analog inputs can be processed Some input modules are designed for intrinsically safe circuits as well as for electric position sensors proximity switches according to DIN EN 60947 5 6 Digital and analog outputs are also available The HIMA PES are installed in 19 inches subracks The H41q system family is a compact sys tem consisting of one subrack holding all components such as central unit
448. rdware clock and sRAM on the central module The sRAM memory of the coprocessor module is buffered via two lithium batteries on the pow er supply monitoring module F 7131 Output 5 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use 2 5 V YE 2x 2 5 mm2 Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply subrack 9302 XG 3 GND GN 2 x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply I O subrack B 9302 GN Color code green YE Color code yellow Table 3 Output 5 VDC Output WD Connection Wire and connection Use XG 1 2 4 0 5 mm wire end ferrule WD to I O subrack GY Color code gray Table 4 Output WD Connection of the monitoring loop for fuses and fans Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 26 4 5 6 GY 0 5 mm Faston 2 8 x 0 8 max 4 A slow Floating NO NC con blow tact for signaling GY Color code gray Table 5 Connection of the monitoring loop 91 B 5230 H51q M 0605 4 4 Internal fuses Position Size Dimension HIMA part no Z 6011 4 A slow blow 5 20 57 0174409 Z 6013 1 6 A slow blow 5x 20mm 57 0174169 Table 6 Internal fuses 45 Obus The data connection of the I O level with the central module is established via the I O bus Connection Procedure Remove bus termination module F 7546 and plug it on XD 2 of the last I O rack then connect cable BV 7032 there and plug it on XD 1 of the 1st I O rac
449. re that the user program always processes the most current data record of the channel A monotonically increasing sequence number incremented by the MODBUS TCP master can serve e g as a criterion for determining how up to date the BUSCOM variables in the separate address ranges are Figure 10 shows an example in which the sequence number is registered in the BUSCOM va riables Channel1 and Channel2 respectively F 8627X 0650 6 4 3 Connection via port 502 Via F 8627X port 502 the F 865x central module operates as a MODBUS TCP slave and can be directly reached The BUSCOM Variables can be accessed via the BUSCOM adresses configured in 1 The MODBUS slave on the central module provides the MODBUS function codes as de scribed in the manual Functions of the operating system HI 800 105 Note The events query and the synchronization of the central module CM software clock is only possible via TCP server port 502 The HSR communication for a MODBUS TCP slave via port 502 is independent of the HIPRO S DIRECT mode The F 8627x and F 865x react to a MODBUS request via port 502 as follows If the F 8627X is in mono operation mode i e no HSR connection to a second F 8627X then the F 8627X must have a connection to the F 865x which in turn must be in RUN status to answer a MODBUS request with the corresponding MOD BUS response If two F 8627X are operating redundantly i e HSR connection to a second F 8627X
450. re part of delivery Top view 4 o4 2 34 95 10 i 11 4 4 x 12 T Ls fs 5oe 80 6 Feeding 48 VDC Side view Circuit diagram Connecting example with terminals on mounting rail Figure 1 H 7021 power supply filter The power supply filter H 7021 dampens wide banded low energy switching interferences Burst according to IEC EN 61000 4 4 up to 2 kV and wide banded high energy overvolta ges Surge according to IEC EN 61000 4 5 up to 1 kV on a 48 VDC power supply circuit The interferences are discharged to earth Highest effectiveness can be achieved if the filter is installed directly at the 48 V power supply Connection 2 5 mm directly on the device terminals combined wires on terminals of min 10 mm Height over mounting rail approx 100 mm Electric strength against earth 250 V Max permissible operation voltage 48 VAC 60 VDC Power consumption 3 0 mA at 48 VDC Ambient conditions 25 70 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 499 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl H 7021 0548 Mounting the H 7021 into Zone 2 EG guideline 94 9 EG ATEX 500 The device is suitable for mounting into zone 2 The corresponding Declaration of Conformity is added on the following page For this mounting the following mentioned special conditions have to be regarded Special conditions X for safety related application 1 The power supply fi
451. ren in alleiniger Verantwortung dass die Produkte declare under our sole responsibility that the products QF H 7013 Netzfilter 24 VDC QF H 7021 Netzfilter 48 VDC auf die sich diese Erkl rung bezieht mit den folgenden Normen bereinstimmt to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standards EN 61000 6 4 08 02 EN 61000 6 2 08 02 EN 61131 2 2003 EN 60079 15 2003 Elektrische Betriebsmittel f r gasexplosionsgef hrdete Breiche Teil 15 Z ndschutzart n Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres Part 15 Type of protection n Gem den Bestimmungen der Richtlinien Following the provisions of Directives EMV Richtlinie 89 336 EWG Ex Richtlinie 94 9 EG Bruhl den 22 ia 2005 LA Prof Dr m B rcs k J rgen H lzel Bereichsleiter ntwicklung Leiter Vorentwicklung und Qualitatswesen Vice President Development Lead Engineer Predevelopment and Quality Assurance 501 H 7021 0548 502 H 7505 0630 H 7505 H 7505 Multifunctional interface converter to built up the bus systems HIBUS 1 4 wire bus HIBUS L RS 422 full duplex active bus coupling HIBUS 2 2 wire bus RS 485 half duplex passive bus coupling HIBUS 2 HIBUS 2 Repeater HIBUS 2 HIBUS 1 Repeater 1 2 ps ZEN een Positi d ve Legend ositions ia 9 white Switch Lf d 2 1
452. report no 70013102 3 This certificate pertains only to the sample product submitted to TUV PRODUCT SERVICE for testing Therefore this certificate has no specified period of validity Released with the above mentioned certificate number by the Certification Body of TUV PRODUCT SERVICE lum Department TA ES MUC IQSE jb Date 15 05 2002 PRODUCT SERVICE GMBH is a Notified Body in accordance with Council Directive 94 9 for equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres with the identification number 0123 T V PRODUCT SERVICE GMBH Zertifizierstelle Ridlerstrasse 65 D 80339 M nchen 249 F 3335 0622 vie 8 Juepunpsy nd no Ag ds p jensiA 1ndino ndino gt 2 nd no quepunpos zndino jensi 0 gandino oberon V nr z ndino sBeyoA 1 nd no Juepunpsy 1 nd no Ae ds p Jensia pz Indjno zq nd no LO ez uonouny nd no Mod BOIANSS 1 LEO 28161 90 20 SX3 ON i 932913495 53 x pusddy v 1ndino eui 1sureBe Jo xeed e dn
453. requirements SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage or PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage See also chapter 6 4 The power supply units meet the requirements of the NAMUR recommendation NE 21 for the safety during short time voltage dips up to 20 ms For the supply of 24 V sources which cannot guarantee a buffering during voltage dips of at least 20 ms the following measures must be taken in the H41q system family decoupling of the power supply for the central units and noise blanking parameterizable Note Due to the high inrush current of lamps the correct dimensioning of the power supply units for lamp loads must be regarded 11 The H41q System Family 12 The H51q System Family 4 4 1 The H51q System Family The H51q system family comprises modular designed PES in single channel and redundant models also with TUV safety certificate All input output modules can be used with both redundant and single channel models of the central devices All modules of the H51q system family meet the requirements for electromagnetic compatibility and immunity according to article 10 of the EU guideline 89 336 EWG for the electromagnetic conformity This is marked with the CE sign within the data sheets of the modules Also the systems and modules are wearing a label with this sign The H51q system family consists of one 19 inches central rack 5 units high and up to 16 input output racks in the 19 inches size 4 units high see
454. resistor wired sensor can be used lt gt 1k 10k ZU 1 use either connection X10 X12 X14 X16 in the cable plug resistor 390 existent or separate 390 1 resistor connected in series Figure 3 Resistor wired sensor Operating modes Pulse counting Gate time measuring Cycle independent output switching with comparison operation Recognition of rotation direction Pulse counting The module is counting up the incoming pulses The resolution of the counter on the module is 24 bit The value provided by the function block HF CNT 3 for the user program is from type DINT The counting range of the variable is 0 16 777 215 The value of the variable can be reset via the function block The counter starts again with 0 at overflow F 5220 0625 Gate time measuring In the mode gate time measuring the module counts the incoming pulses over a parameteri zable gate time 50 ms The gate time is a variable type UINT entered in steps of 50 ms The gate time range is 0 65 535 0 3276 75 s Cycle independent output switching with comparison operation The output on the module is independent of the PES cycle time It switches off when used for pulse counting if the parameterized value is reached resolution from value 0 16 500 000 or when used for gate time measuring when the number of the parameterized pulses do not come in The switching off value is param
455. riables BI PESD4 Bn PESO 132 YES BI PESDS Bn PESO 132 YES B1_PESOS Bn PESO 132 YES BI PESD7 Bn PESO 132 YES B1_PESO8 PESO 132 YES BI PESOS PESO 132 YES BN PESO Bn PESO 132 YES BN PESO2 Bn PESO 132 YES Add Delete Undo Cancel Apply Help Figure 15 HIPRO S communication partners of the resource Setting the monitoring time depends on the process and must be agreed upon with the appropriate authority The monitoring time must not exceed the time period agreed upon 393 F 8627X 0650 In define the HIPRO S variable which should be used for the HIPRO S communica tion Variable Event handing HIPRO N S BUSCOM 3964R HIPRO N Available PES master Import from PES master _ 501 gt Export to PES master HIPRO S Available resources Import from resource Export to resourcels 1_ 504 Standard Add Update Delete Undo Close Figure 16 Configuration of a HIPRO S variable Il Note To verify the HIPRO S DIRECT configuration the PES master pro gram should be compiled but not be loaded into the master Potential errors can thus be corrected 394 F 8627X 0650 6 9 6 9 1 6 9 1 1 6 9 1 2 Communication with HIMA OPC Server BUSCOM The F 8627X communicates with an OPC server via the non safety related BUSCOM vari ables Note The F 8627X
456. ring module F 7131 checking undervoltage over voltage or failure In case of a faulty power supply module the operating system of the CPU informs the user pro gram via a system variable In case of a 5 VDC system power failure a lithium battery on the central module buffers the hardware clock and sRAM on the central module The sRAM memory of the coprocessor module is buffered via two lithium batteries on the pow er supply monitoring module F 7131 Output 5 VDC Connection Wire and connection Use XG 2 5 V YE 2 x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3x 0 8 Supply subrack 9302 XG 3 GND GN 2 x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Supply subrack B 9302 GN Color code green YE Color code yellow Table 3 Output 5 VDC Output WD Connection Wire and connection Use XG 1 6 8 only B 5232 1 GY Color code gray Table 4 Output WD 113 5232 1 2 H51q H HR 0605 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 114 Connection of the monitoring loop for fuses and fans Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 26 4 5 6 GY Color code gray Table 5 Connection of the monitoring loop Internal fuses GY 0 5 Faston 2 8 x 0 8 max 4 A slow blow Floating NO NC tact for signaling Position Size Dimension HIMA part no Z 6011 4 A slow blow 5 20 57 0174409 Z 6013 1 6 A slow blow 5x 20mm 57 0174169
457. rom OS version 3 x Compatible to OS version 2 x HIPRO S DIRECT Mode No more than 99 safeethernet members can be configured in the total network An individual PES can have 63 safeethernet communication part ners n HIPRO S DIRECT mode the number of OPC servers can be set via switch from 0 up to 14 see also Table 8 Overview of the communi cation with a HIMA OPC server via the F 8627X in combination with HIPRO S on page 372 From OS version 4 x Compatible with OS versions 2 x and 3 x only F 8627X PES can communicate as a MODBUS TCP slave via Port 502 and Port 8896 II TCP connection between a PADT PC and F 8627X System environment required for F 8627X e Central module F 865x OS version 05 34 or higher Il version 4 1 Build 6118 or higher Table 1 F 8627X operating system versions F 8627X 0650 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 Compatibility of the operating system versions Communication modules having different operating system versions may operate within one rack even if the communication modules are interconnected redundantly or communicate with one another via Ethernet Observe that the used functions of a communication module are supported by the respective operating system see Table 1 Note Observe the application guidelines and settings of the F 8627X in Chapter 6 Ethernet communication between F 8627X and F 8625 Check the following Ethernet c
458. rotocols F 8627 Ethernet interface safeethernet F 8628 Profibus DP slave interface Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Special applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the central module to PADT II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network Modbus TCP Special application with the communication module F 8628X ELOP II TCP connection PADT via the Ethernet interface of the F 8628X to the H41q H51q controller Startup and maintenance A battery change of the buffer batteries on the power supply monitoring module and the central module CPU in operation is recommended every 6 years Buffer battery with soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000016 Buffer battery without soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000019 Further informations see also catalog H41q H51q chapter 9 Startup and maintenance 99 B 5231 H51q MS 0605 4 Wiring of the assembly kit The assembly kit is already wired for operation Wirings have still to be done by the user op tional modules see Assembly kit wiring diagram With installation of the assembly kit a conductive connection to the frame or a separate earth connection has to be installed according to N the EMC requirements Connection PE earth Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm Pay attention for the manufacturers information concerning detaching and replugging of th
459. ry area EV on the F 8627X beginning with identity number 317 which follows the identity number 316 of the last BOOL variable from export area 0 The identity numbers of the BOOL variables in the memory area EV are ascending up to the last BOOL variable 4196 from the export area 1 Note If BUSCOM variables do not start at the beginning of an area this area is padded with dummy variables on the central module and also mapped on the communication module F 865x F 8627X BUSCOM areas memory area EV Export area EA for Export variables EV ER 0000 ee ooon D UU pir wor Identity number BUSCOM address 0119 word Ev 0000 110 ER 2047 p 1115 7 ER 0000 0000 z 215 4096 bool x 0100 Z oo EV 0000 E 316 ER 2047 e 317 ER 4096 4100 bool EV 4096 word 417 4200 ER 8191 ER 4096 4096 bool 4196 ER 8191 Figure 21 Mapping of WORD and BOOL variables from export areas 0 and 1 403 F 8627X 0650 8 8 1 404 Replacing of the operating system Upgrading downgrading the operating system versions of the F 8627X The following instructions describe the upgrade downgrade the operation systems for the F 8627X module neers It is recommended that the operating system is changed e g in N Upgrading downgrading may only be performed by HIMA service engi times of a shutdown of the plant Upgrading downgrading from version 2 x To
460. s must be plugged into the redundant module slot for each communication partner Note Respect the guidelines and application notes for configuring the Ether net Segments Chapter 6 2 6 8 1 Function description of bus configuration The resources Bn 501 Bn 502 are created in all three bus configura tions The resources Bn PESO1 and Bn 502 can thus exchange data with any other configured resource In the bus configuration BUS 1 the resources B1 PESO3 up to B1 PES31 can communicate directly with each other In the bus configuration BUS 2 the resources B2 PES32 up to B2 PES60 can communicate directly with each other In the bus configuration BUS 3 the resources B3 PES61 up to B3 PES64 can communicate directly with each other If data from different bus configurations must exchanged between resources the data must be sent via the gateway resources Bn PESO1 and Bn PESO2 Bus 1 2 3 BUS 1 BUS 2 BUS 3 PES 01 and PES 02 PES 03 31 PES 32 60 PES 61 64 _ 01 _ _PES32 n PES61 I A Data Exchange Ethernet Connection Figure 12 MONO bus configuration with HIPRO S DIRECT Note All communication partners must be connected via switches Consider the delay time of the used switches If the delay time is higher than 5 ms Time out for the answer of the communication partners must be configured via s
461. s of Terminal Module H 7015A WOO OO 0 4 19 10 11 12 13 14 Y Y OIOIOIOO OO v 2 146 mm Figure 2 Mechanical design and dimensions of Terminal Module H 7015A Depth 105 mm with Vario plug ELCO 8016 Mounting on 35 mm DIN rail Installation orientation horizontally or vertically Installation clearance not necessary 478 112 mm H 7015A 0524 Applications for Terminal Module H 7015A Wiring of H 7015A with H 7018 For fast and efficient wiring plug and play between a PLC cabinet and a marshalling cabinet the Terminal Modules H 7015A H 7018 and the cable BV 7201 are required Marshalling cabinet Terminal Module H 7018 H 7018 JELco 8016 E Vario ELCO 8016 Code 1 1 A B Wago 739 C D 32 I O channels to field 2 contacts shield Y 2 floating contacts BV 7201 PLC cabinet 5 ELCO 80162 Figure 3 Wiring of 7015 with 7018 Wiring of 7015A with PHOENIX UMK EC56 56 One to one connection of all signals and power supplies from Terminal Module 7015A to Phoenix UMK EC56 56 Marshalling cabinet Phoenix UMK EC56 56 Vario plug ELCO 8016 Code 1 1 Terminal block 56 contacts to the field Note Other Phoenix modules can also be used if they are equipped with an ELCO 8016 Code 1 1 socket e g UMK 56 32 BV 7201 PLC cabinet ELCO 8016
462. se of a faulty power supply module the operating system of the CPU informs the user pro gram via a system variable In case of a 5 VDC system power failure a lithium battery on the central module buffers the hardware clock and sRAM on the central module Connection of the monitoring loop for fuses and fans Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use 21 4 516 GY 0 5 Faston 2 8 x 0 8 4 A slow Floating NO NC con blow tact for signaling GY Color code gray Table 2 Connection of the monitoring loop Internal fuses Position Size Dimension HIMA part no Z 6011 4 A slow blow 5 20 mm 57 0174409 Z 6013 1 6 A slow blow 5 x 20 mm 57 0174169 Table 3 Internal fuses Backplane bus Central module CU and I O modules are connected via the backplane bus The jumper plug Z 6007 on connection XD 1 combines the separated I O buses For the single channel system this is mandatory Redundant systems see also H41q HR and H41q HRS slot 1 to 7 and 8 013 59 4234 H41q M 0605 4 5 Connections on the rear GS a XG 3 XG 4 XG 5 xG2xG1 Mi E on XG 6 52 51 Z 6007 XG 9 XG 10 XG 11 a XG 12 XG 14 12 108 6 4 2 L 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 HIMA Tf L 13 1
463. sed for backup 25 Operating Conditions 26 Application Notes 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 Application Notes Configuration Notes Programming System Il and Operating System For programming and operation of the H41q H51q PES the version 2 3 0 of Il is re quired Required operating system gt BS 41q 51q V 7 0 8 Cabinet Engineering In Il After RT declaration RT resource type the cabinet can be configured within the resource Usable Function Blocks All standard function blocks of HIMA are included in the operating system Therefore the user program only contains the call of the function block and not the code itself For information to the current status of the function blocks refer to the most recent state of the ELOP II online help System Extensions If an existing H51 system is changed in an H51q system and I O racks out of the assembly kit B 9301 are still part of the system it could be extended always with I O racks out of the assem bly kit B 9302 These extensions are covered through the TUV certificate The control in oper ation is protected for continued existence also after the end of the certificate Installation of the Output Modules of the H50 Family The following modules may only be installed in the I O subrack B 9301 assembly kit F 3311 F 3312 F 3313 F 3314 F 3321 F 3323 F 3412 F 3413 F 6701 There are many specialties watchdog shutdown etc with inst
464. specially DIN EN 60079 14 VDE 0165 Part 1 EN 50 014 VDE 0170 0171 Part 1 EN 50 020 VDE 0170 0171 Part 7 System start up Before the first system start up an Ex expert has to check whether the system has been cor rectly installed especially the supply voltage connections and the connections of the intrinsi cally safe circuits Maintenance In case of a failure the defective module must be replaced with the same type or with another approved type N Any repair work must only be carried out by the manufacturer F 3335 0622 CERTIFICADO CERTIFICAT 3 ZERTIFIKAT CERTIFICATE EC Type Examination Certificate ii No EX5 02 05 19183 037 PRODUCT SERVICE in accordance with Annex III of Council Directive No 94 9 EC for equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres ATEX for HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG Albert Bassermann Stra e 28 68782 Br hl Product Electrical apparatus type of protection intrinsically safety i EX RL Model Automation device safety related F 3335 Parameters see appendix four pages The above mentioned product meets the provisions of the Directive This certificate is issued on the basis of the product provided for testing and certification and on its technical documentation The detailed results of the test and the provided technical documentation are listed in Test
465. ssible from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 of the central module Applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the central module to PADT II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network safeethernet Modbus TCP The communication runs from the central module via the backplane bus to the communication module F 8627X and from the Ethernet ports of the F 8627X into the Ethernet network and vice versa Special features of the central module Self education from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 ELOP II TCP from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 Further informations about the bus station no ELOP II TCP loading of operating systems and application programs self education et al corresponding to the central module you will find in the data sheet of the F8627X as well as the operating system manual of H41q H51q and the safety manual of H41q H51q Before removing a central module its fixing screws must be completely loosened and freely movable Remove the module from the bus board by pushing the ejection lever front label top down and quickly remov ing in an upward motion to ensure that faulty signals are not triggered within the system To attach the module place it on the terminal block and press it inwards as far as it will go This action should be performed quickly to ensure that faulty signals are not triggered within the
466. st be loaded Please regard therefore the informations in the operating system manual Power Supplies Remove 1 2 3 4 Check the LEDs on the power supplies F 7126 F 7130A and of the monitoring modules F 7127 F 7131 luminated LEDs indicate correctmodules dark LED indicate defective module Change only defectivemodule otherwise the PES will switch off If the LED is off check the 24 VDC feeding Before removing the faulty power supply F 7126 7130A check the output voltages of all other power supplies cf data sheets Screw off the faulty power supply and remove it Insert 1 2 Insert power supply and fix it by screws Check the output voltage cf data sheet Installation and Connections 8 2 5 8 3 8 3 1 8 3 2 8 4 Communication and Coprocessor Modules Remove 1 Disconnect the communication cable 2 Important At first remove the appertaining central module after removing the fixing screws 3 remove communication module Ethernet module with HSR cable connected if existing after removing the fixing screws 4 Ethernet module Remove HSR cable Insert Check settings of the switches according to the data sheet insert module without cable and fix it Ethernet module Connect HSR cable only at HIPRO S but not at HIPRO S DIRECT connect communication cable insert appertaining central module and fix it by screws o Earthing of the 24 VDC System Voltage
467. supply of transmitters the Z 7128 cable plug with transmitter supply is available suit able only for two wire connections f This cable plug may not be used together with zener barriers Z 7128 6217 2 7128 6217 V Analog GND Analog 8 Z 7128 Wiring of cable connector Z 7128 Front cable plug Figure 8 Wiring of cable connector Z 7128 293 F 6217 0606 294 Channel Connection Color 1 74 BN x4 WH d4 GN 2 z8 GY x8 YE d8 PK 3 212 RD x12 BU d12 BK 4 z16 WHBN x16 VT Cable d16 WHGN LiYCY 5 220 WHGY 24 x 0 14 mm x20 WHYE screened d20 WHPK 6 z24 WHRD x24 WHBU d24 WHBK 7 z28 BNYE x28 BNGN d28 BNGY 750 mm 8 232 BNBU q 1mm x32 BNPK d32 BNRD Flat L d26 BK pt plug EL L d30 RD 2 8 x 0 8 mm Cable screen YEGN 2 120 mm 7 2 5 mm Flat plug 6 3 x 0 8 mm to be connected to the earth bar under the slot Lead marking cable plug with transmitter supply Z 7128 6217 C ITI Figure 9 Lead marking cable plug with transmitter supply Cable plugs marked with R1 and R2 are for redundant systems applications refer to previous figures If using the transmitter Saab Rosemount 3300 GWR with internal zener diode a galvanic iso lation in the signal connection must be provided to remove interferences signal s
468. switch S1 8 On Off 442 12 567 8 34 BB 6 H E 51 8 ON 9600 bps Off 12345678 H 51 8 OFF 57600 bps F 8650X 0606 Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole For the serial interface only the bus station no 1 31 can be set Within an Ethernet network the bus station no can be set from 1 to 99 Therefore the switches S1 6 7 must be set in addition to the switches S1 1 2 3 4 5 The number of the communication partners within a network is still limited to 64 This enhanced setting the bus station no is only possible from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 of the central module Applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the central module to PADT II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network safeethernet Modbus TCP The communication runs from the central module via the backplane bus to the communication module F 8627X and from the Ethernet p
469. system 455 F 8653X 0606 Function of the ejection lever with front label Push ejection lever top down U Withdraw module Front plate Front plate Figure 2 Function of the ejection lever Diagnostic display of the central module Four digit alphanumerical display two LEDs for the general display of errors CPU for the central modules IO for the testable input output modules two toggle switches to request detailed error information push button ACK resets the error indication in failure stop ACK behaves like restarting the system For further information on the diagnostic display and lists of error codes refer to the documen tation Functions of the operational system BS 41q 51q also on ELOP II CD Notes for start up and maintenance Lifetime of the buffer battery without voltage feeding 1000 days at TA 25 C 200 days at TA 60 C It is recommended to change the buffer battery CPU in operation at the latest after 6 years or with display BATI within three months Lithium battery e g type CR 2477N HIMA part no 44 0000018 Check the bus station no and transmission rate at switch 51 for correct settings Important When upgrading an F 8653 to an F 8653X module the fan concept has also to be changed 456 H 4116 0530 H 4116 Relay in an electronic housing safety related for circuits up to SIL 2 according to IEC 61508 1 4A slow blow
470. t XEN X33 Hulpeasyoeq 40 ZZ 37192 00 jo ejleled pue euo algepauuoo Buunseeui 9 07 om jo uonoeuuoo jejered pue euo xe all x33 Buunseeu 379 00 jo uonoeuuoo pue euo jo eouejioedeo ejqeyoeuuoo HU 5 01 omijouonoeuuoo jejjeied pue euo Jo eouejonpul ejqejoeuuoo XEN Olt e x33 SynoJio 40 9 3914438 1 m P 9 0 28161 tO 20 SX3 ON 93e21rJe7 33 xipueddy 326 F 6221 0625 ZL Jo z Xe3 9222 1625 680 L 2002 90 82 65508 g9 ZOLELOOL ON 48PIO 3801 4 pue siemyog uoneuiojnv 0 1 ZOLELOOZ HaWd SAILOWOLNY ANL rA nennen eysoduuoo ay jo 25 peyosi JO snse M nen 8 pue JO ln jndinooupoe 3 z
471. t The cable to the transmitter must be shielded twisted pair Start up Before the first system start up an Ex expert has to check whether the system has been cor rectly installed especially the supply voltage connections and the connections of the intrinsi cally safe circuits Maintenance In case of a failure the defective module must be replaced with the same type or with another approved type Any repair work must only be carried out by the manufacturer Project planning in ELOP Il e Each input channel is configured via the HF AIX 3 software function block The trans mitter supply voltage monitoring must be enabled in the software function block The parameterization of the module must be performed according to the operating System manual for the currently used version of the operating system Especially the chapter about the noise blanking has to be regarded Setting Safety time 2 3 x watchdog time For each input channel the corresponding error bit must be set The channel error bit must be evaluated in the user programs in a way which leads to safety related beha vior of the corresponding input channel Forresetting a channel error the recalibration input of the HF AIX 3 software function block must be set to TRUE twice for at least one PLC cycle Spreading the measuring values this can be configured in the HF AIX 3 software function block will result in an increase of the relative error by the spreading fact
472. t of the total current n reasons of accuracy only one module may generate or consume current This must be regarded in the user program Current outputs Resolution in the range 0 4 20 mA Current 12 bit 2 4095 2 21 3 mA 21 3 mA 20 mA 4 mA 768 3840 4095 Resolution digit Figure 4 Current outputs 339 F 6706 0507 340 F 7126 0507 F 7126 Power supply module Input voltage 24 VDC output voltage 5 VDC for PES H51q EL L F 7126 4 5V Figure 1 F 7126 power supply module The module supplies automation systems with 5 VDC from a main supply of 24 VDC It is a DC DC converter with safe isolation between input and output voltage The module is equipped with overvoltage protection and current limitation The output is short circuit proof To avoid unbalanced load with redundant use of the power supply F 7126 the difference be tween their output voltages may not be more than 0 025 V On the front plate there are a test socket and a potentiometer for adjusting the output voltage The adjustment is only admissible with a suitable measuring instrument of high accuracy Operating data Primary fuse Output voltage 24 VDC 15 20 6 3 A slow blow 5 VDC 0 5 V steplessly adjustable factory adjustment 5 4 VDC 0 025 V lt 15 Output current 10A Current limitation approx 13 A Overvoltage protection set to 6 5 0 5 V Efficiency rate 2 77 Interference acco
473. t subject to change without notice 473 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl H 7014 0507 474 The channels are individually checked for short circuit or overload current and switched off if necessary Resetting the fuses is made via a common reset input W for 24 VDC or via the internal reset pushbutton The fuses can be tripped together via an input T for a 24 VDC signal or individually with own test pushbuttons The fuse trip is indicated with LEDs and signalized via a common output F If this output is not used it must be terminated against L with a resistor of 10 0 25 W Connections and cross sections 1 female plug in connection 1 5 mm 3 pole IN 1 female plug in connection 1 5 mm 9 pole OUT Screw terminals for loads 2 5 mm 2 x 8 pole Mechanical design and dimensions k TFW L K1K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 RESET iN K1 K8 123 123456789 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 e FAULT m TEST OFF ON K1 L K2 L K3 L L OUT K5 L L K7 L L y Figure 2 Mechanical design and dimensions Depth 57 mm with terminals Mounting on DIN rail 35 mm Mounting position horizontal or vertical Assembling distance not required H 7014 0507 Applications Connecting the inputs of the H 7014 in parallel is not permitted not permitted
474. tc PRA et Bed 21 System Data eE T AE SEE 21 Data of the Central Module CU _ 21 Interfaces lE 22 RS 485 Interfaces anne eins 22 Ethernet Interfaces 22 Profibus DP nennen nennen 22 Definition of Signals u ee 22 Operating Conditions 1 criteri enter etie nenn nam anna nase 23 Climatic Conditions ss enaena na e nn nn nn 23 Mechanical Conditions sn 24 EMG GondlitlOnis 24 Vollage Supply 25 Table of Contents 7 7 0 1 7 0 2 7 0 3 Application Notes orien rr nna naeh 27 Programming System and Operating 27 Cabinet Engineering 27 Usable Function Blocks 27 Installation and Connections eese 29 ESD Protection ur unse ee u rte e NIE ln 29 How to Insert and to Remove Modules 29 br each 29 Co pling mn 29 Central Modules OU ee eterne ee 30 Power eese nn nne 30 Communication and Coprocessor 31 Earthing o
475. tem Battery backup of the sRAMs via batteries with monitoring 2interfaces RS 485 with galvanic isolation Transm rate max 57600 bps Adigit diagnostic display and 2 LEDs for information out of the system I O level and user program B 5231 H51q MS 0605 2 2 2 3 Dual Port RAM for fast memory access to the second central module not used in the H51q MS system Hardware clock battery buffered bus logic and connection to the input output modules Watchdog Power supply monitoring testable 5 V system voltage Battery monitoring Coprocessor module F 8621A Right of the central module of the H51q MS PES up to three coprocessor modules can be in stalled The coprocessor module mainly contains Microprocessor HD 64180 with a clock frequency of 10 MHz Operating system EPROM RAM for a PLC master project Note The RAM for the master project is buffered via the batteries on the power supply monitoring module F 7131 Two interfaces RS 485 via communication software function block setting of the baud rate up to 57600 bps Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Communication modules F 8627 F 8628 F 8627X F 8628X Right of the central module of the H51q MS PES up to five communication modules can be installed The communication module mainly contains 32 bit RISC microprocessor Operating system RAM for further p
476. tentiometer type resistor value depending on voltage range Figure 3 Connection with potentiometer for voltage areas 0 1 V 7 C JU5 10 V Note to the connection with potentiometer Note Resistor equipment for the potentiometers on Z 7127 6215 channel 1 8 Due to the tolerance of the potentiometer resistors the accuracy defined in the data sheet is at first guaranteed after a new balancing of all channels within the user program or resistors with tolerances lt 1 have to be used Table 1 Resistor equipment Measuring range R01 03 05 07 R02 04 06 08 Um 09 11 13 15 10 12 14 16 Un 0 5V Value 33 2 1 133 1 Part no 00 0751333 00 0751134 Uy 0 10 V Value 20 1 178 1 Part no 00 0751203 00 0751174 281 F 6215 0507 Current inputs Measuring range 0 4 20 mA Current 12 bit 4095 21 3 mA 21 3 mA 20 mA 4 mA 768 3840 4095 Resolution digit Figure 4 Current inputs Two wire technique with one Pt100 and line balancing option 100 rJ 7 Z 7127 1 6215 2 626 Figure 5 Two wire technique with one Pt100 and line balancing option Line compensation via correction calculation in the user program 282 F 6215 0507 Using of more than one Pt100 in two wire technique Z 71271 6215 22126 24 z8 8 212 412 2 Figure 6 Using of than Pt100 two wir
477. terminal 26 d6 Vpp 230 Um 40 V d30 GND Control circuits type of protection Intrinsic Safety EEx ia IIC IIB terminals or EEx ib IIC IIB circuit 1 d2 d4 circuit 2 d8 d10 circuit 3 d20 d22 circuit 4 d26 d28 with the following maximum values for each circuit U 9 V lL 10 mA 23 mW Linear characteristic The maximum permissible values for the external capacitance and inductance of one individual control circuit and two shunt connected control circuits are shown in the table below BE individual circuit EExiaorib IC IB IC 355 mH 1000 mH 88 355 mH ___ 49pF 40uF 49uF 40uF In the event of concentrated capacitances and or inductances in the intrinsically safe control circuits the maximum permissible external capacitances and inductances of one individual control circuit and two shunt connected control circuits are as follows sheet 2 3 EC type examination Certificates without signature and official stamp shall not be valid The certificates may be circulated only without alteration Extracts or alterations are subject to approval by the Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt In case of dispute the German text shall prevail Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt Bundesallee 100 D 38116 Braunschweig F 3224A 0622 Physikalisch Technische Bundesanstalt Braunschweig und Berlin SCHEDULE TO EC TYPE EXAMINATI
478. the limited to a maximum of 1 uF F 3349 0641 F 3349 8 channel output module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 resistive or inductive load up to 500 mA at 24 V or 48 V lamp load up to 10 W with integrated safety shutdown with safe isolation with line monitoring gt bus 2 5 Sa N N a sae 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 8 PA 1 ia 2 Ya 3 I 2 7 Wa A FIT oT AA N 08 07 06 05 L amp 04 03 T i 4 02 E 01 N N NW Z 7150 LEE l 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Z 7150 3349 F ront 1 cable plug 24 V or 48 V Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Appertaining function block HB BLD 3 or HB BLD 4 The module is automatically tested during operation The main test routines are Reading back of the output signals The operating point of the O signal read back is lt 6 5 V Switching capability of the safety shutdown cross talking walking bit test Line monitoring Nominal output voltage 24 V or 48 V acc to supply of L via cable plug 500 mA short circuit proof Space requirement 4 SU Operating data 5 0 0 15 24 VDC 200 mA via rear bus system 24 48 VDC 50 mA plus load via cable plug All rig
479. the User Program of the Central Module F 865x If a user program with a wrong resource name e g no or wrong Res ID exists in the F 865x no ELOP II TCP connection can be established Delete the user program with the wrong resource name so that the F 8628X can be determine the IP address from the F 865x ID settings DIP switches 1 7 Note Please refer to the manual Functions of the operating system BS41q H51q HI 800 105 for further information about Erasing the user pro gram Perform the following Settings in ELOP Il Create a resource having a name from which the required IP address can be deter mined see chapter 5 1 In the dialog cabinet layout add the F 8628X module icons for the documentation of the cabinet allocation F7I30 b B BS Figure 3 Cabinet Layout Open the context menu of the resource and select Properties lll Properties EtheX 33 x Master Data Print Forms More Print Order GV xRef 10 parameter Safety Lel Code generator Addressing error HIPRO S BUSCOM 39548 Communication Type Ethemet Serial r Ethemet Settings Channel1 1921658057 C Channel 1921658058 192 168 05 3 Cancel Apply Figure 4 dialog Properties Open the tab PADT PC and select the communication type Ethernet Select one of the IP addresses
480. tials separated from the earth just by removing the earthing straps e g for the screens of field cables For the connection of the customers earthing an M 8 screw bolt is pro vided at the cabinet framework 6 Installation and Connections 0 8 0 Door earth 7 9 g 7 70 D 07 7 y 2 2 7 p M 07 2 54 7 6 un p ys 4 y Dy EN m Figure 8 Earthing connections in cabinet Size of the Earthing Straps Earthing Cables 8 Table 6 Earthing straps earthing cables Earthing clamps position 7 in figure 8 Side panels rear panel bottom plate Central earthing bolt position 6 in figure 8 Lifting eyes position 8 in figure 8 Top plate connected to the cabinet framework via four lifting eyes Location of installation i Cross section Length igure 8 Mounting rails 5 16 mm 300 mm single sided with connector sleeve Door 9 16 mm 300 mm Swing frame 25 mm 300 mm M 2500 bus bar 4 25 mm 300 mm single sided with connector sleeve 33 Installation and Connections Cabinet framework Mes Rack Mounting of subracks by earthing clamps Subrack 1 0 Subrack Analog Swing frame or solid frame Connection swing frame cabinet We framework with earthing straps 25 Terminals n A Analog signals u Digital signals
481. tics CU redundant Central modules modules redundant mono bus redundant Output modules Figure 4 Concept of H41q HR HRS H51q HR HRS Concept of the HIMA PES H41q HR H51q HR Redundant central modules and two channel I O bus for highly available PES H41q HRS H51q HRS with double processors safety related redundant central modules and redundant I O bus for highly available and safety related PES with TUV certificate up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 amp FS Remarks to the drawings CU 7 central module modules input output modules bus bus system for inputs and outputs DPR Dual Port RAM The H41q System Family 3 3 1 The H41q System Family The H41q system family comprises compact designed PES in single channel and redundant models also with TUV safety certificate All input output modules can be used with both redundant and single channel models of the central modules All modules of the H41q system family meet the requirements for electromagnetic compatibility and immunity according to article 10 of the EG guideline 89 336 EWG for the electromagnetic conformity This is demonstrated with the CE sign within the data sheets of the modules Also the systems and modules are wearing a label with this sign All models of the H41q system family have all the components required for control tasks in one 19 inches subrack 5 units high with an integrated cable
482. tion to the fact that the cables to sensors and actu ators are separated from power supply cables and in a sufficient distance from electromagnetic active devices motors transformers Cables to the input modules of the H41q H51q systems have to be installed interference free as possible e g as shielded cables This applies especially to cables with analog signals and for proximity switches With cable connectors having a shield termination line this has to be connected to the bus bar of the I O rack below the slot of the module Further informations on the requirements of shielding and earthing you will find in the data sheets of the modules Installation and Connections 8 8 8 9 Lightning Protection in HIMA Communication Systems System earthing problems caused by a flash of lightning could be minimized due to the follow ing methods complete shielding of the field wiring of communication systems correct installation of the system earthing In especially exposed environments outside of buildings it could be advisable to provide light ning protection by using special lightning protection modules For this the module of type MTRS 485 DATA MODUTRAB from Phoenix company is used The module is provided for coarse protection influences up to 10 kA and fine protection influences up to 400 A The connection of the lightning protection modules is according to the sketch below
483. to Auto Automatic adaptation of transmission rate 10 negotiation On negotiation Off 100 MBit s and duplex mode if is Switch S2 3 is ON 4 100 MBit s 10 MBit s The switch position of switch is only relevant if switch S2 3 auto negotiation is OFF 51 2 Full duplex Half duplex The switch position of switch is only relevant if switch S2 3 auto negotiation is OFF Simultaneous sending and receiving if switch 2 5 is ON Note on full duplex operation In network topologies where hubs are used hubs must be replaced by full duplex switches hubs are not full duplex capable 6 2 server 0 Beginning with the F 8627X OS version 3 x the 7 4 server number of OPC servers 0 to 14 must be set via switches Switches S2 6 8 can be com 8 8 OPC server bined by the user If HIPRO S DIRECT is not active the number of HIMA OPC servers is four For determining the Node Ids and IP addresses for the configuration of HIMA OPC server see Chapter 6 8 1 4 and Chapter 6 9 1 5 Table 6 Functions of switch 2 S2 1 Beginning with OS versions 3 x only the transmission rate is automatically adapted when Autonegotiation On 52 3 ON is set The duplex mode must be set using switch S2 5 2 Beginning with OS versions 3 x autonegotiation must be activated at the communication partner e g switch if full duplex 52 5 ON is set on F 8627X Not observing these set tings can lead to communication problems
484. tray see also data sheets of H41q systems or assembly kits Overview Assembly Kits H41q The components required for a working system are included in assembly kits Table 2 Overview Assembly Kits H41q Options Abbreviations CM CoM Coprocessor Module Communication Module Central Module Input Output System H41q M H41q H H41q HR H41q MS H41q HS eae Safety SIL 3 SIL 3 SIL 3 Quantity type 1x 2 2 1 2 2 CU 8653X F 8653X F 8653X F 8652X F 8652X F 8652X Quantity type 1x 2x 1x 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 8621A F 8621A F 8621A 8621A F 8621A F 8621A Quantity type 1x 2x 1x 2x 1x 1x 2x 1x 2x 1x CoM F 8627 F 8627 F 8627 F 8627 F 8627 F 8627 Fast Ethernet F 8627X F 8627X F 8627X F 8627X F 8627X F 8627X Quantity type 1x 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 CoM F 8628 F 8628 F 8628 F 8628 F 8628 F 8628 Profibus DP F 8628X F 8628X F 8628X F 8628X F 8628X F 8628X Quantity type 1x 2x 2 2 2 2 power supply 7130A F 7130A 7130A F7130A F7130A F 7130A Quantity 1 1 2 1 1 2 buses max quantity 13 13 7 6 13 13 7 6 modules Assembly kit 4234 B 4236 1 4236 2 4235 4237 1 4237 2 number The H41q System Family 3 2 Concepts of the Safety Switch Off at H41q In the system descriptions of the safety related PES H41q MS HS HRS the ways for shut dow
485. trinsically safe field circuits via the cable plug Z 7035 In addition the following points should be considered The electronic module including its connections has to be installed in a way that at least the degree of protection IP 20 according to EN 60529 1991 1 2000 is achieved Two output circuits of one or two modules of the F 3335 type can be wired in parallel The reduced maximum values have to be complied with see EC prototype test certifi cate The separation between intrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe terminals must be 2 50 mm especially between adjacent modules The separation between adjacent intrinsically safe terminals must be 2 6 mm ntrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe lines must be installed separately or the intrinsically safe lines must be provided with additional insulation ntrinsically safe lines must be identifiable g by the light blue color RAL 5015 of the insulation Modules which were operated in general electrical system may not be used thereafter no more in Ex plants The lines used must comply with the following insulation test voltages Intrinsically safe lines 2 1000 VAC Not intrinsically safe lines gt 1500 VAC 247 F 3335 0622 2 4 2 5 248 Stranded wires must be provided with wire end ferrules The terminals must be suitable for clamping the wire cross section The applicable regulations and standards have to be complied with e
486. ture for all channels As alternative it is possible to use for each channel of the module an own reference tempera ture Further data Input resistance gt 1 Line length approx 300 m double screened cable twisted pair circuits load impedance max 500 Noise voltage suppression 2 60 dB common mode 50 60 Hz Voltage endurance lt 375 V Ex circuit gt non Ex circuit 7 V Ex circuit gt non Ex circuit The value in II can be scaled 0 1000 by the software function block HF TMP It is possible to select only a window of the range Errors Basis fault from nominal value 0 1 96 at 25 C Safety accuracy 1 96 Metrological individual faults Channel fault X 0 1 96 Temperatur fault zero point 0 1 10 Temperature fault end point 0 1 96 10 K Linearity fault 0 05 96 F 6220 0625 Note Intrinsically safe version of the cable plug without screen PA at the end of the cable non Ex Ex Cable 12 x 2 x 0 2 mm screened PE YEGN SC hy PA YEGN 60 mm YEGN EE 2 5 mm Z 7062 62201 C U100mV gray Channel Connection Color 1 72 WH d2 BN 2 74 d4 YE 3 z8 GY d8 PK 4 z10 BU d10 RD 5 214 414 VT 6 z16 GYPK di6 RDBU 7 z20 WHGN d20 BNGN 8 z22 WHYE d22 BNYE Pt 100 732 WHGY d32 BNGY Cable screen Lead marking cable plug Figure 2 Lead marking cable plu
487. ua 76 OB M co oA RR 70 ore AA k 78 or MR 7 SNR 79 Position switch no oW u Legend Staton ro m Positions white switch n i T AL Bit is set 9 omg White switch in 98 e B position OFF 99 oA Setting of the transmission rate with switch S1 8 On Off 450 12 567 8 34 BB 6 H E 51 8 ON 9600 bps Off 12345678 H 51 8 OFF 57600 bps F 8652X 0606 Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole For the serial interface only the bus station no 1 31 can be set Within an Ethernet network the bus station no can be set from 1 to 99 Therefore the switches S1 6 7 must be set in addition to the switches S1 1 2 3 4 5 The number of the communication partners within a network is still limited to 64 This enhanced setting of the bus station no is only possible from operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 05 31 of the central module Applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the c
488. uctive connection to the frame or a separate earth connection has to be installed according to the EMC requirements Connection PE earth Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm Pay attention for the manufacturers information concerning detaching and replugging of the Faston connectors 4 1 Current distribution within the assembly kit 411 HIMA devices for current distribution It is recommended to use the HIMA supplies and current distributions K 7212 K 7213 K 7214 K 7215 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with 2 decoupling diodes and 2 net work filters with fusing of up to 12 single circuits with circuit breakers or redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with fusing of up to 12 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers graphical display 4 1 2 Supply 24 VDC The 24 VDC power supply can be feeded three times to the system H51q H HR starlike wir ing See also catalog H41q H51q chapter 4 3 The Input Output Level 24 VDC Supply and Distribution Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 21 22 23 2 L RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 0 8 max 16AgL PS1 PS3 XG 21 22 23 1 L BK 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole L RD Color code red BK Color cod
489. ule power supply 24 5 V I O level communication module optional coprocessor module optional and four fans K 1409 CU1 CM1 PS1 ERROR eee 1 CPU ACK IO 48 13 Slots for modules E B 2 9 ie O 5V Earth bar covered 14 CPUIEA 1 x Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm for each slot mx F8653X F8627X F7130A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 16 X 17 18 19 20 21 F8653X F8627X F7130A ZB1 CU1 KB1 CM1 N ING1 PS1 H41g M B 4234 Figure 1 Front view 1 Parts of the B 4234 assembly kit H41q M system e 1x 1409 system subrack 5 HU 19 inch with cable tray with four fan modules K 9212 hinged receptacle for the label and backplane Z 1009 On the rear buffer batteries G1 G2 additional modules on the rear e 2x2Z6011 decoupling and fusing to feed the power supply modules e 1xZ6018 fan run monitoring and fuse monitoring 2x2Z6013 decoupling and fusing for the supply voltage of the WD signal e 1xZ6007 jumper plug combination of the separated buses single channel system H41q M include the modules 1x F 8653X central module CU1 1xF7130A power supply 24 5 VDC PS1 Modules for option separate order 1x F 8621A coprocessor module CU1 1x communication module CM1 e g F 8627X Ethernet or F 8628X Profibus DP e max 13 I O modules slots1 to 13
490. ule F 8621A Right of the central module of the H41q M PES one coprocessor module can be installed The coprocessor module mainly contains Microprocessor HD 64180 with a clock frequency of 10 MHz Operating system EPROM RAM for a PLC master project Note The RAM for the master project is buffered via the batteries on the backplane of the subrack Two interfaces RS 485 via communication software function block setting of the baud rate up to 57600 bps Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Communication modules F 8627 F 8628 F 8627X F 8628X Right of the central module of the H41q M PES one communication module can be installed The communication module mainly contains 32 bit RISC microprocessor Operating system RAM for further protocols F 8627 Ethernet interface safeethernet F 8628 Profibus DP slave interface Dual port RAM DPR for the communication with the central module via CPU bus Special applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the central module to PADT II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network Modbus TCP Special application with the communication module F 8628X II TCP connection PADT via the Ethernet interface of the F 8628X to the H41q H51q controller Startup and maintenance Before startup the system switch on the rear bu
491. ule for Ethernet Communication Application in H41q H51q PES beginning with OS 41q 51q V7 0 7 9906 Appertaining Function block HK COM 3 8627 1 5 490003125 0128 000000 000 0 000000 5 000 gt DEBES un 00 e CPU 10 100BaseT MPC860T a n 000700 0 C E 0 0 00 or JON aea mm OFF a ON HSR c co m al 0 0 _ _ switch 1 switch 2 Figure 1 Communication module F 8627X 1 Technical data Processor 32 bit Motorola CPU MPC860T with integrated RISC communication controller Operating voltage 5V Current consumption 1A Space required 3 HU units high 4 SU units wide Ethernet Interface 10BaseT or 100Base TX according to the IEEE 802 3 standard connection via an RJ 45 plug HSR Interface High speed serial communication interface to the redundant HSR High Speed Redundancy communication module Connection via an RJ 12 plug with BV 7053 Serial Interface The serial interface FB is not used Diagnostic Display 6 LEDs for display diagnostic during
492. unication with the central module via CPU bus Special applications with the communication module F 8627X connection of the central module to PADT II TCP connection to other communication partners within an Ethernet network Modbus Special application with the communication module F 8628X II TCP connection PADT via the Ethernet interface of the F 8628X to the H41q H51q controller Startup and maintenance Before startup the system switch on the rear buffer batteries G1 and G2 DIP switches on the backplane A battery change of the buffer batteries without load CPU in operation is recommended every 6 years Buffer battery with soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000016 Buffer battery without soldering lug HIMA part no 44 0000019 Further informations see also catalog H41q H51q chapter 9 Startup and maintenance 81 4237 1 2 H41q HS HRS 0605 4 Wiring of the assembly kit The assembly kit is already wired for operation Wirings have still to be done by the user op tional modules see Assembly kit wiring diagram With installation of the assembly kit a conductive connection to the frame or a separate earth connection has to be installed according to the EMC requirements Connection PE earth Faston 6 3 x 0 8 mm Pay attention for the manufacturers information concerning detaching and replugging of the Faston connectors 4 1 Current distribution
493. up to the last BOOL variable identity number 100 from export area 0 In this example the BOOL variables in export area 1 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 4096 and are mapped to memory area EV on the F 8628X beginning with identity num ber 101 which follows the last identity number of the BOOL variables i e 100 The identity numbers of the BOOL variables in memory area EV are in ascending order up to the last BOOL variable 4196 from export area 1 F 865x F 8628X BUSCOM areas memory area EV Export area EA for Export variables EV ER 0000 Identity number EV 0000 ER 2047 area 0 ER 0000 EV 4096 BUSCOM address ER 2047 ER 4096 ER 8191 ER 4096 area 1 ER 8191 Figure 6 Mapping of the BOOL variables from the export areas 0 and 1 428 F 8628X 0650 7 3 3 Example 3 In this example the WORD variables in export area 0 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 1 and are mapped to the memory area EV on the F 8628X beginning with identity num ber 1 The identity numbers of the WORD variables in memory area EV are in ascending order up to the last WORD variable 0110 from export area 0 The unused BUSCOM address 0 is assigned a dummy variable and mapped to identity num ber 0 within memory area EV In this example the WORD variables in export area 1 on the F 865x start with BUSCOM ad dress 4100 and are ma
494. ve Bn 501 PES master BN PESO2 Slave B1 PESO3 5 B1 PESO4 5 B1 PESO5 5 me lie 7176 7177177 B1 PESO B1 PESO8 1_ 09 Add Edit Delete Cancel Figure 14 Configuration of BUS 1 Il BUS 1 Bus member Name Type BSN CU CB Number Bn PESO1 PES master 1 1 1 1 Bn PESO1 slave 1 1 Bn PES02 slave 2 1 B1 PESO3 slave 3 i 29 B1 PES31 slave 31 Table 11 Configuration of BUS 1 BUS 2 Bus member Name Type BSN CU CB Number Bn PES02 PES master 2 1 2 1 Bn PESO1 slave 1 1 Bn PES02 slave 2 1 B2 PES32 slave i 29 B2 PES60 slave 31 Table 12 Configuration of BUS 2 392 F 8627X 0650 BUS 3 Bus member Name Type BSN CU CB Number B3 PES61 PES master 3 2 2 1 Bn PESO1 slave 1 1 Bn PES02 slave 2 1 B3 PES61 slave 3 B3 PES64 slave 6 Table 13 Configuration of BUS 3 In each resource define the communication partners resources with which HIPRO S data are to be exchanged Determine and set the monitoring time for the communication partners see Chapter 6 7 D Properties B1_PESO3 Print Def Print Forms More Print Order GVxRet 10 parameter Safety PADT Lel Code generator Addressing enor HIPRO S BUSCOM 3964R PES master Monitoring time 0 15 Reset imported va
495. vers with which the F 8627X can exchange BUSCOM variables A range of node Id s is available for the number of HIMA OPC servers selected via switch 2 see Table 14 The Node Id is required for configuring the HIMA OPC server see manual HIMA OPC server 3 0 Rev 2 Switch 2 Number of HIMA Node Id OPC server co S BBBBH Ae 2 107 and 108 EDARAN 4 107 up to 110 o BBBBH 6 107 up to 112 o BBBBH 107 up to 114 B T HH 14 107 up to 120 10 107 up to 116 m m m m H 12 107 up to 118 Table 14 Settings of switch 2 S2 Legend Positions white switch ong White switch in on g White switch in Off position OFF of position ON Not used switch 396 F 8627X 0650 6 9 1 5 Determining the IP address of the OPC Server network card 6 9 2 6 9 2 1 The IP address is composed of the network address and the host address The default network address is 192 168 0 The last byte of the IP address 192 168 0 x is the host address and it is calculated from the Node Id as specified below Host address Node Id 2 1 For IP address Segment 1 Host address Node Id 2 2 For IP address Segment 2 The following IP addresse are resulting from the calculation see Table 15
496. wer supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole BV 7051 0508 BV 7051 BV 7051 Data connecting cable Connection of the bus terminal H 7506 to optical fibre FO Standard lengths 0 5 2 4m X2 HIMA X1 MIN D plug MIN D plug 9 pole 25 pole Screen Figure 1 Wiring l 25 1 Type of used cable LifYCY 6 x 2 x 0 08 mm All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 169 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl BV 7051 0508 170 Pin RS 485 Signal Meaning 1 not used 2 RP 5 V decoupled by diodes 3 AIR RxD TxD A Receive Transmit Data A 4 CNTR A Control signal A 5 C C DGND Data Ground 6 VP 5 V positive pole of power supply 7 not used 8 B B RxD TxD B Receive Transmit Data B 9 CNTR B Control signal B Table 1 Pin assignment of the interface RS 485 9 pole BV 7052 0508 BV 7052 BV 7052 Data connecting cable Connection of the interface connector H 7505 to the interfaces in the single channel HIMA PES Standard lengths 2 m 4 m bigger lengths on request 2 X1 MIN D plug 67 SY 4 MIN D plug Ir 9 pole 9 pole Screen Figure 1 Wiring HIMA BV7052 XX 00 WWW XX
497. wer supply monitoring 1xF8651X central module CU1 modules for option separate order e 3 x F 8621A coprocessor module CM11 CM13 5xcommunication modules CM11 CM15 e 1x F 7126 power supply module 24 V 5 V 10 A PS3 Assembly kits to be used for the I O level 9302 I O subrack 4 units high 19 inches B 9361 additional power supply 5 VDC 5 units high 19 inches All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 87 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl 5230 H51q M 0605 2 1 88 The max current must be 18 A all I O modules and the modules in the central rack if 3 x F 7126 are used to keep the system in operation even one power supply module F 7126 has failed Values of the current requirement 5 V DC refer to the data sheets Note Operating system resource type in ELOP Il The assembly kit is usable since operating system BS41q 51q V7 0 8 Resource type in ELOP H51qe M Modules Central module F 8651X The central module of the PES H51q M contains the essential functions demonstrated in the block diagram of the central module Interfaces Displays RS 485 E VEM e cT 1 1 Setting of bus subscriber no Front panel Fail safe Watchdog Multiplexer voltage monitoring bus logic Rear side bus plane bus WD DPR Bus CPU Bus Figure 2 Block diagram of the central module F 8651X Mi
498. witches S1 1 5 on each F 8627X 390 F 8627X 0650 6 8 2 Setting up the bus configuration Il The user should be familiar with the programming tool ELOP II and H41q H51q PES Refer to the manual First steps ELOP II and the ELOP II Online Help for further information Note All resources must be created in the same configuration here Config Consider also the notes about parameterizing the HIPRO S DIRECT mode and generating the user program Chapter 6 6 Create the following resources in the configuration Config Bn PESO1 and Bn PESO2 B1 PESOS to B1 PESS31 B2 PES32 to B2 PES60 B3 PES61 to B3 PES64 2 HIPRO s H N Elop Lib E 4 Config J A B1_PESO3 81_ 504 B1 PESO05 b B1 B1 PESO 1 Figure 13 64 resources the configuration Config In the application program of each resource use the software function block HK COM 3 for configuring and monitoring the F 8627X The HK COM3 must be assigned as described in the following table Input Value CU Slot 1 2 1 COM Slot 1 2 3 4 5 1 Enable Configuration TRUE FALSE Function 0 1 0r 3 In the user program HK COM3 s outputs are used for monitoring 391 F 8627X 0650 Create and configure the three busses see Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Edit HIBUS BUS_1 0 Comment Station Parameter BN PESO Sla
499. with out a special procedure Before removing an F 8627X its fixing screws must be completely loosened and freely movable Remove the module from the bus board by pushing the ejection lever front label top down and quickly remov ing in an upward motion to ensure faulty signals are not triggered within the system To attach the module place it on the terminal block and press it inwards as far as it will go This action should be performed quickly to ensure that faulty signals are not triggered within the system 2 4 1 Operation of the ejection lever Push ejection lever top down U Withdraw module Front plate Front plate C 2 Figure 2 Operation of the ejection lever 358 F 8627X 0650 2 4 2 Procedure for exchanging a redundant F 8627X in a redundant H41q H51q controller Make sure that you connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet socket A 10 100BASE T and the HSR cable to the HSR socket HSR The respective connectors must be pressed in until they snap into their sockets 10 Unplug communication cable Ethernet Corresponding central module e g F 8650X with operating system Version below 05 34 remove the central module Version beginning with 05 34 erase application program manually to deactivate the central module see operation system manual Erasing the application pro gram Unplug HSR cable BV 7053 if used Remove communication module F 8627X Check the new F 8627X
500. within the assembly kit 411 HIMA devices for current distribution It is recommended to use the HIMA supplies and current distributions K 7212 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with 2 decoupling diodes and 2 net work filters with fusing of up to 12 single circuits with circuit breakers or K 7213 redundant feeding up to 35 A total current with fusing of up to 12 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7214 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers or K 7215 redundant feeding up to 150 A total current with fusing of up to 18 single cir cuits with circuit breakers graphical display 4 1 2 Supply 24 VDC The supply voltage 24 VDC may be fed two times to the system H41q HS HRS See also cat alog H41q H51q chapter 3 3 The Input Output Level 24 VDC Supply and Distribution Connection Wire and connection Fusing Use XG 24 25 2 L RD 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 max 16A PS1 PS2 XG 24 25 1 L BK 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole L XG 14 L 2 x 2 5 mm Faston 6 3 x 0 8 Reference pole L see note XG 6 L RD 1 2 Faston 2 8 x 0 8 4 see wiring diagram 13 single connections slow blow RD Color code red BK Color code black Table 1 Supply 24 VDC 2 5 mm BK If output modules with 2 pole connection to the actors are Connection XG 14 be wired to the central L bus bar with
501. x 0 8 mm Screen 74 he 26 YEGN Flat pin plug 6 3 x 0 8 mm to be connected to the earth bar under the slot q 1 mm 120 mm Figure 2 Lead marking of the cable plug Z 7116 3236 Switch position for 0 signal Switch position for 1 signal Pushbutton position for 1 signal 2 Flat pin plug 2 8 x 0 8 mm Figure 3 Test plug diagram Z 7201 3236 194 F 3237 0622 F 3237 8 channel input module safety related applicable up to SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 for the connection of safety related proximity switches proximity switches according to EN 60947 5 6 NAMUR and resistor wired sensors monitoring of the lines for short circuit and line break tk tk lt gt or NY Xs 4 202 208 6504 T Qe I e rel al r 1 0 bus Figure 1 Block diagram and front cable plug Appertaining function block HB RTE 3 Z 7108 32371 08 C 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 O 27108 Front cable plug The module is automatically tested completely during operation The main test routines are Switch on and switch off capability Crosstalk of the input circuits by walking zero Function of the in
502. y safe lines must be installed separately or the intrinsically safe lines must be provided with additional insulation ntrinsically safe lines must be identifiable e g by the light blue color RAL 5015 of the insulation The wiring has to be secured mechanically in a way which ensures that in the event of an accidental disconnection the distance EN 50 020 Part 7 Table 4 between the intrinsically safe and not intrinsically safe connections does not fall below the required minimum e g by bundling The line shield has to be connected to equipotential bonding Modules which were operated in general electrical system may not be used thereafter no more in Ex plants F3325 0622 1 4 1 5 The lines used must comply with the following insulation test voltages e Intrinsically safe lines 2 1000 VAC Not intrinsically safe lines gt 1500 VAC Stranded wires must be provided with wire end ferrules The terminals must be suitable for clamping the wire cross section The applicable regulations and standards have to be complied with especially DIN EN 60079 14 1997 VDE 0165 Part 1 1998 EN 50 014 1999 VDE 0170 0171 Part 1 2000 EN 50 020 1994 VDE 0170 0171 Part 7 1996 System start up Before the first system start up an Ex expert has to check whether the system has been cor rectly installed especially the supply voltage connections and the connections of the intrinsi cally safe circuits Mainte
503. y with selectable information Safety related watchdog with output 24 V loadable up to 500 mA short circuit proof Two European standard PCBs one PCB for the diagnostic display Space requirement 8 SU Operating data 5 2 All rights reserved Equipment subject to change without notice 441 HIMA Paul Hildebrandt GmbH Co KG P O Box 1261 68777 Br hl F 8650X 0606 Setting of the bus station no via switches S1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Switch no Stationno 12345 16 orm 7 18 ora M RM 19 GRE 20 Sram A kA 21 22 ore AAA AA Switch no Stationno 12345 48 49 50 oua 51 GM 52 or MR M 53 oma ua 5 ore AAA 55 AAPA Switch no Stationno 12345 mM en 2 org Ma oM Maa 94 Oum 85 oM Maa 86 oum maf
504. ype Contact F X1 X16 double level terminal 16x 1 pin spring cage connection E X17 X20 soldering points for soldering 4x of jumpers or diodes D X21 X22 terminal 2x 1 pin spring cage connection A B C X23 X28 Phoenix Headers 6x 8 pin Accessories Phoenix Combicon Connector FK MCP 1 5 8 ST 3 81 HIMA Part No 52 0000 002 Table 1 Wiring on the Terminal Module Diodes for inverse polarity protection For wiring with input modules diodes are soldered between X17 X19 X18 X20 Diode Mechanical Design 1N5624 3A 200 VDC HIMA Part No 26 8200 015 The designators L L on the labels D and F are project dependent Figure 2 Mechanical Design H 7020 H 7020 0606 Control Cabinet Marshalling Cabinet Applications for the Terminal Module H 7020 The terminal module is used to interconnect I O modules single pole or double pole redundant or mono and connect them with the field level The terminal module can be mounted on DIN Rails in control cabinets or in marshalling cabinets Field cables can be attached directly from the field level to the clamps F of the terminal module The advantage of the H 7020 terminal module is the complete connection of the I O modules to the terminal mo
505. zp zz uod LX duis Ajddns 1 SEO 28161 20 SX3 m 918211497 53 xipueddy v c 5 jndyno 311100 99 OM JO jejjeled 10 XEN nd no 9 OM JO uonoeuuoo e e1ed 10 eouejonpul xei 31110 99 ndino euo 20 Xe Sz 91 euo Xey 919 x33 vc ju 82 99 JO uonoeuuoo 10 ejqeroeuuoo yndyno 9 9 OM Jo uonoeuuoo 104 eouejonpul ju ge 99 3ndjno euo 10 an 9 291 euo 10 eouejonput ejqeioeuuoo Xew eec 41 jndino Q eouejoedeo ezeden MW 2 199 15640 Og 13d Jamog 9 GZ 5 9 yndyno OQ 15910 on AJAXIS Lori Odd
506. zz duis synoum ejes Ajeorsuau L zz Sgec 4 BINPOW zz 2 Fu 8 jeuueuo JueweunseesW 02x duis uod ejes Ajeoisuuu puestas ans ELT LM OT 1229 3 y JO ejes Ajjeorsuujur jo ejep Z 89100 ANVIHISLNIGaNS ANAL se1meej uononpoud jo 3959 49 jou seop pue Dunsej jonpoud jo enbiun ue jo surejuoo uorssiuued uoyum seuinbei sesodind 104 esp Buipjow eu eq Ajuo yoda eoruuoo stu ueu uni 6 08 99 93Je1lSJ9 pr4 ANL peypeJoov ueuounivN 62208 99 egesJe prs 550 pue uoneuojny ANL pog 2002 82 8unf uo v ZOLELOOZ 141 9 28289 gz edye4s uueuuesseg ueqiv 9M 9D VIATH JeJnjoejnue A 6554 pue 1229 4 y e2ujo9 3 29 QNVIHISLNAGGNS NAL 327 F 6221 0625 ZL 10 4 9222 1625 680 L 2002 9

The H41q and H51q System Families

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents